Vol 2 - Combined Sids-Dabos Performance Specs Sep2019

Al-Sids WwTP 5,000 m3/d
& Kafr Daboos WwTP

5000 m3/d
Volume 2 Technical Specification – Design

Build Contract
September 2019
Mott MacDonald in association with

Mott MacDonald Sustainable Rural Sanitation Services Program (SRSSP) 1
In association with Gopa-infra, Utilities, CBI & TADE
Revision Date Originator Checker Approver Description
7th Mar- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

A Technical Specification
2018 Abdullah Gabr Sobhy
4th June- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

B Technical Specification
16th Aug- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

C Technical Specification
17th Sep Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

D Technical Specification

Contents
1 Performance Specification - Scope of Supply of
Plant and Services 1
1.1 Background 1
1.2 Scope of Services/Supply/ Management 1
1.3 Employer’s Basic Design for WWTP 4
1.4 General Project Information 7
Preamble 7
Location of WWTP Sites 7
Topography 7
Geotechnical Conditions 7
Intended Purpose For Which The Works Are Required 7
1.4.5.1 Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR) 8
1.4.5.2 Extended Aeration 9
1.4.5.3 Moving Bed Biological Reactor (MBBR) 9
1.4.5.4 Integrated Secondary Biological Treatment 9
Programme 9
Coordination of The Contract 10
Documents to Be Included In The Tender Submission 10
Detailed Drawings and Information 11
1.5 Specific Requirements 12
Flows and Loads 12
Basic Design Parameters 15
Employer Specific Requirements 15
Criteria for Design Personnel Requirement 16
Design Life Requirements 17
Hydraulic Design Levels 19
Ground Levels 19
Standardization 19
maximum Noise Levels 19
wastewater Treatment Facilities Requirements 20
Miscellaneous Specific Requirements 23
electricity 25
as-Built Documents 25
operation of The Facilities After Completion 25
1.6 pre-Commissioning 26
1.7 commissioning 26
1.8 operation and Maintenance of WWTP 26
1.9 Operational and Maintenance Training and Supervision To The
Employer’s O&M Personnel 26
1.10 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and SOPs 26
1.11 Spare Parts 26

1.12 Tools 27
2 DESIGN CRITERIA 28
2.1 List of Abbreviations 28
2.2 Process Design Criteria of Wastewater Treatment Plants 29
3 MECHANICAL WORKS 34
3.1 Principles for Mechanical Design 34
3.2 Mixture of Standards 34
3.3 Design Safety Features 34
3.4 Labels 35
3.5 Workmanship 36
3.6 Safety Guards 36
3.7 Foundation and Bedplate of Equipment 36
3.8 Lubrication 36
3.9 Anti-Corrosion of Materials 37
3.10 Metals for Mechanical Plant 37
3.11 Machinery 38
3.12 Setting of Machinery 38
3.13 Machinery Finish 39
3.14 Protective Coating 39
3.15 Hydraulic System Design 39
3.16 Steelwork 39
3.17 Steel Constructions 40
Wrought Steel 40
Cast Iron 40
Stainless Steel 40
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys 41
3.18 Welding 41
Welding In General 41
Welding of Carbon Steel 42
Welding of Stainless Steel 42
3.19 Bolts 42
3.20 De-Rating Due To Climate Conditions 43
3.21 Equipment Bases and Bedplates 43
3.22 Pipe Work 43
Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings 44
Steel Pipe Work 44
3.22.2.1 Pipe Jointing 44
Upvc Pipe 44
Stainless Steel Pipes and Fittings 45
Sealing of Ducts 45
Pressure Pipes 45
Flanges and Gaskets 46
Pipe Work Supports 46
Pipe Work Identification 46
3.23 Stairs, Walkways, Platforms and Handrails 46
Access Ladders 47
Open Mesh and Chequer Plate Flooring 47
Hatches 48
3.24 General Equipment 48
Fire Extinguisher 48
First Aid Cabinet 48
Lifting Equipment 49
Ventilation 50
Standard Gearboxes 51
V-Belt Coupling Or Gearbox 52
Bearings 52
Balancing 53
Suppression of Noises 53
Penstocks 53
Gate Valves / Sluice Valves 54
Non-Return Valves 56
Ball Valves 57
Air and Gas Relief Valves 57
Pressure Control Valves 58
Outlet Weir Plates 59
Fire Hydrants 60
Electric Actuators 60
Pressure Gauges 61
Pressure Vessels 61
Compressors 61
3.25 Disinfection Using Chlorine Gas 62
Chlorinators 62
Chlorine Solution Injectors and Diffusers 62
Residual Chlorine Measuring Cell 62
Automatic Changeover Device 63
Chlorine Gas Pressure Reducing Valve 63
Chlorine Fume Detectors 63
Chlorine Gas Cylinders 63
Chlorine Cylinders Weighing Balance 64
Neutralization System 64
Booster Pumps 64
3.26 Disinfection Using Sodium Hypochlorite 64
General 64
Codes and Standards 65
Drawings and Specifications 65

Site Conditions 66
Design Considerations 66
Storage Tanks 66
Dosing Pumps 67
Chlorine Sampling Pumps 67
Pipe Work 67
Residual Chlorine Analyzer 68
PH Analyzer 69
Conductivity Analyzer 69
Injection Point 69
Handling of Sodium Hypochlorite 69
Environment Protection 69
Chlorination Control 70
Disinfection 70
3.27 Mechanical Screens 70
General 70
Manually Cleaned Screen 71
Belt Conveyor 71
Screening Collection Skips 72
3.28 Grit Scraper 72
Definitions 72
3.28.1.1 Grit 72
3.28.1.2 Grit Separation 72
3.28.1.3 Grit Collection 72
3.28.1.4 Grit Removal 72
Design Requirements 72
Aerated Grit Removal System 72
Vortex Type Grit Removal System 72
Delivery, Storage, and Handling 73
Spare Parts 73
Materials and Equipment 73
Aerated Grit Separation Equipment 73
3.28.8.1 Air Piping 73
3.28.8.2 Swing-Out Type Diffuser Holder Assembly 74
3.28.8.3 Diffusers 74
Vortex Type Grit Separation 74
3.28.9.1 Design 74
3.28.9.2 Mechanical Drive 75
Airlift Pump 75
Air Pipes for Grit Removal & Aeration Tanks 76
3.29 Oil and Grease Skimmer 76
3.30 Aeration Tank /SBR Tank 77
– Description 77
- Quality Assurance 78
–- Delivery, Storage and Handling 79
– Performance and Design Requirements 79
- Submittals 80
– SBR Control Panel 81
SBR Control Logic 81
– Instrumentation and Process Control 83
3.31 Positive Displacement Blowers 84
Guarantee and Warranty 85
Blower Construction 85
Blower Casing 86
Rotors and Shaft 86
Gears 86
Lubrication 86
Rotor Seal Assembly 86
Input Shaft Seal Assembly: 87
Drive System 87
Motor 87
Sound Enclosure Ventilation Fan Motor: 88
Flexible Connector 88
Blower Instrumentation Gauges 89
Oil Drains 89
Vibration Isolators 89
Spare Parts 90
Installation, Startup and Training 90
Factory Tests: 90
Air Pipes for Grit Removal & Aeration Tanks 90
3.32 – Air Control Valves 91
3.33 – Fine Bubble Aeration 92
3.34 – Decant Mechanism 94
3.35 – Waste Sludge Pumps 95
3.36 Oxidation Ditch 96
System Description 96
Manufactured Units 96
Rotor Aerators 96
Lubrication Requirements 98
Electric Motors 98
Special Tools 98
Treatment System Installation 98
Painting 99
Framed Instructions 99
Field Tests and Inspections 99
Manufacturer's Services 100
Operating and Maintenance Instructions 100
3.37 Circular Clarifiers 100

General 100
Clarifier Mechanism 101
Design 101
Sludge Collector Assembly 101
Drive Assembly 101
Scum Removal Assembly 103
3.38 Submersible Mixers 105
Design Requirements 105
Mixer Construction 105
Motor 105
Elastomers 106
Propeller 106
Cable Entry 106
Bearings 106
Jet Ring Assembly 107
Oil Housing 107
Mechanical Seals 107
Mast and Mast Assembly 107
Portable Davit Crane 107
3.39 Pumps 108
General 108
Vertical Pumps 108
3.39.2.1 Casings 109
3.39.2.2 Impellers 109
3.39.2.3 Casing Wearing Rings 110
3.39.2.4 Suction Arrangements 110
3.39.2.5 Pump Bearings 110
3.39.2.6 Name Plate 110
3.39.2.7 Intermediate Shafting 111
3.39.2.8 Pressure Gauges 111
3.39.2.9 Motors 111
Submersible Pumps 111
3.39.3.1 Pump construction 112
3.39.3.2 Pump motor 112
Progressive Cavity Pumps 112
Pump Control 113
Pipe Work, Valves and Supports 113
3.40 Standby Diesel Generating Unit 113
3.41 Sludge Dewatering System (Belt Press) 116
Belt Filter - Products 116
Surface Protection 116
Mechanical Details 116
3.41.3.1 Main Structural Frame 116
3.41.3.2 Independent Gravity Drainage Area 117

3.41.3.3 Wedge Section 118
3.41.3.4 Pressure Zone 119
3.41.3.5 Dewatering Belts 119
3.41.3.6 Belt Wash System 119
3.41.3.7 Belt Aligning System 120
3.41.3.8 Belt Tensioning System 120
3.41.3.9 Press Drives 121
3.41.3.10 Safety Guards 121
3.41.3.11 Discharge Blades 121
3.41.3.12 Bearings 121
3.41.3.13 Rollers 121
3.41.3.14 Drainage Pans 122
Electric Motors 122
Electrical Requirements 122
Instrument 124
Flow Transmitter 125
Ultrasonic Dual Channel Clamp-On Flow Meter 125
Ancillary Equipment 125
Sludge Feed Pump 125
Sludge Flow Monitoring 125
Conveyor 125
Polymer Feed System 125
Polymer Tanks 126
Polymer Mixers 126
Polymer Feed Pump 126
Polymer Wetting Device 126
3.42 Recessed Chamber Filter Presses 126
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 126
GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS 126
3.42.2.1 Standard Products 126
3.42.2.2 Nameplates 126
3.42.2.3 Protection of Moving Parts 126
3.42.2.4 Special Tools 126
MATERIALS 127
3.42.3.1 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars 127
3.42.3.2 Pipe and Fittings 127
3.42.3.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports 127
MANUFACTURED UNITS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 127
3.42.4.1 Electrical Products 127
3.42.4.2 Electric Motors 127
3.42.4.3 Tank Requirements 128
SLUDGE DEWATERING EQUIPMENT 129
3.42.5.1 Ancillary Equipment 129
3.42.5.2 Accessory Systems 129

3.42.5.3 System Technical Data 129
FILTER PRESS COMPONENTS 130
3.42.6.1 Main Structural Frame 130
3.42.6.2 Filter Press Plates 131
3.42.6.3 Filter Media 131
3.42.6.4 Closing Mechanism 132
3.42.6.5 Plate Shifter 132
3.42.6.6 Sludge Feed and Discharge Piping 133
3.42.6.7 Filtrate Collection and Weir Tank 133
3.42.6.8 Drip Trays 134
3.42.6.9 Sludge Cake Handling and Storage (Direct Dschareg System)
134
3.42.6.10 Blanking Plate 135
3.42.6.11 Automatic Filter Media Water Washer Assembly 135
CONTROL SYSTEM 135
3.42.7.1 Normal Operation 135
3.42.7.2 Filter Press Control Panel 136
3.42.7.3 Dewatering System Control Panel 137
3.43 Mechanical Equipment for Thickener Tank 138
Requirements 138
Equipment 138
3.43.2.1 Central Pivot 138
3.43.2.2 Driving Unit 138
3.43.2.3 Control Panel 138
3.43.2.4 Access Bridge (full bridge) and Hand Railing 138
3.43.2.5 Scraper Arms 138
3.43.2.6 Dispersion Drum 138
3.43.2.7 Outlet Weir Plates 138
3.43.2.8 Outlet Weir and Channel Cleaning Equipment 139
3.43.2.9 Pipes and Valves 139
3.43.2.10 Valves for Sludge Discharge 139
3.43.2.11 Dislodging Process 139
3.44 Workshop Equipment (Not included in this Contract) 139
General: 139
Sliding and Screw Cutting Lathe 139
Column Drill 140
Portable Electric Welding Apparatus 140
Floor Mounted Grinding Machine 140
Portable Drill-Grinder 140
Two Trolleys 140
Subsidiary Equipment 140
Measuring Instruments and Gauges 141
Electrical Workshop Equipment 141
Maintenance Tools 141

Portable Equipment. 142
3.45 Laboratory Equipment 142
General: 142
Laboratory Apparatuses: 142
Laboratory Glassware: 143
Laboratory Chemicals: 143
Laboratory Furniture: 144
Working Benches: 144
Base Units: 144
Working Tops: 144
Reagent Shelves: 144
Sink Basins:- 145
Service Fixtures: 145
Cases: 145
One Storage Cabinet Wardrobe: 145
Six Laboratory Stools: 145
Refrigerator: 145
3.46 CHEMICAL DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS 145
Accessories 147
Piping 148
Chemical Injection Nozzle and Corporation Stop 148
4 ELECTRICAL WORKS 149

4.1 General Specifications for Electrical Equipment and Cabling 149
Applicability 149
Installation Standards 149
Main Electricity Supply 150
Materials 150
Polarity 150
Workmanship 151
4.2 Medium Voltage Ring Main Units (Rmu) 151
General 151
International Standards 152
4.3 Transformers 152
4.4 Switchboards and Motor Control Boards 155
General Specifications of Switchboards 155
Medium Voltage Switch Boards 155
2bLow Tension Switchboards 156
Busbars 157
Fuses 158
Terminals 158
Auxiliary Switches 158
Labels 158
Panel Earthing 159

Small Wiring and Terminal Blocks 159
Indicating Lamps 160
Cable Connection 160
Instruments 160
Current Transformers 161
Voltage Transformers 161
Safety Notice and Equipment 161
4.5 Circuit Breakers 161
Air Break Circuit Breakers 161
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers 163
4.6 Fuse Switches General 163
Enclosure 163
Fuses 164
4.7 Isolating Switches 164
4.8 Fuses and Links 164
4.9 Motor Starters General 164
4.10 Interlocking 165
4.11 Protection 165
Motor Protection 165
Protection Relays 165
4.12 Electric Motors General 166
4.13 Reactive Power Compensation 167
4.14 Distribution Boards 168
4.15 Remote Control Push Button Station 169
4.16 Power Cables 169
4.17 Cabling Installation Methods 170
General 170
Cable Trench Work 171
Cable Tray Work 172
Laying Cables Direct In Ground 173
Laying Cables in Pipes (Cable Duct) 173
4.18 Electrical Lighting 173
General 173
Design Criteria For Internal Lighting 174
4.18.2.1 General 174
4.18.2.2 Housing 174
4.18.2.3 Protection Code 174
4.18.2.4 Open-type Lighting Fixture 174
Conduit Systems 175
Flexible Conduit 176
Cable Trunking 176
Socket Outlets 177
Lighting Switches 177
LED Luminaires 177

Emergency Lighting 178
4.19 Earthing General 178
Earthing Systems 178
Earthing Nests 179
Location of Nests 180
4.20 Fire Alarm System 180
General 180
Standards 180
Drawings and Data 180
System Configuration 180
Fire Alarm Control Panel 180
Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations 181
Smoke Detectors 181
4.20.7.1 Thermal Fire Detectors 182
4.20.7.2 Alarm Horns 182
Installation Requirements 182
Certification of Compliance 183
4.21 Exterior Lighting 183
General Requirements 183
References, Standards and Codes 183
Electrical Design 184
Cables 184
Lighting Design Parameters 184
Earthing 184
Test On Completion 184
4.21.7.1 Demonstration: 184
4.21.7.2 Tests: 184
Schedule and Records 185
Lighting Poles 185
Fence Lighting Units 185
Entrance Gate & Door Lighting 185
Lighting Luminaires 185
4.21.12.1 General 185
4.21.12.2 Construction: 186
4.21.12.3 Control Gear: 186
Lighting Distribution Panel 186
5 MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENTATION &

CONTROL 187
5.1 General 187
Innovation 187
Units and Dimensions 187
General 188
Enclosures and Environment 189

Performance 190
Identification 191
Design and Installation 191
5.2 Flow Measurement – Regulatory 191
Flow Measurement – Closed Pipe Systems 192
5.2.1.1 Flow Meters – Electro-Magnetic 192
5.2.1.2 Flow Meters – Turbine 194
Weir Plates & Open Channel Systems 194
Weirs and Flumes 195
Flow Metering – Ultrasonic 195
5.3 Level Measurement and Detection 197
Level Measurement – Ultrasonic 197
Level Measurement – Pressure 198
Level Measurement – Capacitance 198
Level Measurement – Boreholes 198
Level Detection – Point 199
Level Control – Sewage Pumping 199
Level Control – Water 199
5.4 Pressure Measurement 199
Pressure Gauges 200
5.5 Dissolved Oxygen Measurement and Control 200
5.6 Suspended Solids and Sludge Density Meters 201
5.7 Turbidity – Monitoring and Control 202
5.8 Ph Measurement and Control 203
5.9 Nitrate Measurement – Water Treatment Works 204
5.10 Other Instruments and Devices 204
5.11 Ammonia Monitors 205
5.12 Sampling Systems 205
5.13 Control and Monitoring System 206
Introduction 206
Scope of Work 207
General Requirements In The Bidding Stage 207
System Description ( Refer to the general item above ). 208
5.13.4.1 General 208
5.13.4.2 Motorized Gates, valves 209
5.13.4.3 Transformers Monitoring 209
5.13.4.4 Medium Voltage Panel Monitoring 210
5.13.4.5 Generators Monitoring 210
Control System Equipment’s ( Refer to the general item above )
. 210
5.13.5.1 Control Panel 210
5.13.5.2 Programmable Logic Controller PLC 210
5.13.5.3 Human Machine Interface HMI 211
5.13.5.4 Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS. 212

5.14 Process and Operational Control Strategies 212
Head Works 212
Biological Basin 212
Contact Tank 212
Tanks and Sump 212
Blowers and Pumps 213
Flow Meters 213
6 Testing Requirements 214

6.1 General 214
6.2 Testing and Commissioning Sequence 214
6.3 Construction Completion Tests 215
General 215
Factory Acceptance Testing 215
Dry Testing 215
Wet Testing 216
Safety Inspection 216
Provision of Resources 216
Water For Testing 217
Construction Completion Report and Certificates 217
6.3.8.1 General 217
6.3.8.2 Civil 217
6.3.8.3 Mechanical 217
6.3.8.4 Electrical 218
6.3.8.5 Instrumentation and Control 218
Specific Plant Tests Undertaken During Process Commissioning
219
6.3.9.1 General 219
6.3.9.2 Hydraulics 219
6.3.9.3 Pumps 219
6.3.9.4 Distribution system and flow splits 219
6.4 Precommissioning Tests 219
Introduction 219
Trial Operation 220
Preliminary Treatment 220
6.4.2.1 Coarse Manual Screens 220
6.4.2.2 Medium Mechanical screens 220
6.4.2.3 Grit removal plant 220
Biological and Secondary Treatment 220
6.4.3.1 Biological Aeration Tank (AT) 220
6.4.3.2 Aeration system 220
Sludge Treatment 221
6.4.4.1 Sludge thickening 221
6.4.4.2 Sludge dewatering 221

6.5 Process Test 222
6.5.1.1 Screens 222
6.5.1.2 Grit removal plant 222
Secondary Treatment Processes 222
6.5.2.1 Biological Aeration Tank (AT) 222
6.5.2.2 Aeration System Control 223
Sludge Treatment 223
6.5.3.1 Sludge Thickener 223
6.5.3.2 Thickened sludge dewaterer 224
6.5.3.3 Polymer preparation and dosing plants 224
Failure of Process Tests 224
6.6 Provision of Consumables During Precommissioning 225
Provision of Sewage 225
Provision of Seed Surplus Activated Sludge (SAS) 225
Disposal of Waste Activated Sludge Was and Thickener
Overflow During Process Commissioning 225
Power/Electricity and Temporary Pipework& Connection 225
6.7 Report On Precommissioning 225
6.8 Commissioning (Including Guarantee Tests) 225
General 225
6.9 Commissioning Area 226
6.10 Weekly Sampling and Testing of The Liquid Streams 226
Sequential Batch Reactor / Aerationtank 226
6.11 Intensive Testing Period of The Liquid Streams 227
6.12 Failure of Guarantee Tests 227
6.13 Performance Testing of The Solids Streams 227
Sludge Thickening and Dewatering 227
7 DATA SHEETS & GUARANTEE TABLES 230

7.1 Mechanical Screens 230
7.2 Screens Cleaning Mechanism 230
7.3 Belt Conveyor 231
7.4 Belt Conveyor Motor 231
7.5 Grit Removal Equipment 231
7.6 Motors for Each Type of Motor 231
7.7 Pumping Units (for Each Type of Pumps) 232
7.8 Pipes and Fittings 234
7.9 Dismantling Pieces and Flange Adaptors 234
7.10 Valves, Gates and Actuators 235
Butterfly Valves 235
Sluice Valves 235
Non Return Valves 236

Air Valves 236
Sluice Gates (Penstocks) 237
Valves and Gates Electric Actuators 237
7.11 Measuring Equipment 237
Flow Meters 237
Level Measuring Equipment 238
Ultra-Sonic Open Channel Flow Meter 238
7.12 Air Blower 239
Accessories 239
7.13 Diesel Generator 241
7.14 Belt Filter Dewatering 242
7.15 Guarantee Tables 243
Table No. 1 : Pumps 243
Table No 2: Pumps Electric Motors 244
Table No. 2: Pumps 245
Table No. 2: Pumps Electric Motors 246
Table No. 3 : Diesel Engine 247
Table No. 4: Alternator 248
8 ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬ 249

٨٫١ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ 249
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ 249
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬ 249
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳـــﻑ‬ 249
: ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ‬ 249
: ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳـــﺔ‬ 249
: ‫ﺍﻟﺻﺧـــﺭ‬ 249
: ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺳــﻊ‬ 249
: ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔـﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋــﺩ‬ 249
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ 249
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺟــﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺳــﻑ‬ 250
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‬ 250
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬ 250
‫ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺳﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬ 250
‫ﺧﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ 250
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳـﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬ 250
‫ﺇﺧــﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗــﻊ‬ 251
‫ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳــﻁﺣﻳﺔ‬ 251
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ 251
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ‬ 251
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬ 251
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ 251
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‬ 252
‫‪Mott MacDonald‬‬ ‫)‪Sustainable Rural Sanitation Services Program (SRSSP‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬
‫‪In association with Gopa-infra, Utilities, CBI & TADE‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ‬ ‫‪252‬‬

‫ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ‬ ‫‪252‬‬
‫ﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪252‬‬
‫ﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﺩ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ‬ ‫‪252‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪252‬‬
‫ﺳـﻧﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻔــﺭ‬ ‫‪252‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋــﺩ‬ ‫‪253‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪253‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳــﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔــﺭ‬ ‫‪253‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧـﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧـﺩﺱ‬ ‫‪253‬‬
‫‪Concrete‬ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ‬
‫‪Blinding‬‬ ‫‪253‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔـﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪254‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗــﻊ‬ ‫‪254‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪254‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪254‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪254‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪) :‬ﺍﻻﺣﻼﻝ(‬ ‫‪255‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪8.2‬‬ ‫‪256‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪256‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪256‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪258‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪258‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪258‬‬
‫ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬ ‫‪258‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪258‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬ ‫‪259‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪259‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳـﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪259‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳــﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪259‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪259‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪260‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪260‬‬
‫ﺗﺷــﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛـﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪261‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳــــﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪261‬‬
‫)‪(Admixtures‬ﺍﻟﻣــﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿــﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪261‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪262‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ‬ ‫‪262‬‬
‫‪Free Water/Cement Ratio‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪262‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬ ‫‪263‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷــﻐﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪263‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪263‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳــﺔ‬ ‫‪263‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳـﺎﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪264‬‬
‫ﺧﻠـﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪265‬‬

‫‪Ready Mixed Concrete‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺧــﻠﻁ‬ ‫‪265‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪266‬‬
‫ﻧﻘـﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪266‬‬
‫ﺻـﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪266‬‬
‫ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣـﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪266‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣـــﻙ‬ ‫‪267‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻧﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷــﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪267‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪267‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷـﺎء‬ ‫‪267‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛــﺔ‬ ‫‪268‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪268‬‬
‫)‪(Water Stop Joints‬ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪269‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳــﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪269‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ‬ ‫‪269‬‬
‫(‪U1‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘـﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪270‬‬
‫(‪U2‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪270‬‬
‫(‪U3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪270‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪270‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬ ‫‪270‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳـﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻـﺏ‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪٨٫٢٫٤٩٫١‬‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟــﺔ‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫‪Consistency‬ﻗﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ‪٨٫٢٫٥٠٫١‬‬ ‫‪271‬‬
‫‪Workability‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷـﻐﻳﻝ ‪٨٫٢٫٥٠٫٢‬‬ ‫‪272‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ ‪٨٫٢٫٥٠٫٣‬‬ ‫‪272‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪272‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺷـﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺗﻳـﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪273‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬ ‫‪273‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷــﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪273‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪274‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪٨٫٢٫٥٦٫١‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ‪٨٫٢٫٥٦٫٢‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬
‫‪8.2.56.3‬‬ ‫‪Bituminous Latex Emulsion‬ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪275‬‬
‫‪8.2.56.4‬‬ ‫‪Polyethylene Sheets‬ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪275‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫‪275‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪275‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳــﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪275‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪276‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪٨٫٣‬‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫‪Submissions‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪277‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳـﺢ‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫‪Accessories‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫ﺟـﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳــﻠﻳﺢ‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷــــﻛﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪277‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻭﻭﻗﺎﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﻣـــﻭﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪278‬‬
‫‪Prestressing Bars‬ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪278‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳــﺕ‬ ‫‪278‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪278‬‬
‫‪8.4‬‬ ‫‪Formwork‬ﺍﻟﺷـﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫‪Submissions‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫‪ 279‬ﺍﻟﻣــﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫ﺃﻧـﻭﺍﻉ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷــﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓـــﺭﻡ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫)‪(F3‬ﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫)‪(F2‬ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻧـﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫)‪(F1‬ﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷـﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪279‬‬
‫ﻓـﻙ ﺍﻟﺷــﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪280‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳـﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷـﻛﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪280‬‬
‫‪ 281‬ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳـﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷــﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪8.5‬‬ ‫‪282‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣـﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪282‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـــﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪282‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪283‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪283‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪284‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧـﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁـﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪284‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺑﺵ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪285‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﺍﻷﺑــﻭﺍﺏ‬ ‫‪285‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪286‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪٨٫٦‬‬ ‫‪287‬‬
‫‪ 287‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ 287‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳــﺔ‬ ‫‪287‬‬
‫ﻣﺳـﺋﻭﻟﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳـﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪287‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـﺏ‬ ‫‪287‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـــﺏ‬ ‫‪287‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳــﺏ‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳـــﺔ‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓـﺫ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ ‪٨٫٧‬‬ ‫‪288‬‬
‫‪ 288‬ﻋــــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺷـﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫‪ 289‬ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳــﺏ‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳــﻑ‬ ‫‪289‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧــــﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﻋــﺎﻡ ‪٨٫٧٫٨٫١‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺧـﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪٨٫٧٫٨٫٢‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـــﺏ ‪٨٫٧٫٨٫٣‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫‪290‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳــﺢ ‪٨٫٧٫٨٫٤‬‬
‫‪TEMPLATES‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪٨٫٧٫٨٫٥‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫‪Iron and Metal Works‬ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪٨٫٧٫٩٫١‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٨٫٧٫٩٫٢‬‬ ‫‪290‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪٨٫٧٫٩٫٣‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪٨٫٧٫٩٫٤‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٨٫٧٫١٠٫١‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪٨٫٧٫١٠٫٢‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪٨٫٧٫١٠٫٣‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺟﺭﻳﻠﻳﺎ( ‪:‬‬ ‫‪291‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪292‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪292‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪8.8‬‬ ‫‪293‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪293‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪293‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪293‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪294‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪295‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪295‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪295‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪297‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧـــﺔ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪297‬‬
‫‪: 297‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳـﻘﻑ‬ ‫‪297‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳــﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟــﻰ‬ ‫‪298‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳــﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬

‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬
‫‪: 298‬ﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪299‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ‬ ‫‪299‬‬
‫‪ 299‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫‪: 300‬ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟــﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ‪٨٫٩‬‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫ﻋـــﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑـﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻠﻳـــﺩ‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺷــــﻭ‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫ﺣﻠـﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺑـــﺭﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋــﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪301‬‬
‫‪ 302‬ﺍﻟﺯﺟــﺎﺝ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺟﻳـﺞ‬ ‫‪302‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪٨٫١٠‬‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫ﻋــﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫‪Waterproofing Membrane‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫‪Bituminous Latex Emulsion‬ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪303‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪304‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫‪304‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬ ‫‪304‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣــﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁـﺎﺕ ‪٨٫١١‬‬ ‫‪305‬‬
‫‪ 305‬ﻋــــــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛــﻭ‬ ‫‪305‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳــﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻁ ﺳـﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋـﻁ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺭﺍﻧﻳﺕ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳــﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫ﺍﻟــﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﺧــــﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫)‪(Concrete Flooring‬ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪306‬‬
‫‪Painting‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫـﺎﻥ ‪٨٫١٢‬‬ ‫‪308‬‬
‫ﻋـــﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪308‬‬
‫ﻁــﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳــﺔ‬ ‫‪308‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ‪٨٫١٣‬‬ ‫‪309‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪309‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪309‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪309‬‬
‫‪:‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪:‬ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫‪309‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﺳﺧﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﻧﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪310‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ‪:‬ﺛﺎﻟﺛًﺎ‬ ‫‪310‬‬
‫" ﺍﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ " ‪ :.‬ﻟﻠﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪:‬ﺭﺍﺑﻌًﺎ‬ ‫‪311‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ‬‫‪:‬ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣ ً‬ ‫‪312‬‬
‫)‪(As Built Drawing‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ‪:‬ﺳﺎﺩ ً‬
‫ﺳﺎ‬ ‫‪312‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪312‬‬
‫‪:‬ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪:‬ﺃﻭﻻ ‪8.13.10.1‬‬ ‫‪312‬‬
‫‪ 313‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎ ً‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪8.13.10.2‬‬
‫‪:Upvc‬ﺍﻟـ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪313‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻏﺭﻑ‬ ‫‪313‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪313‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪:‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳًﺎ‬ ‫‪313‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻧﺎﺕ ‪:‬ﺛﺎﻟﺛًﺎ‬ ‫‪314‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ ‪:‬ﺭﺍﺑﻌًﺎ‬ ‫‪314‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣ ً‬ ‫‪314‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪٨٫١٤‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪315‬‬
‫( ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪u.P.V.C‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻥ ) ‪٨٫١٤٫١٫١‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬
‫‪8.14.1.2‬‬ ‫‪315‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫‪ 315‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺍﺑﺔ ‪٨٫١٤٫٢٫١‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻼﺟﺎﺭﺩ( ‪٨٫١٤٫٢٫٢‬‬ ‫‪315‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻠﻳﺔ ‪٨٫١٤٫٢٫٣‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬
‫ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ‪٨٫١٤٫٢٫٤‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬
‫ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻱ ‪٨٫١٤٫٢٫٥‬‬ ‫‪316‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪316‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪317‬‬
‫ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ‪٨٫١٤٫٤٫١‬‬ ‫‪317‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ ‪٨٫١٤٫٤٫٢‬‬ ‫‪317‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪317‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬ ‫‪317‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺳﻭﺭ ‪٨٫١٥‬‬ ‫‪318‬‬
‫‪ 318‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ "ﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺭﺩﻡ"‬ ‫‪318‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺭﺻﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪318‬‬
‫‪ 318‬ﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺻﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪318‬‬
‫‪ 319‬ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ‬
‫‪ 319‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺟﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ‪٨٫١٦‬‬ ‫‪320‬‬
9 Operation and Maintenance Requirements 322

9.1 Introduction 322
9.2 Staffing 322
9.3 Commissioning Period Plans 323
General 323
9.4 Asset Management Plan 324
General 324
Asset Register 324
9.5 Operation and Maintenance Plan 325
General 325
9.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 325
General 325
9.7 Contingency Plan 328
9.8 Statutory Emergency Planning Documentation 329
General 329
Prevention and Elimination of Emergency Situations 329
9.9 Monthly Operating Report 329
Contents of Monthly Operating Reports 329
9.10 Inspections By The Employer 330
9.11 Buildings and Grounds Maintenance 330
10 Training of Employer’s personnel 331

10.1 Purpose of Training 331
10.2 Employer’s Staff To Be Trained 331
10.3 Form of Training 332
10.4 Contractor’s Training Specialists 333
10.5 Training Programme and Reporting 333
‫‪1 Performance Specification - Scope of‬‬

‫‪Supply of Plant and Services‬‬
‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫‪Background‬‬
‫ﺃﻁﻠﻘﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ) ‪ ( GoE‬ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻲ ﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺻﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ) ‪ ( NRSP‬ﺑﻧﺎءﺍ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺋﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻣﻝ ‪ ٤٠٠٠‬ﻗﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺩﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٢٧٬٠٠٠‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺯﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺟﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺻﺭ‪ ,‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ "ﺍﻟﻼﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﻪ" ﻓﻲ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﺛﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺗﻳﻪ ﻭﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﻁﻧﻰ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻳﻧﻅﻡ ﺳﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺭﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥٥‬ﻗﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻟﺗﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻗﻬﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﺗﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻡ ﻭ ﻓﺭﻉ ﺭﺷﻳﺩ ﻭﻭﻗﻌﺕ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻳﻪ ﻗﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﺗﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺛﻣﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺣﻭ ‪ ٥٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﻻﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺍﻁﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪((SRSSP.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ )‪ (SRSSP‬ﻫﻭ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺳﻳﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻟﺗﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻗﻬﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻗﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺿﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ )ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ( ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻔﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ SRSSP‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺗﻣﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ١٥٥‬ﻗﺭﻳﺔ ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﺭﻑ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺧﺩﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺁﻣﻧﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ )ﺳﻛﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻳﻧﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺇﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﺫﺑﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻫﻥ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻭﺍﺭﻉ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺗﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺿﺦ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﺳﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ‪ PforR‬ﻛﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻥ‪ :‬ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺗﺛﻣﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺗﻳﺔ ﻭ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺗﺧﺹ ﺗﻌﺯﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻛﺗﻭﺑﺭ ‪ ) ٢٠١٥‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺿﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻭﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺙ(‬
‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫‪Scope of Services/Supply/ Management‬‬
‫‪The Contractor's scope of services, for each of the two WWTPs, shall include‬‬
‫‪all elements/aspects to ensure the proper implementation of the project which‬‬
‫‪includes:‬‬
‫‪ Verification of all data given in tender documents.‬‬
‫‪ Preparation of detailed designs including submission of all design calculations‬‬
‫‪as per international standards called for in the tender documents and as well‬‬
‫‪submission of proving documentation attached to the relevant calculation‬‬
‫‪Mott MacDonald in association with‬‬

 The contractor is obliged to modify his submitted design to the satisfaction of

the Engineer recommendation and the final approved design.
 Preparation of Detailed Design, construction, pre-commissioning and
commissioning of a new AlSids wastewater treatment plant with a flow
capacity for the first Stage of 5,000 m3/d (ADWF), with a peaking factor to be
applied resulting in maximum daily capacity of 583 m3/hr; and for the second
Stage of a total capacity of the WWTP to be 10,000 m3/d (ADWF), with a
peaking factor to be applied resulting in maximum daily capacity of 1,167
m3/hr; The design shall be for two stages, and construction shall be for the
first stage only as indicated below. The following Table summarize the
average and peak flow requirements for target year 2037 (Stage 1) and target
year 2057 (Stage 2)
Table 1 Average and Peak Flowrate
Parameter Stage 1 (2037) Stage 2 (2057)
Design Average flow (m3/d) 5,000 10,000
Peak Flow (m3/hr) 583 1,167
 Preparation of Detailed Design, construction, pre-commissioning and

commissioning of a new Kafr Daboos wastewater treatment plant with a flow
capacity for the first Stage of 5,000 m3/d (ADWF), with a peaking factor to be
applied resulting in maximum daily capacity of 583 m3/hr; and for the second
Stage of a total capacity of the WWTP to be 7,500 m3/d (ADWF), with a
peaking factor to be applied resulting in maximum daily capacity of 875 m3/hr;
The design shall be for two stages, and construction shall be for the first stage
only. The following Table summarize the average and peak flow requirements
for target year 2037 (Stage 1) and target year 2057 (Stage 2)
Table 2 Average and Peak Flowrate
Parameter Stage 1 (2037) Stage 2 (2057)
Design Average flow (m3/d) 5,000 7,500
Peak Flow (m3/hr) 583 875
The contractor shall consider that the WWTP civil works for the common units
and buildings required for Stage 1 and 2 shall be constructed within his scope of
works in stage 1 including but not limited to: (inlet chamber, screen, grit chamber,
distribution chambers, sludge pumping station, chlorine house, chlorine contact
tanks, generator house, transformer building, fence, gates, water and irrigation
networks, main MV cables, earthening system, roads, treated water pump
station and effluent pipeline, treated effluent outfall structure on the drain, etc.)
while the electrical and mechanical equipment in these units and buildings shall
be limited to stage 1 only. The Contractor is requested to design the WWTP
general layout indicating all units and buildings for Stage 2. The Contractor shall
ensure the proper distribution of the raw wastewater flow between the two stages
is accomplished. The contractor shall consider that during the erection of stage
2 mechanical and electrical equipment, the operation of stage 1 shall not be
interrupted.
 Supply tools and recommended spare parts for 2 years operation of WWTP;
 Construct and equip a laboratory within the WWTP administration building.

The laboratory should be equipped with appropriate equipment and
chemicals required to undertake daily routine tests for wastewater (raw and
treated effluent) testing analysis;
 Operate and maintain the WWTP, at the contractor’s cost, for a duration of 12
months starting from the issuance of the Completion Certificate. This period
will also include providing operation and maintenance training to the
Employer’s personnel as outlined in Clause 1.8;
 Provide operation and maintenance training and supervision to the
Employer's personnel for a period of 12 months starting from the issuance of
the Completion Certificate as outlined in Clause 1.8;
The scope of works shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:
 Designing of the WWTP Stage 1, including any and all necessary design
components encompassing process, civil, structural, mechanical, electrical,
control, etc. and other "non-process" activities;
 Co-ordinating of the design and construction with all necessary authorities;
 Obtaining all necessary permits according to the relevant Egyptian
regulations for supplying the WWTP and the entire works as required with
electricity, potable water, telecommunication and providing supplies;
 Obtaining all necessary permits for the design and construction of the Works;
 Construction and installation of the entire works;
 Testing, pre-commissioning and commissioning of the WWTP and producing
all the handover documentation; and
 Producing Handover Operation and Maintenance manuals, Standard
Operating Procedures and training required for the operation and
maintenance of the WWTP;
 Providing an Operation and Maintenance Plan for the WWTP.
1.3 Employer’s Basic Design for WWTP

General
The Employer has prepared the Basic Design for each WWTP based on SBR
treatment technology. The presented basic design and WWTP site layout is indicative
for the suitability of the available land area for this treatment technology. The
Contractor is required to develop the detail design of WWTP based on one of the four
technologies as specified in this specifications, provided that it fit within the site
boundary shown on the Drawings (Volume 4). Within the limit of each WWTP site
boundary, the Contractor is free to integrate his design, position and size the various
elements of the WWTP as the Contractor considers best but only to the extent that
they comply with the requirements set out in the Employer's Requirements and other
relevant documents.
The treatment process stream, for each WWTP, shall be provided with the following:
 AlSids WWTP: Inlet deceleration chamber to be connected with the force
mains 3 Nr. pipelines from the following new pump stations “The first force
main diameter 300 mm from AlHebsh pump station, the second force main
diameter 300 mm from Kafr AlShorafa pump station “including the sewage
flow from Tal Mohamed pump station”, and the third force main diameter
300 mm from Sharkia Mubasher pump station “including the sewage flow
from AlSids, ElSheikh Dawood, and Tawaheen Akrash pump stations” The
new inlet chamber shall be provided with an emergency bypass to be
connected to the (AlIbrahimia drain) by gravity.;
 Kafr Daboos WWTP: Inlet deceleration chamber to be connected with the
force mains 3 Nr. pipelines from the following new pump stations “The first
force main diameter 300 mm from Kafr Daboos pump station, “including the
sewage flow from Kheluat Abu Hatab”, the second force main diameter
300 mm from Kafr AlAaeed pump station “including the sewage flow from
Manzel Hayan pump station”, and the third force main diameter 400 mm from
AlMahmodyia pump station “including the sewage flow from Monshaa Ghaly
Mansour pump station, and from ELSheekh ElZawahry pump stations” The
new inlet chamber shall be provided with an emergency bypass to be
connected to the (Manzel Hayan drain) by via the treated effluent pump
station;
 Inlet automatic mechanical screen and standby manual screen;
 Inlet bypass structure overflow weir, sluice gates and bypass piping;
 Inlet offline\in-line equalization tank (subject to Contrator design, equipped
with pumps, submersible mixers and/or aeration facilities. The overflow of the
equalization tank shall be connected by gravity to the emergency bypass line.
The contractor shall decide wheather to have balancing tanks in the system
or not subject to the design submitted by him under his sole responsibility.
Proving documentation shall be submitted by the contractor in the latter case.
 Aerated or Vortex grit chamber;
 Biological treatment reactor (the Employer’s proposed system is Sequential
Batch Reactor ‘SBR’) and associated mechanical and electrical plants and
equipment; The contractor shall submit only one offer based on one of the
following process technologies:
o Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR);
o Extended aeration process;
o Moving Bed Biological Reactor (MBBR);

o Integrated Advanced Biological Reactor.
 Treated effluent disinfection plant and chlorine house, balancing/chlorine
contact tank;
 Waste sludge pumping station;
 Gravity Sludge Thickeners;
 Thickened Sludge Pump Station
 Sludge drying beds;
 Inter process pipework between units (ductile iron pipes), and influent pipes
to WWTP’s inlet. The limit of supply for the inlet pipes shall be 1 meter outside
the plant fence. It shall be the Contractor responsibility to tie in with the force
main from the pump stations;
 Supernatant Pumping Station;
 AlSids WWTP: WWTP effluent piping to existing drain (AlSeeds drain) outfall;
the construction of the outfall structure shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The location of the effluent outfall on AlIbrahimia drain on (km
14.500) and the water level in the drain is (+ ). The Contractor shall be
responsible during bidding period to coordinate with the General Directorate
of Drainage in Sharkia governorate to obtain the water level in the drain under
his responsibility.;
 Kafr Daboos WWTP: Treated effluent tank and pumping station and the
effluent water force main to the Manzel Hayan drain and the outfall structure;
 Kafr Daboos WWTP: WWTP effluent piping to existing drain (Manzel Hayan
drain) outfall; the construction of the outfall structure shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor. The location of the effluent outfall on Manzel Hayan drain
on (km 3.00) and the water level in the drain is (+ ). The Contractor shall be
responsible during bidding period to coordinate with the General Directorate
of Drainage in Sharkia governorate to obtain the water level in the drain under
his responsibility. The recommended material for construction of forcemain
shall be HDPE;
 Site works, boundary fence, roads, as requested in the architectural and civil
specification, lighting, water supply, telecommunication, drainage network,
storm drainage gullies, tanks drainage networks, firefighting system (including
fire fighting and potable water tank and pumps) and networks to the
requirement and regulation of civil defence authority etc.;
 Ancillary building such as administration building including laboratory room,
store and prey room, guard house, air blower building, chlorine building,
transformers and generator buildings, as requested in the architectural and
civil specification complete with all services such as lighting, water supply,
telephone lines, internet, waste and storm drainage, telecommunication, etc.
 Water supply piping inside the site and to buildings, and connection to existing
main, the employer shall be responsible to provide water piping a distance of
one meter outside the plant fence. It shall be the contractor responsibility to
tie in with the water piping;
 The contractor shall take into account that the standby percentage of all main
mechanical equipment’s such as (pumps, blowers, …etc.) shall be 50%. With
regards to power transformers the standby capacity shall be 100%. The diesel
generating plant shall be designed to cover the basic plant load under
emergency condition excluding non-continuous loads comprising of cranes,
normal ventilation and dewatering pumps (stand-by use);
 The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with Electricity Company to
secure the permenant medium voltage supply and M.V. cables
from nearest source to the RMU inside each treatment plant. The cost of
these works shall be paid against a provisional sum as indicated in the Bill of
Quantities;
 Electrical works including R.M.Us, Medium & Low voltage switch boards,
Motor Control Centers, cables, earthening system and cables, lighting,
transformers and standby generator, and its buildings;
 Instrumentations shall monitor all process governing criteria such as flow,
level, pressure …etc. including flow measurement for total waste water
influent, sludge and effluent flows;
 Signage for buildings, WWTP entry and facilities.
 The contractor shall investigate and propose his strategy to control nitrogen
and phosphorus concentrations and levels in the treated wastewater effluent
and indicate if this strategy is viable or not viable in his technical proposal.
This study and strategy shall secure an additional technical points in the
proposal evaluation. The Contractor shall indicate this additional cost in Bill
No. 8 of the Bill of quantities. For the design purpose, the influent phosphorus
ion PO4 shall equal 30 mg/l, and the influent total Nitrogen shall be 50 mg/l.
The required treated effluent concentration of nitrogen and phosphorus shall
be 20 and 10 mg/l, respectively.
1.4 General Project Information

Preamble
The Requirements presented herein define the location of the Site and the
WWTP, specify the purpose of the WWTP and particular requirements for the
completed WWTP, including functional requirements, quality, performance and
scope, requirements for the supply of certain items (all required consumables such
as chemicals, lubricants, etc. shall be indicated in the bidder`s proposal), special
obligations and other details.
The Specifications described hereinafter are deemed to form and shall constitute an
integral part of the Employer's Requirements.
Location of WWTP Sites
The location of the Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWTP) site is shown on the
drawings herein (Volume 4). The WWTP is located to the West of AlHebsh village
and to the East of Kafr AlShorafa and Sharkia Mubasher villages. The total land area
of the new WWTP site is approximately 4.27 feddan (Note that 1 feddan is equivalent
to 4,200 m2).
The location of the Waste Water Treatment Plant (WWTP) site is shown on the
drawings herein (Volume 4). The WWTP is located to the South of Manzel Hayan
village and to the North West of Kafr Daboos village. The total land area of the new
WWTP site is approximately 4.05 feddan.
Topography
The site of the treatment plant is almost flat with average elevations of +5.60 m. The
results of a topographic survey are included in Volume 4.
The site of the treatment plant is almost flat with average elevations of +7.20 m. The
results of a topographic survey are included in Volume 4.
Geotechnical Conditions
A geotechnical/soils investigation was carried out in Kafr Daboos treatment plant site
in year 2018. The geotechnical investigation report shall be included in these tender
documents (Volume 5).
Soil investigation data is provided for the Contractor’s information only and it shall be
expressly understood that the Employer will not be held responsible for any
interpretations or conclusions drawn by the Contractor from these reports, nor for the
completeness of the data provided to the Tenderer. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify the data and source any additional data that might be missing or
incomplete.
The contractor shall be responsible to conduct investigation pits to allocate the existing
undergrounds pipes and cables, if any.
Intended Purpose For Which The Works Are Required
The Contractor is required to deliver to the Employer a fully functional, commissioned
and operating TWO (2) Waste Water Treatment Plants for AlSIds cluster, Markaz
AlIbrahimia, and Kafr Daboos clusters, Markaz Hehyia, Sharkia governorate, Egypt.
Also the Contractor is required to operate and maintain the WWTP for a period of time
as well as providing training to the Employer’s operational and maintenance personnel,
as detailed in Clause 1.8.
Based on information given in the Tender Documents, the Contractor shall:
 Prepare detailed designs and construct two WWTPs based on the any of the
available approved technologies specified in the technical specification and in
accordance with the Employer’s Requirements.
 The Works shall include all necessary activities such as construction, supply
and installation of equipment, supply of spare parts, commissioning, operation
and maintenance, handover, training and supervision to Employer’s operation
and maintenance personnel etc., pertaining to the successful completion of
the Contract as detailed in the Bidding Documents.
 The Contractor shall submit only one for each WWTP offer from the following
treatment technologies, ensuring compliance with the basic requirements and
influent and effluent wastewater characteristics. The proposed technologies
shall include the following:
1.4.5.1 Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR)
1.4.5.2 Extended Aeration
1.4.5.3 Moving Bed Biological Reactor (MBBR)
1.4.5.4 Integrated Secondary Biological Treatment
Programme
The Time for Completion of the construction period is estimated at 2 4 months for
both WWTPs as stated in the Particular Conditions of the Contract. Wastewater will
be pumped to AlSids WWTP through the three (3) pumping stations AlHebsh pump
station, Kafr AlShorafa pump station “including the sewage flow from Tal Mohamed
pump station”, and Sharkia Mubasher pump station “including the sewage flow from
AlSids, ElSheikh Dawood, and Tawaheen Akrash pump stations” and will be pumped
to Kafr Daboos WWTP through the three (3) pumping stations “Kafr Daboos pump
station, “including the sewage flow from Kheluat Abu Hatab”, Kafr AlAaeed pump
station “including the sewage flow from Manzel Hayan pump station”, and
AlMahmodyia pump station “including the sewage flow from Monshaa Ghaly Mansour
pump station, and from ELSheekh ElZawahry pump stations” to allow the Contractor
to carry out commissioning and Tests on Completion.
The Contractor is required to maintain and operate the WWTPs with his own staff as
well as provide training to Employer’s operation and maintenance personnel for a period
of 6 months starting from the date of issuing the Completion Certificate. The Contractor
is required to maintain and operate the WWTP with the Employer’s trained staff under
the Contractor’s supervision for a period of the following 6 months.
The Employer is responsible for the quantity of wastewater collected in the sewer
network and pumped to the WWTP for the testing and commissioning period and after
the issuance of the Completion Certificate.
Coordination of The Contract
The Contractor shall coordinate all his work in AlSids WWTP with the contracts for the
construction of the sewerage system in AlHebsh, Kafr AlShorafa, Tal Mohamed,
Sharkia Mubasher, AlSids, ElSheikh Dawood, and Tawaheen Akrash villages and
pump stations including the construction of the forcemain pipelines to the boundaries
of the WWTP. The Contractor shall coordinate all his work in Kafr Daboos WWTP with
the contracts for the construction of the sewerage system in Kafr Daboos, Kheluat
Abu Hatab, Kafr AlAaeed, Manzel Hayan, AlMahmodyia, Monshaa Ghaly Mansour,
ELSheekh ElZawahry villages and pump stations including the construction of the
forcemain pipelines to the boundaries of the WWTP. It shall be the Contractor
responsibility to tie-in with the these force mains to the WWTPs as mentioned above.
Documents to Be Included In The Tender Submission
The bidder shall submit but not limited to the following in his proposal for each WWTP
 Full hydraulic, mechanical, electrical calculation for the WWTP treatment
processes and site buildings. The Contractor shall fill the attached calculation
note for the SBR technology or submit a similar calculation note for his
submitted technology in his proposal.
 Technical proposal including technical details, catalogues, datasheets &
guarantee tables for the different electrical and mechanical equipment
included in the bidder design.
 General layout of the WWTP indicating all pipelines for both Stage 1 (target
year of 2037) and another layout for Stage 2 (target year of 2057).
 General piping routing diagram and general specification of piping materials.
 Hydraulic profile calculation and drawing.
 Process Flow Diagram (PFD) and preliminary (main principles) Process
Instrumentation Diagram (PID) for the treatment plant.
 Preliminary Process Description and preliminary mass balance.
 Complete Control System description and technical details.
 Mechanical & Electrical Equipment list.
 Mechanical & Electrical Equipment process data sheet.
 Instrument process data sheet (control & ON/OFF valves, analyzers, flow
meters, etc.)
 Single line diagram.
 Preliminary electrical consumers list and electrical load list.
 Preliminary electrical cable schedule.
 Main electrical cables routing drawings
 Specification for painting, coating, and insulation.

Detailed Drawings and Information
“Following award, the Contractor shall submit a detailed schedule showing the
interaction of design and build activities. This schedule should reflect the fact that:
a. Complete process and hydraulic calculation and design shall be submitted
and approved.
b. Each component of the work shall be constructed only after detailed and
shop drawings are submitted and approved.”
This shall include but not be limited to the following:
 Structural, hydraulic and pipeline calculations;
 Process flow diagram (PFD);
 Process design calculation and mass balance;
 Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID);
 Hazardous area classification;
 Special design requirements such as HAZOP/CHAZOP;
 Electrical calculations including power supply sizing;
 Protection discrimination curves and calculations for the whole WWTP
including co-ordination with the local Electricity Company’s supply and
protection;
 Structural details, drawings and reinforcement bending schedules;
 Longitudinal pipeline sections for piping within WWTP;
 Pipeline layout and connection details;
 Materials specifications for all items in the entire WWTP;
 Routing diagrams for all services;
 Cable schedules for pump stations and WWTP;
 Small power and lighting calculations and drawings;
 Architectural details including room schedules, building details, color finishes,
 HVAC Calculations;
 Landscaping and fencing details with position of gate;
 MCC panel drawings and detailed information;
 Mechanical equipment in detail, performance, connections, materials used,
product type and casing broken down to machine units;
 Manufacturing and erection drawings, etc.
Plant working drawings and other items listed above shall include but not be limited
to:
 General arrangement drawings and sectional views, fully dimensioned and
showing in detail all Plant and ancillary equipment to be provided under the
Contract;
 Dimensional assembly and erection drawings of each item of Plant including,
where applicable, drawings showing foundations and loads and forces acting
thereon, weight of the Plant items, and kinds of materials and finishes;
 Working drawings of all assemblies and systems required, electrical and/or
mechanical connections, showing the units of equipment in the proposed
position for installation and the details of attachments and connections
required with locations referred to each other and to the structure;
 Single line power and schematic diagrams including diagrams of connections
for each type of electrical equipment together with a comprehensive wiring
diagram showing all connections between the various items of the equipment
necessary for the complete provision and the safety devices (the terminal
lettering shall correspond to the terminal marking to be used on the
equipment);
 Plans of conduits, station pipework, interconnecting pipework and valves
indicating manual and remote control devices, and diagrams of control
systems and circuits;
 Shop fabrication drawings, etc;
 Diagrams and schematics showing flow paths and circuits, descriptions,
dimensions and capacities of wastewater treatment process units, and
piezometric levels corresponding to average and maximum flow rates, all to
be accompanied by proof of computations;
 Complete and detailed schedules listing all Plant and ancillary equipment to
be supplied by the Contractor;
 Any additional drawings required to cover all other Plant elements not listed
above.
Full details of all items of electrical equipment constituting an operating system and
any mechanical units involved therein shall be submitted to the Consultant
concurrently and shall include clear diagrams showing circuit functioning and
necessary details for field erection.
Plant working drawings prepared by Sub-Contractors and manufacturers employed
by the Contractor, shall be checked by him for accuracy and compliance with the
Contract before being forwarded to the Project Manager. A note shall appear on
such working drawings indicating that the Contractor has made this check. Working
drawings, not so checked and noted, will be rejected and returned to the Contractor
without further examination for resubmission.
Drawings and other information submitted at the previous stages which have
been revised or updated shall re-submitted. All drawings shall be complete and
thoroughly checked.
1.5 Specific Requirements
Flows and Loads
The WWTP shall be designed to treat the flows and loads given in the following tables
and to meet the consent water and sludge quality standards defined in the
Functional Guarantees under the required international standards. The plant shall
be designed to meet the projected flow for the entire period from construction until
the design year 2037 for first stage and 2057 for the second stage. The construction
works for the process units shall be limited to the first stage only.
The WWTP shall be capable to handle the minimum flow and loads at the Year
2020, but also take into account the increase in flows and loads from 2020 up to
2037 in the first Stage and up to 2057 in the second Stage. The construction of the
plant shall be limited to the first Stage as applicable. Some civil elements such
as the headworks, service buildings, pump stations, generator building, control
room, and transformer building shall be sized and constructed to meet the second
Stage requirements.
The flows and loads should take into account the return filtrate water from sludge
treatment processes.
The influent wastewater characteristics in Table 3 are daily averages and the WWTP
must be capable of treating normal variations and peaks of at least 15% above the
loading throughout the day. This means that during the day some hours might come
with a concentration of 15% more than the average concentration of pollutants as
stated in Table 3. The contractor is required to demonstrate the ability of his proposed
treatment process to handle this extra concentration of pollutants
The Contractor shall allow for the seasonal variation in ambient temperature and
wastewater temperature in the design of the WWTP. The design shall allow for a
variation in influent wastewater temperature from 18 oC to 32 oC. Influent wastewater
is primarily domestic from households, public institutions, hotels, restaurants,
services, and small commercial/industrial activities.
Table 3 Influent and Effluent Wastewater Quality to the Treatment Plant
Influent Effluent Law No.

Parameter Unit
Wastewater Wastewater 48/1982
Temperature [oC] 18-32 25-35 35
pH [-] 6.5 6-9 6-9
BOD5 [mg/lit] 650 60 60
SS [mg/lit] 500 50 50
COD [mg/lit] 1,200 <80 80
Total Solids
[mg/lit] 1400 NA NA
TS
Dissolved
[mg/lit] 900 <2000 <2000
Solids
TN [mg/lit] 50 - NA
Oil and
[mg/lit] 50 10 10
grease
Alkalinity [mg/lit] 250 - NA
NO3-N [mg/lit] - 50 50
MPN for
colonial /100 ml 6×108 5000 5000
Bacteria
These parameters follow the standard. The general logic parameter for effluent
discharge after treatment to the waterway environment as stipulated in the Egyptian
law 48/1982 and shall be taken as performance guarantee criteria. Other effluent
treated wastewater quality parameters shall be as stipulated in the Egyptian law
48/1982.
The Contractor shall note that the estimated flows and loads during the period of
p r e - c o m m i s s i o n i n g a n d commissioning and carrying out of the Guarantee Tests
may be lower than expected due to reasons beyond the control of the Employer.
However, the Contractor shall take into consideration during design that the minimum
flow rate could be about 25% of the average flow at year 2037.
AlSids Wastewater Treatment Plant design capacity flows are as follows:
 Average Dry Weather Flow (year 2037): 5,000 m3/day
 Peak Dry Weather Flow year 2037 (including peaking factor): 583 m3/hr
 Sludge shall be dewatered at the drying-bed field to a dry solids content of
20-30% in the dry season without the addition of lime.
Kafr Daboos Wastewater Treatment Plant design capacity flows are as follows:
 Average Dry Weather Flow (year 2037): 5,000 m3/day
 Peak Dry Weather Flow year 2037 (including peaking factor): 583 m3/hr
 Sludge shall be dewatered at the drying-bed field to a dry solids
content of 20-30% in the dry season without the addition of lime
Basic Design Parameters
EMPLOYER’S OUTLINE DESIGN For WWTP
The Employer’s Outline Design was based on Sequential Batch Reactor (SBR)
process. The Contractor is requested to submit, for each WWTP, his own calculation
for the proposed system and any alternative process he may submit with his proposal.
The contractor shall consider that for redundancy, the minimum number of each
process units shall not be less than two (2).
The treatment process stream shall be provided with the following:
 Inlet piping and structure
 Inlet automatic mechanical screen and manual bypass screen;
 Inlet bypass structure over flow weir, sluice gates and bypass piping;
 Aerated grit removal chamber;
 Inlet offline / online equalization tank (subject to Contractor design), equipped
with pumps, submersible mixers and/or aeration facilities, overflow, and
piping facilities.
 Biological treatment reactor (sequential batch reactor or as the case may be);
 Chlorine contact tank;
 Waste sludge pumping station;
 Gravity sludge thickeners and thickened sludge pump station;
 Sludge drying beds;
 Supernatant pump station;
 AlSids WWTP effluent piping and drain outfall to existing drain (Ibrahimyia
drain) and the construction of the drain outfall structure.
 Kafr Daboos WWTP effluent piping and force main to existing drain (Manzel
Hayan drain) and the construction of the drain outfall structure
 Site works, site access and internal roads, fences, storage buildings,
administration and laboratory building, transformer and generator buildings,
and fuel tanks, etc.;
 water supply piping, connection to existing main;
 electrical works including MCC, cables, lighting, transformer and standby
generator
 Flow measurement for total waste water influent, effluent, and sludge.
Employer Specific Requirements
The following main points and conditions shall be taken into consideration as general
design constraints for the treatment system for each WWTP:
 The contractor shall submit a completion certificate issued by the plant
Employer confirming the efficiency of the proposed treatment system and its
sustainability of working with the same efficiency for at least ten (10) years.
 The system shall produce minimum quantity of sludge.

 The minimum number of any wastewater or sludge treatment process unit
shall be two.
 The system shall utilize the minimum possible available land area after
installation, according to the plant area submitted.
 Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling of equipment.
 All electro-mechanical equipment shall be of heavy duty performance, and to
be supplied from North America, European Union, Japan, or local
manufacturing origin.
 All electro-mechanical equipment manufacturers shall be ISO certified.
 The operation and maintenance costs shall be minimized.
 The use of chemicals shall be either chlorine gas or hypochlorite solution for
disinfection of the treated effluent and polymer for mechanical sludge
dewatering system (if used).
 All design loadings (dead & live loads, wind loads, thermal loads, dynamic
loads from process equipment) shall either be in accordance with specified
design standards, or to the relevant UK codes or an equivalent Egyptian code.
 All permanent process structure shall be reinforced concrete structure.
 Concrete, steel, masonry, foundations, construction joints, expansion joints,
and movement joints shall either be in accordance with specified design
standards, or to the relevant Egyptian codes.
 Structural concrete shall comply with BS 8110: Structural use of Concrete and
with BS 8007 (Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous Liquids)
or to the equivalent Egyptian Code and Standards.
 The capability to meet variable hydraulic and organic loads shall be met.
 The operation and maintenance requirements shall be easy.
 The environmental governing rules shall be met.
 All cabling lengths are to be minimized.
 All automatic equipment is to be made available for local monitoring via PLC
& HMI control.
 All geotechnical works should take into account the risks of sliding,
overturning, groundwater issues, flotation, seismic disturbance, settlement
and bearing capacity. An appropriate factor of safety should be included.
Geotechnical works should be designed so that cut/fill operations are
minimized and that the best use is made of the local topography.
Criteria for Design Personnel Requirement
The Contractor shall have a sufficient number and competent staff with the range
of skills required in Sharkia at the Site of the Works during the whole of the design
period. There is no specific requirement to carry out the design at the Site of the
W orks or in Cairo. However, the Contractor’s staff at the Sites of the Works shall
have sufficient experience and knowledge of all aspects of the design to be able to
explain to and discuss the design with the Project Manager.
The Contractor’s Design Manager (person responsible for the design) shall be
present in Sharkia at the Site of the W orks (or in the project location), as necessary
to ensure that the above conditions are met and specifically for the following:
 Initial meetings at the start of the project to discuss the design with the Project
Manager and Employer;
 To present and discuss the Preliminary Design at meetings as necessary
until the Preliminary Design has received (Approved for Construction) by the
Project Manager
To carry out the detailed design, the Contractor shall only engage appropriately
qualified and suitably experienced personnel who are competent with all aspects
of the necessary works for this project and the WWTP. The key personnel shall
also be well acquainted with Design & Build and International Standards. The
Contractor shall include within his tender detailed CVs of the staff he intends to use.
Change of key personnel i.e. Project Manager, Deputy Project Manager, Process
Designer, Structural engineer, Senior Engineer(s) shall only be made after CVs have
been submitted to the Project Manager and approved in writing by him.
Design Life Requirements
Civil, Structural and Building Works shall be designed on the basis of a 50-year service
life. Design life for other components of the Contract is given in Table 4 below.
Mechanical and electrical equipment shall be suitable for 24 hour per day continuous
operation and also under discontinuous operation under all local climatic conditions
and be designed such that complete replacement shall not be required until at least
the time period in years in Table 4 after the Date of issue of Completion Certificate.
Wherever possible WWTP shall be designed and arranged so that the degree of skill
required maintaining and servicing the Works shall be minimal. Except for
consumable items, which normally require more frequent replacement, no part
subject to wear shall have a design life from new to replacement or repair of less
than five years of continuous normal operation.
Electrical contactors’, relays’ and switches shall have a minimum life under normal
full load working conditions of two million hours operations without replacement of
any part and two hundred thousand hours operations without maintenance of any
kind. Electrical relays and light current switching devices shall not require
maintenance of any kind before completing two million hours operations under
normal full working load.
The Works shall be designed for the prevention of corrosion, entry of insects and
vermin, entry of dirt and dust, and to minimize risk and damage in the event of a
fire. Plant shall operate without undue vibration and parts shall be designed to
withstand the maximum stresses under the most severe conditions of normal service
after loss due to any corrosion allowance, or the specified test condition including
any corrosion allowance.
Plant shall be designed so that when operating at the normal condition, the
intensity of emitted noise in the working environment shall not constitute a health
hazard to operators and other personnel or cause a nuisance outside the boundary
of the Works. The anticipated noise characteristics of all items of Plant and systems
which have high noise potential shall be submitted to the Project Manager early in
the design stage of the Contract.
The Design of the Works shall be in accordance with best modern international
practice and shall be such as to facilitate construction, operation, inspection and
maintenance of all processes and equipment. All mechanical and electrical
equipment to be supplied shall, wherever possible, have a proven reliability record in

similar works.
The style and finish of the WWTP installation shall be consistent throughout the
Works.
The requirements for design life shall govern the selection of materials. The
requirements contained elsewhere in the specification represent minimum
standards and are not necessarily sufficient to meet the design life.
Table 4: Minimum Design Life

Description Design Life
Years
( not limited)
Civil Works and Buildings 50

Process Structures 50
Buried Pipework ( D u c t i l e i r o n ) 50
Buildings 50
Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) equipment 20
Building Services 20
Mechanical and Electrical Plant
Process Plant – sewage 25
Process Plant – sludge 20
Pumps – sewage and sludge 20
Valves and Actuators – sewage and sludge 20
HV switchgear and transformers 40
LV Motor Control Centres 20
Electrical Installations-Panels-Switchboards 20
Instrumentation, Control and Automation equipment 20
PLC systems 20
Computers-Printers 10
Flowmeters-Pressure Indicators 20
Instrumentation for physical parameters 20
Instrumentation for sewage and effluent quality 20
Miscellaneous analytical and process instrumentation 20
The electrical transformer and HV switchgear is estimated as 40 years.

Consequently, the Contractor shall consider that the sizing of the transformer shall
be sized for target year 2037 (i.e. Stage 1).
The Contractor shall consider that the sizing of the transformer building, MV Cables,
and MV Switchgear shall be sized for target year 2057 (i.e. Stage 2).
The minimum number of transformers shall be two (2) including the standby capacity
of 100% as stated in this Volume of specification. The transformers shall be designed
to cover the power needs for first stage 2037, as well the HV switchboard. The civil
work of the transformer building, LV switchgear, and generator building shall be
designed to accommodate stage 2 (2057) requirements.
The diesel generator shall be sized for 2037 basic power requirements
All civil engineering structures shall be designed and constructed for at least the
minimum design life with a minimum amount of maintenance. The design and
materials of construction shall take account of the climatic conditions and different
operational environments.
Hydraulic Design Levels
The Employer’s Basic Design is based on a maximum water level at the inlet to
the WWTP based on the maximum water level in the effluent receiving drain.
The Contractor is free to choose the maximum water level to suit the process design,
but should explain in his Technical Proposal the basis for the maximum water level.
The Contractor will be required to finalize the water level at the inlet to the WWTP
(including maximum and minimum water levels) no later than 2 months from the
Commencement Date of the Contract.
The final effluent from AlSids WWTP shall be drained by gravity line to the existing
drain (AlIbrahimyia drain) and the construction of the outfall shall be under the scope
of the contract. The treated water effluent line and the by-pass emergency line shall be
designed for the stage 2 peak flow rate of the WWTP.
The final effluent from Kaf r Dab o os WWTP shall be d i s c h a r g e d t h r o u g h a
force main to the existing drain (Manzel Hayan drain) and the construction of the
outfall shall be under the scope of the contract. The treated water effluent line and the
by-pass emergency line and the pump station shall be designed for the stage 2 peak
flow rate of the WWTP
Ground Levels
In accordance with the planning requirements for the site as shown on the drawings,
the finished ground elevation at AlSids WWTP site shall be in average (+6.00), and
the finished ground elevation at Kafr Daboos WWTP site shall be in average (+8.00).
Suitable landscaping shall be provided between existing and final ground levels.
In no part of the site shall the final ground level be lower than the existing ground level.
Standardization
Whenever possible, the Contractor shall provide equipment of a similar nature
from the same manufacturer, e.g. electric motors. Standardization of types of
equipment shall also be adopted.
The Contractor shall note that particular attention will be paid to these
requirements during bid evaluation. In cases where the proposed equipment is not
standardized with regard to manufacturer and type, the Contractor shall be
required to provide conclusive technical justification; considerations of price alone
will not be accepted. Equipment and components which have not been standardized
will not be approved.
maximum Noise Levels
The WWTPs shall be designed to ensure that:
 The maximum noise level at the site boundary shall not exceed an equivalent
continuous sound level of 60 dB(A) when all equipment installed is being
operated;
 The maximum noise level shall meet the requirement set out of the Egyptian
Standard.
In addition, the noise level at a distance of 1m from each sound-producing item of
mechanical or electrical plant or equipment shall not exceed 80 dB(A) during starting,
running and stopping when all duty plant and equipment is in operation.
Noise levels in other locations shall not exceed the following, all in dB (A):
 offices 45
 laboratory 45
 control room 45
 electrical equipment rooms, workshops 60
The Contractor shall estimate and substantiate by calculation to be submitted at
design submission stage the equivalent noise levels.
The noise levels of the Contractor’s plant and equipment shall meet the
requirements of the Egyptian Standard for the Contractor’s equipment operated on
public roads. The maximum noise level of the Contractor’s operations during
construction shall meet the requirement set out the Egyptian Standard. Equipment,
machinery and tools shall comply with all relevant health and safety regulations and
requirements, and public safety requirements or shall be ordered removed from site.
Vibration monitors on major mechanical plants shall be provided.
wastewater Treatment Facilities Requirements
The following states the minimum requirements and specific requirements for various
parts of each WWTP. The requirements apply to the flows and loads in the period
from year 2020 up to 2037.
Screening
 The type of mechanical screen and bar spacing shall be as specified in
Specification for Mechanical Works.
 All wastewater shall be pumped through the pump-stations to the WWTP.
 A minimum of one manually standby screen, shall be provided to the set of
screens able to accommodate the peak flow of the mechanical screen.
 Screenings from the mechanical screens shall be directly discharged
mechanically to skip containers or bins. A minimum of two skip containers or
bins shall be provided, each with a minimum capacity of 2 m3 or a capacity
equal to the estimated maximum quantity of screenings to be disposed in
one (1) week at the maximum flow.
 Each container or bin shall be covered, complete with devices to facilitate
handling with a lorry mounted lifting device, and drainage. Only one (1)
container or bin shall be used at any time and enough space for the other
container or bin shall be provided.
 The layout of the plant shall allow space for a lorry to collect the skip container
or bins that have been used and to move the skip container or bin that is empty
to the location for use.
Flow Measurement
 Continuous automatic measurement of the total flow to the biological treatment

shall be provided ahead of the biological treatment reactors. Parshall flume is
recommended.
Grit Removal Chamber
 Aerated grit chamber for the removal of grit and oil and grease from the influent
wastewater.
 Vortex grit chamber is acceptable.
Offline / Online equalization tank
 The Contractor shall determine the need for equalization tank as per his chosen
treatment process (Proving documentation shall be submitted ). Offline / Online
equalization tank shall be considered subject to Contractor design. The
Contractor shall indicate within his proposal, supported with calculation, his
methodology to handle the peak flow for four continuous hours and shall
guarantee the treatment results as per the required functional guarantee.
 If the Contractor propose the use of offline equalization tanks, after the grit
removal chamber and during the peak flow period, the difference between the
peak flow and the average flow shall be diverted to the offline equalization tank.
The tank shall be equipped with pumps, submersible mixer to prevent solids
settling and/or aeration facilities to prevent settling and septicity. The estimated
peak duration time is four (4) hours. During the minimum flow rate periods, the
stored wastewater in the off-line equalization tank shall be pumped to the grit
chamber effluent not exceeding the total influent flow rate than the designed
average flow to the biological treatment plant. The equalization tank shall be
provided with overflow connected to the main bypass line in the plant.
Sequential Batch Reactor (S.B.R)
 The design loading rate for the sequential batch reactor shall not exceed the
following:
 Design based on: 0.04-0.15 kg BOD/kg MLVSS.d
 The Contractor’s design shall specifically take into account of the specific local
conditions, including temperature, and the potential additional loading of the
disposal of the extra dumps of septic tanks from trucks into the sewerage system.
Sludge Drying Bed
 In this project the sludge dewatering is only realized at a sludge drying bed.
 The sludge shall be stabilized by adding lime to the raw liquid sludge. The dose
of lime addition shall be as referenced in Metcalf & Eddy 4th Edition, 2003.
 At the sludge drying bed there is a requirement to provide additional sludge
storage space for dewatered/dried sludge. Drying beds shall be designed to
allow sludge to be removed manually.
 A drying-bed consists out of several sludge field lanes for storage and dewatering
of the discharged excess biological sludge from the Sequential Batch Reactor
biological process. The beds shall be designed as separate sections to allow
discharge of sludge while older material is drying.
 The estimated time required to achieve target consistency shall be used to
determine the total area and number of beds required as per the requirement of
the Egyptian Code for the design of wastewater treatment plants.
 The design of the drying beds shall incorporate a method of discharge of sludge
onto the beds and method of removal of the sludge. If sand or pea gravel is
required it shall be specified in terms of nominal diameter, and the annual cost
of replacement of material shall be estimated at design stage.
 If the sludge drying-bed is covered then the height of the roof shall allow for
sludge to be removed manually. Tenderers shall clearly justify the reason for
proposing covered drying sludge fields, compared to drying fields that are not
covered and provide calculations to show the area of drying bed required if
covered and not covered.
Final Effluent Flow Measurement and Sampling
Downstream of the Sequential Batch Reactor
 A facility to allow sampling of the Sequential Batch Reactor shall be provided. In
this project effluent flow & sludge flow shall be measured.
Emergency Power
 Provide a diesel generator which shall start automatically in the event of power
failure at the works and shall be capable of providing 100% of the power demand
on site. The Contractor’s design and operation and maintenance procedures
shall allow for operation of the WWTP when there is pumped flow to the WWTP
and power failures of various durations at the WWTP. The diesel generator shall
be designed on Prime use basis.
Bypass
 A bypass pipe shall be provided. This shall be used in emergency situations,
high levels of wet weather wastewater flows or prolonged power cuts and shall
not be considered for use during normal operations.
 The bypass shall be provided directly before the influent screening. The bypass
shall operate under gravity under all conditions and shall be capable of passing
the peak flow rate of the plant to the effluent outfall structure (or the pump station
as the case may be).
Buildings
 The contractor shall provide the buildings as stated in the architectural and civil
specifications in Part 8 of this volume with the specified area and finishing.
Laboratory
 The laboratory shall have equipment to allow the on-site analysis of all influent
and effluent and sludge quality parameters, together with all equipment which is
necessary to control the treatment process which is selected. The laboratory
shall have necessary fixed furniture and equipment of good industrial quality and
resistance against impact of chemicals and shall be easy to clean and maintain.
The laboratory could be included in the administration buildings. The laboratory
equipment and furniture shall be as specified in the tender documents
Internal Drains
 An internal drainage system within boundary of WWTP should be arranged, The
storm water shall be properly discharged to open green areas within the plant.
The evacuation of the tanks during maintenance shall be pumped to the other
working similar process tank.
 Design of slopes, surfaces and ditches shall be arranged in such way that all
storm-water will be led away from structures.
 All roads shall be paved with minimum width of 6 (six) meters, and shall have
sufficient slope in order to allow for quick runoff of surface water.
 If sloping of surfaces will not be sufficient for the drainage of surface water to the
green areas, then the Contractor shall design and install a drainage system
containing inlets and pipework according to the current standards and subject to
the Project Manager's approval.
 The site shall be designed in such a way as to avoid the occurrence of any
flooding from surface water for a return period of 5 years.
Fire Detection, Alarm and Extinguishing System
 A complete fire detection, alarm and extinguishing system, which complies with
all relevant national, civil defence authority requirements, and local regulations
shall be provided including water fire hydrants.
Water System
 The Contractor shall construct a 100mm diameter HDPE piped water supply
system to supply the WWTP . It shall be the Contractor scope of work to
coonect the potable and fire fighting water network in the plant to the 100mm
HDPE within 1 meter outside the plant fence at the Contractor’s cost.
 The water supply system shall provide a wash-water/fire protection and potable
water system.
 The contractor, subject to the requirement of Civil Defense Authority, may
construct a potable and fire fighting water storage tank and pumping station to
feed the plant with potable and fire fighting water.
Odor (Optional Item)
 The plant shall be designed such to minimize discernible odours from the plant
at any point within 50 meters of the site boundary under prevailing wind
conditions at any time of the year.
 Proposals for containing and treating odours and directing them away from areas
of habitation should be included in the design. However these should not affect
the performance of the plant with regard to treatment of waste water.
 Odor control facilities shall be provided for both AlSids and Kafr Daboos WWTP
Sites.
 Odor control facilities shall be provided for inlet chamber, sludge thickeners, and
mechanical sludge dewatering facilities (as applicable) only. No odor control
facilities is required for sludge drying beds. Only lime addition for the purpose of
sludge stabilization is requested at the drying beds site.
 The odor control system shall be proposed by the contractor and indicated in
the Schedule of price as optional item, and the Employer shall have the right to
request or deletion of this item. The contractor shall have no additional cost or
time if this item was cancelled.
Miscellaneous Specific Requirements
The following details specific requirements which shall be incorporated in the design
and construction of the WWTP.
Maximum Height of Treatment Plant Units
The maximum height of any part of the Permanent Works shall be 8 m above the
finished ground level for the part of the site where the treatment plant unit,
building or any other part of the Permanent Works is located.
Site Entrance
The Contractor shall locate the access to the WWTP along the road side boundary
of the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the pavement of the road from the
main access road to the site gate with a width not less than 6.0 m wide.
A minimum of one access and security post shall be provided. The access shall be a
minimum of 6m wide, lockable gate.
Site Roads and Footpaths
The Contractor shall provide site access roads to give easy access to all operational
areas. The minimum width of the roads shall be 6.0 m and designed for 30 tons
heavy goods vehicles. Hard- standings shall be provided at all the key operational
areas, to facilitate personnel and vehicle access for operational and maintenance
purposes.
All access roads and hard standings shall be designed to prevent standing water and
all necessary drainage shall be provided.
The roadway and clearances between and into buildings shall allow a clear and safe
approach and manoeuvring for all types and size of operational vehicle required
for the operation and maintenance of the Works. Vehicle access provisions shall
be provided at all locations where required as part of the Works to facilitate
personnel and vehicle access for operational and maintenance purposes.
Where appropriate, ramps shall be provided at equipment access doors to enable
a vehicle to be driven into the building. With the exception of access ramps, road
gradients shall not exceed 1:10.
Turning areas shall permit a vehicle to manoeuvre into the final discharge or
pick-up position. Surface markings shall be provided to identify areas allocated as
turning areas and parking/unloading bays.
A minimum of 6 car parking spaces and 2 motorcycle parking spaces shall be
provided. These shall be in close proximity to the administration house. All spaces
shall be covered.
Footpaths shall be provided to all buildings, structures and chambers from roads in
order to access for all operational staff and visitors.
Landscaping
Landscaping within the site and along the site boundary shall be provided to
minimize the visual impact of the plant.
Open areas within the site are to be grassed. Suitable trees and shrubs shall
be planted to minimize the visual impact of the plant to the general public.
The Contractor shall design and construct landscaping works to integrate the Works
into the surrounding environment. Consideration shall be given to the use of
shallow contoured grassy mounds and the provision of trees and shrubs to mitigate
the visual impact of structures.
Site Boundary
The whole length of the site boundary for the WWTP shall be provided with a fence
wall (with the exception of the site entrance). A secure fence wall with a minimum
height of 2.50 m shall be provided at the site boundary.
All fence walls shall be straight apart from where there are changes in direction
in the site boundary.
Warning signs in Arabic shall be provided at suitable intervals along the site
boundary and at gates to warn the public of the dangers of entering the wastewater
treatment plant site.
The above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for site
security under the Contract.
electricity
The Medium Tension power supply to the site shall be secured by the Contractor up
to the main ring unit or the medium tension switch board inside the plant borders, as
detailed hereinunder and as per Clause 1.3. The contractor is responsible for supplying
the medium tension equipment within the plant boundaries such as R.M.Us, MV
Switchboard & power transformers and install these equipment under full supervision
of Electricity Distribution Company. The contractor shall apply for approval of all
medium tension Equipment and transformers from the electricity distribution company
and fulfil any requirement without any additional cost.
The Contractor shall apply, secure, and coordinate the permenant supply of electricity
to the plant, on behalf of the Employer, with the Electricity Distribution Company to
connect with the medium tension network of the city. The cost of this work shall be paid
from a provisional sum allocated on the Schedule of Prices
as-Built Documents
As-built documents shall be prepared and provided by the Contractor in accordance with
the Employer’s Requirements in Volume 1.
operation of The Facilities After Completion
It is envisaged that the Facilities will be manned normally during 7 days per week
and 24 hours per day .The Facilities shall be manned with the minimum personnel
required for the job safety standards.
The design of the Works must be suitable for 24 hours per day continuous
operation and for prolonged periods in the climatic conditions that could occur in
the locality, and ensure that the maintenance requirements of the Plant are
minimal. The Contractor may be required by the Employer to demonstrate this for
any component of the Plant proposed in his design, by service records and other
technical data of such components installed in a similar working environment.
Notwithstanding the requirements of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall
design the Works in accordance with the standards and codes listed in this
Specification and in accordance with this Clause.
In general, the requirements for the design, fabrication, construction, inspection and
testing of the entire Works have been specified to meet the applicable standards and
codes of USA (ASTM), Japan (JIS), Europe (EU), Germany (DIN), the UK (British
Standards), the EC equivalent (EN), or the Egyptian equivalent Standards. However,
the Contractor shall be permitted to use other international standards and codes
provided the product, design and installation meets or exceeds the minimum
specified requirements of the standard and codes of the American or British
Standards or EC standards or the Egyptian standards equivalent.
Notwithstanding the above sub-clause, the design, execution and completion of
the Works shall comply with ASTM or BS or Egyptian Standards in the cases
where they are obligatory and/or more restrictive than the standards and codes listed
in the Technical Specification or proposed by the Contractor.
The names of the manufacturers of Materials and Plant proposed for incorporation
in the Works together with performance characteristics, capacities, certified test
reports and similar information of proposed Plant, shall be furnished at the specified
times or when requested by the Employer. If in the Employer’s judgement, the
provision of such Materials and Plant is unsatisfactory because they are not in
compliance with the standards and codes listed in the Performance Specification,
then the Employer shall have the right to reject such proposed manufacturers.
1.6 pre-Commissioning
Pre-commissioning shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Conditions of
Contract.
1.7 commissioning
Commissioning shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Conditions of
Contract.
1.8 operation and Maintenance of WWTP
The Contractor will be responsible for undertaking the Operation and Maintenance of
the WWTP and providing training to the Employer’s Operation and Maintenance
personnel for a period of 12 months starting from the issuance of the Completion
Certificate in accordance with the Contract Documents as follow
1- The Contractor shall operate and maintain the WWTP by his own experienced
staff for the first 6 months in which he shall train the Employer’s personnel.
2- The trained Employer’s personnel shall operate and maintain the WWTP under
the full and direct supervision of the Contractor’s experienced staff for another 6
months to ensure that the trained Employer’s personnel are fully capable to
operate and maintain the WWTP successfully.
3- All utilities, electrical energy, lubricants, chemicals, catalysts, facilities, and fuel
expenses during the first year of operation and maintenance period shall be borne
by the Employer. The Contractor shall be responsible for securing all other
matters.
4- The Employer shall be responsible for dry sludge, grit, and screenings material
disposal.
1.9 Operational and Maintenance Training and Supervision To The
Employer’s O&M Personnel
The Contractor will be responsible for providing Operation and Maintenance training
and supervision to Employer’s O&M Personnel for a period of 12 months starting from
issuance of Completion Certificate in accordance with the Contract Document.
1.10 Operation and Maintenance Manuals and SOPs
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared and provided by the
Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Technical Specification and
Conditions of Contract. The O&M manuals shall be ready before commissioning of
the Works, and that they should be updated for any changes or rectification made to
the Works during the testing period (on and after completion)
1.11 Spare Parts
All items of the Plant and Works shall be supplied with sufficient initial spares,
spare parts and consumable items to last for a full 2 years from the Completion of
the Works at the rate set out in the manufacturer’s standard maintenance
instructions or as necessary for the proper preventative maintenance of the Plant.
Any spares and consumables which are used during the operation and maintenance
period shall be replaced.
The rates and sums entered in the respective Price Schedules shall be deemed to
include all such “2 year’s spares”.
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule with itemized list in duplicate of all
the spare parts to be supplied. During Commissioning all spare parts shall be
checked against the schedule and against the recommended maintenance
programme. Any shortfall in the provision shall be provided by the Contractor.
All spare parts supplied shall be new, and strictly interchangeable with the parts for
which they are intended to be replacements, and shall be treated and packed for
long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site. Each spare part
shall be clearly marked or labelled on the outside of its packing with its description
and purpose, and when more than one spare is packed in a single case or other
container, a general description of its contents shall be shown on the outside of such
case or container and a detailed list enclosed.
All cases, containers and other packages shall be packed and numbered in an
approved manner for the purposes of identification.
All cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for such
examination as maybe required and packing shall be designed to facilitate opening
and thereafter repacking. The spare parts shall be to the equipment manufacturers
recommendations.
1.12 Tools
The Contractor shall provide for each WWTP lockable metal boxes containing
two sets of polished steel spanners, sockets, wrenches, gauges, screwdrivers,
keys, extension and any other jigs, test rigs, extractors tools, instruments
(voltmeters, ammeters, multi-meters), and other items which may be necessary for
general maintenance, erection, dismantling or testing to be carried out. The tools
shall fit every nut bolt and screw on the Plant including those of holding down bolts
and unions. It is intended that such tools shall not be used for the erection of the
Plant and furthermore the Project Manager may call upon the Contractor to
demonstrate the effectiveness of any special tool. Should the Contractor require
any such tools on site for supervision of the erection, he shall provide his own. Tools
for each different type of equipment shall be contained in a suitable box clearly
marked or labelled with its description (e.g. ‘digital multi-meter’). Each tool shall be
identified and a list of tools shall be affixed to the inside of the box lid. Each set
of tools shall be supplied with the equipment with which it is associated. The
Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule of the tools supplied in accordance
with the requirements of As-Built Documents.
2 DESIGN CRITERIA
2.1 List of Abbreviations
ABR Anaerobic Baffled Reactor

BOD Biological Oxygen Demand
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
DO Dissolved Oxygen
EPA United States Environmental Protection Agency
EWRA Egyptian Water Regulatory Agency
GIS Geographic Information Systems
GPS Global Positioning System
GRC Glass Reinforced Concrete
GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic
HDPE High Density Polyethylene
HH Households
HRT Hydraulic Residence Time
kVA Kilo Volt Amp
kW Kilowatt
LF Load Factor
MBBR Moving Bed Biofilm Reactor
MBR Membrane Bio Reactor
MLSS Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids
MLVSS Mixed Liquor Volatile Suspended Solids
MPN Most Probable Number
NOPWASD National Organization for Potable Water and Sanitary Drainage
O&M Operation and Maintenance
PF Power Factor
PS Pumping Station
SF Safety Factor
SRT Sludge Residence Time
SS Suspended Solids
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
UASB Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket
uPVC Un plasticised Poly Vinyl Chloride
WSC Water and Sanitation Company
XLPE Cross Linked Polyethylene

2.2 Process Design Criteria of Wastewater Treatment PlantsThe

minimum number of any process units shall be TWO (2)
Process Design Criteria
Slow down chamber Design flow = peak flow rate

Retention time = 30 - 90 sec
Horizontal Velocity = 0.6 – 1.2 m/s
Depth of water to be not less than (the force main diameter + max. water
depth in approach channel).
Approach channel Velocity to be 0.4 - 0.6 m/s.

Width = 2 depth for best hydraulic section
Use manning equation to calculate velocity
v= 1/n R2/3 S1/2
Mechanical screen Design flow = peak flow rate

Spacing between bars fine screen = (3-6) mm
Spacing between bars medium screen = (10-20) mm
Spacing between bars for manual screen = (25-50) mm
Angle of inclination = (60 – 80) degrees.
Approach perpendicular velocity is ≥0.6 m/sec
Velocity between bars ≤1.5 m/s
Maximum head loss in screen = (10 – 15) cm for manual screen
Maximum head loss in mecqahnical screen = 15 – 60 cm
Bar width = (1-2) cm
Bar length = (2.5-5) cm
Screenings quantity is assumed as per spacing between bars and as per
the requirements of Egyptian Code.
Screenings shall be disposed outside the plant in an authorized landfill.
Grit Removal Chamber – Horizontal Velocity = 0.25 – 0.4 m/s

Horizontal Flow Type
Retention time= 45 – 90 sec.
Surface Loading Rate = 1450 - 1875 m3/m2.d.
Water depth ≥ 0.60 m
Tank width = (1 to 2) water depth
Tank length = (20 to 30) water depth
Settled grit quantity = (100 – 250) litre/1000 m3 of wastewater/d
Grit Removal Chamber – Retention time = (2 - 5) minutes

Aerated Chamber Type
Surface loading rate is not more than 1000 m3/m2/day.
Water depth = (2 – 5) m
Length = (7.5 – 20) m
Width = 2.50 – 7.0 m
Air flow rate = (0.2 – 0.5) m3/min./m of tank length with an average of
10 m3/hr/m3 of tank volume.

Settled quantity of sand = (100 – 250) l/ 1,000 m3 of flow /day
Vortex grit chamber Retention time at average flow = 20 – 30 sec.

Tank diameter
Upper compartment = (1.2 – 7.2) m
Lower compartment = (0.9 – 1.8) m
Tank depth = (2.7- 4.8) m
Settled quantity of sand = (4 – 200) l/ 1,000 m3 of flow /day
Equalization Tank (If Volume = the volume shall be sized for stage 1 or stage 2 as per the
recommended by the contractor design
contractor )
Retention time = 4 hours for the difference (Qp-Qav)
Air supply = (0.01 – 0.015) m3/m3 of tank volume. min
Mixing requirement = 0.004 - 0.008 Kw/m3 of Tank volume
Primary Sedimentation Retention time (T) = 2.0 – 4.0 hr.

Tanks
Overflow Rate at average flow = 30 – 50 m3/m2.d
Overflow rate at peak flow = 80 – 120 m3/m2.d
Weir loading = 125 – 500 m3/m’/d
For circular Primary Sedimentation tanks

Depth = 3.0 – 5.0 m
Diameter = 30 - 50 m
Bed Slope = 1:6 – 1:16
For Rectangular Primary Sedimentation Tanks

Depth = 3- 5m
Length = (4 – 5) width, 30-50 m
Width = (2-3) depth, (10-20)m
Bed Slope = 1:30 to 1:50
Biological treatment: At least two SBR tanks are needed

Sequencing Batch Reactor No final sedimentation is needed
(SBR)
No sludge recycle is needed
If θc is >20 days, no primary sedimentation tank is needed
SBR tanks are rectangular tanks in which 5 < L < 50m
Typical depth = 3 – 6 m.
Total cycle time = 6.0 – 12 hr
Sludge Volume Index = 150 – 180 mg/ml
MLSS at full volume (3000 - 5000)
F/M = 0.04 – 0.15 kg BOD/kg MLVSS/day
Volumetric loading = 0.1 – 0.3 Kg BOD/m3.d
BOD removal ratio = (90 - 98) %
Sludge age = 10 – 30 days

Buffer Zone (in case of using advanced SBR) = 10 – 20% settling volume
Moving Bed Biological Media Specific Density = 0.92 – 0.96 g/cm3

Reactor (MBBR)
Media surface area: not less than 400 m2/m3 of media bulk volume
Media filling ratio = 30 – 70 % of the tank volume
Size of media = varied between 7-25 mm
Anoxic detention time = 1.0 – 2.0 hr
Aerobic detention time = 3.5 – 4.5 hr
BOD loading = 1.5 – 4.5 kgBOD/m3.d
Mixed liquor suspended solids = 2500 – 6000 mg/l
Secondary clarifier hydraulic application rate = 0.5 – 0.8 m3/m2/hr
Extended Aeration System Sludge age = (20 - 40) d

(Oxidation Ditch)
Hydraulic retention time = 20- 30 hr
Mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) = (3000 – 5000) mg/l
Volatile / total suspended solids = 0.5 – 0.6
F/M ratio = 0.04 – 0.10 kg BOD/Kg SS/d
Return activated sludge /flow (Qr/Q) = 50% – 150%
Volumetric loading rate = 0.1 – 0.3 kg BOD/m3
Contact tank The initial coliform count for Influent wastewater (MPN/100 ml) = 6*108
The required chlorine dosage for effluent standards (1000 MPN/100 ml) =
5-20 mg/l
Effective retention time = (20-40) min.
Tank depth = (2- 4) m
Sludge thickener tank Detention time = (12-48) hour

Water depth (2.5-3.5) m
Rotational Speed of scrapers = 3 m/min at tank perimeter
Bed Slope = 1:6 to 1:4
Dislodging Pipe diameter = min. 200 mm
Surface loading rate
From Primary Sedimentation Tanks = 100 – 150 Kg solids/m2.d
From Final Sedimentation Tanks following Activated Sludge = 20 – 30 Kg
solids/m2.d
From Primary Sedimentation Tanks + from Final Sedimentation tanks
following Activated Sludge = (25-70) Kg/m2/day
Sludge drying beds The stabilized sludge from sludge thickener tanks shall be dried by drying
beds. The dried sludge shall be removed every 4-10 days and the
supernatant water shall be returned to the inlet of the treatment plant.
Sludge layer thickness = 10 – 15 cm
Total Sludge layer thickness = 30 cm
Period of drying before covering with another layer = 4 days
Gravel layer thickness = 0.15 – 0.3 m with an effective size 3-6 mm.
Sand layer thickness 0.15 – 0.3 m with an effective size 0.5 – 0.75 mm.

The under drainage system consists of perforated PVC pipes with diameter
100 – 150mm with interval distance not exceeding 6m.
Hydraulic formula Hydraulic gradients and the design of pipelines, channels and hydraulic
structures shall be based on the following formula
Concrete lined channels:
Manning formula using a roughness factor n - 0.013.
Bypass channel
Sediment transport theory using a sediment content of 200mg/1:
Ks (walls) = 3.0 mm
Ks (base with sediment) = 60 mm
Gravity pipelines:
Colebrook - White formula using the following roughness factors:
Ks - 3.0 mm. (upstream of primary sedimentation tanks).
Ks - 1.5 mm. (general).
Ks - 3.0mm. (Primary sludge draw off return activated sludge).
Ks - 6.0 mm. (thickened sludge).
Pumping mains (Excluding Treated Effluent):
Colebrook - White formula using the roughness factors given in
Table 2-1: Value of roughness coefficient Ks based on pipe material.
Maximum and minimum Sizing and gradients of pipelines and channels shall be selected to provide
fluid velocities the following minimum velocities:
General Pipelines and Channels: 0.60 m/s.
Bypass channel: minimum velocity to ensure transport of sedimentation
subject is 0.60 m/s.
Minimum velocity in the inverted siphons and sanitary sewers: 0.75 m/s
Velocities in any conduit shall not exceed 2.50 m/s
Hydraulic structures Hydraulic design, structures shall be based on the Egyptian code for the
design of water and wastewater network:
Flumes Flumes shall be the long throated type with level insert.
V-Notch weir Weirs shall be designed using the Kindsvater-Shen formula.
Full-width weirs Weirs shall he designed using the Rehbock formula.
Partial width weirs Weirs shall he designed using the Kindsvater -Carter formula.
Drowned Weirs Weirs shall he designed using the Villemonte formula.
Screened weirs Head loss through clean screens shall be calculated using Kirschmers
formula.
Relevant legislation The following Egyptian Laws and Regulations should be complied with
during installation and start-up of the treatment plant:
Law 4/1994 concerning protection of environment.
Law 48 of 1982 for the protection of the Nile river and its waterways from
pollution. Ministry of water resources and irrigation.
Table 2-1: Value of roughness coefficient Ks in pumping mains

Pipe Material Ks (mm)
UPVC 0.003 – 0.03
GRP 0.003 – 0.03
HDPE 0.003 – 0.03
Concrete 0.03 -0.1
Ductile Iron 0.03 – 0.1
Steel 0.03 – 0.1

3 MECHANICAL WORKS
3.1 Principles for Mechanical Design
A The following contents include the principles for design, calculation, selection and
installation of machines and equipment, which shall all be strictly complied with.
B Spare Parts
1. If a component from a certain manufacturer must guarantee uninterrupted
operation in any condition, in this case sufficient spare parts such like motors,
etc. must be provided in the design.
C Ease of Maintenance
1. During the design stage, the Contractor shall pay special attention to ensure
easy maintenance of machines and equipment. This is essential to ensure
the realization of quick, easy inspection, maintenance and repairing.
Besides, from the view of safety, it is essential to provide facilities such as
ladder, handrails and platforms to safely access machines and equipment
for inspection and operation.
2. Lifting facilities shall be provided for the machines over 30 kg. The Contractor
must give thorough considerations to the size and alignment of lifting facilities
and lifting holes.
D Group Operation
1. The design shall allow for separating equipment from related equipment for
maintenance and repairs.
E Installation of Pumps
1. When pumps and similar equipment are installed into the pipeline, valves,
check valves and flushing points shall be provided. Expansion joints shall be
installed on both the suction side and the pressure side.
3.2 Mixture of Standards
A The Contractor should note that the Engineer will not approve of any complete
system incorporating component parts and design standards to different National
Standards unless the entire system has been designed to function as a whole within
the standards and design codes laid down by only one of the approved international
standards
3.3 Design Safety Features
A Plant, as designed and installed, shall have no feature that could be a hazard to
operators, maintenance staff, visitors or other persons having access thereto. Guard
electrical safety devices, thermal insulation, noise suppression devices, written
notices, safety covers, lifebelt and the like shall be provided where needed.
B Adequate safeguards shall be provided to prevent personnel accidentally coming into
contact with dangerous machinery mechanisms, hot surfaces, electrically live parts
and any other hazardous components or contents.
C Emergency stop devices shall be provided and positioned adjacent to all driven plant
which:
1. involves a risk of injury to personnel during normal and maintenance
operations;
2. handles high pressure fluid or dangerous chemicals;

3. is located at a distance of more than five meters from its controller;

4. has no direct, unimpeded access between the controller and the item of
controlled plant, irrespective of distance.
D Secure and substantial guards shall be supplied throughout the installation to cover
drive mechanisms. All rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. shall be
provided with removable shrouds for gaining access to the plant without the need to
first remove or displace any major item of plant; and they should also allow for
adequate ventilation.
E Guards shall not have to be removed during normal operation running maintenance
and routine inspections, and shall be designed to prevent access of fingers to the
moving parts.
F Rubber mats shall be provided by the Contractor in front of all motor control centres,
distribution boards, instruments and battery supply power cabinets
3.4 Labels
A The Contractor shall supply and fit engraved labels on each item of Plant throughout
all installations.
B The labels shall be permanently attached in a conspicuous position and shall detail
the design performance, function manufacturer’s identification and system
identification. In general the function and system identification shall be separately
labelled.
C All indicating and operating devices shall have securely attached to them or marked
upon them designations in English as to their function and proper manner of use.
D Items such as valves shall have direction of rotation for closing and opening
indicated. Only non-flame-propagating materials may be used for place and labels.
E Inscriptions shall be permanently engraved and, in general, a dark inscription on a
light background shall be provided.
F The proposed style, label material, inscription, location and means of fixing shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Embossed materials and techniques will not
be accepted.
G Where withdrawable or detachable equipment is provided, both the fixed and moving
or detachable portions shall be similarly labelled.
H Labels shall be provided to warn of dangerous or potentially dangerous
circumstances or substances.
I Inscriptions on danger labels shall start with the word “DANGER” and be white on a
red background.
J Inscriptions on caution labels shall start with the word “CAUTION”.
K Instruction labels shall be provided where safety procedures are essential to protect
operating and maintenance personnel from hazardous or potentially hazardous
conditions, e.g. advising the isolation or earthling of electrical circuits or the wearing
of protective clothing.
L In addition to the above plant identification labels the Contractor shall ensure each
item of machinery shall have a manufacturer’s identification/rating plate detailing the
following:
1. Manufacturer’s name and address
2. Model/type identification
3. Serial number
4. Year of manufacture
5. Appropriate rating details
6. Motor protection device
7. Other relevant details, limitations, etc.
3.5 Workmanship
A The design, fabricating, installation and other work of all the equipment must be in
line with the latest engineering technology. The element of each part shall be
fabricated according to standard specifications and it shall be possible to replace and
install them on site at any time. The same elements shall be able to replace each
other.
B The materials must be suitable for all operation conditions. The characters of
strength, ductility and durability shall be taken into consideration when choosing
metal materials. The cast iron material shall be of a tenacious compact texture, with
no pores, defects or cracks. The forge pieces bearing stress shall be fine and even;
cast iron, steel and other materials shall all be in accordance with the requirements
in the equipment specifications. All the materials chosen shall be new and unused.
3.6 Safety Guards
A All the conveyor screws, blades, chains, couplings, exposed central axis and other
rotary parts of the equipment shall have protection coverings for safety guard.
B The safety protection shall be standard products of manufacturers or made of
electroplated or compound aluminium steel plate or galvanized metal plates. Each
safe guard facility shall be easily installed and dismantled and shall be attached with
necessary supports and accessories. The safety guard outdoor facility shall prevent
the splashing of rain water.
3.7 Foundation and Bedplate of Equipment
A Unless there are other stipulations, each piece of equipment shall have high-strength
iron or steel structure bedplate, which can be installed on concrete foundation. The
foundation and bedplate shall have support pads and dowels, which shall coordinate
with the alignment of combining bodies or relevant equipment. There shall be enough
space left for grouting and cable pipe lines. All the joints between plates shall be
welded and ground smoothly
3.8 Lubrication
A Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention not
more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall
not require attention during start-up or shutdown, and shall not waste lubricants. The
lubrication system shall be sized to provide full protection of the structures throughout
its designed operating life and environmental conditions.
B Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings
shall be easy accessible from the normal operating area or platform, and shall be
accessible without requiring the removal of guards, handrails, or other safety devices.
Drains shall be located so as to allow for collection of waste oil into containers without
removing the equipment from its normal position.
C Arrangements shall be made to prevent overfilling with lubricant.
D Grease nipples shall be button head (Tat) type of a uniform size throughout the
project.
E Oil sumps, reservoirs, and tanks shall be fitted with fill plugs, drain plugs, and sight
glass level indicators. Dipsticks shall only be used if the provision of a sight glass is
not possible. Sight glasses shall show normal, maximum and minimum oil levels,
shall be enclosed in a protective metal case, and shall be readily dismantled for
cleaning whilst the infrastructure is in service.
F Lubrication systems, reliant upon pumped circulation of the lubricant, and where
failure of the system would result in catastrophic failure of the process system or
equipment, shall incorporate instrumentation to provide an alarm signal in the event
of a blockage, loss of lubricant, or other malfunction.
G Furthermore, a list of recommended lubricants and their equivalents shall be included
in the operation and maintenance instructions. The lubricants recommended shall be
available locally.
H Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be
provided in sufficient quantities to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all
consumption during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of the
equipment by the Project Manager. Sufficient lubricants shall also be supplied for
operation of the equipment during the entire defects liability period. The quantities
shall be based on operating hours of 24 hours per day.
I A separate nipple shall be provided to serve each lubrication point. Where a number
of nipples supply remote lubricating points they shall be grouped together on a
conveniently placed battery plate, with spacing in accordance with the
recommendations of B.S. 1486, Part I, Table 9 and 10.
3.9 Anti-Corrosion of Materials
A The parts of equipment operated under water or in water-gas interface, or those in
direct contact with chemicals etc., shall have anti-corrosion and anti-etching
properties. Should the above parts show signs of corrosion or abrasion during the
Defects Notification Period, the Contractor shall replace these parts with qualified
antirust materials with anti-corrosion properties to meet the requirement of long-term
service.
B All steel parts below wastewater and sludge levels or in wastewater-gas interface
shall be from stainless steel 316.
C When steel or iron is used then a 3 layer galvanised coating is required
3.10 Metals for Mechanical Plant
A Metals used for the construction of mechanical plant shall comply with the relevant
provisions of the standards set out below or equivalent standards.
Cast Iron DIN 1691
Stainless Steel BS EN 10088 : Part 2

 for machining Grade X8CrNiS 18-9
 for lightweight fabrication Grade X2CrNiN 18-10
 for aggressive environments Grade X5CrNiMo 17-12-2
Gunmetal BS EN 1982
Cast Molybdenum Steel BS 3100
Bronze 88:10:2 Mix

B Castings shall have a homogeneous structure and shall be free from defects, non-
metallic inclusions or blowholes. All non-machined surfaces shall be carefully fettled
and all foundry irregularities removed. Minor defects of a depth not exceeding 10%
of the total metal thickness and that will not affect the strength or serviceability of the
casting may be repaired using approved techniques. Larger defects must be reported
to the Project Manager and no repair made without approval.
C All major stress bearing forgings shall be examined, including internally wherever
possible, and be non-destructively tested for the detection of flaws. They shall be
heat treated for the relief of residual stresses.
D Dissimilar metals shall generally be isolated from each other. Where contact is
unavoidable the metals shall be selected such that any galvanic corrosion shall not
compromise the specified Asset Design Life.
3.11 Machinery
A Where practicable, machine assemblies shall be mounted on a common bedplate or
base frame complete with drive motor, gearbox, etc., and be arranged for direct drive
by use of flexible couplings. Where the design of the bedplate is such that pockets of
air would be trapped during grouting, air vent holes shall be provided to allow air to
escape.
B Where separate components or items of interconnected plant depend on correct
alignment for satisfactory operation each item shall be positively located by machined
spigot or by dowels or pins after alignment.
C Unless stated otherwise, bearings shall be selected and rated with an L10 (h)
operating life not less than 100,000 hours at design duty conditions. Bearing
assemblies shall be sealed-for-life to IP 55 W minimum. Oil-bath lubricated bearings
shall be fitted with a pressure venting device, oil fill and drain tapings, and an oil-level
sight glass.
D Couplings shall be selected to enable separation of the driver and driven components
without the need to disturb the “other” component. Split-type couplings shall be
supplied as a matched pair and shall be marked accordingly. Couplings shall be
manufactured from forgings, and shall be secured to their shafts by key and keyway.
Spacer-type couplings shall be used where this would facilitate maintenance of either
the driver or driven machine in-situ.
E Belt drives shall be designed such that not more than 20% of the speed reduction is
achieved by pulley ratios. All belt drives shall include a means of adjusting the tension
of the belt(s). All multiple belt drives shall be provided with matched sets of belts.
3.12 Setting of Machinery
A All machinery shall be set in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
B Machinery shall be set on flat steel packing pieces selected to take up any variations
in the level of its foundation. The foundation shall be prepared to provide suitable
bedding for the packing pieces and one packing piece only shall be used at each
holding down bolt location.
C Machinery may be located on reinforced concrete plinths or foundation slabs: in these
cases the Contractor shall include for diamond drilling of holes for the holding-down
bolts as necessary.
D Final levelling shall be achieved using stainless steel or brass shims tailored to fit the
contact area. Shim thickness shall not exceed 3 mm, and no more than 3 shims shall
be used at each location.
E Machinery shall be aligned, levelled, and pulled down by tightening the nuts of the
holding down bolts using a spanner of normal length. Grouting of holding down bolts,
where applicable, shall be carried out before the machinery is run. Final grouting in
of the machinery shall only be carried out after initial testing is complete and the
Project Manager’s approval given.
3.13 Machinery Finish
A All covers, flanges and joints shall be clean, properly faced, bored, fitted, hollowed,
moulded or chamfered as the case may be according to the best approved practice
and all working Plant and other apparatus shall in like manner be well and accurately
fitted, finished, fixed and adjusted.
3.14 Protective Coating
A The preparation, protective coatings and painting of the machinery shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the belonging specification or otherwise agreed
upon between the supplier or subcontractor and the engineer.
3.15 Hydraulic System Design
A Pipe work shall be designed using a roughness factor, ‘k’, appropriate for the pipe
material in good, average, and poor condition. The reference from which the ‘k’
values are taken shall be stated in the calculations submitted. Hydraulic calculations
shall be carried out using the Prandl-Colebrook Formula (Colebrook-White) unless
otherwise agreed with the Project Manager.
B In the design of pumping systems, the pump set manufacturer / supplier shall be
consulted to ensure that the generated head for the pump set is matched to the pipe
work / system configuration.
C Pumping systems shall be designed to be self-priming.
D Pumping stations pipe work systems shall, unless stated otherwise, be designed for
flow velocities generally as indicated in the following table:
Velocities within Inlet Pipe Work [m/s] Velocities within Delivery Pipe Work [m/s]
Average Minimum Maximum Average Minimum Maximum
1.3 1.2 1.5 2.0 1.2 2.4
E Surge pressures shall be taken into account in the design of pressure pipe work.
Pressure pipe work shall normally be designed to remain full while in service, inflow
check valves shall be fitted where appropriate.
F Air valves or air vents, appropriate to the fluid in the pipeline and of adequate airflow
capacity, are required at high points.
G Drain points shall be provided to allow the pipeline to be substantially emptied to
appropriate discharge points.
3.16 Steelwork
A Steel work shall be supplied and fixed as specified in the particular specification and
as follows:
1. Chequer plate cover and support frames shall be provided at ground level
above each pump. If applicable, a motor support frame shall be incorporated in
the design. Openings in the floor beams shall be large enough to pass the
pump. The Contractor shall provide and fix a steel framework to surround the
openings in the floor, together with the necessary steel cross beams to support
the motor and shafting. The underside of the frame shall rest evenly on and be
securely fixed to the structural floor beams, and shall be flush with the finished
floor level.
2. Chequer plate cover and support frames covering machinery access openings,
and valve chambers containing valves within the limits of pipe work supplied
under this contract.
3. Drainage channel frames and grating in pump chambers.
4. Steps, platforms, ladders, and hand railing to give access to items of system in
the plant units.
5. Support steelwork for intermediate shaft bearings. The supply of steelwork,
hand railing, flooring, and access ladders shall be in accordance with the
particular specification.
3.17 Steel Constructions
A Steel constructions shall be designed to resist all the static and dynamic forces to
which they may be exposed. The Contractor must specify in his offer, all materials to
be used.
B Where risk of galvanic corrosion exists, galvanic separation is required.
C Structural steelwork shall be designed to BS 449: Part 2 or BS 5950 and shall comply
with the relevant provisions of the standard, as set out below (or equivalent):
Type BS
Structural steel sections 4: Part 1
Cold rolled steel sections 2994
Weldable structural steels EN 10025
Hot-rolled structural steel angles EN 10056-1
Hot-rolled structural hollow sections EN 10210: Part 2
Steel tubes for general purposes 6323: Parts 2 - 7
D Structural steel shall have a materials certificate in accordance with DIN 50049-3.1B
Wrought Steel
A Whenever left unspecified, wrought steel parts shall be selected from appropriate
grade of BS 970 and be free from all blemishes.
B The steel must be suitable for hot-dip galvanizing.
Cast Iron
A All grey iron castings supplied shall conform to the appropriate grade in DIN EN 1561.
All castings are to be free from blowholes, flaws and cracks. No plugging, filling,
welding or "burning-on" will be accepted.
Stainless Steel
A Stainless steel shall, at a minimum, be provided in accordance with grade 316 to BS
970 (equivalent to AISI 316, W1.4404, and W1.4435) if not otherwise specified.
B Material thickness of stainless steel shall be at least 3 mm when not otherwise stated.
Welded tubes shall have a wall thickness of at least 2 mm.
C Material certificates are required for all stainless steel work pieces to be incorporated
in the works. Certificates shall comply with DIN 50049-3.1B. Certificates shall be part
of the QA documentation.
D All stainless steel material (pipes, flanges etc.), shall be stamped according to their
type, grade, and pressure class. In addition all stainless steel shall be accompanied
by an authentic manufacturer’s certificate to enable verification of origin and date of
manufacture.
Aluminium and Aluminium Alloys
A Due to the corrosive atmosphere, the use of aluminium or aluminium alloy requires
the approval of the Project Manager in all cases.
B Immersed installations, or installations which are periodically immersed, must not be
constructed from aluminium or aluminium alloys.
C If alloys are used, they shall be of a type used for marine applications with magnesium
as the main additive.
D Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with the relevant provisions of
the Standard, as set out below (or equivalent). Maximum deflection of aluminium
structural sections shall be span/200:
Type Standard
Sections for structural purposes BS 1161
Plate, sheet and strip EN 485 and EN 573
Drawn tube EN 515, EN 573-3,4, EN 754-1, 2, 7 & 8
Bars, extruded round tubes and sections 1474 or EN 755: Parts 3 - 6
Ingots and castings EN 1559-1/EN1559-4, EN1676 & EN1706
3.18 Welding
Welding In General
A Before welding, all steel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, and no welded joints
shall have less strength than the joined parts.
B All welding work shall be carried out at the manufacturer's workshop. Field welding
will be allowed only with the prior approval of the Project Manager.
C Where required a non-destructive test (NDT) of the welding work shall be performed
in accordance with a recognised and appropriate standard.
D Ten percent of the welds shall be tested. The following methods can be applied:
1. Radiographic
2. Ultrasonic
3. Penetration.
E Radiographies shall be given first priority when choosing NDT methods. If it is
impossible, the two other methods can be considered.
F The test shall be carried out by an accredited independent agency. The acceptance
criterion shall be class C in accordance with ISO 5817:2003. A report on the tests
shall be provided.
G Welds to be tested shall mainly be selected from those of which the reverse side of
the weld cannot be visually inspected. Such welds shall be tested by the radiographic
or the ultrasonic method.
H If the NDT reveal defects, the number of tests shall be increased. The consequence
of one defective weld is that two neighbouring welds of the same type shall be tested.
If one or both of these welds are defective, the testing shall extend further.
Welding of Carbon Steel
A Manual shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, flux cored arc, gas
tungsten arc, and other applicable welding processes and methods may be used.
B Prefabrication in workshops shall be used to the maximum extent possible.
C For the welding of carbon steel, the appropriate sections of AISI code B 31.1 and API
Std. 5L recommended practices shall apply.
Welding of Stainless Steel
A For welding of stainless steel the AWS D10.4-79 shall apply.
B The welding method for workshop as well as on-site welding shall be the tungsten
inert gas method (TIG) or the metal inert gas method (MIG). Irrespective of the
method chosen, the inner surface of the weld shall be protected by clean inert gas.
When welding, the oxygen content of the mixture oxygen/inert gas must not exceed
20 ppm.
C In order to guarantee high quality welded joints, piping and other quality stainless
steel components shall, as far as possible, be prefabricated in the workshops.
D For stainless steel welding the following shall be observed:
1. Only butt weld jointing of pipes is allowed during erection work,
2. Where butt welds are used, the penetration shall be completed, if necessary,
with root run,
3. Backing rings shall not be used,
4. No surface defects reducing the corrosion resistance, or discoloration of the
surface will be accepted,
5. After welding the weld shall be carefully pickled and passivated, and
6. The welds shall be thoroughly washed in clean water after pickling and
passivation.
3.19 Bolts
A All nuts and bolts shall be threaded in accordance with BS 3643 “isometric series
thread” part 2 “limits and tolerances for coarse pitch threads” and fitted with 3 mm
thick washers beneath bolt and nut.
B All bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates, except high tensile, for all ferrous parts
shall be steel galvanized to BS 729, and primed and painted after assembly and
tightening in accordance with this Specification.
C All bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for fastening galvanized components or
aluminium alloy components shall be of stainless steel BS EN 1088, and shall remain
unpainted. PTFE washers shall be fitted beneath stainless steel washers for both bolt
head and nut.
D All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for use
externally, or in internal areas which are subject to contact with sewage or effluent,
or in ‘wet’ areas but above the top water level, shall be stainless steel Grade 316/816
to BS 970.
E All holding down and anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and anchor plates for use internally
in areas not subject to contact with sewage or effluent shall be steel galvanized to
BS 729:1971, and all exposed surfaces shall be painted after assembly and
tightening.
F Drilled anchor fixings for use on concrete structures shall be of a type approved by
the Project Manager. The positions of all drilled anchors shall be approved by the
Project Manager, and any contractor proposing to use such fixings shall be deemed
to have undertaken to supply, mark off, and fit the fixings.
G All exposed bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal. The length of all bolts shall be
such that, when fitted with a nut and tightened down, the threaded portion shall fit the
nut and not protrude from the face by more than a half diameter.
3.20 De-Rating Due To Climate Conditions
A All equipment shall be de-rated for continuous operation in accordance with an
ambient temperature of 45oC and in accordance with BS 7671 Part 2, Section 522-
01, 522-02, 522-11, Table 4C1 and 4C2.
B All materials and equipment which are subject to certification by testing authorities
shall be certified as being tested at an ambient temperature of 45oC.
3.21 Equipment Bases and Bedplates
A Equipment assemblies shall be mounted on a single heavy cast iron or welded steel
bedplate unless otherwise specified.
B Bases and bedplates shall be provided with machined support pads, tapered dowels
for alignment or mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting,
and openings for electrical conduits. Seams and contact edges between steel plates
and shapes shall be continuously welded, and welds ground smooth.
C Jacking screws shall be provided in equipment bases and bedplates to aid in levelling
prior to grouting. Plates of minimum thickness of 6 mm shall be provided.
3.22 Pipe Work
A The Contractor shall include for all pipework, valves and fittings to complete the
installation in every part and detail.
B All pipes and assembly parts under this Contract shall be of best quality, truly circular,
and of uniform thickness, free from scale, lamination, and other defects, and shall be
designed and suitable for sewage and sludge flows and their operational pressures
and temperatures.
C Pipes shall be suitable for immersion in corrosive conditions according to Soil
Investigation Report.
D Pipe work shall be designed with independent supports and restraints to
accommodate loads and thrust so as not to superimpose stresses onto machinery or
plant items. Pumps, valves, meters, strainers, and other such in-line equipment shall
be supported independently of the pipe work.
E Flexible pipe couplings, flange adaptors, or flanged fittings shall be incorporated into
the pipe work as appropriate to facilitate removal of plant items for maintenance,
without the need to dismantle or disturb adjacent pipe work / manifolds, and to allow
for final closure of pipe work joints without superimposing stresses onto plant items.
F Where pipe work passes through a wall, flanged joints shall be provided either side
of the wall.
G Where flange adaptors are used they shall be tied to the nearest flange, restraining
structure, thrust block or wall.
H Long radius bends shall be used on pipe work where space permits.
I The pipe work design shall include compensation for any thermal or other differential
expansion or settlement between structures by the incorporation of bellows, rocker
pipes, or similar approved devices.
J All pipes and fittings shall be lined and coated according to Ministerial Decree No.
164 issued in 2015 and all its related documents.
Ductile Iron Pipes and Fittings
A Ductile iron pipes, fittings and joints shall be GGG 50 and comply with BS EN 598,
ISO 2531 and ISO 4179 or equivalent.
B Class shall be K9 for spigot and socket pipes, K12 for fittings and flanged pipes, and
K14 for tees.
C Unless otherwise specified, all flanges shall conform to BS EN 1092 with PN 10.
D Pipes shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of what is
recommended by the manufacturer of the coupling.
Steel Pipe Work
A Steel pipe work below or equal to DN250 shall be of hot finished seamless steel type
according to DIN 2448 / DIN 1629 sheet 3 or equivalent, and all pipe assemblies shall
be made up from piping to this specification.
B Steel pipe work above DN250 shall be of the welded steel tubing type in accordance
with DIN 2458 / DIN 1626 sheet 3 or equivalent and all assemblies shall be made up
from piping to this specification.
C The individual sections of pipe work shall be prefabricated in required lengths.
Connections shall be pre-welded according to DIN 2632 / 2633 or equivalent unless
required with special connections.
D Connections to be jointed at site shall be made by pre-welded flanges, unless
otherwise required.
E The pipe thickness shall be suitable to comply with the required normal working
pressure.
F Steel pipes and fittings of either seamless or welded construction shall be of
Schedules 40 unless otherwise specified.
3.22.2.1 Pipe Jointing
A Pipe jointing surfaces and components shall be kept clean and free from extraneous
matter until the joints have been made or assembled.
B Where pipes with flexible joints are required to be laid to curves, the deflection at any
joint as laid shall not exceed three-quarters of the maximum deflection recommended
by the manufacturer.
Upvc Pipe
A UPVC pipes and fittings for sewers shall conform to BS 5481 and BS 4660.
B UPVC pipes and fittings shall be capable of withstanding ultraviolet degradation and
shall incorporate a rodent inhibitor.
C UPVC pipes 200 mm in diameter may be supplied in lengths up to 4 m. uPVC pipes

150 mm in diameter and less shall be supplied 50 percent in lengths not exceeding
2 m and 50 percent in lengths not exceeding 4 m.
D Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted for sewerage pipelines and all jointing
shall be by socket and spigots with sealing rings which shall conform to BS 2494.
Stainless Steel Pipes and Fittings
A ll stainless steel for pipes, tubes and fittings shall conform to ASTM A778, ASTM
A240, ASTM A167 and ASTM A276; diameters and wall thickness to ANSI B36.19.
B Stainless steel fittings and specials shall be compression type conforming to ASTM
A774.
C Plate shall conform to ASTM A240; diameters, wall thickness and dimensions to
ANSI B36.19, ANSI B16.9 and ASTM A234.
D Unless otherwise designated, pipe shall be of Schedule 40 seamless stainless steel
and shall conform to material specifications ASTM A312 and dimensional
specifications ANSI B36.19. Fittings shall conform to material specification ASTM
A182 and ASTM A403 and dimensional requirements of ANSI B16.11, ANSI B16.9
and ANSI B16.28.
E Flanges shall be ANSI slip-on or welding neck type, with 150 pounds rating
conforming to material
F Stainless steel shall be isolated from galvanized steel and aluminium by bituminous
paint, plastic sleeves, PVC pads or rubber gaskets or as directed by the Project
Manager to prevent galvanic action or chemical corrosion.
G All stainless steels are to be suitably cleaned with approved pickling solution or paste
and treated with approved passivating fluid according to ASTM A380 procedures
before installation.
H Electrodes and techniques as per AWS 5.0 series specifications shall be used for
welding stainless steel or as approved by the Project Manager.
Sealing of Ducts
A Ducts for cables and small pipes shall be sealed against the ingress of moisture and
vermin once the cable or pipe installation is complete. Ducts shall be sealed to
prevent the ingress of gas where one side of the duct is located in a zoned hazardous
area, or where a dangerous gas could be present.
B Ducts must be sealed in such a way as to make it possible to break out the seal in
the future without damaging the services within.
Pressure Pipes
A Pipe work material shall be appropriate for the media being carried.
B The Contractor shall advise the Project Manager at least five working days prior to
the pressure tests, and shall provide and mount all necessary equipment for the
pressure tests.
C Pressure tests made against closed valves shall follow the guidelines from the valve
manufacturer regarding the highest single side pressure allowed.
D Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by the use of potable water.
E uring pressure tests a minimum of 1.5 times maximum allowed operating pressure
shall be maintained for one hour.
F After the pressure tests have been finalised the Contractor shall produce a report, a
copy of which shall be submitted to the Project Manager. The report shall as a
minimum include:
1. Pressure Test Procedure;
2. Unambiguous references to piping or part of piping and shut-off;
3. Specification of test pressure;
4. The period of the pressure tests;
5. Results and signature of acceptance;
6. A description of any failures, their causes, and proposed corrective action.
Flanges and Gaskets
A ll flanges must be drilled according to DIN 2501 and DIN 2630.
B Gaskets for flanged pipe joints shall be of the inside-bolt-circle type. The dimensions
of gaskets shall comply with DIN EN 1514-1. Gaskets shall be manufactured from
material complying with the provisions of DIN EN 681-1 Type WA rings.
C Flanges for stainless steel pipes shall be of the weld-on type in stainless steel of
similar quality as the piping. Alternatively, welding neck rings and loose flanges of
stainless steel may be used.
Pipe Work Supports
A Pipe work shall be supported in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, or
in accordance with BS 3974, parts 1, 2 or 3 as appropriate.
B Pipe support brackets and clips shall generally be manufactured in mild steel,
galvanised after fabrication. Plastic clips / brackets are acceptable for the support of
thermoplastic pipe work. Steel brackets in contact with thermoplastic pipe work shall
be free from sharp edges.
C Each pipe support shall cradle the pipe over at least 180 degrees.
Pipe Work Identification
A The Contractor shall include for painting identification markings on all pipe work in
the buildings at 3 metre intervals, and where pipes cross through walls or floors, and
enter or leave the building or storage container. Adjacent to each such point shall be
placed in a conspicuous position an identification schedule. The identification
markings shall consist of single or multiple coloured rings painted around the pipes.
All identification markings shall conform to the recommendations of DIN 2403 where
applicable.
3.23 Stairs, Walkways, Platforms and Handrails
A All open sides of stairs, landings, walkways, and platforms shall be guarded with
handrails. Handrails shall include top handrail, intermediate rail, stanchions, and toe
kick plates. Untensioned chains, ropes, or other non-rigid materials shall not be used
as protective barriers. Self-closing gates shall be provided at access openings in
handrails.
B Ladders and step irons will only be permitted in locations of occasional access, such
as roof access. In all other locations, stairs shall be provided, with a minimum
220 mm tread and maximum 175 mm riser.
C The height of the handrails shall be 1,100 mm, with an intermediate rail at a height of
550 mm. Handrail height shall be measured vertically from finish floor level to the
handrail centreline. The height of toe plates shall be 150 mm. Toe plates shall be
fixed securely to the stanchions.
D Sloping handrails shall be as specified for horizontal handrails, but with top rail
900 mm vertically above the line of pitch, and stanchions vertical and spaced at not
more than 1,500 mm measured parallel to the line of pitch.
E All mounting flanges shall be of substantial construction, with horizontal flanges
drilled for not less than three bolts, with two bolts on a line parallel to and on the
walkway side of the line of handrails. Vertical flanges shall be drilled for not less than
two bolts, the lines through the bolts being vertical. Fittings shall be screwed or
secured by means of grub screws.
F Handrails shall be able to withstand a vertical force of 0.8 kN/m on the top rail. The
deflection of the rails shall not exceed 0.8% of the span between stanchions, and the
deflection of stanchions shall not exceed 0.8% of their height.
G Handrail and stanchions shall be manufactured from either mild steel galvanised after
manufacture, aluminium, or stainless steel tube, with bore not less than 32 mm. Toe
plates shall be of 5 mm thick stainless steel plate. Distance between stanchions shall
not exceed 1,500 mm.
H Handrails, stanchions, and toe plates shall include all necessary joints to facilitate
easy installation, and to provide a smooth and neat appearance. The Contractor shall
ensure that, unless specified to the contrary, all handrails shall be prefabricated and
of uniform appearance and manufacture.
I The Contractor shall submit working drawings of the handrails to the Project Manager
for approval.
Access Ladders
A Ladders shall be fabricated from mild steel, and hot dip galvanised after fabrication.
The stringers shall be flat section not less than 65 mm x 13 mm spaced 380 mm
apart, and shall be flanged and drilled for wall fixing at both ends. The distance
between stringers shall be widened over the top, where they shall be not less than
600 mm apart. Ladders over 3,000 mm long shall have additional intermediate stays
at not more than 2,500 mm centres.
B Rungs shall be 25 mm diameter solids, at 300 mm centres welded to the stringers.
Rungs shall be not less than 225 mm from the wall.
C All ladders shall have safety cages, which shall be constructed of three flat vertical
strips supported by flat hoops, with a diameter of 750 mm. The hoops shall be
approximately 700 mm centres, and the first hoop shall be 2,400 mm above ground
or platform level.
D Where the rise exceeds 6,000 mm an intermediate landing shall be provided.
Open Mesh and Chequer Plate Flooring
A Open mesh flooring and gratings shall generally comply with BS 4592, except where
otherwise specified hereinafter. Such flooring and gratings shall be of rectangular
mesh and non-slip, and shall be mild steel and hot dip galvanised after manufacture.
All locations adjacent to sludge, wastewater, or wastewater vapor must have open
mesh and chequer plate flooring manufactured from stainless steel or glass fibre
reinforced polyester.
B Both the load bearing and transverse bars in rectangular open mesh flooring panels
shall be positioned symmetrically around the centre lines of the panels in both
directions so that, when the panels are fixed in extensive areas or in long runs, the
bars of all panels are in line.
C Chequer plate flooring shall be of the non-slip type, not less than 6 mm thick
measured excluding the raised pattern. The flooring shall be secured to its frame by
stainless steel countersunk screws.
D Chequer plate flooring shall be designed to carry a uniformly distributed load of
5 kN/m². The deflection shall not exceed 0.2% (percent) of the span.
E All flooring shall be removable and set flush in frames of similar material. Where
frames are to be fixed over openings the frames shall be provided with lugs for
building in.
F Flooring shall be provided in sizes suitable for lifting and removal by one man, and
with the appropriate cut-outs to permit its removal without disturbing or dismantling
spindles, supporting brackets, cables, or pipe-work.
Hatches
A Hatches shall consist of a frame with a hinged cover. The frame shall be designed
for mounting in recesses in the concrete slab. Hatches on dry wells shall be
watertight.
B A handle for opening of the hinged cover shall be integrated in the cover. The cover
shall be provided with a safety mechanism, which locks the cover in the open position
whenever opened. The mechanism shall be manually released before the hatch can
be closed again.
C The hatches shall be designed to withstand a load of minimum 15 kN.
D Hatches shall be prefabricated and shall be from a recognised manufacturer
specialised in their manufacture.
E Heavy hatches shall be provided with spring-loaded mechanisms or similar facilities
which reduce the force required for safe opening and closing of the hatch.
F The hatches shall be made of mild steel, and hot dip galvanised after fabrication.
Alternatively hatches may be made of stainless steel.
3.24 General Equipment
Fire Extinguisher
A A light alloy CO2 fire extinguisher (for dealing with electrical fires) and chemical
powder fire extinguisher (for dealing with general purpose fires) of not less than
6.0 kg capacity shall be supplied, fitted with a squeeze grip, valve and swivel horn,
for each building.
B The jet length shall not be less than 2 meters and the extinguisher shall be suitable
for operation in an ambient temperature of 45ºC and be subject to a test pressure of
not less than 87 kg/cm2.
C The base of each extinguisher shall be flat to enable the unit to be rested on the floor.
D Each extinguisher shall be complete with a wall mounted bracket and a sign in
English giving operating instructions which shall be fixed in positions designated by
the Project Manager.
First Aid Cabinet
A A first aid cabinet shall be supplied and installed in the office/control room. The first
aid outfit shall be housed in a strongly made, wall fixing, wooden cabinet and the
contents shall be according to International safety standards.
Lifting Equipment
A Lifting equipment is installed above the equipment below the ceiling, above pumps &
air blowers units for examples. The Contractor shall confirm the suitability of the
equipment.
B The hoist shall be rated for the heaviest single lift under erection or maintenance
operations, including provision for "break out" loads.
C The Contractor shall include for testing and certification of the equipment and
associated equipment unless otherwise stated.
D Each end carriage shall be driven by independent but concurrently run drive motor
through necessary reduction gears.
E The motor enclosures shall afford protection to IP 55 standard. 380 volts, 50 hz. Each
drive motor shall be fitted with an automatic electro-magnetic brake to prevent over
travel of the crane on interruption of the power supply whether intentional, accidental
or due to power failure.
F All crane and hoist functions shall be controlled from a single non-metallic pendant
unit. The pendant unit shall be suspended from a special track spanning the bridge
length using a non-metallic cord and not the control cable. The pendant shall operate
from a low voltage source, incorporating a key operator switch to prevent
unauthorized operation and indicators to indicate all crane and hoist movements.
G Buttons shall be of the hold-on-to-operate type. The pendant enclosure shall have
protection to IP 67 standard. Operation of the crane shall be possible from any
position across the full span. The pendant legends shall be inscribed in Arabic and
English. Three sets of red "conductor alive" warning lamps shall be provided and
fixed to the wall at girder level.
H Crane hoist shall be designed for 25% overload and chain shall be tested for 75%
overload.
I For wet or dry installation submersible pumps, monorail crane shall be used.
Otherwise, overhead double girder crane type shall be used.
J Jib crane with suitable capacity shall be used to serve the screens in case of
maintenance.
K The crane shall be electrically operated with dual speed on each motion with stepless
electronic speed control and fitted with main and auxiliary hoists.
L The overhead crane shall be electrically operated in all six (6) directions, and
monorail crane shall be electrically operated in all four (4) directions.
M The contractor shall be responsible to select the propoer type of lifting equipment (jib
crane, monorail crane, or overhead crane) so that the crane shall cover the whole
area of equipment and handle any equpmant or part of it without disturbing the
operation of the remaining equipment in the building. However, he operation type of
the lifting equipment shall be
Location Operation
Crane for return and excess sludge pumping station Manual
Crane for thickened sludge pumping station Manual
Crane for supernatant pumping station Manual
Crane for workshop (if required) Manual
Crane for generator building Manual
Crane for chlorination building Electrical & Manual
Crane for Air blower building Manual
Crane for Mechanical Dewatering Building Electrical & Manual
Ventilation
A The Contractor shall verify the suitability of the ventilation system with the equipment
to be provided in operation.
B In compliance with safety requirements, ventilation shall be provided were necessary
to dissipate heat and to alleviate odour problems, particularly in hazardous areas.
Pumping stations, blower rooms, electrical building, generator buildings and any
hazardous zones shall have forced inlet and extract systems installed. The minimum
ventilation rates (air changes/hour) for all plant buildings shall be according to the
Egyptian code.
C General
1. Ventilating fans shall be of the type and arrangement shall be according to the
building/mechanical installation and as specified herein after. All fans shall be
rated and constructed in accordance with VDE/DIN. Fans shall be furnished
completely with motor, drive equipment, vibration isolators, supports,
appurtenances, and disconnect switches.
2. Direct driven fans shall have the fan wheel mounted on an extension of the
motor shaft. The motor shall be mounted in a rigid streamlined frame designed
to provide vibration isolation for the motor and so that the wiring can be run to
the motor unexposed.
D Axial Wall Mounted Fans
1. Axial wall mounted type shall be equipped with backward inclined aluminium
blades, direct driven by an electric motor, stationary discharge.
E Centrifugal Fans
1. Centrifugal fans shall be an in-line centrifugal tubular fan with backward inclined
aluminium blades, direct driven by an electric motor, stationary discharge,
conversion vanes. Inlet and outlet connections for the fan casings to duct-work
and equipment casings shall be of the flanged type. Inlets shall be stream-lined
and conversion vanes shall eliminate turbulence and provide smooth discharge
air flow. Air ducts shall be made of galvanized steel extending down till one
meter higher than the floor of equipment room.
2. Fan bearings and drive shafts shall be enclosed and isolated from the air
stream. Motor bearings shall be mechanically sealed against dust and dirt and
shall be permanently grease-lubricated ball type.
3. The speed shall be 1500 rpm as maximum.
4. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled with class B insulation, and rated
for an ambient operating temperature of 45 C, shall have degree of protection

IP44.
5. All fans shall have vibration and sound-absorbing mountings.
6. All motors shall be 3 Ph., 380 volt, 50 cps.
7. Fan wheel and casing inside and outside for the supply and exhaust.
8. Fans for shall be given an acid-resistant coating of easiness, latchet, here site
or acceptable equivalent corrosion-resistant coating.
9. All fans shall be supplied with thermostatic control of heavy duty type.
F Ventilation systems for buildings with internal heat gain shall, unless otherwise
specified, be designed to ensure that the maximum internal ambient temperature
does not exceed 5°C above external ambient temperatures.
G Whenever forced ventilation is required, the noise level shall be minimised and not
exceed the levels described in this Specification.
H All intakes and exhausts louvers shall be fitted with vermin screens, and covered for
all weathers.
I All confined spaces where sewage or other gases may accumulate, and where
frequent access will be required for operation and maintenance, such as pump wells,
shall be provided with forced ventilation that delivers fresh air to the lowest access
areas in the confined space.
Standard Gearboxes
A Standard enclosed gear-boxes for machines shall be obtained from an approved
manufacturer where necessary. The gear-box shall be designed to operate with the
output shaft oriented at the required angle of inclination without lubricant leakage.
The input shaft shall be horizontal where possible and appropriate.
B All gear-boxes shall be suitable for outdoor installation and shall be derated
considering continuous operation and heavy shock loads. Service factor shall not be
less than 2. The thermal power rating of the gear reducer shall exceed the motor
power after derating for 50°C ambient temperature. The gear-box selection shall be
checked for momentary overloads, and overhung radial and thrust loads.
C Gear-box housing shall be of rigid high-strength close grained cast iron with
provisions for:
1. proper closing inspection cover;
2. ventilation opening;
3. oil level gauge;
4. gauge window protection.
D The ingress of moisture into the gear-box shall be prevented and splash and leakage
water etc. must be able to drain off easily.
E The transmission of power shall be achieved by means of precision gears. Helical
gears shall be used.
F Cylindrical gears having helical or herringbone teeth shall be precision ground for
close tolerance operation.
G All gears shall be amply designed, both regarding surface durability and strength,
guaranteeing a life span of at least 100,000 hours running.
H The gear-box shafts shall be solid forgings of the parallel type, precision ground and
made from heat-treated hardened and tempered chrome-molybdenum alloy steel.
Gear-box shafts shall be mounted on tapered roller bearings or double row self-
aligning spherical roller bearings (or as recommended by the gear-box manufacturer)
capable of handling radial and thrust loads simultaneously and guaranteeing a life of
at least 50,000 hours running.
I Lubrication of the gear teeth surfaces shall be achieved by being immersed in the oil
contained in the gear-box housing. For this purpose the gear-box shall be oil-tight
and shall be such as to prevent the total loss of oil from the gear box in the event of
the failure of the oil seals. The whirling oil and the oil dripping from the surfaces shall
lubricate the bearings.
J Where immersion or splash lubrication is not effective, gears and bearings shall be
lubricated automatically by a forced lubrication system. Lubricants shall be as or the
equal to that recommended by the manufacturer of the gear-box.
K Provision shall be made in the design of the gear-box for oil filling and drainage. If
the drain is not easily accessible, the gear-box shall be equipped with an outlet hose
and small hand pump.
L The gear-box shall be provided with a flexible overload coupling (including safety
guards) between the motor and the input shaft of the gear-box. Parts subject to wear
must be easily replaceable without disassembling the motor.
M Particular care shall be taken in designing gear-box arrangements to protect the
Works or water under treatment from contamination arising from accidental overflow,
any future leakage due to excessive wear, seal failure, or poor filling or drainage
practices. Drip and catch trays and the like shall be generously provided throughout
the Works.
V-Belt Coupling Or Gearbox
A The V-belt Coupling shall be fully rated transmit the motor full load power without
exceeding normal working temperature.
B The V-belt Coupling shall be rated to take account of and of the specified climatic
conditions and shall be tested adjusting for static and dynamic balance.
C The weight of the coupling is taken on the motor shaft only provided the motor shaft
and bearing are adequate for the load without significant life reduction.
D Belt drives shall be aligned such that motor and machine pulleys are parallel to each
other in the same plane. Misalignment shall subject to manufacturer’s
recommendation, but in all cases shall be less than 1 mm.
E Belt tensioning shall be checked and adjusted to be within the allowable limit
recommended by the manufacturer.
F Guarding is provided to both coupling and associated shafts to give adequate
protection to all moving parts.
G Belts shall conform to BS 3790
Bearings
A All bearings shall be generously rated and sized to secure satisfactory and stable
running without vibration under all conditions of operation for a minimum life of
100,000 hours running.
B All bearing shall be to ISO standard and SI metric unit dimensions where practicable.
C The intervals between lubrication shall be maximized (not less than 2 weeks), and
shall be defined for each individual item and included in the operation and
maintenance manual.
Balancing
A Rotating elements shall be dynamically or statically balanced. Vibration levels shall
not exceed values stated in the Contract specific specification (where applicable) and
shall be evaluated in accordance with BS 7854. Lateral critical speeds shall occur
outside the range between ±20% of the rotational speed. Torsional critical speeds
shall occur outside the range between ±10% of the rotational speed.
Suppression of Noises
A All systems offered shall be quiet in operation. Unless specified elsewhere in the
Contract Document, the noise level within the building shall be not more than 85
decibels ‘A’ scale when measured along a contour 3 m from any single item of system
during starting, running, and stopping. This level will be subject to a tolerance of +5%
over the audible frequency spectrum measured at mid band. The noise level outside
the building shall be not more than 65 decibels ‘A’ scale when measured along a
contour 3 m from the external wall, subject to a tolerance of +5% over the audible
frequency spectrum measured at mid band.
B Noise test measurements shall be made on completion of the installation of the plant
at site to verify that it complies with this specification. System that fails to comply with
the noise level limits when tested will render it liable for rejection unless it is
satisfactorily modified.
C All noise levels for all different buildings or equipment inside the WWTP shall be not
more than the noise levels stated the regulations issued by the Egyptian Ministry of
Environmental.
Penstocks
A Penstocks shall be of the following types:
1. Cast iron with scraped non-ferrous sealing, or
2. Cast iron with rubber sealing faces.
3. Stainless Steel 316
B Each penstock shall be provided with a suitable hand wheel of adequate size for the
duty required. The gearing shall be supplied, where necessary, to ensure that the
required operating force applied by hand to the hand wheel shall not exceed 250 N.
The height of the operating hand wheel shall be approximately 1 metre above
operating level, unless otherwise stated for ease of operation.
C The hand wheels shall have the direction of closing cast on them, which shall be
clockwise.
D Spindles shall have machine cut, robust trapezoidal, or square form threads. They
shall be of stainless steel.
E All penstocks shall be of the non-rising or rising spindle type, depending on location
and duty as agreed with the Project Manager.
F Penstocks shall be watertight under the conditions of head and flow direction for
which they are designed.
G The penstocks shall be designed to ensure tight closure, whilst maintaining freedom
of plate movement during operation and minimizing sliding wear of the seals.
H Non-ferrous metal sealing faces shall be formed from accurately machined gunmetal
or bronze strips, bedded and fixed to machine recesses by corrosion resistant,
countersunk screws. The faces of the strips shall be brought together in the operating
position and hand scraped to a watertight finish.
I Rubber sealing faces shall be formed from high quality synthetic rubber, suitably
shaped to interlock into grooves in the frame or plate and shall be securely bonded
thereto.
J The materials used for the manufacture of the penstocks shall conform to the
following minimum standards or equivalent:
1. Cast-iron DIN EN 1561 Grade 180
2. Gunmetal BS 1400 Grade LG2
3. Stainless Steel BS 970, pt 4 Grade 316 S31
4. Phosphor Bronze BS 2874 Grade PB 102.
K Cast iron penstocks shall be painted in accordance with the specifications in this
Section, location category C.
Gate Valves / Sluice Valves
A Gate valves shall be of the double flanged ductile cast iron GGG50 wedge gate type.
B Wedge-gate Sluice valves shall be of the double-flanged cast iron type unless
otherwise specified. They shall have a ductile cast iron body with renewable gunmetal
faces on body and wedge and bolt-on cast iron bonnet. Valves shall be of rising stem
U
type and shall also incorporate a combined yoke. U
C Gate valves from DN50 to DN300 shall be in accordance with DIN 3352 Part 4. The
face to face dimension shall be to DIN 3202 Part 1, F4.
D Gate valves from DN350 to DN600 shall be in accordance with DIN 3352 Part 4. The
face to face dimension shall be to DIN 3202 Part 1, F5.
E Valves over DN700 shall have an integral valve bypass to allow differential pressure
to be alleviated on opening.
F Unless otherwise specified, each valve shall be provided with a suitable hand wheel
of adequate diameter for the duty required. Gearing shall be supplied, where
necessary, to ensure that the required operating force applied by hand to the rim of
the wheel does not exceed 250 N.
G Hand wheels shall have smooth rims with the direction of closing, which shall be
clockwise, cast on them.
H Valve stems shall be of stainless steel, machined all over with a machine cut robust
trapezoidal or square form thread, operating in a gunmetal nut.
I Stem seals shall be the O-ring type, with two such seals arranged for easy
replacement of O-rings or of the stuffing box and gland form arranged for easy
replacement of packing. The stem seals shall be accessible for maintenance with the
valve under pressure without removing the valve from service.
J Fastening bolts shall be of stainless steel, countersunk and corrosion sealed.
K Extension spindles, headstocks and foot brackets shall be provided where specified.
Where possible and provided the valve is not subject to submergence, the extension
spindle shall be of the non-rising type and a cast iron bridle piece or similar, shall be
incorporated on valves of the rising spindle type for this purpose. Where rising stem
valves are subject to submergence the extension spindle shall also be of the rising
type with the threaded portion positioned above top water level. Extended spindle
installations shall include all necessary brackets and intermediate supports etc.
L Headstocks for non-rising spindle installations shall incorporate a valve position
indicator. Extension spindles shall be of stainless steel or manganese steel and shall
conform to the requirements for valve stems with the exception of non-threaded
sections which may be of mild steel. Extension spindle couplings shall be of the muff
type and shall be drilled and provided with a nut and bolt for securing the spindle to
the valve stem which shall likewise be drilled to accept the bolt.
M Extended spindle installations of the rising type shall be provided with thrust tubes
between valve and headstock in order to absorb the thrust in both directions of
operation for valves of 300 mm bore and above and for all motorised / actuator
operated valves. Thrust tubes shall incorporate all necessary fixing brackets and
spindle guide plates.
N Extended spindles for all motorized or actuator operated valves shall be provided
with thrust tubes between valve and headstock in order to absorb the thrust in both
directions of operation.
O Remote mounted actuators shall be mounted on a floor pedestal, and shall be
provided with drive shafts between valve and actuator units, complete with all
necessary universal joints and shaft support bearing brackets.
P Where sluice valves larger than 350 mm bore are mounted with the spindle in the
horizontal plane the valve bodies shall be fitted with renewable gunmetal machined
gate slides and the gates with renewable hard bronze shoes accurately machined to
reduce sliding friction.
Q All sluice valves above 500 mm bore (300 mm if power actuated) shall be provided
with jacking screws and valves above 350 mm bore where mounted in the vertical
plane shall be provided with feet.
R Each valve weighing more than 50 kg shall be provided with 2 lifting eyes for handling
by crane.
S Vandal and weatherproof clear polycarbonate tube covers shall be securely fitted to
protect the threads of rising stems and spindles and tubes shall be clearly and
permanently engraved to indicate the position of the valve.
T Where valves are required to be operated by tee keys, spindle caps shall be fitted.
The caps shall be drilled and each provided with nut and bolt for securing to the
spindle which shall likewise be drilled to accept the bolt. Where caps are fitted they
shall each be supplied complete with operating tee key.
U All hand wheels, headstocks, foot brackets, guide brackets and thrust tubes shall be
of ductile iron.
V Fixing nuts and bolts supplied by the manufacturer shall be as specified in the
appropriate sections herein and in accordance to BS Standards.
W Valves shall carry identification marks and/or plates in accordance with the BS
Standards and those for use on process plant shall carry an additional brass plate
carrying valve identification and a brief description of its function.
X Valves shall be sized such that the velocity through the valve when fully open does
not exceed 2.25 meters per second and the rated throughput. They shall have
flanges and shall be capable of withstanding the same test pressure as the pipeline
on which they operate. All nuts and studs subject to vibration shall be fitted with spring
washers or locking tabs.
Y Provision shall be made for the necessary lubrication of all universal joints / bearing
points in an extended valve drive shaft assembly. Lubrication facilities shall be in the
form of grease nipples or grease filled protective gaiters, as appropriate.
Z Valves shall be capable of being locked in their operating and isolation positions to
prevent unauthorised use of the valves. Valves fitted with a hand wheel shall
incorporate a locking bracket for use with a padlock or padlock and chain. Valves
fitted with valve caps shall be provided with a lockable cap. All devices shall be easily
removed when unlocked, and captive to prevent loss of the device.
AA Valves shall carry identification plates or marks in accordance with appropriate
standards.
BB All valves shall be painted in accordance with the specifications in this Section.
Location categories are stated in the description of works for each item.
CC All materials used in manufacture of the valves shall conform to the following
minimum standards or equivalent:
1. Ductile Iron DIN 1693 GGG-50
2. Dezincification Resistant Brass BS 2874 Grade CZ132
3. Stainless Steel DIN X 20 Cr 13
4. O-rings NBR Rubber.
DD Working pressure of all gate valves shall be of PN6 with PN9 Testing pressure unless
otherwise specified.
Non-Return Valves
A Non-return valves shall be mounted in the horizontal plane unless otherwise agreed
with the Project Manager.
B Non-return valves less than DN80 shall be bronze swing check pattern in accordance
with BS 5154, and screwed to BS 21. Valve rating shall be according to particular
specifications.
C Non-return valves DN80 and larger shall be ductile cast iron swing check pattern in
accordance with DIN EN 12334, with flanges to BS 4504 Section 3.1 and DIN EN
1092-2. Valve bodies shall be fitted with an inspection cover. Inspection covers shall
have tapped bosses fitted with galvanised plugs.
D Non-return valves shall be supplied with a limit switch mounting plate, external lever
and counter-weight, and fully enclosed in a guard compliant with PD 5304, unless
otherwise specified.
E All materials used in the manufacture of non-return valves shall conform to the
following minimum standards or equivalent:
1. Ductile Iron DIN 1693 GGG-50
2. Gunmetal BS 1400 Grade LG2
3. Stainless Steel BS 970 Grade 431S29.
F Non-return valves shall be painted in accordance with the requirements in this
Section according to actual location.
G Selection of non-return valves shall be coordinated with the surge analysis.
H Working pressure of all non-return valves shall be of PN6 with PN9 Testing pressure
unless otherwise specified.
Ball Valves
A The ball valves shall be of the two-way type, and be provided with a hand wheel for
easy opening.
B All flanges shall be rated and drilled for PN16 according to DIN 2576 B or DIN 2632.
Air and Gas Relief Valves
A The air valves shall be of the automatic type designed to meet the following
conditions:
1. The large orifice shall automatically exhaust air from the pipeline when it is
being filled with water.
2. Automatically ventilate the pipeline when it is being emptied of water, also, in
the case of a main burst, of preventing vacuum.
3. The small orifice shall automatically release air accumulating in the pipeline.
B Air and gas relief valves shall be of the double orifice pattern with ductile cast iron
GGG50 bodies. The inlet flange shall be rated and drilled for PN10 according to DIN
2576 B or DIN 2632.
C The valves shall be adequately sized for the release of gas from the pipeline (or other
container) without restriction of rate of filling or flow due to back pressure and also to
allow admission of air during pipeline emptying at a rate sufficient to prevent
excessive depression of pressure in the pipe.
D Valves shall be designed to prevent the operating elements being in contact with the
pipeline liquid by approved means such as the provision of an auxiliary float and
chamber sufficiently large to isolate the orifice valves and seats throughout the rated
operational range.
E Air valves shall be fitted with an isolating gate or butterfly valve and gearing shall be
provided where necessary to facilitate operation.
F In applications where the pipeline characteristics may lead to liquid column
separation with consequent possibility of surge, a vented non-return valve shall be
provided which allows air to enter freely on separation but controls expulsion of
air/gas as the liquid column re-joins.
G In applications where the hydraulic conditions are such that pressure falls below
atmospheric pressure during normal operation, where air inflow at that time could
induce surge conditions and an air inflow check valve shall be incorporated.
H Fixing nuts and bolts supplied by the manufacturer shall be as specified in the
appropriate clauses herein and in accordance to BS Standards.
I All air and gas relief valves and associated isolating valves shall be works tested and
capable of withstanding the same test pressure as the pipeline or vessel on which
they operate.
J All valves and operating linkages shall be prepared and painted in accordance to
required minimum standards.
K All materials used in the manufacture of the valves shall conform to the following
minimum standards:
Item Material
Float Chamber, Flange and Grey Cast Iron to DIN EN 1561 Grade 220 or
Cover Spheroidal Graphite Iron to DIN EN 1563.
Liquid Float Copper, Polycarbonate or approved equivalent
Air Valve Float and Guide Polycarbonate or approved equivalent
Orifices, Guides and Stainless Steel to BS EN 10090

Mechanisms
Sealing Rings Moulded Rubber or suitably approved equivalent
L In order to avoid water hammer in the pipeline system, and to minimize mechanical
load on the valve, the air velocities will be restricted to the following maximum limits:
1. 50 m/s for air evacuation
2. 80 m/s for air admission
Pressure Control Valves
A Pressure control valves for pipe bores 100 mm diameter and above used for pressure
reduction, pressure sustaining or pressure relief shall be of the double flanged type
and of ductile cast iron GGG50 and shall operate by use of an integral auxiliary
actuating mechanism suitable for the application.
B The valves shall be adequately sized to control the flow and pressure differential
required for the application with an accuracy of  2½% of the set value. They shall
be capable of operating at a sustained pressure 20% in excess of the nominal
declared working pressure.
C Valves shall be sized to ensure that their full capacity will be more than adequate to
accept the desired maximum flow at the minimum required differential pressure.
D Flanges shall be suitable for the sustained pressure detailed above but in any case
not less than PN10.
E The main valve disc, ported guide pressure differential piston shall be in high grade
cast iron gunmetal as appropriate. For cast iron discs the seating face shall be in
gunmetal, synthetic or other approved material to suit the application. The piston
cylinder shall be fitted with a bronze liner. The piston shall be fitted with rings suitable
for maintaining a pressure seal with the cylinder to suit the maximum pressure
differential for which the valve has been designed.
F Where specified, an externally projecting indicator rod shall be fitted to the top of the
piston to indicate the position of the main valve disc.
G The main pressure control valve operation shall be actuated by a hydraulic differential
pressure system in balance with a spring loaded bellows type diaphragm, the
reference pressures being bled from the inlet and outlet of the main valve.
H The diaphragm spring shall be adjustable by a screw to cover the range of pressure
adjustment specified for the valve application.
I The control circuit bleeds shall be controlled by isolating cocks to enable the system
connections to be removed without disturbing the main valve.
J The detail connections and application of reference pressure shall be arranged to suit
the requirement, whether for pressure reduction, pressure relief or to sustain a
constant pressure.
K Monitoring orifices shall be protected by suitable fine mesh strainers on the pipeline
side, the elements, strainer, pipework and fittings being in suitable corrosion resistant
materials.
L A pressure gauge shall be fitted to indicate the regulated pressure.
M Where required, a needle valve shall be incorporated in the connection from the
”relay” valve to the main valve piston cylinder to adjust the rate of pressure.
N When the main and relay valves are closed, the main valve seating shall be ”drop
tight” under the inherent hydraulic pressure.
O Where specified an electric or hydraulic servo device shall be incorporated to turn
the spring screw for remote pressure adjustment.
P Fixing nuts and bolts supplied by the manufacturer shall be as specified in the
appropriate clauses herein.
Q Before the application of paint or other similar treatment, valves shall be works tested
hydrostatically, the test pressure for the body and disc being 1.5 and for the seat 1.0
times a maximum sustained pressure of 20% in excess of the nominal declared
working pressure.
R All valves and operating gear shall be prepared and painted in accordance required
minimum standards.
S All materials used in the manufacture of the valves shall conform to the following
minimum standards:
Item Material
Body, Cover and Disc D.C.I GGG50, and Cast Iron to DIN EN 1561,
Grade 220
Valve guide, rings etc. Gunmetal
Liner Bronze
Seating Face Gunmetal synthetic or other approved material

as appropriate
Indicator Rod Stainless Steel to BS EN 10090
Actuating Valve Body, etc. Bronze
Spindle Stainless Steel BS EN 10090
Valve Face Nylon
Reinforced synthetic rubber or approved

Diaphragm and Bellows
equivalent
Orifice body and plate Bronze
Strainer Copper wire cloth
Spring Spring Steel
All parts not listed shall be of homogeneous corrosion-resistant material.

Outlet Weir Plates
A An adjustable V-notched peripheral weir plates shall be provided and installed to
each tank.
B The weir plate shall be constructed of stainless steel 316 with minimum thickness of
4 mm and shall be completely sealed with an approved type of rubber sealing strips
of 4 mm thick.
C The complete assembly shall form a water-tight seal against the concrete surface
and provision should be made for vertical adjustment of about 50 mm.
Fire Hydrants
A Fire hydrants shall be of the above ground type as to DIN 3222 and consisting of two
separate parts connected by a flange in the middle, and the bolts shall be designed
in a manner that allow dismantling the upper part from the lower part and in a way
that allows the fine hydrant to receive shocks without allowing breakage of the fine
hydrant body or leakage of water. Fire hydrant shall be designed in a way that allows
dismantling of inner parts such as rising stem, control valve for maintenance needs
without the need to dismantle the valve.
Electric Actuators
A Where required, penstocks and valves shall be operated by means of electrically
driven actuators with integral reversing starters.
B Each actuator shall be fully weatherproof, and fitted with anti-condensation heater,
upper and lower limit switches, and torque switches.
C All local controls shall be protected by a lockable cover.
D Each actuator shall be adequately sized to suit the application, and be continuously
rated to suit the modulating control required.
E The gearbox shall be oil or grease filled and capable of installation in any position.
F Alternative hand operation shall be possible, and the hand wheel together with a
suitable reduction gear-box if necessary shall be of adequate dimensions for easy
operation by two men. The motor drive shall be automatically disengaged when under
manual operation.
G The operating gear of all penstocks shall be capable of opening or closing the gate
against an unbalanced head equal to the maximum working pressure. Hand wheels
shall be rotated clockwise to close the valves, and shall be clearly marked with the
words ‘open’ and ‘close’ and arrows in the appropriate directions. The rims of all hand
wheels shall have a smooth finish.
H Rising spindle penstocks shall not be fitted with position indicators, but all actuators
shall be equipped with indicators showing whether the penstock is fully open or
closed. A transparent PVC cover shall be fitted to protect the thread of the rising
spindle.
I All operating spindles, gears, and headstocks shall be provided with adequate points
for lubrication.
J The actuator starters shall be integrally housed with the actuator in a robustly
constructed enclosure to IP 55. The motor starters shall be capable of starting the
motors under the most severe conditions.
K The starter housing shall be fitted with internal heaters so as to provide protection
against damage due to condensation. Heaters shall be suitable for single phase
110 Volt operation.
L A separate isolator shall be supplied loose with each actuator. The isolator enclosure
shall be to IP 55. The Contractor shall mount each isolator adjacent to its associated
actuator in a position to be approved by the Project Manager.
Note: All Penstocks and valves installed on delivery side of all pumps & blowers shall be
U U
actuated. Main delivery valves such as Air inlet to SBR tanks, sludge inlets & outlets
…etc. shall be actuated, as the biological treatment plant shall be fully automated.
Pressure Gauges
A All pressure gauges shall comply with DIN EN 837-1. Pressure gauges shall be
Bourdon tube gauges, unless agreed otherwise by the Project Manager.
B For wastewater and sludge applications, pressure gauges shall be independently
mounted on a stub branch line not less than 50 mm NB for pipe sizes of 50 mm and
above. For pipe sizes below 50 mm the stub branch shall be the same size as the
pipe. All gauges shall be protected by a stainless steel seal diaphragm (or Schaffer
diaphragm gauges shall be provided). An isolating valve shall be installed in each
stub branch line on the pump side of the diaphragm.
C All gauges shall have concentric dials of 100 mm (min.) diameter, graduated in
metres head. Under maximum head conditions the gauge pointer shall not exceed
90% of Full Scale Deflection (FSD). Ideally the guaranteed duty head shall be
approximately 70% FSD.
D Pump suction gauges shall be compound gauges calibrated to read both pressure
and vacuum.
E A test certificate for each gauge shall be issued to the Project Manager, and a copy
included in the relevant section of the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
F Pressure gauges shall be mounted in a position that is clearly visible from a walkway
or access platform. Where practicable, pressure gauges on an item of system shall
be mounted at the same height.
G All gauge mountings shall be free of vibration and the accuracy of measuring shall
be better than ±0.5%.
H Gauges shall be zero adjustable and glycerine filled casing.
Pressure Vessels
A Pressure vessels shall be constructed in accordance with the relevant British
Standard and shall be mounted vertically or horizontally and supported on concrete
plinths. The vessels shall be manufactured from hot dip galvanised steel and shall be
GRP coated internally an external access ladder shall be provided for each tank.
B The vessels shall be complete with all necessary fittings for control and safety of
operation including but not limited to water level gauge, manometer, air cock, safety
valve, man-way.
Compressors
A Compressors shall be manufactured to the relevant British Standards and shall have
direct coupled motors the compressor and motor shall be mounted on a robust
common baseplate. The units shall be sound insulated and dust proofed.
B The compressor shall be suitably rated for the quantity and pressure of air required
for the installation and a pressure gauge shall be fitted to each unit to indicate the
operating pressure. The design shall ensure that the air discharged by the
compressors is oil free.
C Pressure relief valves, non-return valves and air intake filters shall be provided fitted
to each unit. The air intake filters shall be of the paper element type housed in a metal
retaining cage.
3.25 Disinfection Using Chlorine Gas

Important Note
The contractor is free to use either hypochlorite solution or chlorine gas for the purpose of
effluent water disinfection provided that the Contractor shall submit the operation and
maintenance cost for the selected system for a duration of 20 years and indicate it in the
Schedule of Prices. Detailed specification for both systems shall be as detailed hereinafter as
follows
Chlorination Equipment (In case of using chlorine gas)
Chlorinators
A The chlorinator shall be of the V-Notch, vacuum operated, solution feed type. Each
unit shall be individually housed in a free standing, floor mounted fibre glass cabinet.
B The units shall be automatically controlled through signals received from the residual
chlorine controller to maintain free residual chlorine of 0.1 mg/L, according to the
prevailing condition and effluent flowrate.
C Manual feed rate adjustment should also be available. The pre-set feed rate should
be maintained within ± 4%.
D The unit shall be complete with gas flow meter of 20:1 range between maximum and
minimum flow rates, differential vacuum regulating valve, pressure/vacuum relief
valve, gas pressure regulating valve, remotely mounted injector, gas inlet and vent
pipes.
E Gauges shall be provided to indicate gas pressure and vacuum.
F The vacuum gauge should be fitted with alarm contacts to initiate an alarm on high
or low vacuum.
Chlorine Solution Injectors and Diffusers
A The injector shall be of the aspirator type to give maximum efficiency in mixing the
chlorine gas with water. They shall be remotely mounted outside the control units.
B Each injector shall be provided with an integral combined check valve to prevent
backflow of the injector water into the system.
C The injector nozzle shall be sized for the given hydraulic conditions to operate the
chlorinator efficiently over its full range.
D Pressure gauge shall be fitted to both the motive water and the chlorine gas lines.
E Diffusers shall be installed at the injection points and shall be connected to the
injectors by using of reinforced rubber hoses.
Residual Chlorine Measuring Cell
A The cells shall be wall mounted and incorporate bi-metallic electrodes.
B The electrodes shall be self-cleaned by using of recirculating rubbing materials over
the electrodes surfaces.
C A micro-ampere signal, proportional to the free residual chlorine shall be generated
and transmitted to the control panel.
D Water samples shall be drawn at a suitable distance after the injection points.
Pressure and pH of such samples should be regulated before passing through the
cells.
E The sampling system shall be complete with sampling pumps, all necessary pipe
works and valves.
Automatic Changeover Device

A The cylinders changeover device shall consist of a changeover valve operated by a
self-cycling motor which, in turn, is energized through a relay by a pre-set low
pressure electrical contact on a gas pressure gauge.
B Indicator lights or similar shall be fitted to show which supply is in use. A manual
switch shall be provided to enable the device to be operated independent of the
automatic cycle.
C The device shall be an integral wall-mounted unit consisting of a sealed cast metal
case, housing the valve, motor and electrical controls, on top of which a pressure
gauge shall be mounted.
Chlorine Gas Pressure Reducing Valve
A Chlorine gas pressure reducing valve shall be of an independent, heavy duty, spring
loaded diaphragm type providing an automatically regulated output and a positive
manual gas shut-off.
B The valve shall consist of a body, diaphragm, resilient seat, stem, cone, guide, spring
and on/off knob.
C The combination of the resilient seat and the hard stem and cone gives a tight shut-
off, and the guide ensures accurate seating. The diaphragm shall be of the good
flexibility leak proof type.
D The valve shall be provided with filter unit and a pressure gauge and shall be wall
mounted.
Chlorine Fume Detectors
A The detector shall be provided with two integral recharged batteries to maintain
operation for about four hours, when power failure occurs.
B The detector shall be provided with two alarm levels for chlorine fume which can be
preset at 0.3 ppm for the low level and at 0.5 ppm for the high level.
C The detector cell should give very fast response to any alarm condition.
D Two alarm contacts should be provided on the low level alarm and three on the high
level alarm to bring into operation visual indicating fume warning panel, audible
warbler and extraction fans.
E The fume warning panel shall be erected outside the chlorine building.
F The panel should give a high intensity flashing red warning in case of chlorine gas
leakage.
G An audible alarm by using of remote mounted warbler should also be connected to
give a loud and clear audible alarm.
Chlorine Gas Cylinders
A The Contractor shall supply chlorine gas cylinders each of 1000 kgs capacity, from
an approved supplier.
B It is required to supply sets of drum supports, each consists of four cast iron trunnions,
to be used as a method of positioning the outlet valves of the chlorine cylinders and
also for spacing and supporting the drums. The trunnions shall be mounted to steel
I-beams to be fixed rigidly to the store floor.
C The storage period of chlorine cylinders shall be 15 days.
Chlorine Cylinders Weighing Balance

A The balance shall be of the suspended type with 3 tons measuring capacity.
Neutralization System
A Caustic soda solution (with 10% concentration) prepared at the bottom part of the
neutralization tower shall be sucked by the pumps and delivered to the spraying
nozzles at the top of the tower. In the same time contaminated air shall be delivered
to the lower part of the tower by (at least two) air blowers of suitable capacity. Contact
shall happen, between the contaminated air and the caustic soda solution, through
the contact rings and the neutralized solution shall be collected back at the bottom of
the tank. The process shall continue until the concentration of the chlorine gas in air
becomes normal. The neutralized solution shall be drained out from the lower part of
the tower and another volume shall be prepared to be ready for emergency cases.
B The tower shall be made from reinforced fiber glass. The neutralizing solution shall
be prepared at the bottom of the tower by using of caustic soda ash. In the upper part
of the tank, the spraying system with its nozzles shall be installed.
C Porcelain or P.V.C. rings shall be placed on certain brackets inside the tower for
increasing the contact area between the contaminated air and the sprayed
neutralization solution.
D The recirculating pumps shall be manufactured from suitable materials to withstand
the corrosion action of the handled media (up to 25% caustic soda concentration).
Booster Pumps
A The contractor shall supply and erect two boosting pumps to be located inside the
apparatus room. The pumps shall be connected in parallel so that one can be as
stand-by for the other. These boosters shall be used for operating the injectors. Each
pump shall be directly coupled to a totally enclosed air cooled electric motor, the
motor shall be complete with its starter, rated for continuous running (24 hours) at an
ambient temperature of 45ºC. The boosting pumps shall be complete with pipes,
valves and pressure gauges.
3.26 Disinfection Using Sodium Hypochlorite
Important Note
The contractor is free to use either hypochlorite solution or chlorine gas for the purpose of
effluent water disinfection provided that the Contractor shall submit the operation and
maintenance cost for the selected system for a duration of 20 years and indicate it in the
Schedule of Prices. Detailed specification for both systems shall be as detailed hereinafter as
follows
Chlorination Equipment (In case of using sodium hypochlorite)
General
A This specification lays down the requirements for sodium hypochlorite chlorination
system.
B The contractor shall be responsible in every respect for the complete design, supply,
installation, proper and fail-safe functioning of the chlorination system. All items
necessary for the completeness of the system are deemed to be included even if not
specifically stated in the various tender documents.
C The contractor shall prepare a full set of calculations and drawings for review and
approval. All drawings including the drawings of subcontractors etc. shall be
compatible and drawn to the same standards.
D The contractor shall supply and install at site all equipment and materials necessary
for the specified installations.
E The contractor shall perform all tests at site considered necessary, such as:
functional tests, accuracy tests, tests of installed systems etc.
F The contractor shall be responsible for the pre-commissioning, commissioning and
start-up of the installations, and for the proper functioning of the installation during
the guarantee period including the supply and installation of any required
replacement parts.
G The contractor shall ensure that he has on site all equipment necessary to achieve a
high quality of workshop outfit for the complete range and type of installation supplied
for the project.
H The contractor shall supply all special tools, equipment, spares and consumables
necessary for the maintenance, testing and commissioning of the installation.
I The chlorination system supplier shall take full responsibility to ensure that all plant /
equipment making up the system are in accordance with the design requirements
and shall guarantee the proper operation of the system as specified.
J The contractor shall supply a complete system to meet requirements for the required
chlorination dosing capacity.
Codes and Standards
A The design, selection and installation of sodium hypochlorite chlorination system
shall be carried out as laid down in the Specifications.
B It is the contractor's responsibility to study the existing situation and requirements for
the hypo chlorination system and submit for approval detailed design drawings for
continuous and fail-safe operation of the hypo chlorination system.
C The contractor shall observe in his detailed design all the requirements set out in
these Specifications.
D The system design shall be in accordance with the requirements contained in the
latest editions and supplements of the codes and standards issued by the following
organizations :
1. International Electro technical Commission (IEC)
2. Instrument Society of America (ISA)
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
4. American Standards Association (ASA)
5. Where local regulations are more stringent than the requirements of the above
mentioned standards and codes, as well as those of this specification, the
former shall prevail.
6. The contractor shall prepare and submit all the required drawings and
documents for the hypo chlorination system.
Drawings and Specifications
A All drawings shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and shall be
appropriately detailed and properly organized.
B The set of chlorination drawings shall include, but not limited to, the following
1. Piping and Instrument Diagram:
2. Pumps & Piping Drawings:
3. Electrical Drawings
4. Instrumentation & Control Drawings
5. Specifications shall be prepared for all components of the hypo chlorination
system. Separate sheets shall be made for each type of equipment and
material. All relevant process, construction and engineering data materials shall
be incorporated on these sheets.
Site Conditions
A The hypo chlorination system and associated equipment shall be designed and
suitable for operation in the climatic conditions of Egypt.
B However the offered equipment shall be suitable for the below mentioned conditions
as a minimum:
1. Maximum ambient conditions in the shade: 45ºC
2. Minimum ambient temperature: 5ºC
3. Maximum ambient relative humidity: 100%
Design Considerations
A The chlorination system shall be designed for case of operation and for maximum
simplicity, reliability and for minimum maintenance.
B In engineering and selection of equipment, materials and systems, the guiding
principle shall be to provide suitable, reliable and fail safe installations, requiring only
a minimum of maintenance; moreover, the variety in type shall be held to a minimum.
Use shall be made of exclusively new and modern materials suitable for the intended
purpose. The selection of equipment shall be subject to the approval.
C All electronic components shall be de-rated in order to ensure long life and stable
operation.
D All installations shall be suitable for continuous operation at the above mentioned
project site conditions.
E Every precaution shall be taken in the installation of the equipment to protect it and
its components against the harsh weather conditions prevailing in Egypt. All
equipment and material selected shall be suitable for tropical conditions and
corrosion resistant.
F Hypochlorite is best stored for the longest storage life at temperatures around or
below (15°C), when filtered and free of impurities, at dilute concentrations that
maintain pH above 10, and without direct sun exposure due to the decomposition
effects of ultraviolet radiation and heat.
Storage Tanks
A Storage tanks shall be manufactured from GRP panels with PVC internal lining or
from molded high density polyethylene HDPE or XLPE. The hypochlorite storage
tanks should be rated at 1.9 specific gravity. The external surfaces of the storage
tanks shall be U.V. stabilized. There shall be two (2) sodium hypochlorite storage
tanks. The storage tanks shall be sized such that 24 hours hypochlorite storage
capacity is achieved for systems at maximum dosing rate. The CONTRACTOR shall
provide sizing calculations to confirm that the above mentioned criteria is achieved.
B The tanks shall be designed for mounting on a flat base. A re-circulation flow from
the pumps shall be provided to prevent the settling of calcareous precipitates.
However these precipitates shall be automatically drained on a periodical basis. The
tank base shall be designed to support the static head of contents at no additional
load.
C The hypochlorite storage tanks shall be fitted with suitably sized manhole, inlet,
outlet, drain, overflow and siphon breaker nozzles.
Dosing Pumps
A Sodium hypochlorite dosing pumps shall be a positive displacement, peristaltic type
tubing pump with a brushless variable speed motor, non-spring loaded roller
assembly located in the pumphead, integral tube failure detection system, tube life
roller revolution counter with user alarm set-point and flexible tubing with attached
connection fittings. All materials used for pump construction shall be subject to
Engineer approval. The dosing pumps shall generally comply with the standard
specification for main pumps. The sodium hypochlorite dosing pumps shall however
be fitted with mechanical seal rather than soft packing. The dosing pumps shall
operate as duty/standby. In case of duty pump failure, the standby pump shall
operate and the pump failure shall be indicated on the chlorination control panel.
B Sodium hypochlorite dosing pump could be a diaphragm metering pump as specified
in this specifications.
C Pressure switches shall be installed on the common suction line of each dosing pump
skid. Each suction main shall be connected to 2 No. dosing pumps.
D The dosing pumps shall be installed indoors. All piping, valves and fittings on the
suction side of the dosing system shall be suitable for the fluid handled and shall be
submitted for approval. The material construction for the discharge pipe work from
the dosing pumps to injection point shall be suitable for the fluid handled and subject
to approval. The material of construction for valves, flow control valves, flow meters,
etc. on the discharge side of the dosing pumps shall be proposed by the
CONTRACTOR and forwarded for approval.
Chlorine Sampling Pumps
A Two (2) chlorine sampling pumps (1 duty/1 standby) shall be supplied and installed
for each point of sampling to pump sample water analyzer.
B Chlorine sampling pumps shall be centrifugal single stage pumps. The sampling
pumps shall have duplex stainless steel casing with duplex stainless steel shaft and
impellers.
C The CONTRACTOR shall prepare sizing calculations for the flow and head of the
respective pumps and submit the same for approval. The sampling pumps shall
generally comply with the specifications for pumps. Each pump shall be fitted with
suction and delivery isolating valves and delivery non-return valve. The material of
construction for the valves shall be suitable for the fluid handled and shall be subject
to approval. The material of construction for the pipe work shall also be suitable for
the fluid handled and shall be subject to approval.
Pipe Work
A The contractor shall supply and install all necessary water and chlorinated water
pipework and valves for the complete installation.
B Pipe work between the hypochlorite storage tanks and dosing pumps shall run below
floor level so as not to obstruct the free passage. The trench cover shall be of the
open mesh type so that pipe work can be easily traced and checked for leaks.
Drainage of trench shall be provided.
C Buried piping shall have a minimum soil cover of 1000 mm and shall be bedded and
surrounded by 1000 mm thick of sieved soft sand backfill entirely free from foreign
particles which may cause damage to the pipes and fittings.
D The material of construction and method of joining for all pipes and fittings shall be
suitable for the medium handled and the above shall be proposed by the Contractor
and forwarded for approval.
Residual Chlorine Analyzer
A The residual chlorine analyzer system shall consist of a sensor assembly and an
indicating transmitter. The system shall measure and indicate the residual chlorine
concentration of the process liquid and transmit a linear 4-20 mA dc signal
proportional to the residual. High and Low switches shall be provided.
B The sensor assembly shall be of (3) electrode type using potential static
measurement principle. It shall be composed of corrosion resistant materials and
contain a field-replaceable electrode held in place with a threaded retainer ring. The
reference electrode shall be immersed in an electrolyte solution. A thermistor
mounted in the sensor shall provide wide range of automatic temperature
compensation from 0 to 50C. The sensor shall be insensitive to varying hydraulic
heads and pH variations encountered during normal process operation. A corrosion
and weather resistant cable supplied with the sensor shall be used for connecting to
the transmitter. The sensor shall permit operation within specifications at process
fluid velocities down to 0 m/sec.
C The analyzer cell shall be of transparent Plexiglas. The sample flow rate to the
analyzer shall be automatically regulated at a maximum of 1 liters/min, using a flow
control valve.
D The pressure of the sampling water shall be fed to the analyzer via duty/standby
sampling pumps. The residual analyzers shall incorporate fine screen filter.
E All the chemical analyzer equipment shall be installed in special designated chemical
analyzer cubicles. The location of the chemical analyzer cubicles shall ensure a
transportation delay of samples as short as possible. Each chemical analyzer cubicle
shall house 1 duty/1 standby residual analyzer system. The analyzer cubicles shall
be double enclosure insulated type with proper sun shades. The air conditioning
systems in all cases shall be redundant. The cubicles shall be fitted with the relevant
small power & lighting fittings.
F Each transmitter signal shall be transmitted remotely to the PLC/SCADA system.
G The residual chlorine transmitter electronics shall be all solid state utilizing integrated
circuitry. All components shall be mounted on two printed circuit boards. The
measured value of the residual concentration shall be displayed on a digital meter
mounted in the transmitter case. The meter shall be direct reading and range
selectable to suit. Input/output isolation shall be provided. Power supply shall be
230V ac, 50/60 Hz. Degree of protection for the casing shall be IP65 (min). All
analyzer transmitters shall have integral indicators and facilities for checking their
calibration. Automatic compensation/correction shall be integrated in the equipment.
Zero and span adjustments shall be available for calibration purposes. The residual
chlorine analyzer system shall be of the latest type reliable and maintenance free.
H A buffer solution feed shall be provided by a peristaltic pump using a positive head
feed. This will be used to eliminate the effects of varying PH on the sample. An
electrode cleaning system shall be provided by means of hydro-mechanical action or
approved equal. A buffer solution tank with low level alarm shall also be provided.
I Two (2) sampling pumps shall be installed (one running and one standby) to pump
the sample water to the analyzers cubicles to ensure a continuous flow of the
sampled process liquid.
J The sample pumps for each location shall be positioned next to the analyzer cubicles.
The sample pump sets shall be positioned under suitably designed sun shade.
PH Analyzer
A The pH analyzer shall consist of a sensor assembly and an indicating transmitter.
The system shall measure and indicate the pH value of the process liquid.
B The sensor shall be of the immersion type and housed in its own enclosure. It shall
provide an on-stream analysis of the sampled process liquid. The sensor shall be
equipped with 0-50C temperature compensation element and shall be insensitive to
varying hydraulic heads.
C The pH transmitter shall be micro-processor based with solid state electronics using
integrated circuitry with local digital display and signal for remote indication.
Enclosure shall be IP 65 (min) and suitable for wall mounting with wall mounting plate
and bracket.
Conductivity Analyzer
A The conductivity analyzer system shall consist of a sensor assembly and an
indicating transmitter. The system shall measure and indicate the conductivity value
of the process liquid.
B The sensor shall be of the immersion type and housed in its own enclosure. It shall
provide an on-stream analysis of the sampled process liquid. The sensor shall be
equipped with 0-50C temperature compensation element and shall be insensitive to
varying sample conditions.
C The conductivity transmitter shall be microprocessor based solid state electronics
using integrated circuitry with local digital display and a 4-20 mA dc isolated output
for remote indication. Power supply shall be 230 v ac, 50/60 Hz. Enclosure shall be
IP 65 (min) and suitable for wall mounting with wall mounting plate and bracket.
Injection Point
A Where chlorine solution is to be injected into a pipeline, an injection pipe of material
not affected by chlorine solution shall be provided. The injection fittings shall
comprise flanged or screwed pipe branch and isolation valve of suitable diameter to
allow the injection pipe to pass through. The outer end of the isolation valve shall be
fitted with a compression fitting thus enabling the injection pipe to be partially
withdrawn and the isolating valve closed before complete withdrawal of the injection
pipe.
Handling of Sodium Hypochlorite
A Protective clothing shall be used by maintenance personnel whenever direct contact
with sodium hypochlorite may be possible. Contact with iron, carbon steel and
stainless steel will degrade the concentration and produce gaseous chlorine.
B A hands-off automatic shower facility, and separately, an eyewash/bath facility, shall
be provided and installed outside, near the door of Chlorination Building and be
complete with drain facilities.
Environment Protection
A The storage tanks shall be bunded so that neither hypochlorite solution neither brine
effect the environment in case of significant spillage or rupture of tank. The dosing
pumps shall be bunded as well.
Chlorination Control
A Control of entire chlorination shall be performed from the chlorination control panel
installed in the chlorination control room to control the dosing of sodium hypochlorite
B The design and construction requirements for the control panel shall follow the
requirements of general specifications. The arrangement of instruments in the front
of panel shall be subject to approval.
C Communication or data transmission between chlorination control panel and main
control system shall be of the same type as for other parts of control system. That
may require additional I/O units to be installed in the local chlorination control panel.
D Instrumentation and control signals for chlorination shall be 4 to 20 mA and 24 V dc
unless otherwise approved.
Disinfection
A The treated wastewater shall be disinfected by chlorine before entering the chlorine
contact tank.
B Preliminary Design Parameters:
1. No. of Tanks – 1 for each plant
2. Minimum Detention Time – 20 – 40 minutes
3. The chlorine contact tank shall be baffled concrete tank to ensure proper
contact time and disinfection.
4. Chlorine dosage = 7-10 mg/l.
5. Ensure that the residence time in the chlorine contact tank is in excess of 20
minutes at all times and maintains a residual chlorine concentration of at least
0.1 mg/l, in accordance with Egyptian standards.
6. Provide the chlorination system as described in the previous paragraph(s)
“Disinfection using Sodium Hypochlorite”
3.27 Mechanical Screens
General
A The screens shall be designed, as the case of all the headwork’s structure and
equipment to deal with the plant peak flow up till the final stage.
B Provision shall be made for using an over-riding differential level sensor of an
approved design so as the raking mechanism comes into operation automatically
upon accumulation of screenings, making a difference in level in front and back of
screen, of about (10 -15 cm).
C The screen shall be of straight bars suitable for inclined installation about 70º - 85o
to the horizontal.
D All wetted parts, main drive shaft, main components and hardware such as nuts and
bolts shall be constructed of type 316 L stainless steel pickled in an acid bath or wear
resistant, heat treated type stainless steel as appropriate for the application.
E The frame shall be constructed from stainless steel (316) sections and channels.
F The bar section is rectangular in shape of at least 10 mm width by 30 mm depth.
Sliding rails for rack hinges as well as chain guides are all fitted in the frame. Motor
drive is housed on an emerging head on top of frame.
G The mechanical screens shall be either fine or coarse screens according to the bidder
design and they shall be of Multi Rake type.
H The cleaning rake shall be of the front cleaned, jam proof type with cleaning element
of stainless steel 316 L and shall be formed of several parts of steel teeth having
adequate length and section for easy replacement. The teeth parts shall be bolted to
the rake bars which rotate by using of driving chains and sprocket wheels.
I Screen chains shall be of specified ultimate strength with proper attachment links,
heat treated steel pins and rivets.
J The sprockets shall be of stainless steel, cast in a chill of specified hardness and with
number of teeth accurately ground to fit the chain. The driving sprocket shall be keyed
firmly to shafts, and the foot shaft sprockets shall be suitable for under water service
under gritty conditions. All shafting shall be of stainless steel, straight and true, of
sufficient size, properly keyed to transmit power as required. Steel shafts shall be
protected against wastewater.
K The maximum bar spacing shall be 6 mm for fine screens and 20 mm for coarse
screens and velocities across the screen bars shall not exceed what stated in the
Egyptian code.
L The electric motor shall be of the induction squirrel cage, suitable for electric supply
three phase, it shall be totally enclosed, weather proof, fan cooled, and tropically
insulated with Class (F) insulation with temperature rise not exceeds Class (B) and
IP 65 enclosure, protected against gases, dripping water, splash water and moist
atmosphere. The rated output of the motor shall be 50% in excess than the maximum
power consumed by the raking system; the motor shall be rated for continuous
running 24 hours. The service factor of gear boxes shall be at least 2.
M The screen shall be provided with end sprocket and chain for manual operation in
emergency cases.
N An automatic rake wiper shall be provided for the screen designed and placed so that
the screenings do not wrap around the rake or the wiper during screenings removal.
The dead plate shall be constructed of at least 6 mm thick steel sheets and shall be
bolted to the side frame of the screen.
O The screenings containers capacity shall be defined according to the contractor
design.
Manually Cleaned Screen
A The manually cleaned bar screen (for standby operation) shall be of bar type set into
position at an inclination of 45o to 60o to the horizontal.
B The bars shall be fully extended to the floor invert level and shall be extended 75 mm
above the collecting tray.
C Gap between the screen frame and side wall shall be sealed with stainless steel
baffle plates welded to the screen frame and bolted to the walls or gasket system
manufactured from a material suitable for permanent emersion in wastewater. The
side wall seals shall ensure that no wastewater in the channel can bypass the
screening element.
D The screen bars shall be formed of 316 stainless steel sections. The section is
rectangular in shape of at least 10 mm width by 25 mm depth.
Belt Conveyor
A The belt conveyor shall handle the screenings from the screens with sideways load-
pick-up, operated manually and automatically by suitable starters according to the
operating conditions of the screens. The width of the belt conveyor shall be 0.8 m.
B The belt shall be made of rubber and canvas of at least 10 mm thickness and shall
be carried on rollers to take trough shape. The roller shall be sealed and greased for
their lifetime. The driving motor shall be totally enclosed complete with gear box.
1. Drive: Shaft gear motor
2. Motor power: As per supplier recommendations.
3. Protection: IP55-class (F) insulation – (B) temp rise
4. Power Supply: 380V/ 3ph / 50 Hz
Screening Collection Skips
A The Contractor shall supply number of skips for collecting screenings material carried
by the conveyor. The skips shall be fabricated from steel sheets of 6 mm thickness
coated and lined with corrosion resistant epoxy. The capacity of skip shall be not less
than 2m3.
B The skips shall be fitted with 4 steel wheels covered with hard rubber. At least two
wheels shall be provided with manual brake to prevent sliding in sloped ground.
3.28 Grit Scraper
Definitions
3.28.1.1 Grit
A The settleable solids load present in wastewater such as sand, gravel, cinders, metal
fragments not ameliorated by secondary treatment and/or sludge removal techniques
and capable of producing excessive wear on mechanical equipment.
3.28.1.2 Grit Separation
A The process of separating grit from wastewater by controlling the velocity of the
wastewater with aeration to suspend organics to separate the grit from the organic
solids by differential sedimentation and scour.
3.28.1.3 Grit Collection
A The process of gathering the separated grit in a hopper or other point of collection
[by mechanical equipment designed for the purpose]
3.28.1.4 Grit Removal
A The process of conveying grit out of the chamber from the point of collection in the
chamber to the indicated point of discharge. Grit removal equipment may accomplish
some dewatering.
Design Requirements
A Grit removal system shall be designed to separate, collect, remove, and deposit grit
at the indicated point of its discharge, within the area and at the elevations indicated.
Aerated Grit Removal System
A Grit shall be separated in an aerated grit chamber. Collection and removal of grit
shall be by travelling bridge with scrubber and airlift pump.
Vortex Type Grit Removal System
A Grit shall be separated in a vortex type grit removal system. Removal of grit shall be
by grit pump or airlift pump.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A Equipment and parts shall be packaged for shipment to prevent breakage, damage
or cause out-of-adjustment calibration, readings or controls.
B Materials delivered to the site shall be inspected for damage and shall be unloaded
and stored with a minimum of handling. Equipment and materials shall be stored
indoors, off the floor. Area shall be dry with adequate ventilation, free from dust or
water, and shall permit easy access for inspection and handling
Spare Parts
A Spare parts for the equipment specified above shall be furnished in the quantities
listed below. The spare parts shall be identical and interchangeable with the original
parts. The parts shall be furnished in wooden containers clearly marked with contents
on two sides and top. Where the number of spare part units required by the schedule
results in a fractional number of units, the number furnished shall be rounded off to
the next highest.
Description of Spare Part Unit Number of Spare Units Required as

Percentage of Part Units Installed
A. Aerated Grit System:
Diffusers 5 percent
B. Grit Pump:
One set of pump gland packing
One complete set of gaskets
One complete set of bearings, bushings,

sleeves and seals
Materials and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be standard commercial
products in regular production by the manufacturers and suitable for the required
service. Unless otherwise specified, structural steel shall conform to ASTM
A36/A36M hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM
A153/A153M. Submerged steel shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Unless
otherwise specified, cast iron shall conform to ASTM A48/A48M, Grade 30. Bronze
castings not otherwise specified shall conform to ASTM B30. Drives, lubrication, and
bearings shall be accessible from walkways at or above ground level
Aerated Grit Separation Equipment
A. Grit separation equipment shall include air piping and valves, swing diffuser holder
assembly, header pipes, hoist, and diffusers. Baffles shall be structural steel plate, 50
mm thick redwood, or manufacturer's standard. System shall receive air from an
external supply.
3.28.8.1 Air Piping
A. All interconnecting pipework between the blowers’ expansion joints and the main
header to the Grit Removal/Aeration tanks together with the necessary isolating
valves shall be supplied by the Contractor. Main headers from air blowers to Grit
Removal/Aeration tanks shall be of galvanized steel. Transmission main pipes from
main headers down and along each tank shall be of st.st 316. All submerged air pipe
branches from transmission mains shall be made of UPVC treated to prevent
degradation by ultra-violet light. The contractor shall submit detailed drawings of the
fixation of the air pipes inside the tanks.
1. Stainless steel piping shall conform to ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316,
Schedule 10.
2. Plastic piping shall conform to ASTM D1785, Class PVC 1220, Schedule 80.
Fittings shall be the same type and grade as the pipe and conform to ASTM
D2467.
3.28.8.2 Swing-Out Type Diffuser Holder Assembly
A. Assembly shall include an upper pivot joint with air control and shut-off valve, a drop
pipe with intermediate pivot joint, and a diffuser header. Upper pivot joint shall be of
cast iron or cast steel and shall have a trunnion type support for the rotary joint. Unit
shall have a base flange for mounting to a wall anchorage elbow, and joint shall rotate
on two bronze sleeve bearings, either permanently lubricated or with suitable grease
fittings for lubrication. Chloroprene or Buna N rubber O-ring gaskets shall be included
at each pivot bearing to ensure air and water tightness. Valve shall be butterfly type
and be suitable for air control with indicator markings for throttling and complete shut-
off. Butterfly valve shall conform to AWWA C504, shall have cast-iron or bronze body
and chloroprene rubber seat, and shall be lever or hand wheel operated.
B. Intermediate pivot joint shall be as specified for the upper joint, except that it shall
not have the integral valve and base flange. Threaded or flanged connections shall
be provided for the upper and lower hanger pipes. Bearings with O-ring seals shall
be as specified for the upper pivot joint. The intermediate pivot joint shall have a
locking device to allow positive locking in any position. Spacing of diffuser
assemblies in the basin and diffusers on the header shall be as recommended by
the diffuser manufacturer. Drilling and tapping of diffuser header pipe shall be such
as to make the diffuser level in the horizontal plane. Diffuser header shall
incorporate an adjustable stop on the wall side to prevent the diffuser from coming
into contact with the wall. A portable hoist shall be provided to raise and lower the
diffuser assembly. Hoist shall be expressly designed to be compatible with the
diffuser holder assembly and shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Hoist
shall be hydraulically operated, powered by an electric motor with quick clamping
arrangement to engage upper hanger pipe. The hoist shall be adequately powered
to raise the assembly from the tank. The hoist shall provide means of locking the
diffuser header in a raised position over the tank or the walkway.
3.28.8.3 Diffusers
A. Diffusers shall be of the non-porous nozzle or valve orifice type. Nozzle devices shall
be saddle mounted with stainless steel spring fasteners or thread mounted on the
diffuser header as recommended by the diffuser manufacturer. Nozzle orifice shall
be sized for the particular application to assure the proper range of exit velocity and
back pressure.
Vortex Type Grit Separation
A. Separation and collection equipment shall be installed in a concrete chamber.
Equipment shall include motor drive assembly, paddle drive tube; air lift pump, piping
and valves; and control box. System shall receive air from an external supply.
3.28.9.1 Design
A. Removal device shall have less than 6 mm head loss through the chamber. Influent
baffles, if required, shall be stainless steel installed according to equipment
manufacturer's recommendations. Grit shall be hydraulically scoured to remove

organics before it is airlifted to the separation equipment. Paddle agitator assembly
shall be geared to provide a rotational velocity
3.28.9.2 Mechanical Drive
A. Grit removal unit shall have variable pitch and depth paddles mounted onto a drive
torque tube bolted to the slewing bearing with integral gearing driven by the gear
head. Design of drive assembly shall be such as to permit sustained operation at the
continuous output torque rating without excessive wear and to develop twice the
continuous output torque rating without damage to or failure of the drive assembly
components.
1. Grit removal mechanism shall be powered by a helical gear motor with a
minimum service factor of 2.0. The motor shall be a totally enclosed fan-cooled
(TEFC) type, suitable for outside installations with normal starting torque and
low starting current, suitable for 380 volt, 50 Hz, 3 phase service, enclosed in
an anti-corrosion aluminum housing with degree of protection of IP65. Gear
motor shall be in accordance with AGMA, not be overloaded under any normal
operating conditions encountered and be designed for long life at 24 hours per
day service. Helical gearing shall be oil lubricated.
2. Reducer shall include anti-friction bearings and double lip high temperature oil
seals riding on precision ground shafts. Gears shall be made of hardened and
heat treated forged steel. Gear motor shall drive a gear head consisting of a
pinion driving a slewing bearing with integral gearing. Both pinion and slewing
bearing shall have a service factor of 5.0 or greater. Pinion shall be heat treated
and machined on all surfaces. Slewing bearing shall be no less than 475 mm
in diameter and shall have precision-ground, deep induction-hardened
raceway, chrome alloy steel balls separated by spacers and protected by seals.
Gears on the external ring and bearing shall be grease-packed in a heavy cast
iron-gear case. Slewing bearings and pinion shall be wear-resistant to
withstand 24 hours per day continuous service. The gear box shall have an
appropriately sized opening for the drive torque tube to the propeller. Bottom
opening shall have an air bell around the drive torque tube to prevent water
from entering the gear box. Top of gear box shall have a bolted flanged
connection for the airlift pipe.
Airlift Pump
A. Airlift type pump shall include an air pipe, educator, foot piece, tail pipe, air separator
and a vent pipe. The air pipe to the educator shall be of zinc-coated steel Schedule
40 of adequate size to discharge the required amount of liquid without excessive
pressure drop. An air control valve shall be provided on the air pipe to provide
accurate adjustment of the airlift discharge rate. Air control valve shall be a MSS SP-
80 globe valve, MSS SP-72 ball valve, or MSS SP-78 plug valve. Tail pipe below the
foot piece, the educator pipe, air separator and vent from it shall be of zinc-coated
steel. Fittings shall be of zinc-coated malleable iron or cast iron. Educator shall be
provided with a clean-out above the water level.
B. Airlift pump shall be installed so as to permit easy removal for maintenance.
C. The grit chamber shall be provided with sand air lift pumps of suitable capacity and
head for lifting the sand and grit from the hopper to the sand silos complete with all
necessary piping and valves.
D. The delivery pipe of each pump shall be complete with valves, dismantling pieces
and fittings.
E. Air lift type pump shall include an air pipe, foot piece, tail pipe, air separator and a
vent pipe. An air control valve shall be provided on the air pipe to provide accurate
adjustment of the air lift discharge rate.
F. The vertical pipe or updraft tube with auxiliary air pipes shall be installed vertically
with verticality tolerances within ±6 mm. A globe valve or ball valve shall be provided
for air control. The control valve shall be located at the deck level for easy access.
G. The vertical pipe shall be supported by an end flange which shall be bolted securely
to the deck concrete.
H. The sand silo shall volume shall be calculated and shall be made of welded sheet
steel not less than 6 mm thick and include all necessary equipment and access stairs
and platform, and shall include but not limited to the followings:
1. Support scaffolding in profile steel or tubing
2. Over flow piping
3. Drip water piping
4. Quick action gate valve
I. The silo shall be installed in such location and elevation that sufficient room is left
underneath the sand discharge outlet for a dump- truck to receive the sand for
disposal
Air Pipes for Grit Removal & Aeration Tanks
branches from transmission mains shall be made of UPVC Class C minimum treated
to prevent degradation by ultra-violet light. The contractor shall submit detailed
drawings of the fixation of the air pipes inside the tanks.
(1) Stainless steel piping shall conform to ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316,
Schedule 10.
(2) Plastic piping shall conform to ASTM D1785, Class PVC 1220, Schedule 80.
D2467.
3.29 Oil and Grease Skimmer
A. The grease removal system shall be designed to skim, collect, remove and drain
grease and oil to a container or skip for disposal.
B. Grease removal shall be achieved by the inclusion of automatically operated surface
skimmers which shall trap the grease on a beaching platform and a sweeping
mechanism shall be provided to remove the grease into a collecting pipe.
C. Surface skimmer can be mounted on grit scraper and the action of skimming shall
take place during the backward stroke of the carriage. The skimmer is to be
automatically lifted above the water level at the forward stroke.
D. The Contractor shall supply a slotted hot dipped galvanized steel pipe (or trough) of
minimum 200 mm diameter to be installed across the width of the grit chamber. The
axis of the pipe shall pass through the average water surface in the chamber.
E. This pipe (or trough) shall be closed from one end, while the other end shall pass
through the wall, and extended outside to transfer the collected oil and grease to an
oil separation chamber. Water shall be discharged to the site drainage network while
oil and grease shall be kept in the chamber for periodic removal using of a vortex
submersible pumping unit to trucks or tankers. All components of the oil/scum
collectors shall be stainless steel grade 316 L. Each skimmer shall be of sufficient
length to span the width of the tank.
3.30 Aeration Tank /SBR Tank
– Description
A. This Section covers the requirements for supplying all labor, materials, equipment
and services necessary to furnish and install a fully automatic sequencing batch
reactor (SBR) type domestic wastewater treatment system as it is specified herein.
B. The SBR shall be design to operate using the Intermittent Cycle Extended Aeration
System and shall include furnishing and installing the necessary equipment and
controls to provide an operating treatment system complete with air diffusion
equipment, decant mechanisms, blower systems, air control valves, waste sludge
pumps, submersible mixers, instrumentation, control panel.
C. The system shall come complete, and without restricting the generality of the
following, shall consist of:
1. Decanter Assemblies
2. Air Blower Packages including Pressure Transmitters and Gauges
3. Fine Bubble Disc Air Diffuser Assemblies per Basin
4. Air Flow Control Valves with Actuators
5. Sludge Wasting Pumps
6. System Control Panel
7. Dissolved Oxygen In-Tank Sensors with Local Transmitters
8. Primary Level Pressure Transducer Assemblies
9. Backup Level Float Assemblies
10. WAS Flow Meter
11. WAS TSS Meter
12. Various Intermediate Supports, Stilling Wells, Guide Rails, and Associated
Hardware as necessary.
13. Assembly Hardware as specified herein and as recommended by manufacturer
14. Spare Parts and Miscellaneous Equipment
D. Scope Notes:
1. Equipment furnished as work of this Section shall be as specified herein
2. All adhesive anchors, stud anchors, and expansion bolts necessary to anchor
equipment supplied by the SBR equipment manufacturer to concrete or
another rigid surface shall be furnished by the SBR manufacturer and installed
by the Contractor and be as shown on the SBR detail sheets or as specified
elsewhere.
3. All assembly hardware such as bolts, washers, nuts, and jam nuts shall be
furnished by the SBR manufacturer for installation by the Contractor.
4. Intermediate supports for SBR equipment, except valve and pump lift rail
extensions, shall be fabricated by the SBR manufacturer for installation by the
Contractor as shown on the Drawings.
5. Intermediate valve stem guides for SBR manufacturer supplied process valves
shall be furnished by the SBR manufacturer and installed by the Contractor.
6. Threaded rod and other pipe restraining devices shall be furnished and
installed by the Contractor.
7. Electrical power conductors, and control and float cables that are factory
attached to SBR equipment and devices shall be brought to the top of the
reactor wall and temporarily secured to handrailing by the Contractor. Electrical
installation and connections, including junction boxes and local disconnect
switches, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the local transmitters
for primary level elements and dissolved oxygen probes for frame mounting
and electrical connections.
- Quality Assurance
A. The system shall be furnished by one single Supplier (SBR Manufacturer). This
requires the Supplier to be responsible for the development, design, fabrication,
assembly, delivery and proper sustained automatic operation of all system equipment
in order to achieve the effluent water quality specified herein, but does not require
that all system equipment and accessories be the products of one single
manufacturer.
B. Consideration will only be given to Suppliers who can demonstrate that their system
complies with these specifications having had successful and documented
experience of the size, quality, performance and reliability to that specified, and who
can successfully demonstrate this criteria to the Engineer.
C. The Supplier shall have at least ten (10) years of experience in the design and
manufacturing of the specified system.
D. The Supplier shall prepare and submit to the Engineer three (3) copies of the
“Evaluation Documentation” as listed below. The information shall be in a form that
is neat, clear, precise, legible and computer drafted and prepared so as to allow the
Engineer to evaluate the proposed equipment. The “Evaluation Documentation” shall
be delivered within the technical bid submission documents. The “Evaluation
Documentation” shall consist of the following:
1. Process Diagram showing reactor size, pipe names, flow directions, pipe and
valve sizes, chemical injection points (if any), and location of every system
component.
2. Instrumentation Diagram showing loop names and loop descriptions.
3. Process calculations showing unit sizing, mass balance, hydraulic flow rates,
and chemical feed rates (if any).
4. Descriptive technical information for the proposed product(s). Descriptive
technical information shall include model numbers, type, sizes, weights,
performance data, and materials of construction. Include all major electrical
devices mounted inside the System Control Panel.
5. List of facilities showing facility name, active contact name and telephone
number, years in service, design conditions and parameters and design
engineer’s name and current telephone number of the company.
6. Equipment cuts showing dimensional data for all system components.

7. Cross sections of the system and media support method.
E. The Supplier shall state if he is in compliance with each and all Sections of the
Specifications. Any variance from the specified equipment shall be listed and a
description of each variance must be in letter form. Facsimile transmissions will not
be accepted.
F. Failure to submit the above listed in the technical submission package shall be cause
for non-evaluation and the product will not be considered for the project.
G. After Contract execution, submit shop drawings of the system as specified herein.
The Contractor shall remain fully responsible for all design revisions, including but
not limited to, the following: structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation
because of utilization of substitute equipment.
–- Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. The supplier shall package all hardware in suitably sized plastic envelopes with the
corresponding part number marked on the envelope. The supplier shall then package
all envelopes containing same size bolts, washers, nuts, anchors, clamps, etc. in a
suitably sized hard plastic pail with lid. The contents of each pail shall be marked on
the pail side such as ½” bolts, ¾” nuts, etc. This will enable the installing contractor
to keep inventory of like sized component hardware and to properly store hardware
during the installation process.
B. Hardware such as bolts, washers, nuts, etc. shall be furnished in adequate quantity
to install the system plus 2% extra to account for lost or defective hardware.
C. The SBR manufacturer shall provide a master parts list, packaged in a plastic
protector page holder. Provide three (3) copies of the master parts list, each in a
plastic holder.
D. Store all plastic pails on a common wooden pallet that can be moved about the site
and lowered into the tank. The storage system shall be maintained in a neat, orderly
fashion to allow the Engineer to properly observe the use of component hardware.
E. The installation drawings shall be folded and shipped in a plastic project case with
the title box showing. The project case shall be commercially purchased and be
suitably sized to store all installation drawings. Provide a duplicate set of installation
drawings (in a project case also) with the equipment shipment for use by the
Engineer.
F. The installation shall not be allowed to proceed until the Contractor has demonstrated
to the Engineer that the hardware will be properly inventoried. The Contractor shall
replace pail lids at the end of each day.
G. Immediately store all fragile, electronic devices indoors until ready for installation.
Immediately store the spare parts crate indoors. Keep all spare parts in the crate until
the manufacturer’s representative is onsite to inventory the components with the
Contractor. The manufacturer’s field report shall address the status of the spare parts
delivered to the site.
– Performance and Design Requirements
A. The manufacturer of the SBR system shall be responsible for the proper design of
their system, including but not limited to: diffused aeration equipment and blowers,
transfer pumps, mixers, decanters and controls. All equipment shall perform as
specified and the completed installation shall operate in accordance with the
requirements specified herein.
B. The aeration system shall be designed to provide oxygen distribution to the entire
basin (reactor). It shall also ensure mixing to promote suspension of all biological
solids in the basin without the introduction of air. No change in the basin geometry
shall be allowed. The velocity and mixing in the basin shall be sufficient to ensure
complete biological solids suspension and dispersion.
C. The SBR aeration system shall be capable of providing mixing such that when
operated under any combination of the specified design conditions, it shall suspend
all biological floc and mixed liquor suspended solids throughout the liquid mass in
each basin. The aeration system shall further be capable of maintaining complete
aerobic conditions and suspension of all biological floc and suspended solids
throughout the liquid mass in each basin.
- Submittals
The following documents shall be submitted:
A. Technical descriptive data for each equipment item in the system showing model
number(s), sizes, capacities, weights, horsepower, motor and voltage information,
and similar type information. Catalog cuts are acceptable if they contain the
necessary information.
B. Scaled plan of the reactors with location dimensions for all reactor-mounted
equipment. Establish point(s) of reference and dimension the location of all
equipment from these point(s). Show the location of primary element transmitters.
C. Complete process calculations.
D. Diffuser assembly details and technical specifications for the diffuser.
E. Adhesive anchor plan for moored-in-place equipment.
F. Equipment details for each system component.
G. Field wiring diagram for each motor operated piece of equipment and valve and all
primary element transmitters.
H. System control panel schematic wiring diagram.
I. Control panel layout diagrams for the panel’s interior and exterior.
J. Blower arrangement plan and section view.
K. Catalog cuts for each component of the blower package.
L. Legend nameplate details for control panel switches, lights and panel mounted
equipment.
M. Catalog cuts for every electrical device mounted inside and on the face of the control
panel such as: breakers, terminal blocks, switches, level display unit, pressure
display unit, pilot lights, programmable logic controller, operator interfaces, etc.
N. Programmable logic controller and operator interface information.
O. List of operator field adjustable set points/control points.
P. List of alarm conditions annunciated through the operator interface.
Q. Color screen shots of each graphic display of the operator interface with remarks to
describe the color changing sequence.
R. Storage, handling and installation instructions.
S. List of spare parts and miscellaneous equipment to be provided under this Section.
T. Process and Equipment Warranty Certificate
U. Manufacturer Start-up Report (MSR).

V. Submit manufacturer’s requirements for testing and certifying all components and
equipment for a three tank SBR system with the ability to only operate one SBR tank
at a time. Additionally, submit detailed storage and protection requirements for all
components of this SBR basin system when one or two basins may be off line for a
year or more.
W. Operations and Maintenance Manual A complete process chapter shall be prepared
specifically for this project.
X. In addition to the Operations and Maintenance Manual, prepare a condensed, pocket
size, Operator Field Guide containing the salient points of SBR process control. The
guide shall be commercially bound and printed. Fifteen (15) final copies shall be
provided. The guide shall be protected with front and back heavy stock covers. As a
minimum the guide shall contain the following:
1. List SBR equipment part and model numbers
2. Brief explanation of each phase
3. Default cycle structure diagram
4. “What if” type troubleshooting guide
5. Sample calculations for sludge age, F/M ratio, SVI
6. Step-by-step procedure for editing the blower and phase times via the operator
interface
7. Brief explanation of the cause and effect for each storm flow condition.
8. Emergency and department telephone numbers that the Owner may contact
for assistance with the SBR equipment, including after normal working hours,
weekends, and holidays.
– SBR Control Panel
A. Scope of Work
1. The SBR supplier to furnish a complete SBR control system as a part of the
main control system of the plant. This shall include a master control panel with
a Graphic Operator Interface, Programmable Logic Controller, Motor Starters,
Variable Frequency Drives, Control Switches, and Pilot lights.
2. Local control stations shall be included for the Decanters.
3. Motor Starters and Variable Frequency Drives shall be included in a separate
Motor Control Center.
B. Control Panel
1. The specification of the control panel including (PLC, HMI, UPS..,etc) shall
follow the description contained in item 5.13 chapter 5 (Measurement
Instrumentation & Control) of Volume 2 of this tender documents.
SBR Control Logic
A. Decanter speed will be controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) which
controls the speed of the decanter actuator motor. The VFD shall be microprocessor
based, all-digital, compact style, low-noise PWM type. It shall allow programming of
the torque curve, speed and voltage, over current and overload protection. It shall
have protective warning and diagnosis functions. The unit shall have programmed
automatic fault restarts and low power ride through. The control unit display shall be
mounted in an easily accessible location. The unit shall have a NEMA 1 rating
suitable for mounting in a panel, on a wall, or in an MCC. The VFD will be setup,
programmed, and post commissioned supported by Sanitaire personnel. The speed
is determined by the PLC in order to maintain a uniform vertical lowering of the
decanter weir. The maximum decanter travel is controlled by magnetic limit switches
mounted on the decanter actuator. In addition, there shall be a decanter local control
station for each basin consisting of a 4-position switch enclosed in a NEMA 4X
enclosure. The local station allows manual raise and lower control as well as off and
automatic control. The VFD must be properly wired and programmed so that manual
raise and lower control does not require any input from the PLC.
B. The SBR controls shall operate on a time cycle basis. The process elapsed time will
be displayed on the display terminal. Two tanks will operate on a complimentary basis
so that while one tank is in aeration the other tank is in settling or decant phase. The
cycle will automatically adjust for high flow conditions to increase the throughput
capacity in high flow conditions. In automatic operation, the processor shall at all
times maintain the proper sequence of operation even in the event of power failure.
All phases of the process and equipment shall be interlocked so that the process
cannot be upset. If an equipment failure takes place an alarm will be displayed on
the operator terminal until cleared. The display will indicate the time of the alarm and
status. Time critical sequences and other process variables can be adjusted via the
operator interface terminal as follows: [1] Aeration blower run time, [2] The waste
sludge pump start time and running time, [3] The decanter lowering rate, [4] Special
process variables such as DO or SIMS control setpoints if required.
C. “BLOWER SPEED - REMOTE-LOCAL” selector switch for the control panel, common
to all blowers, that when placed in the “LOCAL” position the speed of the blowers
shall be adjustable only at the control panel as specified herein below. When placed
in the “REMOTE” position the blower speed shall only be adjustable via the blower
MCC sections.
D. When in the “RUN” or “AUTO” mode, a manual blower speed adjustment, in percent
of full speed with corresponding hertz indicated, shall be used by the operator to
select a blower speed.
1. Operator interface up and down controls shall be used to adjust the speed of
each blower and “enter” shall be provided to set the speed at the indicated
value.
2. The PLC shall generate a corresponding 4-20 mA signal that will be sent to the
VFD controller in the corresponding MCC room. Speed adjustment shall be
provided for each blower.
E. Provide a lead blower selector function in the PLC that allows the operator to select
the “LEAD” blower via the operator interface.
1. The operator shall be able to designate any of the blowers as the “LEAD”
blower by inputting the blower number into the appropriate input fields. Provide
a set-up screen via the interface to allow the operator to make these selections.
2. The operator shall also be able to select lead blower selection as
“ALTERNATE” which will automatically alternate the lead blower selection if the
lead blower fails to start.
3. Provide the following alarm conditions through the operator interface for each
blower:
a. MOTOR OVER TEMPERATURE.
b. HIGH DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE.
c. HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE AND LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE.
d. FAILED TO START.
4. Provide control logic such that in the event the “LEAD” blower fails to start, then
the “LAG” blower shall run.
5. Provide control logic such that if any blower selector switch is in the OFF
position, the program will not include that blower in the automatic lead blower
alternation or lag blower activation.
F. The control panel shall be designed to control the system discharge flow rate as
specified herein:
1. “RUN” and “OFF” run pilot lights for each pump.
2. “PUMP SPEED - REMOTE-LOCAL” selector switch for the control panel,
common to all pumps, that when placed in the “LOCAL” position the speed of
the pumps shall be adjustable only at CP-1 as specified herein below. When
placed in the “REMOTE” position the pump speed shall only be adjustable via
the pump MCC sections.
3. “RUN-OFF-AUTO” selector switch for each pump; i.e. “PUMP NO. 1”. Each
pump is to be controlled by its dedicated “RUN-OFF-AUTO” selector switch. In
the “RUN” position the pump shall be activated by the operator until the low
level shut off level is reached as measured by either on-line wet well level
probe. In the “AUTO” position the pump shall be controlled and be operated as
specified hereinafter.
4. When in the “RUN” or “AUTO” mode, a manual pump speed adjustment, in
percent of full speed with corresponding hertz indicated, shall be used by the
operator to select a pump speed.
a. Operator interface up and down controls shall be used to adjust the speed
of each pump and “enter” shall be provided to set the speed at the
indicated value.
b. The PLC shall generate a corresponding 4-20 mA signal that will be
sent to the VFD controller in the MCC room. Speed adjustment shall be
provided for each pump.
– Instrumentation and Process Control
A. The SBR supplier to furnish, configure and commission the instrumentation for the
SBR system. In addition, the SBR supplier shall furnish the control algorithms
detailed below to control the process with the supplied instrumentation.
B. Level Measurement
1. Each basin shall be equipped with a level instrument. The level instrument shall
indicate and send signals of different high/low water levels inside the basins.
The specification of the level instruments shall follow the description contained
in chapter 5 (Measurement Instrumentation & Control) of Volume 2 of this
tender documents.
2. Level signals shall be used to control the high flow cycle time and to reduce the
aeration time in case of extreme high flows.
C. Terminal/Controller
1. The analyzer shall be a digital multi-channel, multi-parameter system capable
of controlling up to 20 sensors, in any combination, for the determination of
water and wastewater parameters.
a. The controller must be configurable to include the following
measurements: COD, TOC, DOC, SAC, BOD, pH, ORP, NH4, NO3,
Conductivity, DO, Turbidity, TSS, Temperature and Sludge Level

Monitor.
b. Communication between controller and sensor shall be digital, allowing
cable runs up to 1,000 m without further amplification.
c. The system will provide up to 20 programmable analog outputs (max.
load 500 ohms) and 20 programmable alarm relays (rated to 5A at
250VAC).
d. Enclosure is NEMA-4X rated.
e. Entire system including the sensors shall have built in lightning and surge
protection.
f. Ambient operating temperature +8°C to +50°C.
g. System diagnostics shall be standard.
h. System shall also have a USB interface port, data storage capability, and
3 levels of security.
i. System must have integrated lightening and overvoltage protection.
j. Backup controller function to increase reliability.
2. All instruments associated with the SBR system must be connected to the
terminal/controller communication network back to the main SBR control panel.
3. Universal Mounting Kits with all necessary hardware shall be provided for each
sensor.
4. A sunshield and mounting bracket shall be provided for the system
display/controller and each local component to be mounted outside.
D. Dissolved Oxygen Controller
1. Each basin shall be equipped with a dissolved oxygen instrument.
2. The specification of the DO instruments shall follow the description contained
in chapter 5 (Measurement Instrumentation & Control) of Volume 2 of this
tender documents.
3. The dissolved oxygen signal shall be displayed at the main control panel
display unit and be an input to the PLC. The PLC, using a control algorithm will
output a 4-20ma signal to control the air flow out of the blower. The control
system shall control the airflow to provide only the amount of air required to
maintain the dissolved oxygen set point..
E. Portable Suspended Solids System
1. The SBR supplier to furnish one (1) portable suspended solids system which
shall consist of a minimum two major components, the analyzer and the sensor.
2. The specification of the portable suspended solids system shall follow the
description contained in chapter 5 (Measurement Instrumentation & Control) of
Volume 2 of this tender documents.
3. The portable unit shall be used for analyzing suspended solids and blanket
interfaces in the reactor.
3.31 Positive Displacement Blowers
A. The contractor shall provide all labor, material and equipment to furnish and install
the positive displacement blower systems as specified herein for the aeration basins
and grit removal tanks.
B. Blower and accessories shall be furnished as a complete assembled package and

must include all interconnecting piping, instrumentation and supports needed to ship
the assembly as a complete unit. The blower packager shall be able to show that
similar units have been in successful operation for five years.
C. Each blower package shall include the following components:
1. Positive displacement blower
2. Motor with swing base
3. V-Belt drive
4. Sound Enclosure
5. 380V enclosure ventilation fan
6. Discharge flexible expansion joints
7. Drive guard
8. Base frame with integrated discharge silencer
9. Inlet silencer with integral filter
10. Pressure relief valve
11. Swing type check valve
12. Discharge pressure gauge
13. Filter differential pressure indicator
14. Temperature gauge (discharge)
15. Vibration isolators
16. Spare parts
17. PTC Thermistors
Guarantee and Warranty
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the bare blower being supplied against all defects in
workmanship and materials for a period of twelve (12) months from date of startup.
B. All other package components shall be warranted for a period of twelve (12) months
from date of startup, not to exceed eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for proper storage of the equipment so as to
remain in “as shipped” condition. If the equipment remains in storage at the job site
for longer than six (6) months before installation, the contractor shall provide factory
service personnel for a complete inspection of the equipment. Any work necessary
to restore the equipment to “as shipped” condition shall be the responsibility of the
contractor.
Blower Construction
A. Blower shall be vertically mounted, positive displacement rotary type with top inlet
and bottom outlet.
B. Blower shall be V-belt driven by a motor.
C. All four rotor shaft support locations shall incorporate large, heavy-duty, full
complement, cylindrical roller bearings with PEEK cages, designed with at least 5-
times the dynamic capacity of ball bearings. Ball bearings shall not be allowed
Blower Casing
A. The casing shall be made of high strength, close grained, cast iron, and shall be
adequately ribbed to prevent casing deflection and facilitate cooling. Casing shall be
of EN GG 25 material.
Rotors and Shaft
A. The rotors shall be precision machined out of a one piece casting made of EN GGG
50 material. Stub shafts or two-piece impellers shall not be allowed.
B. The rotor assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO standard
1940/1- Q2.5 (turbine rotor). Modifications to the face of the rotors for balancing
purposes are not acceptable.
C. The rotors shall be a tri-lobe design in order to minimize pulsation and noise.
Gears
A. The rotor timing gears shall be precision machined and ground from alloy steel made
from case hardened 16 MnCr5 material.
B. Each timing gear shall be straight cut and beveled to quality standard 5f 21, which
will eliminate axial bearing loads and ensure long life as well as quiet operation.
Helical gears, which cause axial loading, shall not be allowed.
C. Each timing gear shall be manufactured in accordance with:
1. DIN 3960, Specifications for Spur Gear Sets
2. DIN 3961 & DIN 3962, Tolerances for Spur Gear Mesh
3. DIN 3964, Specifications for Shaft Centering
D. The timing gear set shall be taper-mounted on the rotors. Keyed, hub mounted, taper-
pinned, or splined shaft timing gear mounting designs are not acceptable.
Lubrication
A. Both the gear end and the drive end of the blowers shall be oil splash lubricated via
a disc slinger for minimal maintenance and long service life. Grease lubricated
bearings in the blower are not acceptable.
B. The lubrication design shall ensure adequate lubrication of the timing gears and
bearings.
C. The drive-end and gear-end oil chambers must not be interconnected and each oil
chamber shall have a domed design sight glass to allow visual inspection of oil level
and oil condition, viewable from the front of the blower.
D. Blower to be factory filled with a synthetic lubricating fluid that is rated for the design
conditions specified.
Rotor Seal Assembly
A. Each rotor shall include one labyrinth seal assembly on each end, four assemblies in
total per blower. Each seal assembly shall consist of the following;
1. Oil splash guard ring.
2. Shaft guide wear sleeve with vent holes located between the dual air and oil
ring seals. Wear sleeve shall protect the blower casing.
3. Four piston ring type labyrinth seals made from heat treated GG/42CrMo4
material. Two seals located on the air side and two seals located on the oil side
of the grooved rotor sleeve. The use of rubber lip seals shall not be allowed.
4. Grooved rotor sleeve which will protect the rotor shaft and be used to hold the
four piston ring seals.
Input Shaft Seal Assembly:
A. The input drive shaft seal shall be a high temperature radial lip type seal made from
Viton elastomer. The seal shall prevent oil leakage from where the input shaft goes
thru the drive end covers
B. The seal design shall incorporate a replaceable wear sleeve on the input drive shaft.
Drive System
A. Each blower shall be driven by a multiple V-belt drive system with a 1.4 service factor.
A two-part OSHA approved drive guard shall be provided for each blower.
Motor
A. Motor shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest
revised editions of NEMA MG-1, IEC, DIN, ISO, IEEE, ANSI, and AFBMMA
standards as applicable and shall be capable of continuous operation. Motor must
meet or exceed Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA 2007) standards for
NEMA Premium efficiency. It shall also be marked with a Department of Energy
Certification Compliance Number to assure compliance. Motor shall comply with Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC or equivalent and be UL listed.
B. Motor shall confirm to the following:
1. Motor voltage: 380v/ 3ph/ 50hz
2. Type: Squirrel cage induction
3. Speed: Single
4. Torque: Constant
5. Service factor: 1.15
6. Enclosure: TEFC
7. Mounting: Horizontal
8. Speed: up to 3,500 rpm @ 50 hz (maximum)
9. Design: A
10. Duty cycle: continuous (24 hours a day)
11. Winding insulation: F
12. Temperature rise: B
13. Thermal motor protection: Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) thermistors
(one per winding) wired in series. The use of thermostats is not allowed
14. Connection of the PTC thermistors to the control system and signal processing
is not part of the blower manufacturer’s scope of supply.
15. Conduit box location: Top
16. Wiring Connection: Terminal strip inside conduit box. Use of wire nuts for
connection of motor wiring to power source shall not be allowed.
17. Bearing L10 life: >40,000 hours
18. Bearing lubrication: Grease
19. Bearing type:
a. ≤ 40HP: Permanently greased

b. ≥ 50HP: Regreaseable,
c. Lubrication fittings must be located towards the front of the blower
package so that both bearings can be safely lubricated while the blower
package is running.
20. Grease drain holes to be closed for protection of the environment. A spent
grease cavity in the bearing cover should be large enough to hold spent grease
required for 40,000 operating hours.
21. Bearing design: Cantilever forces (belt drive)
Sound Enclosure Ventilation Fan Motor:
A. Motor voltage: 380V/3ph/50Hz
B. Motor shall be UL listed
C. Motor starter/ overload protection is the responsibility of the control system provider.
D. The fan motor should turn “on” when the main motor starts and turn “off” 10 minutes
after the main motor stops. Controlling the fan motor via a thermostat shall not be
allowed.
E. Accessories
1. Pressure Relief Valve
a. The relief valve(s) shall be factory installed within sound enclosure. Relief
valve may not be shipped loose for field installation in the discharge
piping.
b. The relief valve(s) shall be spring type and must be sized for 100% of the
design flow specified. Weighted relief valves shall not be used.
c. The relief valve(s) shall be set to protect the blower from excessive
differential pressure based on the design conditions specified. A seal
shall be affixed that must be broken if set point is changed.
d. The relief valve(s) exhaust shall be vented out of the sound enclosure.
Exhaust vented into the sound enclosure shall not be allowed.
e. The relief valve shall be ASME Section IIIV, UV, CE, and PED certified.
2. Check Valve
a. A check valve to prevent back flow through the blower shall be factory
installed and not shipped loose for field installation in the discharge
piping.
b. The check valve flapper shall be swing type made from a steel disc
embedded in a high temperature silicone elastomer. The valve shall be
designed so that, in the event of failure, the valve element is retained in
the valve housing. Split disc or center hinged designs shall not be used.
c. The check valve capacity shall exceed the blower package’s maximum
discharge pressure and temperature.
Flexible Connector
A. An elastomeric compensator/flex connector shall be provided to isolate the
connection of the blower package to the self-supporting system piping. Restraining
rods shall not be used. Flex connectors located between the bare blower and
silencers shall not be allowed.
B. The flexible connector capacity shall exceed the blower package’s maximum
discharge pressure and temperature.
C. Discharge connection
1. 4” and smaller connection, a web reinforced silicone rubber sleeve with
corrosion resistant clamps shall be provided.
2. 6” and larger connection, a ANSI/DIN flanged arch-type EPDM web reinforced
connector shall be provided.
Blower Instrumentation Gauges
A. Discharge pressure gauge
1. The discharge pressure gauge shall measure the pressure at the discharge of
the blower.
2. The discharge pressure gauge shall be dual unit (English – PSI / Metric – Bar)
with a range of 0 – 23 psi (0 – 1.6 bar). Minimum dial diameter shall be 2 ½”,
made with a stainless steel case and be glycerin filled for pulsation dampening.
B. Discharge temperature gauge with adjustable switch
1. The discharge temperature gauge shall measure the temperature at the
discharge of the blower package.
2. The discharge temperature gauge shall be single unit (Metric - ºC) with a range
from (0 – 200ºC) and include an adjustable set point dial. Minimal dial diameter
shall be 2 ½”, made with a black plastic case and have a liquid filled measuring
system that is converted by a Bourdon tube into a rotary movement of the
pointer. The rotary movement of the pointer spindle shall operate a SPDT
microswitch through a lever system. Voltage rating up 220v, 5amps.
3. The high temperature set point shall be as recommended by the blower
manufacturer.
4. Connection of the switch to the control system is not part of the blower
manufacturer’s scope of supply. The switch shall be wired to shut down the
blower package when actuated.
C. Filter differential pressure gauge
1. The filter differential pressure gauge shall measure the pressure difference
from ambient to the back side of the filter that is integral to the blower
package’s inlet silencer. When the filter starts to become dirty, the resistance
shall be shown on a resettable red dial indicating when the filter shall be
changed.
Oil Drains
A. An oil drain from the blower drive-end and gear-end lubricating oil sumps shall be
separately piped to the front of the blower base with flexible tubing. Common fill and
drain shall not be allowed.
B. Each oil drain shall include a drain valve installed for ease of maintenance. The drain
valves shall be 90° stainless steel ball valves and include a fully retained gasketed
threaded cap to prevent accidental discharge of the blower lubricant.
Vibration Isolators
A. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the base frame with integrated
discharge silencer and sound enclosure skid to prevent transmission of vibration to
the foundation.
B. A ground wire shall be installed between the blower base and the sound enclosure
base to allow for grounding of the complete blower package.
Spare Parts
A. The equipment supplier shall deliver the following spare parts for each blower size:
1. One-year supply of oil/grease (under normal operating conditions)
2. One (1) set of V-belts of each size
3. One (1) filter element for each size air intake filter
B. All of the above parts shall be provided as spare parts and shall be packaged for
potential long-term dry storage.
Installation, Startup and Training
A. The blower manufacturer will furnish services of a factory-based engineer for one (1)
eight (8) hour day to check the blower installation, make any field adjustments
necessary to insure proper mechanical operation, and instruct plant operations
personnel on equipment supplied.
B. The blower manufacturer shall submit a written report for record certifying that
equipment has been satisfactorily installed and lubricated.
C. Furnish the services of a manufacturer’s authorized representative, who will instruct
plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the blower package. All
procedures shall be covered including preventive maintenance, method of controlling
the blower package and troubleshooting.
Factory Tests:
A. Parts must be inspected as part of a strict ISO 9001:2008 quality control program.
B. All critical dimensions of the blower components provided by the manufacturer shall
be verified and documented prior to assembly.
C. Each blower provided by the manufacturer shall be tested per ISO 1217, Annex B.
D. Each blower provided by the manufacturer shall be operated at its maximum rated
speed and differential pressure for fifteen (15) minutes.
E. On completion of final assembly of the packaged blower and prior to shipment, each
packaged blower shall be mechanically run for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes.
F. Each blower package provided by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed to provide
performance to ISO 1217, Annex C
G. Certified slip test results shall be submitted for the engineer’s review
Air Pipes for Grit Removal & Aeration Tanks
branches from transmission mains shall be made of UPVC Class C minimum treated
to prevent degradation by ultra-violet light. The contractor shall submit detailed
drawings of the fixation of the air pipes inside the tanks.
(1) Stainless steel piping shall conform to ASTM A312/A312M, Type 316,
Schedule 10.
(2) Plastic piping shall conform to ASTM D1785, Class PVC 1220, Schedule 80.
D2467.
3.32 – Air Control Valves
A. The SBR supplier to furnish motor operated air flow control valves to control aeration
in the SBR basins.
B. Construction – Valves
1. The valves shall be butterfly valves, wafer body style, EPDM-seat, tight-closing
type for installation between two (2) ANSI Class 125/150 standard flanges.
2. The valves shall be rated at 50 psi (345 kPa) and provide drop tight shutoff at
differentials up to 50 psi.
3. Valve bodies shall be cast iron (ASTM A126, Class B) and have two flange bolt
guides to center the body in the pipeline. Valves shall be provided with power
actuators.
4. The seat shall be tongue-and-grove design and act as a body liner to prevent
flow from contacting the body casting. The seat shall also provide a positive
seal without use of flange gaskets. Seats shall be of EPDM suitable for use
with compressed air and shall be field replaceable.
5. The disc shall be aluminum bronze (ASTM B148-954). The disc-to-shaft
connections shall be direct drive double “D” design requiring no disc screws or
pins to connect shaft to disc. Outside diameter of disc shall be designed that
when opened, it will not interfere with adjacent piping.
6. Shafts shall be one piece and shall be 416 stainless steel (ASTM A582 Type
416). Shafts shall be finish ground to minimize bearing and shaft seal wear.
Shaft seals shall be provided to prevent leakage and to protect bearings from
internal or external corrosion.
7. Valves shall be furnished with self-adjusting stem seal and non-corrosive
Acetal bushings for smooth, low torque operation.
C. Construction – Electric Motor Actuators
1. All electric actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C-
540.
2. Power actuated valves shall be furnished with electric motor actuators. The
valve actuators are to be sized for design pressure with flow in reverse direction
plus a 1.5 safety factor. The actuators shall include, geared travel limit
switches, torque limit switches, manual handwheel, condensation heater,
terminals for motor power and controls and drive nut.
3. The motor shall be specifically designed for actuator service. The motor will be
of the induction type with class F insulation and protected by means of thermal
switches imbedded in the motor windings. Motor enclosure will be totally
enclosed, non-ventilated.
4. The entire actuator enclosure should be NEMA 4 watertight.
5. Travel limit switches will be provided to de-energize the motor control circuit
when the actuator reaches the limits of travel in the open and close directions.
6. Mechanical dial position indicator will be furnished on all valves.
7. The motor shall have an operating speed adjustment.
3.33 – Fine Bubble Aeration

A. Furnish all materials, equipment, services, and testing for the fine bubble aeration
system.
B. Equipment Components Included
1. Stainless steel droplegs, supports, and anchors.
2. PVC manifolds, air distributors, diffuser holders, and retainer rings
3. Bolts, nuts and gaskets for aeration system flange connections.
4. Air distributor purge systems.
5. Membrane disc diffusers with integral O-ring gaskets.
C. System Design and Performance
1. Design aeration system to transfer the required designed amount of oxygen
per day in clean water at 14.7 PSI, 20○C and zero dissolved oxygen at the
specified submergence, air rate and pressure.
2. Design air distributors with centerline spacing not to exceed 4 feet to maximize
oxygen transfer efficiency and mixing efficiency and to minimize solids
deposition between air distributors.
D. Materials, Fabrication and Finishing
1. Stainless Steel – Pipe, Fittings and Supports
a. Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of
304L stainless steel with a 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240, 554, 774,
778.
b. Fabricate non-welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of
304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.
c. Welds & Welding Procedure
1) Weld in the factory using latest standards according to AWS.
Continuously weld both sides of face rings and flanges to eliminate
potential for crevice corrosion.
d. Corrosion Protection and Finishing clean all welded stainless steel
surfaces and welds after fabrication by using the following procedure:
1) Pre-clean outside and finish clean all interior and exterior welds and
piping by full immersion pickling and rinse with water to remove
all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate a uniform
corrosion resistant chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section
6.2.11, Table A2.1 Annex A2 and Section 8.3.
2. Natural Rubber – Furnish all fixed and expansion joint O-ring gaskets of natural
rubber/SBR with a Shore A durometer of 45 ± 5.
3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – Pipe and Fittings
a. Produce all PVC pipe and fittings from PVC compound with a minimum
tensile strength of 7000 psi.
b. Factory solvent weld all PVC joints. Field solvent welding will NOT be
permitted.
4. EPDM - Membrane Diffusers and Gaskets
a. Manufacture circular membrane diffuser discs with integral O-ring of
EPDM synthetic rubber compound with precision die formed slits.

Thermoplastic materials (i.e. plasticized PVC or polyurethane) are not
acceptable.
E. Fine Bubble Aeration System Components
1. Droplegs - Provide a stainless steel dropleg from the air main connection to the
dropleg connection on the manifold.
2. Manifolds – Provide PVC manifolds for connection to the air distribution
headers.
a. Fabricate manifolds with 4 inch diameter fixed threaded union positive
locking anti rotational or flanged joints for connection to the air
distributors.
3. Air Distributors and Diffuser Holders - Provide 4 inch diameter air distributors
perpendicular to the air manifold
a. Fabricate distributors with single diffuser holders solvent welded to the
crown of the air distributor for complete air seal and strength.
b. Provide 4-inch diameter threaded removable end caps complete with
gasket, threaded coupling and end plate for clean out at the end of each
distributor.
4. Air Distributor and Manifold Connection Joints
a. Join air distributor sections with positive locking anti rotational fixed
threaded union or flange type joints for all submerged header joints to
prevent blow apart and rotation.
5. Supports- Provide each section of manifold and air distributor with a minimum
of two (2) supports.
a. Limit maximum support spacing to 2.5 m.
b. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces
over a temperature range of 50 oC. P P
6. Diffuser Assemblies - Furnish diffuser assemblies including diffuser, diffuser

gasket, holder, retaining ring and air flow control orifice.
a. Membrane Diffuser
1) Incorporate an integral check valve into the membrane diffuser.
b. Design and test diffusers for a dynamic wet pressure (DWP) of 12 inches
at 20% water column at 1700 LPH/diffuser and 0.05 m submergence.
c. Visual Uniformity – Observe diffusers for uniform air distribution across
the active surface of the diffuser at 1700 LPH/diffuser and 0.05 m
submergence. Active surface is defined as the perforated horizontal
projected area of the diffuser.
7. Diffuser Holders and Retainer Rings
a. Design holder with air flow control orifice. Holder to provide peripheral
support for the diffuser.
b. Design retainer ring to seal the diffuser and O-ring in the holder to prevent
air leakage around gasket.
c. Design retainer rings threads with minimum cross section of 3mm and
allow for one complete turn to engage threads.
8. Anchor Bolts: Provide a mechanical 304 SS expansion anchor bolts with a

pullout safety factor of 4.
9. Liquid Purge System: Provide a liquid purge system to drain the entire
submerged aeration piping system for each aeration grid including airlift purge
eductor line and control valve. The purge system shall use a solenoid valve for
automatic operation coordinated with the SBR operation.
10. Package spare parts in a separate container clearly marked as “Spare Parts”
and provide inventory list on exterior of the container.
3.34 – Decant Mechanism
A. The SBR supplier to furnish decanter assemblies with drive actuator for each SBR
basin. The decanters shall be designed to remove clarified effluent.
B. Design Parameters
1. The decanter weir and trough shall always be visible from the basin side wall
thereby providing the operator with a visual check of the effluent quality during
the decant phase of the cycle.
2. The decanter shall be parked above the design top water level during aeration
and settling phases, thereby eliminating any possibility of solids carryover
during these phases. Decanters floating on the liquid surface during aeration
and settling, with the weir of entry ports submerged below the surface shall not
be allowed.
3. At top park position, the decanter shall provide ‘fail safe’ overflow protection in
the event of a power failure. Settled supernatant will flow via gravity, under the
scum guard, over the weir, and into the decanters.
4. The decanter shall be designed with a scum guard mechanism to prevent the
discharge of scum and floatables during decanter or overflow operation.
5. All in-basin seals and bearings shall be maintenance free.
6. Decanter assembly components requiring routine maintenance shall be
accessible from the walkway and shall not require confined space entry into
the basin.
7. The drive mechanism or actuator shall be designed for a continuous duty,
variable speed mode of operation thereby producing a uniform effluent flow rate
throughout the decant phase.
8. Actuator limit switches and motor shall be integrated with process control
system to prevent blower operation during the decant phase of the cycle.
9. The decanter assembly shall not require effluent valves, valve vaults, flex joints,
throttling capabilities, or dewatering supports.
C. Equipment
1. The decanters shall be supplied with the following components:
a. Upper collection trough with integral, overflow weir
b. Scum guard mechanism
c. Downcomer pipes
d. Collector pipe (for decanters >2 m)
e. Swivel Joint or Seals & bearings, as required
f. Electro-mechanical actuator
2. The drive mechanism or actuator shall consist of an electro-mechanical screw

jack with protective boot and end position limit switches. The actuator shall be
equipped with a VFD rated motor suitable for continuous duty in an outdoor,
moist environment. The motor shall be driven by a variable frequency drive
allowing the controls to vertically lower the decanter at a continuous and
uniform rate.
3. The decanter shall not require spring loaded valves, flexible joints, and/or
throttling effluent valves to control discharge rate.
4. The decanter must be self-supporting when the basin is drained.
D. Materials
1. All in-basin welded decanter components, except seals and bearings, shall be
constructed of corrosion and ultra-violet resistant stainless steel. All fasteners
shall be constructed of stainless steel.
2. The decanter seals and bearings shall be constructed of maintenance free,
synthetic materials for longest possible service life. All seals and bearings shall
be shipped factory assembled, simplifying installation.
E. Fabrication and Finishing
1. All decanter welding must be conducted by welders certified under ASME Code
9.
2. All joints to be finish tested for integrity by either air pressure (200 mbar) or dye
penetrate methods.
3. All finished decanter units to be fee of abrasions, damage, flaws, carbon
contamination and discoloration. All weld burn and discoloration shall be
removed with pickle paste. All stainless steel surfaces shall be passivated and
shall have a pleasing and uniform passivated appearance. Decanters shall be
power washed for final cleaning prior to shipment.
3.35 – Waste Sludge Pumps
A. The SBR supplier to furnish submersible non-clog wastewater pump(s), in each SBR
basin. Leak detectors shall be used to sense water presence in the oil and stator
housings.
B. Equipment: Each pump shall be equipped with a submersible electric motor with
submersible cable (SUBCAB) suitable for submersible pump application. The power
cable shall be sized according to NEC and IEC standards. The pump shall be
supplied with a mating cast iron 3-inch discharge connection. Each pump shall be
fitted with lifting chain or stainless steel cable. The working load of the lifting system
shall be 50% greater than the pump unit weight.
C. Pump Design: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3
(Mechanical Works) of Volume 2 of this tender documents.
D. Pump Construction: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3
E. Bearings: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3 (Mechanical
Works) of Volume 2 of this tender documents.
F. Mechanical Seal: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3
G. Cable Entry Seal: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3
H. Wearing Rings: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3

I. Volute: Please refer to description contained in item 3.37.3 chapter 3 (Mechanical
Works) of Volume 2 of this tender documents.
3.36 Oxidation Ditch
System Description
A. The work required by this section consists of furnishing and installing equipment for
a continuous loop reactor (CLR) oxidation ditch.
1. Design Requirements: Treatment of the wastewater shall be accomplished by
contact with the waste activated sludge in the CLR.
2. Mixing Parameters: The aeration/mixing system selected shall provide the
propelling force for circulation and mixing of the basin contents. The
aeration/mixing unit(s) shall be sized to maintain horizontal velocity throughout
the basin and maintain a uniform mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS)
concentration throughout the basin at MLSS concentrations up to 5000 mg/L,
with one aeration/mixing device not operating.
3. The aeration/mixing system selected shall be capable of maintaining a
dissolved oxygen concentration of not less than 0.5 mg/L anywhere in the CLR.
4. Bottom diffused air is allowed as an aeration method for the oxidation ditch.
Manufactured Units
A. A complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and
technical literature; performance charts and curves; catalog cuts; installation
instructions; and a recommendation on quantities of spare parts to have on hand at
all times for each piece of equipment.
B. Standard Products: Provide materials and equipment which are the standard
products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and
which essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use in similar facilities
for at least 5 years. All aeration/mixing equipment, associated accessories, and
appurtenances shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
C. Nameplates: Provide pumps, blowers and motors with the manufacturer's name,
address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number on a stainless
steel plate permanently secured to the item of equipment
D. Protection of Moving Parts Belts, chains, couplings, and other moving parts shall be
completely enclosed by guards to prevent accidental personal injury. Guards shall be
removable or so arranged as to allow access to the equipment for maintenance. If
equipment is housed in a lockable housing, this shall be sufficient protection and no
additional guards are necessary.
Rotor Aerators
A. Aeration Mechanism - The rotor aeration system shall be provided as indicated. The
units shall be complete and include rotor assemblies, shaft, or torque tube, drive unit,
bearings, supports and all appurtenances necessary for the proper operation of the
equipment. The rotor aeration system shall be designed for continuous operation.
1. Rotor Assembly: Each blade assembly shall consist of individual blades. The
blade assemblies shall be secured to the shaft with a clamp ring, by using a
keyed shaft, by compression between the assembly blades and the shaft or by
another method that will hold the assembly tightly, ensure no slippage, and
provide continuous proper alignment. The blades shall be removable by

unbolting. Welding blades to the shaft will not be permitted.
2. Velocity Baffles: Provide velocity baffles at the designed locations and
alignment and in accordance with all structural and installation requirements as
recommended by the manufacturer of the aeration mechanism.
3. Disc and Rotor Immersion Requirements: To ensure the most efficient
operation of the aeration system and to avoid damage to the drive system the
rotor blades shall be operated with a minimum immersion of 0.125 m and a
maximum immersion of 0.35 m.
4. Shafts and Bearings: The rotor assembly shall be supported at both ends by a
shaft. The shaft shall be fabricated of steel conforming to ASTM A36. The shaft
shall be solid steel of a steel torque tube with a minimum 10 mm wall thickness.
Each rotor assembly shall be furnished with support bearing assemblies.
Bearings shall be waterproof, self-aligning and consist of a cast-iron pillow
block set on adjustable anchor plates. The bearings shall be grease lubricated
and have a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or
ABMA 11.
B. Drive System
1. Reducer: The drive system reducer shall be constructed to maintain alignment
of bearings and gearing while absorbing the external loads of the rotor
assembly. The unit shall be designed to continuously withstand all internal
loadings developed at the full load motor wattage horsepower, including motor
starting torques up to 250 percent of motor running torques. The unit shall also
be designed to withstand all external loadings produced by torque, out-of-
balance and vibration resulting from operating conditions. The speed reducer
shall be provided with lifting lugs. The interior of the gear case shall be vented
by an approved breather, constructed to retard the entrance of water vapor.
2. Housing Drive: housing shall be weatherproof and constructed of steel in
accordance with ASTM A36/A36M or high grade cast-iron in accordance with
ASTM A48/A48M. A protective coating shall be applied that will not peel, crack
or discolor at continuous operating temperatures up to 120 degrees C.
3. Rating: The drive gearing shall have a minimum service factor of at least 1.4
times the rated brake horsepower of the drive motor. The gear reduction
system shall be suitable for continuous operation and moderate shock loading
in accordance with ANSI/AGMA 6113ANSI/AGMA 6013 for gear motor
reducers or gear motors using helical and spiral bevel gears.
4. Bearings Power transmission bearings shall be antifriction type and shall have
a minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours at maximum operating speed in
accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11. Bearings shall be fully sealed and
protected from water spray.
5. Lubrication: Lubrication shall be provided by gears running in an oil bath. The
drive shall be provided with an oil "dam", spring loaded lip seals or other means
of positive protection against lubricant leakage around the output shaft. An oil
level gauge or sight glass and drain fittings shall also be provided. The thermal
rating of the gear reducer shall exceed the design load or proper cooling shall
be provided.
6. Couplings: Power transmission from the motor to the gear reduction system
shall be supplied by sheaves and V-belts. To reduce the output speed, the
sheaves shall be removable. The assembly shall be covered with a suitable
guard and shall be protected from splashing.
C. Mounting: The drive system shall be a base mounted type which is separately
mounted on a concrete pier or a shaft mounted type which is supported by the drive
side rotor bearing.
Lubrication Requirements
A. An adequate means of lubrication shall be provided for all moving parts subject to
wear. Except as otherwise specified, lubrication shall be by grease or oil. Grease
fittings shall be provided for all grease-type bearings. If bearings are not easily
accessible, grease tubing shall be provided in a convenient location. Bearings shall
be provided with relief ports to prevent build-up of pressures which might damage
the bearings or seals. Oil reservoirs shall be liberal in size and shall be provided with
an opening for filling, an overflow opening at the proper location to prevent overfilling,
and a drain opening at the lowest point. Reservoirs shall be properly vented to
prevent pressure build-up.
Electric Motors
A. A squirrel-cage induction premium efficiency motor suitable for continuous duty shall
be used. The motor shall have a power rating which will be non-overloading for any
conditions under which the driven equipment must function.
B. Frame: The motor frame size shall be selected in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Motors of the same rating, mounting, and characteristics shall be interchangeable.
C. Design Induction motors shall be Design B as defined in NEMA MG 1, with normal
torque and low starting current.
D. Enclosure: A totally enclosed fan cooled enclosure shall be provided.
E. Terminal Boxes Cast-iron terminal boxes shall be sized for the space required, for
the allowable bending radius and stiffness of the motor supply cables, and for
terminating a grounding conductor. The terminal boxes shall be gasketed and have
threaded conduit entrances or hubs. Terminal boxes shall be rotatable for connection
from any one of four directions at 90 degree intervals with a motor lead seal and
separator gasket provided between the motor frame and terminal box.
F. Bearings Grease lubricated, shielded, antifriction steel ball bearings shall be provided
and greased with a moisture resistant grease. Grease fittings and excess grease
purge plugs shall be readily accessible and shall be located externally so that bearing
lubricant can be changed without removing fan housing or dismantling the motor.
G. Windings Motor windings shall be nonhygroscopic, epoxy coated.
H. Motor Characteristics Motor rotors shall receive a standard dynamic balance. The
maximum amplitude (peak to peak) of motor vibration, as measured at the bearing
housing, and the method of measurement shall be in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
The motor characteristics such as wattage horsepower, speed, rpm, voltage and
phase requirements and insulation class shall be as indicated.
I. Motor Controls NEMA ICS 1.
Special Tools
A. One set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments required for operation,
calibration and maintenance of the equipment shall be provided.
Treatment System Installation
A. Submit drawings containing complete wiring and schematic diagrams; equipment
layout and anchorage; and any other details required to demonstrate that the system
has been coordinated and will properly function as a unit. Drawings showing
proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances and equipment
relationship to other parts of the work including clearances required for maintenance
and operation.
B. Welding Piping shall be welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M by welders
certified to have passed tests using procedures in accordance with AWS B2.1/B2.1M
or ASME BPVC SEC IX. The welder or welding operator shall apply the assigned
personal symbol near each weld made, as a permanent record. Submit a copy of
qualified procedures and a list of names and identification symbols of qualified
welders and welding operators. Welding procedures qualified by others, and welders
and welding operators qualified by another employer may be accepted as permitted
by ASME B31.1. Notify the Engineer 24 hours in advance of tests and the tests shall
be performed at the work site if practicable.
C. Equipment Installation Equipment installation shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.
Painting
A. Surface preparation and painting shall be performed in the field. Manufactured items,
such as motors and switchboards, shall be finished with the manufacturer's standard
finish.
Framed Instructions
A. Submit approved wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of the
entire system, including equipment, piping valves, and control sequence, framed
under glass or in approved laminated plastic, for posting where directed. In addition,
condensed operating instructions explaining preventive maintenance procedures,
methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and procedures for safely
starting and stopping the system shall be prepared in typed form, framed as specified
above for the wiring and control diagrams, and posted beside the diagrams. The
framed instructions shall be posted before acceptance testing of the systems
Field Tests and Inspections
A. Water required for the field tests will be supplied. The Engineer will witness all field
tests and conduct field inspections. Any deficiencies found shall be rectified and work
affected by such deficiencies shall be completely retested at the Contractor's
expense.
B. Operating Tests: After completion of the installation and as soon as practical, an
operating test of the CLR and all equipment shall be performed to demonstrate that
the system functions properly. The tests shall include all manufacturer's
recommended tests for equipment vibration, horizontal and vertical alignment and
structural integrity. Wattage Horsepower shall be checked and verified with the
manufacturer's design data for the specified equipment. Aerator wattage horsepower
shall be nameplate plus or minus five percent. After completion of all tests, the system
shall be adjusted for proper operation in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions and the operating and maintenance instructions.
C. Velocity Test: After completion of the operating tests, a velocity test shall be
conducted on the basin. Velocity cross-sections shall be taken at a distance of 3
meters upstream of the shaft centerline of each aerator. Each cross-section shall
consist of a minimum of 16 velocity measurements equidistantly spaced so that the
distance between measurement points does not exceed 1.2 meters vertically or
horizontally. Measurement points shall begin at approximately 0.6 meter from walls.
The average velocity at each cross-section shall not be less than 0.3 m/s. Where
average velocities are found to be less than that specified, make modifications to the
system as needed to produce the required velocities at no extra cost to the Employer.
D. Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency Test (S.O.T.E.): After completion of the velocity
test an S.O.T.E. test shall be performed. This test shall be in accordance with ASCE
2-06. The aeration system oxygenation capacity shall not be less than 1.5 kg of
oxygen per horsepower per hour with 2 aeration units operating at a combined power
draw. The test shall be repeated in the same water until ten tests have been run or
until the total dissolved solids (TDS) exceed 2000 mg/L. A minimum to maximum
power curve shall be plotted from the results. Power input shall be based on wire
power. Test shall be performed by a nationally recognized independent testing
laboratory.
E. Reporting Test Results: Upon completion and testing of the installed system, submit
test reports showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all field
tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria. Each
test report shall indicate the final position of controls. Reporting of results shall be in
accordance with paragraph 9.0 "REPORTING" of ASCE 2-06.
Manufacturer's Services
A. Supervise Installation, Adjustment, and Testing Obtain the services of the
manufacturer's representative experienced in the installation, adjustment, and
operation of the equipment specified to supervise the installation, adjustment and
testing of the equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Field Training: Conduct a training course for the operating staff as designated by the
Engineer. The training period shall consist of a total two 8-hour days and shall start
after the system is functionally completed but prior to final acceptance tests. The field
instructions shall cover all of the items contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Instructions, as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Engineer
shall be notified at least 14 days prior to date of proposed conduction of the training
course.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
A. Furnish instructions including the manufacturer's name, model number, service
manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating
features. Each set shall be permanently bound and shall have a hard cover. The
following identification shall be inscribed on the covers: the words "OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," name and location of the facility, name of the
Contractor, and contract number.
B. Instructions shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. System layout showing piping, valves, and controls.
2. Approved wiring and control diagrams.
3. A control sequence describing startup, operation, and shutdown.
4. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment, including
lubrication instructions and troubleshooting guide.
5. Manufacturer's bulletins, cut sheets and descriptive data, parts lists, and
recommended spare parts.
6. Simplified diagrams for the system as installed.
3.37 Circular Clarifiers
General
A. Clarifier equipment shall include clarifier mechanism with effluent trough and weir
assembly, weirs and baffles, influent well, and piping.
B. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36/A36M. Completely or intermittently

submerged steel members shall have a minimum thickness of 6 mm. Cast iron shall
conform toASTM A48/A48M, Class 30 minimum.
Clarifier Mechanism
A. Shall include sludge collector assembly with rapid sludge removal system; drive
assembly; supporting bridge; operating platform and access walkway thereto; influent
skirt and effluent trough and weir assembly; scum removal assembly; overload
protection and alarm; and electrical control equipment. The drive shall rotate the
sludge collector assembly, which shall be designed to move settled sludge to a
centrally located sludge hopper. Mechanism shall be so designed that there will be
no chains, sprockets, bearings (except sleeve bearings when used), or operating
mechanism below the liquid surface or in contact with the liquid. The mechanism shall
be assembled in the shop to ensure proper fitting of parts, match-marked for erection,
and disassembled for shipment
Design
A. Clarifier mechanism shall be designed to have a continuous output torque with the
scraper arms rotating at a constant speed which will produce a peripheral speed of
0.035 to 0.05 meter per second. Clarifier mechanism and its component parts shall
be designed, with a safety factor of 2.5, to withstand all structural and mechanical
stresses brought about by the following loadings: continuous output rated torque
load; dead load; wind load (except on scum skimmer); and a live load of 2.5 kPa on
access section of supporting bridge. Under maximum load, deflection of supporting
bridge shall not exceed 1/360 span. Clarifier mechanism shall be designed for
continuous 24-hour service under design load without excessive wear, damage, or
failure. Stresses developed under aforementioned operating conditions and loads
shall not exceed stresses allowed under AISC 360.
Sludge Collector Assembly
A. Shall include scraper arms, scraper blades, and center drive cage/drum.
B. Scraper Arms
1. Shall be fabricated of structural steel, using welded truss construction of
triangular or box section.
2. Steel scraper blades, with attached squeegees, shall be welded or bolted to
underside of scraper arms and shall be designed to move settled sludge to a
centrally located sludge hopper. Scraper arms shall be connected to center
drive cage/drum by bolted or welded connections.
3. Scraper blades shall be steel plate having a minimum thickness of 6 mm.
Squeegees shall be of bronze or stainless steel having a minimum thickness
of 3 mm, and shall be connected to scraper blades with bronze or stainless
steel bolts and nuts with provision for vertical adjustment of not less than 50
mm.
C. Center Drive Cage/Drum
1. Shall be fabricated of structural steel, using box truss or cylindrical drum
construction. Center drive cage/drum shall be connected to drive assembly with
machine screws or by a bolted connection.
Drive Assembly
A. Shall include motor, speed reduction and turntable gearing, turntable bearing
assembly, drive assembly bearings, and belt drives. Design of drive assembly shall
be such as to permit sustained operation at the continuous output torque rating
without excessive wear and to develop twice the continuous output torque rating
without damage to or failure of drive assembly components.
B. Motor
1. Motor shall be constant speed, totally-enclosed, fan-cooled, horizontal or
vertical type, suitable for outdoor service, and conforming to NEMA MG 1.
2. Motor wattage horsepower shall be adequate to drive the sludge collector
assembly continuously at the maximum load encountered under any operating
condition without overloading or exceeding the nameplate rating of the motor.
Motor shall be suitable for operation on 380 volt, 3 phase, 50 hertz service.
Motor shall be protected against overload, low voltage, and unbalanced
voltage.
3. Motor shall provide the starting torque needed to move sludge collector
assembly from a dead stop in a dewatered clarifier tank. Motor shall be close-
coupled to or on input shaft of primary speed reducer; or shall drive speed
reducer by a belt. Flexible coupling for connecting shafts of close-coupled
motor and speed reducer shall conform to the applicable requirements of
AGMA 9002, and ANSI/AGMA 9000. Motor position shall be adjustable to
increase or decrease belt tension.
C. Speed Reduction and Turntable Gearing
1. Speed reduction and turntable gearing for primary and intermediate speed
reducers shall be helical. Gearing for turntable shall be a pinion-and-spur-gear
reduction unit. Speed reduction and turntable gearing shall be designed with a
AGMA service factor as recommended in the applicable AGMA Standards
ANSI/AGMA 6113 ANSI/AGMA 6013, ANSI/AGMA 6034 or when drive is
operating at full load motor wattage horsepower, 24 hours a day continuous
running. Gearing shall be designed to withstand any loadings produced by
thrust, out-of-balance, and vibration resulting from operating conditions and
shall operate from zero rpm to a speed consistent with the maximum peripheral
speed specified in paragraph entitled "Design."
2. All component parts of the speed reduction and turntable gearing shall be
designed to permit sustained operation at the continuous output torque rating
for the life expectancy specified without excessive wear and to develop twice
the continuous output torque without damage to or failure of any component
part. Gears shall conform to applicable requirements of the following AGMA
Standards (AGMA 908, AGMA ISO 10064-6, AGMA ISO 17485, AGMA 2011,
ANSI/AGMA 6034, AGMA 2015/915-1). Gears for primary and intermediate
reducers shall be not less than AGMA Quality 10, AGMA 2015/915-1, AGMA
ISO 10064-6, AGMA ISO 17485, AGMA 2011, or ANSI/AGMA 6113
ANSI/AGMA 6013. Gears for turntable shall be not less than AGMA Quality 6,
AGMA ISO 10064-6, AGMA ISO 17485, AGMA 2011. Gears shall be certified
as meeting the specified quality. Spur gear shall be internal or external; shall
be of cast iron, nodular cast iron, heat treated cast alloy steel, or heat-treated
forged steel; and shall have an endurance and strength rating of 1,000,000
cycles. Spur gear teeth shall be hardened by the through-hardening, contour-
induction-hardening, nitriding, or carburizing processes; flame-hardened gears
will not be acceptable. Shafts, bolting, and keys for gears shall conform to
ANSI/AGMA 6001; shafts shall be of structural steel. An oil or grease lubrication
system shall be provided for speed reduction gearing. Bath lubrication using oil
seals for containment or lubrication systems which rely upon an oil circulating
pump shall include means to stop drive motor in event of insufficient lubrication.
Pressure indicating devices influenced by oil sludge or changes in oil viscosity
will not be acceptable. Speed reduction and turntable gearing shall be fully
enclosed in cast iron or fabricated steel housings provided with dust and oil
seals. Mating surfaces of turntable and intermediate gear reducer housing shall
be machined in such manner and to such tolerances that accurate alignment
of the pinion will be assured.
D. Gearmotor
1. Gearmotor, where practicable, may be used in lieu of separate motor and
primary speed reducer. Motor component of gearmotor shall be as specified in
paragraph entitled "Motor." Speed reducing component of gearmotor shall
conform to the applicable requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Speed
Reduction and Turntable Gearing," and in ANSI/AGMA 6113 ANSI/AGMA 6013
and ANSI/AGMA 6034
E. Turntable Bearing Assembly
1. Turntable bearing assembly shall include the turntable bearings upon which the
turntable and attached sludge collector assembly are supported; the turntable;
and the drive assembly/turntable support base. Assembly shall be designed for
all radial and axial loads imposed by drive assembly and sludge collector
assembly. Arrangement of component parts shall permit replacement of balls
or rollers, or the bearing raceways, or complete bearing unit. Bearing raceway
material shall have adequate strength to withstand all radial and axial loads
and shall have a Rockwell "C" hardness of not less than 58. Turntable bearing
assembly for a center-column-supported clarifier mechanism] shall also be
designed to support, where applicable, drive assembly, turntable, spur gear,
and one end of access bridge. A design incorporating a bottom support bearing
will not be acceptable. Bearing shall run in an oil bath or be grease-lubricated.
Turntable and drive assembly/turntable base shall be of cast iron, nodular cast
iron, or steel; if of steel, these parts shall have sufficient thickness to provide
the rigidity necessary to maintain alignment of sludge collector assembly.
Turntable shall be cast integrally with spur gear or be fastened to the spur gear
with machine screws or bolts.
F. Drive Assembly Bearings
1. Drive assembly bearings shall be ball or roller bearings having a minimum rated
life expectancy (L10) as specified in this paragraph when clarifier mechanism
is operating continuously at torque rating specified in paragraph entitled
"Design." Load rating and fatigue life shall be based on ABMA 9 and ABMA 11,
as applicable. Bearings shall be either oil lubricated or grease lubricated.
2. Spur and intermediate helical gearbox bearings L10 17,000 hours Gearmotor,
indirect drive L10 17,000 hours
Scum Removal Assembly
A. Shall include skimmer assembly scum trough. Skimmer assembly shall continuously
move surface scum to tank periphery and automatically flush the scum into scum
trough. Assembly shall discharge scum with a minimum discharge of water
B. Skimmer Assembly
1. Skimmer assembly shall include a hinged or pivoting skimming blade, a hinged
or pivoting plow blade with wiper blades, and support legs
2. Skimming blade shall be of structural steel and shall extend from influent well
to scum trough. Plow blade shall be structural steel, shall be the width of the
scum trough, and shall have grease- and oil-resistant chloroprene wiper blades
securely clamped in position with a bronze backing plate. The plow blade and
its hinged or pivoted connections shall be designed so as to assure proper

alignment and continuous contact between wiper blades, scum trough
approach ramp, and scum baffle. Plow blade shall have provision for field
adjustment in the vertical plane. Suitable means shall be provided to carry plow
blade smoothly over the scum trough. Corrosion-resistant materials shall be
used for moving parts within the skimming assembly in such manner as to
ensure that corrosion will not freeze joints, springs, and other moving or
adjustable parts into position. Blades shall be adequately supported from one
scraper arm; bracing shall be provided where necessary to maintain rigidity of
assembly. Support legs shall be of structural steel
C. Scum Trough
1. Scum trough shall be welded structural steel, minimum thickness 6 mm; shall
have a flanged connection for the scum discharge pipe; and shall be supported
from the tank wall. The inclined approach ramp leading to discharge section of
scum trough shall be shaped to contain the scum as it is moved up the incline
to the trough by the plow blade.
2. Scum Skimmer: Scum skimmer shall include skimming blade and support legs
and shall be mounted on the one scraper arm. Skimming blade and support
legs shall be of structural steel. The skimming blade shall extend from clarifier
tank wall to influent skirt. Scum skimmer shall be hinged and counter weighted
to provide for passing under scum trough, piping, and other obstructions within
clarifier tank. The skimming blade shall have provision for field adjustment in
the vertical plane.
3. Scum Trough: Scum trough shall be of the adjustable dipping weir type and
shall include collector pipe and operator. Scum trough shall be provided in
peripheral raceway where indicated.
a. Collector pipe shall be steel pipe conforming to ASTM A53/A53M
Schedule 20 minimum. Pipe shall have a 1.05 rad 60 degree wide slot
cut symmetrically about the vertical axis, with the horizontal edges of the
slot parallel to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. At maximum intervals of
750 mm, a 50 mm wide band of full circumference shall be left for
stiffness. The pipe shall be plugged on inboard end and open on effluent
end. End supports shall include a rolled steel collar welded to an
adjustable steel end plate. A grease and oil-resistant, watertight seal
shall be provided, so constructed that it will allow smooth motion of the
rotating pipe; seal shall be readily renewable without removing pipe. End
supports shall be secured to concrete tanks walls by stainless steel
anchor bolts of 16 mm 5/8 inch minimum diameter.
b. Operator: A manual operating lever shall be mounted on the collector
pipe. Lever shall be steel pipe having a minimum diameter of 31 mm and
shall be secured to collector pipe with a chain or bolted connection. Lever
shall extend at least 0.91 m above the top of the tank wall and shall permit
rotation of collector pipe at least 0.52 rad 30 degrees each side of the
vertical axis.
D. Access Bridge, Walkway, and Operating Platform
1. Access bridge shall be of structural steel and shall extend from tank sidewall to
the center and beyond sufficient to support walkway and operating platform.
Walkway and operating platform shall be skidproof galvanized steel or raised-
pattern floor plate or grating. Walkway and operating platform shall have a
double railing not less than one m in height on both sides of walkway and
around outside of operating platform; railing shall be of galvanized structural
steel section or of standard 38 mm galvanized pipe conforming to ASTM

A53/A53M. Walkway shall be not less than 750 mm wide. Raised-pattern floor
plate or Grating shall be of a design and material thickness necessary to keep
deflection to less than 6 mm with a uniform load of 5 kPa per square foot.
3.38 Submersible Mixers
Design Requirements
A. Design the mixer to provide mixing and solids suspension without vortexing,
splashing, or introducing air into the fluid.
B. Provide a vortex suppressor.
C. Design mixer to be of the integral design, close coupled, submersible type.
D. All components of the mixer, including motor shall be capable of continuous
underwater operation.
E. In addition, all components of the mixer shall be capable of continuous operation
completely unsubmerged for two hours.
F. Design the mixer to be easily removed for inspection or service without the need for
personnel to enter the mixing tank or vessel.
Mixer Construction
A. Each mixer shall be of the integral design, close coupled, submersible type. All
components of the mixer, including motor, shall be capable of continuous underwater
operation. Major mixer components such as motor, shaft, hub …etc. shall be of 316L
Stainless Steel construction.
B. The oil housing cover plate shall be of corrosion resistant composite (4610/20 utilize
a vinyl ester composite motor cover). All exposed fasteners shall be of stainless steel.
In order to insure that the low velocity area around the motor remains impervious to
low PH solids and or liquid attack, the motor housing exterior shall be made of 316
Stainless Steel. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the mixed media, other
than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic
dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy finish coat on the exterior of the
mixer.
Motor
A. The multi-pole motor shall be directly connected to the propeller (gearbox designs
are not acceptable). The mixer motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, shell type
design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator windings shall be
insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180°C (356°F). The
stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-
free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. The motor shall
be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA MG1, Part 31. The motor shall be
designed for continuous duty, capable of no less than 15 evenly spaced starts per
hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum.
B. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be
equipped with three (3) thermal switches embedded in the end coils of the stator
winding and set for 284°F (140°C). These shall be used in conjunction with, and
supplemental to, external motor overload protection, and must be wired to the control
panel as required by FM regulations.
C. Mixer shall be capable of continuous operation under submergence condition, the
degree of protection shall be of (IP68).
Elastomers
A. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted
with a double set of Nitrile rubber or Viton O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing
is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces. This will
result in controlled compression of the O-rings without requiring a specific torque limit.
B. Do not use secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical Orings,
grease or other devices.
Propeller
A. The propeller shall be of 316 stainless steel dynamically balanced, nonclogging
backward curved design. Each blade shall be laser cut and welded to the hub to
ensure that the propeller is properly balanced. The propeller shall be capable of
handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in normal
sewage applications.
Cable Entry
A. The cable entry housing shall be an integral part of the back plate.
B. The cable entry shall have a double set of elastomer grommets in order to ensure a
redundant system in the event of a cable entry failure. Single sealing systems will not
be deemed acceptable.
C. The cable entry shall be comprised of two cylindrical elastomer grommets, each
flanked by washers and a ferrule designed with close tolerance fit against the cable
outside diameter and the entry inside diameter. This will provide a leak proof seal at
the cable entrance without the need for specific torque requirements.
D. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the stator casing opening and be
compressed by a gland nut threaded into it.
E. Interaction between the gland nut and the ferrule should move the grommet along
the cable axially instead of with a rotary motion.
F. The junction chamber and motor compartment shall be separated by a terminal board
which shall protect the motor interior from foreign material gaining access into the
mixer top. Connection shall be made between the threaded compressed type binder
posts thus securely affixing the cable wires to the terminal board.
G. The use of the terminal compressed type post and a terminal board O-ring shall
render the motor compartment leak proof from any liquid which may enter the
terminal compartment. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall
not be considered acceptable.
Bearings
A. All bearings shall have a minimum B-10 or L-10aa rated life of 100,000 hours and
shall have inner and outer races of metal construction. Bearings with races made of
nonmetallic construction will not be deemed acceptable or meeting the load handling
and environmental requirements of this application.
B. The outboard propeller bearing shall be an angular contact bearing.
C. The motor shaft end shall be supported by two bearings.
D. A roller and an angular contact ball bearing shall take up the axial and radial loads
while an angular contact ball bearing shall take up the axial loads.
E. The bearings shall be pre-loaded by a bearing loading nut located on the motor end
of the shaft in order to reduce shaft deflection and increase bearing life and seal life.
Mixers without pre-loaded bearings will not be considered acceptable or equal.
Jet Ring Assembly
A. Mixer assembly shall incorporate a jet ring a full 360 degrees around the propeller.
Maintain a maximum clearance of 1½ " between the propeller tip and the shroud in
order to maintain hydraulic efficiency and power consumption.
B. Jet ring shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel
Oil Housing
A. The oil housing shall contain two compartments consisting of an inner and an outer
section with four ports to connect and facilitate oil flow. In the event that the mixed
media bypasses the other seal, this design will allow the outer compartment to collect
the heavier (denser) fluids by means of a simple gravity process.
Mechanical Seals
A. Each mixer shall be provided with two sets of lapped end face type mechanical seals
running in oil reservoirs for cooling and lubrication. The mechanical seals shall
contain positively driven rotary, corrosion resistant, Tungsten Carbide/Tungsten
Carbide face rings for the outer seal assembly and Tungsten Carbide/Aluminum
Oxide seal faces for the inner seal assembly or optional Silicon Carbide rings (select
appropriate materials). One face of the inner seal ring pair shall have spiral grooves
laser etched in it, to provide a pumping action to move leakage from the stator
housing back into the oil chamber. In order to avoid seal failure due to sticking,
clogging, and misalignment from elements contained in the mixed media, only the
seal faces of the outer seal assembly and its retaining clips shall be exposed to the
mixed media. All other components shall be contained in the oil housing.
B. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment, but shall be easy to
check and replace. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members shall not
be considered acceptable or equal.
Mast and Mast Assembly
A. Provide upper and lower mast brackets.
B. The lower mast bracket shall be floor mounted.
C. The upper mast bracket shall be mounted as shown in drawings.
D. Brackets shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.
E. Provide an intermediate bracket if the mast length exceeds 15 ft.
F. Size brackets so that the mast is securely supported by the brackets.
G. Provide a 4"x4"x 3/16” stainless steel mast.
H. Mast brackets and mast shall be furnished by the mixer supplier
Portable Davit Crane
A. Mixer manufacturer shall provide portable davit crane and socket base for removing
the mixer from the reactors.
B. Provide hand winch operation and adjustable boom.
C. Supply the crane with all necessary equipment for operation and mounting as shown
on the drawings.
D. Crane shall have corrosion resistant finish

3.39 Pumps
General
A. Pumps supplied shall be capable of satisfying the performance requirements
specified and starts per hour shall be according to electrical motor rating power.
B. Low maintenance costs, reliability, and trouble-free operation will be prime
considerations when selecting pumps.
C. Pumps shall be quiet in operation and free from vibration. Preference will be given to
pumps with lower speeds in operation.
D. Pump impellers shall be manufactured from single castings, shall be positively
located onto the pump shaft, and secured in a manner to prevent them working loose
whilst rotating in either direction.
E. Pumps shall be fitted with packed gland or mechanical seals. The seal manufacturer
shall be consulted regarding the selection of the seal faces for a specific application.
The pump casing shall be designed to collect and run to drain any seal leakages.
Where necessary for satisfactory seal operation, provision shall be made for
connection to a water supply for seal flushing.
F. Pump casings shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test prior to any coating or
painting taking place. The hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1.5 times the casing
design pressure, where the casing design pressure is taken as the ‘closed valve’
head generated by the maximum diameter impeller at the maximum running speed,
plus the maximum suction head, all multiplied by 1.2. The test pressure shall be
maintained for a period of at least 30 minutes without detectable loss of pressure or
visible leakage.
G. On fixed speed installations the pump impeller diameter for the guaranteed duty shall
not exceed 95% of the maximum impeller diameter for the standard design. For spiral
vane type impellers the requirements of this Clause will not apply.
H. The guaranteed duty shall preferably be in the range of 80 to 110% of the best
efficiency flow rate for the selected impeller diameter. However, for multi-pump
installations the run out conditions shall be considered such that the run out flow for
any pump shall not exceed 120% of the best efficiency flow rate for the selected
impeller diameter.
I. At maximum speed there shall be a +30% margin of NPSH (available) over NPSH
(required) over the operational envelope of the pump.
J. For both fixed and variable speed duties, the motor shall be rated to allow for a 20%
excess of power above the maximum absorbed by the pump across the full range of
operation from the maximum flow rate under run out conditions to zero flow.
K. NOTE: Two submersible dewatering pumping units shall be supplied & installed in
dry pumps rooms complete with all accessories, valves, pipes...etc., one in duty &
one in standby mode.
Vertical Pumps
A. Pumps shall be suitable for vertical dry chamber installation, and shall be fixed on
stools or plinths above the floor of the pump chamber. The drive motors shall be
direct close coupled to the pump.
B. Pumps shall be fitted with soft packed glands designed for grease lubrication, glands
and lantern rings shall be split to facilitate easy packing. The pump casing shall be
designed to collect and run to drain any seal leakages. Where necessary for
satisfactory seal operation, provision shall be made for connection to a water supply
for seal flushing.
C. The pumps shall be of the non-clogging single vane centrifugal type, and shall run
unattended for long periods. They shall be capable of passing solids at least up to a
specified sphere size corresponding to their discharge capacity.
D. The critical speed of the pumps shall occur at not less than 150% of maximum rated
speed.
E. The shut off head shall be as low as possible, preferably around 160% of duty head.
F. Net positive suction head (NPSH) required for the pumps when pumping singly, or in
any combination as specified, shall satisfy the NPSH available. The calculations are
to be submitted with the Quotation. Any deviation in the NPSH of the pumps shall be
corrected at the Contractor’s expense.
G. Rotating parts of pumps shall be statically balanced during manufacturing, and
dynamically balanced after assembly.
H. Copies of pump performance curves and anticipated system hydraulics, it is the
responsibility of the contractor to verify this information and to provide with his
quotation the proposed pump hydraulic performance details.
3.39.2.1 Casings
A. Casings shall be designed such that the withdrawal of the impeller and drive end
cover assembly can be affected without disturbing the pump casings.
B. Hand holes shall be provided, close to the eye of the impeller and near the delivery
branch on the volute, to facilitate inspection and the clearance of blockages. The
covers to the hand holes are to be bolted and shaped internally to match the internal
contours of the casing and to minimize disturbances to the flow.
C. Renewable internal 'wear plates' shall be fitted, or the casing shall be arranged for
replaceable suction and gland plates.
D. Casings shall be grey cast iron to BS 1452 grade GG25 or better and shall have
sufficient metal thickness in the volute, where not protected by wearing plates, to
compensate for corrosive and abrasive action of the sewage.
3.39.2.2 Impellers
A. Impellers shall be constructed of grey cast iron to BS 1452 grade GG25 or better they
shall be smooth, well-finished, free from blow holes and imperfections, and statically
and dynamically balanced.
B. The impellers shall be of heavy construction capable of passing solids, designed and
filed smooth so that rags and stringy matter will not adhere to them, and shall be
capable of passing a sphere of at least 50 mm through the impeller without choking.
C. The velocity through the eye of the impeller shall not exceed 4 m/s when the pump
is operating at the duty point.
D. The impellers shall be securely fitted to pump spindles in such manner that they do
not loosen or become detached when the pump is in operation, or when the impeller
is rotated in the wrong direction by reversed flow or reversed motor connections.
E. The impellers shall be provided with means to prevent abrasive matter getting to the
glands/seals and, in fully shrouded impellers, to prevent the collecting of matter
between the outer shroud and the pump casing.
F. Pump spindles shall be of stainless steel, and fitted with renewable stainless steel or
bronze sleeves to protect the spindles against wear over the distance it passes
through the stuffing box.
3.39.2.3 Casing Wearing Rings
A. All surfaces of the casing with fine clearance to the impeller shall be provided with
renewable wear parts, which shall have a minimum hardness differential of 50 HB
below that of the impeller wear ring surfaces.
B. Casing wearing rings shall be of best quality, close-grained cast iron or nickel iron in
a full circle, and fully concealed and machined.
C. Casing wearing rings shall be deep and of adequate section to prevent sag and
distortion when not in the seating and when stored.
D. Casing wearing rings shall be a light drive fit in the casing and be located in suitable
recesses machined in the casing.
E. Casing wearing rings shall form a continuous and smooth surface without gaps or
steps with the adjoining surfaces of the pump casing.
3.39.2.4 Suction Arrangements
A. The suction bend leading to the eye of the impeller:
1. Shall be of adequate thickness to provide for the abrasive and corrosive action
of the liquid.
2. Shall be tested to the same pressure as the pump casing.
3. Shall be fixed to the pump casing and horizontal suction pipe with bolts and
nuts.
B. The suction arrangements shall avoid peroration in the suction pipe work, and
present a good flow pattern at the entrance to the impeller.
C. The suction pipe work shall not be less in diameter than the eye of the impeller.
3.39.2.5 Pump Bearings
A. All bearings shall be according to BS 5512, S1 unit dimensions where practicable.
B. Pump bearings shall be external to the pump casing, and be removable with the
rotating element. They shall be adequately rated ball or roller type, and shall be
arranged to take all radial and axial loads during start-up and running conditions.
C. Pump bearings shall be mounted in a dust-proof housing, and provided with
accessible lubricating points for grease gun greasing. The life time of pump bearings
shall be at least 100,000 continuous operating hours.
3.39.2.6 Name Plate
A. The bearing housing shall accommodate both the manufacturer’s rating plate and the
Authority’s university identification plate.
B. The manufacturer’s rating plate shall contain at least the following information:
1. Manufacturer
2. Pump Serial No.
3. Pump Direction of Rotating
4. Duty Generated Head
5. Duty Flow Rate
6. Pump Absorbed Power at Duty Point

7. Pump Running Speed
8. Pump Casing Design Pressure
3.39.2.7 Intermediate Shafting
A. The pump shaft shall be made of stainless steel 316. It shall have cross section &
number of bearings enough to avoid having any critical speeds occurring at or near
the normal speed and strong enough to absorb any forces at any condition of loading
and adequate stuffing box with split-type gland be applied. The shaft rotating train
weight and geometry should not generate, when rotating at the rated operating
speed, vibration amplitude in excess of 2.5 mm/sec as stipulated in the API 610
standards.
B. The shaft shall be protected against wear at the stuffing box and from contact with
sewage by using renewable sleeves. The weight of impeller & shaft shall be carried
by an ample size thrust bearing & shall be guided by ball or roller bearings preferable
self-aligning type.
3.39.2.8 Pressure Gauges
A. Pressure and compound gauges shall be fitted to the respective delivery and suction
branches of each pump. The gauges shall comply with the requirement of the
specification.
3.39.2.9 Motors
A. Motors shall be provided suitable for the application and shall be squirrel cage
induction motors of the totally enclosed fan cooled type suitable for variable speed
starters. The motors shall be a minimum of IP 54 with insulation to class F and
temperature rise to class B. Motor output to be a minimum of 20% in excess of shaft
power required by the pump at maximum duty point. The motor shall be of 380 volts,
50 Hz type and speed shall not be more than 1500 r.p.m.
Submersible Pumps
A. Pump shall be suitable for operation in a dry well or wet well installation. They shall
be designed to give non-overloading characteristics over the complete operable
range of the pump. Dry installation submersible pump type be provided by motor
cooling jacket of approved type.
B. Pumps shall be fitted with cartridge-type mechanical seals. The seal manufacturer
shall be consulted regarding the selection of the seal faces for a specific application.
An oil chamber shall be incorporated between the pump and motor units to lubricate
the seal rings.
C. Motors shall be of the submersible cage rotor induction type. Motor shall be of IP68
insulation.
D. The units shall be supplied with at least 20m of suitably sheathed flexible cable which
shall pass through a watertight gland on entry to the motor body.
E. The motor windings shall incorporate thermal switches as a safeguard against
overheating, these shall be connected into the control circuit for hand reset only.
F. Wet well installations shall be provided complete with guide rails, automatic location
pump discharge branch, cable guides and holders and lifting chains to allow the pump
to be raised and lowered without entry to the sump. Lifting davits and equipment shall
be provided for this purpose.
G. Pump Maximum speed is 1500 r.p.m
H. Pump best efficiency point shall be at working point (duty point) of the pump curve,
3.39.3.1 Pump construction
A. Major pump components shall be of Grey cast iron GG25, with smooth surfaces
devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. Where watertight sealing is required, O-
ring made of nitrile rubber shall be used. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of
stainless steel. All surfaces coming into contact with sewage, other than stainless
steel, shall be protected by an approved sewage resistance coating.
B. Impeller shall be of Grey cast iron GG25 and coated with PVC epoxy primer. Pump
exterior shall be sprayed with PVC primer, with chloric rubber paint finish seal. The
pump shaft shall be of stainless steel 316L and shall be completely isolated from the
pumped liquid. Shaft sealing between motor and hydraulic section shall be
accomplished by means of high quality mechanical seal independent of direction of
rotation and resistant to thermal shocks.
3.39.3.2 Pump motor
A. The pump motor shall be squirrel cage induction motor of shell type design, housed
in an air – filled, watertight chamber. The stator winding stator lead shall be insulated
with moisture resistance class “F” insulation which will resist a temperature rise of
class “B”. The stator shall be dipped and baked three times in class “F” varnish. The
motor shall be designed for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a minimum of
starts per hour according to the Egyptian Code in corresponding to the motor rating.
The rotor bars and short circuit ring shall be made of aluminium. At design point the
motor shall not draw more than the kw value at nominal voltage at utility quality. The
motor shall be of 380 volts, 50 Hz type and speed shall not be more than 1500 r.p.m.
B. The junction chamber containing the terminal board shall be sealed from the motor
by elastomer compression seal (0-ring). Connection between the cable conductors
and star leads shall be made with threaded compressed type binding
C. Post permanently affixed to a terminal board and thus perfectly leak proof. Thermal
sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be equipped
with three (3) thermal switches, embedded in the end coils of the stator winding (one
switch in each stator phase). This shall be used in the conjunction with the
supplemental to external motor over current protection and wired to the control panel.
Pumps shall have a free passage to allow solids pass through it according to the
U
following table:
Pump Flow Rate Free passage

Up to 30 L/s Not less than 50 mm
From 30 to 100 L/s Not less than 75 mm
Higher than 400 L/s Not less than 150 mm
Progressive Cavity Pumps
A. The pumps shall be of the horizontal rotary progressive cavity type having a helical
rotor operating in a resilient synthetic stator suitable for handling the media to be
pumped. These types of pumps shall be used to transfer the thickened sludge from
sludge thickeners to the drying beds.
B. The pumps shall be of grey cast iron casing, polyurethane or rubber stator, stainless
steel 316 L rotor and anti-friction bearings.
C. The rotor speed shall be limited to 300 rpm. Each pump shall be electrically driven
through a reduction gearbox. The pump, gearbox and motor shall be mounted on a
common rigid baseplate and the drive shall be transmitted through shaft couplings.
D. All rotating parts shall be completely protected by suitable guards easily removable
for inspection and maintenance.
E. Each pump shall be provided with a spring loaded pressure relief valve of the plate
type specifically designed for the medium the discharge shall be separately piped
back to the pump suction. The valve shall be of the type with external spring, adjusting
handle and locking device and shall be set to the maximum safe working pressure of
the pumps.
F. Pressure and compound gauges shall be fitted to the delivery and suction branches
of each pump.
G. Pumps shall be tested on site to prove their performance over the full operating range
of the pump.
Pump Control
A. Pumps shall be controlled by use of ultrasonic level sensors in the wet well. Pumps
shall be arranged to start and stop automatically at predetermined levels in the
sumps. Duty, standby and sequence operation switches shall be provided for pump
operation to be alternated, this control shall be provided for all pumps and shall be
included in a separate electrical contract only if specified in the Particular
Specification.
Pipe Work, Valves and Supports
A. The Contractor shall include for all pipe work, valves, and supports within the
treatment plant. The Contractor shall be responsible for all interconnections
pipework. Valves, pipe work, and supports shall be in accordance to the specification
with working pressure of not less than PN10 for both valves & pipes.
3.40 Standby Diesel Generating Unit
A. The prime power for generating set shall be enough for 100% of the basic continuous
operating load including electric motor staring power.
B. The diesel engine shall be directly coupled to the alternator. The diesel engine,
alternator, lubricating oil filters, fuel oil filters, lubricating oil strainers, fuel oil strainers,
lubricating oil coolers and other accessories deemed necessary by the manufacturer
shall be mounted on a common steel fabricated baseplate. The common steel base
shall be of sufficient strength to adequately support all equipment mounted on it
without distortion, either during operation or shipment.
C. The steel base shall be supported on steel springs working as vibration isolators of
sufficient size specifically designed for the weights involved. The isolators shall be
furnished as a part of the equipment. All pipe connections from the engine or
accessories mounted on the steel base, such as air intake and exhaust, shall be
flexible connections. These flexible connections shall be furnished as part of the
equipment.
D. The diesel engine exhaust pipe shall be complete with silencer to eliminate noise and
flexible joints to eliminate transport of vibration.
E. Also the exhaust pipes shall be insulated with fibre glass layers to limit the heat
transfer inside the generating sets hall.
F. The diesel engine shall be of the 4-stroke, direct injection, turbo-charging, in-line or
V type.
G. The engine shall be capable of running satisfactorily with fuel oil and lubricating oil of
grades and standards used in the Arabic Republic of Egypt.
H. The engine speed regulation shall not exceed ± 10% for the momentary, and ± 6%
for the permanent change when the full load on the engine is suddenly thrown off or
put on respectively.
I. Provision shall be made for varying the engine speed within 6% above or below the
normal speed at all loads.
J. The engine shall be provided with a control panel as mentioned hereafter.
K. Engine when running at 90% of its rated power shall cover all output load required
from alternator with 10% overload capability for emergency use for 1 hour each 12
full load. Prime power shall be in accordance with ISO8528 and ISO3046.
L. The engine shall be supplied with the following:-
1. Main fuel storage tank.
2. Daily service fuel tank.
3. Duplex fuel oil filter.
4. Fuel pump.
5. Lubricating pump.
6. Oil cooler.
7. Oil strainer and filter.
8. Lubricating oil priming pump.
9. Exhaust system complete with silencer and flexible connections.
10. Air intake system.
11. Speed control governor.
12. Fly wheel of sufficient weight to prevent flickering of light.
13. Water cooling system.
14. Starting system.
M. The alternator shall be directly connected to the engine fly-wheel through a coupling
designed and supplied in accordance with alternator manufacturer requirements.
N. The alternator shall be of three phase, synchronous, of brushless excitation, drip
proof, self-excited using built in exciter with voltage regulator and adjusting rheostat.
It shall be also provided with special windings for reduced harmonics and arranged
for parallel operation with similar set.
O. Insulation shall be tropical and moisture proof, of class (F) insulation, temperature
rise class (B), protection class IP 23, efficiency not less than 90%.
P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
1. The automatic voltage regulator shall be of the digital type. The size shall be
recommended by alternator and regulator manufacturers.
2. It shall be designed to provide an overall alternator performance as follows:
a. Steady State: With any constant load between no load and full load and
at any power factor from 0.8 to 1.0 and ambient temperature, specified
voltage regulation shall be 1%.
b. Steady State: With constant load and ambient temperature, voltage dip
shall not exceed 1% during any one hour period.

c. Transient: 12% maximum voltage drop when applying 50% of the rated
load, with two second maximum recovery time to steady state, when
operating at 50%.
d. Transient: 12% maximum voltage rise when removing 50% of the rated
load with two seconds maximum recovery time to steady state, when
operating at 100%.
e. The voltage regulator shall be designed for adjusting alternator output ±
10%. A manual voltage adjusting rheostat with operating knob shall be
supplied and mounted on the switchboard.
Q. The engine shall be provided with an electric starting system complete with starting
motor, set of batteries (with capacity sufficient for minimum six consecutive starting
cycles) and battery charger.
R. The capacity of the main storage tank shall be 10 times the capacity of the daily tank.
S. The main storage tank shall be made of welded black steel sheet plates of minimum
thickness 8mm and reinforced with steel sections.
T. The capacity of the daily tank shall be enough to cover 8 hours at least of the diesel
engine requirement when working at full load.
U. The electric fuel pump shall operate electrical by signal actuated from a float inside
daily fuel tank.
V. The tanks shall be coated externally with 2 coats of zinc rich epoxy primer and one
coat of aluminium paint with total thickness of not less than 500 micron.
W. Mean Effective Pressure and mean piston speed
RATING BMEP MPS

Not exceed 20 Not exceed 10
1 Up to 500 K.V.A
kg/cm2 P m/sec
Larger than 500 K.V.A Up Not exceed 22
2
to 2000 K.V.A kg/cm2 P
Not exceed 11
Not exceed 24 m/sec
3 Larger than 2000 K.V.A
kg/cm2 P
X. Stroke / Bore Ratio

1. The average value of the stroke / bore ratio will vary between 1.2 and 1.5 only.
Y. Rated speed of engine
1. The speed of the engine shall not exceed 1500 R.P.M. Engines having speeds
exceeding the specified limit shall be rejected.
Z. Rated Output
1. The generator should be 3-phase, 380 V, 50 Hz and 0.8 lagging power factor.
Derating formula shall be stated in quotation based ambient temperature 45ºC.
AA. Over Load Capacity
1. The alternator shall be capable of sustaining an overload of 10 percent at
terminal voltage of 380 volt. ±5 % volts and 0.8 power factor without suffering
harmful over-heating that may injure the windings insulation when this
overloading lasts for 1 hour.
3.41 Sludge Dewatering System (Belt Press)

Belt Filter - Products
A. The equipment covered by these specifications is intended to be belt filter press
dewatering equipment of proven ability as manufactured by reputable concerns
having long experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment
furnished shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the best practice and
methods.
B. All components of the sludge dewatering equipment shall be engineered for long
continuous and uninterrupted service. Provisions shall be made for easy lubrication,
adjustment, or replacement of all parts. Corresponding parts of multiple units shall be
interchangeable. Except as otherwise specified, steel plates and shapes shall have
a minimum thickness of 1/4” and bolts shall have a minimum diameter of 1/2”.
C. All welding shall be in accordance with the latest acceptable codes of the American
Welding Society ANSI/AWS D1.1.
D. All material used in the construction of the sludge dewatering equipment shall be of
the best quality and entirely suitable in every respect for the service required. All
structural steel shall conform to the ASTM standard specification for structural steel,
designation A36-77A. All iron casting shall conform to the ASTM standard
specification for gray iron casting, designation A48-76, and shall be of a class suitable
for the purpose intended. Other materials shall conform to ASTM specifications
where such specifications exist; the use of such material shall be based on
continuous and successful use under the similar conditions of service.
E. Unless otherwise specified herein, all metal parts in contact with polyelectrolyte or
sludge shall be type 304 stainless steel. All fasteners, pins, and anchor bolts shall be
type 304 stainless steel.
F. All fiberglass reinforced plastics (FRP) shall be manufactured in conformance with
NBS standards PS15-69.
Surface Protection
A. Ferrous metals shall be hot-dipped galvanized per the latest revision of ASTM A123
specification and covered with the following paint system:
B. First coat of Tnemec #104 epoxy of contrasting color to a minimum of four (4) dry
mils thickness.
C. Apply a second coat of Tnemec #104, finished color, minimum of four (4) mils
thickness. Total thickness of the two (2) coats will be a minimum of eight (8) mils dry.
D. All pre-painted purchased equipment such as electrical motors, gear boxes,
cylinders, etc., are to be painted with a final coat of the above system.
E. The control panel enclosure shall be Nema 4 X constructed of type 304 stainless
steel. The inside back panel of the control panel box shall be white.
Mechanical Details
3.41.3.1 Main Structural Frame
A. The frame shall be fabricated from tubular steel structural members designed to
adequately support all components and accessories. Steel shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A36; all welding shall be performed in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.1. Where frame components are bolted, stainless steel fasteners shall
be used.
B. The fabricated steel frame shall be designed to withstand the maximum stresses
imposed on the individual members with a safety factor of 10. Specifically, the
maximum actual stress on any member, connection, plate, etc., shall not exceed 1/10
of the yield strength of the frame material used. The deflection ratio of any structural
member shall not exceed L/600 where L is the member span. The tension used for
the calculations shall be at least 50 lbs. per linear inch of actual belt width.
C. Drip pans shall be fabricated of a minimum 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel and
shall collect filtrate from all gravity and pressure sections.
D. The frame work shall be constructed in such a manner that it will insure absolute
plane parallelism of all rolling elements by machined bearing pads.
E. The frame work shall be of welded and/or bolted construction. No disassembled
component, excluding the belt filter frame, shall weigh more than 1600 Kg.
F. Flocculation/Conditioning System: To achieve rapid contact between sludge particles
and a solution of dilute polyelectrolyte, provide:
1. A static, in-line, adjustable energy non-clogging Venturi mixer shall be
provided. The mixer shall be equipped with a Vortex polymer injection ring with
four (4) tangentially mounted polymer injectors. Two polymer injection rings
shall be provided for installation second injection point upstream from the
primary injection mixer. The mixer shall be located upstream of the belt filter
press. The belt filter press manufacturer shall recommend the proper layout of
the system. The in-line Venturi mixer shall be fabricated of bronze fitted cast
iron with an adjustable open throat area.
2. A conditioning tank shall be provided after the Venturi mixer to insure optimum
sludge conditioning. The conditioning tank shall be an upflow feedbox
extending across the full width of the machine. The conditioner shall be
vertically baffled and discharge into a stainless steel distributor. The
conditioning tank assembly shall be fabricated of type 304 Stainless Steel.
3. The conditioning tank shall be supplied with a variable speed conditioning
paddle. This paddle wheel shall be constructed of a full width 304ss paddle
wheel with replaceable rubber wear strips. It shall be driven by a variable speed
1/3 HP DC/SCR drive motor and gearbox.
3.41.3.2 Independent Gravity Drainage Area
A. The press shall be furnished with an independent primary gravity drainage area
consisting of a variable speed belt designed to contain and drain conditioned sludge.
The inlet distributor shall be utilized to evenly distribute the conditioned sludge over
the face of the moving filter belt. The belt system shall be sealed to prevent leakage
and shall be easily accessible for operator viewing, cleaning, and adjusting.
B. All materials in contact with the sludge in the distributor area shall be 304 stainless
steel with furrowing plows of UHMW plastic.
C. The gravity belt thickener shall have a minimum horizontal area of 1.5 m2. The gravity
drainage section shall be supported by slide strips. Supports shall be designed to
prevent deflections greater than 1.25 mm with a loading of 500 kg/m2. Slide strips
shall be easily removable without disassembly of any components.
D. The belt support shall be a series of UHMW wear strips within a 304 stainless frame.
The strips shall be every 12” and be of a design to not only to provide support but
also enhance gravity dewatering. Only systems, which demonstrate effective
drainage in the defined area shall be considered.
E. Provide adjustable leakage seals to contain the sludge on the belt through the gravity
drainage zone. Seals shall be neoprene rubber with 304SS deckle supports,
designed to provide an effective seal without causing wear to the belt.
F. Suitable No. of swing up type furrowing plow devices shall be supplied in the gravity
drainage section and shall be readily removable .
G. The adjustable plows shall be mounted on a support system that can be raised for
cleaning via lifting handles.
H. Plows will be high-density polyethylene with hot dipped galvanized support holders.
Plow position will be adjustable from 0 to 30 degrees with respect to the direction of
belt travel. All plows will be adjustable in unison for each plow row. To facilitate
cleaning, each row of plows will include a single, lifting handle, designed to raise the
entire row of plows at least 150 mm from the belt.
I. The independent gravity unit shall be equipped with a variable speed VFD drive,
powered and controlled from the main press panel.
J. The gravity section provided shall be constructed at operator level for easy viewing
and operation. For equipment with elevated gravity section, catwalks must be
supplied on both sides of each machine. The platform height shall be such that the
gravity deck of the belt filter press is easily visible and accessible. The platform shall
be constructed such that its placement will not interfere with routine maintenance of
the belt filter presses. All additional costs for foundation and anchor supports shall be
at no extra cost to the Employer. Handrails and vertical stairs shall be provided for
the platform. Kick plates (toe plates) shall be provided which shall project a minimum
of 100 mm above the walking surface. The platform and all supports shall be
constructed of structural aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel and it shall be
designed to carry a live load of 1000 kg/m2. All walking surfaces shall be non-slip.
Minimum platform width shall be 0.8 m.
K. The independent gravity section shall be provided with hydraulic tension and tracking
system as specified in this specification. Manual tensioning or tracking systems will
not be acceptable
3.41.3.3 Wedge Section
A. The belt filter press shall be furnished with a distribution chute to receive sludge from
the primary gravity dewatering section for purposes of even distribution of the sludge
to the wedge section.
B. The wedge section shall be constructed to contain the sludge on the belts with
adjustable sealed deckles. This area shall be easily accessible for operating, viewing,
cleaning, and adjusting.
C. Movement through the wedge section shall be designed to insure a uniform layer of
sludge across the entire working width of the belt. It further shall be adjustable to
allow operator determination of proper relationship between belt speed and cake
height, in order to insure optimum dewatering.
D. The materials in contact with the sludge shall be fabricated from type 304 stainless
steel. All fasteners, along with mounting and adjustment hardware shall be 304
stainless steel.
E. The use of vacuum assisted drainage sections is not acceptable.
F. The upper and lower press section filter belts, while in the wedge section, shall be
supported by construction equal to that of the gravity belt section, shall be a minimum
of 0.05 m wider than the width of the belt and so designed to reduce belt wear.
3.41.3.4 Pressure Zone

A. The belt filter press shall be furnished with a pressure zone following the wedge
section drainage area. The pressure section shall have a vertical configuration with
belt to roller contact exceeding 200 degrees on each s-wrap.
B. The wedge shall become uniform at the tangent of the first low pressure drainage
roll. The first drainage roll shall be a hot-dipped galvanized perforated roll. The roll
shall be internally baffled and designed to eliminate cake rewetting. It shall be a
minimum of 0.5 m diameter, followed by a 0.4 m diameter nylon coated reversing
turn, completing a full S with each turn exceeding 200 degrees.
C. The next stage of the pressure zone shall consist of an arrangement of a minimum
of five (5) rollers developing a continued 2000 S-shaped belt travel. The rolls shall
decrease from 0.3 m in diameter to 0.25 m in diameter.
D. The decreasing roll diameter is to provide an increasing pressure profile in the
pressure zone, made adjustable by changing the belt tension.
E. The final or eighth roll in the pressure section shall be a 0.25 m diameter drive roll
forming a last 2000 turn.
F. The minimum journal size in the press section shall be 1-15/16” in diameter and the
ends of each shaft on the rollers shall be equipped with support bearings as specified
under bearings.
G. The vertical pressure zone configuration shall include a tray beneath each roll such
that the filtrate is removed from the sludge cake without rewetting of the downstream
cake. Each drip pan shall be directed to a final collection pan and piped to the sump
area. The collection pans must eliminate filtrate from landing on the returning belt.
3.41.3.5 Dewatering Belts
A. Belts shall be seamed and fabricated of monofilament polyester, wear resistant
plastic material or combination monofilament polyester and stainless steel material.
The mesh design shall be selected for optimum dewatering of the sludge to be
processed with a minimum blinding of the filter fabric.
B. Belt selection shall be based on the manufacturer’s experience obtained at other
installations dewatering similar sludge with similar polyelectrolyte conditioning
chemicals.
C. Dewatering belt shall include guaranteed service life of at least 3,000 hours .
D. Each belt and connecting splice shall be designed for a minimum tensile strength
equal to five times the normal maximum dynamic tension to which the belt shall be
subjected. The splice shall be designed to fail before the belt.
E. Belt shall be designed for ease of replacement with a minimum of belt filter downtime.
Belt replacement shall be such that disassembly is not required
3.41.3.6 Belt Wash System
A. Each filter belt shall be washed by a belt wash station. The belt wash system shall
use high pressure water spray nozzles equipped with manually operated wire
brushes for internal nozzle cleaning. Each spray assembly shall be housed in an
enclosure in a manner that limits the spray pattern within the housing assembly. The
housing and nozzle assembly shall be readily removable. The housing shall be
fabricated from type 304 stainless steel.
B. The housing shall be sealed against the belt with rubber seals. The belt shall be
protected from excessive wear by the edges of the wash station housing by
replaceable guide surfaces. The belt wash station shall extend over the full width of
the filter belt by a minimum of 2 inches.
C. Wash water required shall not exceed 150 Lit/min. at 8 bar per press. The
manufacturer shall provide a complete pressure boosting system for each press to
achieve the above pressure when provided a minimum system pressure of 4 bar.
D. The booster pump shall be a multi stage with replaceable stainless steel shaft sleeve
and casing wear ring. The shaft shall be sealed by a ceramic/carbon mechanical seal
with 304 SS metal components. The impeller O-ring seal produces high pressure and
efficiency . The motor shall be a standard NEMA frame, C Face mounting with JM
shaft, 3500 RPM, with a TEFC enclosure.
E. Each shower header shall be supplied through a globe valve for throttling. Each press
shall be supplied with a pressure gauge before and after the booster pump.
3.41.3.7 Belt Aligning System
A. The belt aligning devices shall be hydraulically operated to align each belt and locate
it centrally on the rollers by means of a sensing arm, which detects the position of the
belt edge. This arm shall operate a pilot valve, which in turn affects the position of
the hydraulic actuator. The actuator shall be connected to a pivoting belt aligning
roller, causing this roller to skew from its traverse position.
B. The alignment system shall function as a continuous automatic belt guidance system
and shall be an integral part of the press. The alignment system shall operate with
smooth and slow motions resulting in a minimum of belt travel from side to side. The
use of electric servos shall not be acceptable.
C. Backup limit switches for the belt aligning system shall be provided on the machine
with sufficient contacts to de-energize all drives and sound an alarm in case of a belt
over travel.
D. A complete simplex hydraulic system shall be provided. This package shall include
vane pump, 2 hp TEFC motor, control valves, 75 liters storage reservoir, level gauge,
low pressure switch, temperature gauge, all controls and piping as necessary to
provide a complete and operating system. All interconnecting between the press and
power unit shall be provided by the installation contractor and shall be constructed of
316 stainless steel tubing.
E. All hydraulic lines shall be 316 stainless steel and be rigidly supported on the
structural frame and be properly sized for the intended use with adequate factors of
safety for the rated pressure.
F. All belt alignment control equipment shall be fabricated from corrosion resistant
materials or effectively coated not to rust or stain
3.41.3.8 Belt Tensioning System
A. Each belt shall be provided with a belt tensioning system. The belt tensioning system
shall be hydraulically actuated. The design of the tensioning system shall be such
that the dewatering pressure is directly proportional to belt tension and that
adjustments in the tension shall result in immediate changes in dewatering pressure.
Manual or electric servo tensioning systems are not acceptable.
B. Each belt tensioning shall be furnished with an individual control station such that
independent adjustment for each belt is possible. The control stations shall
incorporate an on/off selector, calibrated pressure regulating valve and a pressure
gauge to indicate actual operating pressure on each system.
C. The design of the belt tensioning system shall insure parallel movement of the
tensioning cylinders. The tensioning roller shall be mounted on a rugged yoke
assembly, with hydraulic cylinders at each end. The belt tensioning system shall
accommodate a minimum of 2.5% increase in belt length.
D. Sensing devices shall be furnished to determine belt travel beyond normal operating
limits. The sensing devices shall be electrically connected within the alarm system to
cause “an alarm shut down”. Manual reset shall be required.
3.41.3.9 Press Drives
A. The two belt drives shall be 1 and 2 HP respectively for the gravity and press sections.
Each shall be variable speed with a variable frequency AC drive unit. The variable
speed paddle wheel shall be driven by a 1/3 hp DC/SCR drive. Speed indicator
readouts for each shall be installed in the main press control panel.
B. The gravity belt drive shall be capable of varying output speed of about 3 to 25 meter
per minute and the press section drive, from 1 to 10 meter per minute.
C. The nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least
equal to the nameplate horsepower of the drive motor. Each drive unit shall be
designed for 24 hour continuous service.
D. Each gear reducer shall be totally enclosed, water spray proof, oil lubricated with
antifriction bearings throughout. All motors shall be TEFC.
E. The drives shall be furnished with provisions for use on 380 volt, 50/60 hertz, 3 phase
power supply.
F. The belt drive for the pressure section shall be driven by a single roller. The gearbox
shall be shaft mounted. Spur gears or chain driven rollers shall not be acceptable.
3.41.3.10 Safety Guards
A. All equipment having exposed moving parts such as fans, V-belts, gears, couplings,
chains, and including the pressure roll section, shall be provided with safety guards
as required by OSHA standards.
3.41.3.11 Discharge Blades
A. Discharge blades shall be provided to scrape dewatered sludge from the belt at the
final discharge rollers. The doctor blade shall be made of wear resistant UHMW
plastic. The blades shall be readily removable. The blade holders shall be secured in
place by means of counterweights. Spring tension type fasteners or cylinder operated
tensioning are not acceptable.
B. The minimum discharge height shall be 2 meters high. If necessary, the belt presses
and catwalks shall be supplied with additional support legs by the press
manufacturer.
3.41.3.12 Bearings
A. The shafts of all rollers shall be equipped with heavy-duty, greaseable type, self-
aligning roller bearings in sealed, splash proof housings. All bearings shall be
spherical roller bearings. The housings shall allow the changing of the bearings
without changes in the factory alignment of the roller. The housing shall be sealed to
provide adequate sealing from moisture and grime. The outside of the housing on
roller bearings shall also incorporate a sealed end cap.
B. All bearings shall have a minimum bearing life of 100,000 hours .
3.41.3.13 Rollers
A. All rollers shall be of solid steel or double-separated plate stub end shaft construction.
The stub end shafts and roller heads shall be welded in place. Bolted and or through
shaft roll construction is unacceptable. All rollers shall be designed to have a

maximum deflection of 0.5 mm at their center when under maximum loading.
B. All rollers except drive and tracking rolls, shall be of carbon steel construction, coated
with a minimum of 30 mils of thermoplastic nylon, selected for intended service. Drive
and tracking rollers shall incorporate 3.1 mm Nylon coating with a minimum Shore
“A” hardness rating of between 55 and 65 durometer for abrasion resistance and
proper belt tracking and drive. Other types of roller coatings shall not be acceptable.
3.41.3.14 Drainage Pans
A. Drainage pans shall be supplied as necessary to contain all filtrate and wash water
within the belt filter press and to reduce rewetting of down stream cake. Filtrate and
wash water pans shall be constructed of minimum 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel.
B. All drainage piping shall be furnished adequately sized for the intended service and
rigidly attached to the press frame. All drainage piping shall be directed and piped
solid to one (1) common point such that all drainage can be collected in a single
collection pit not to exceed 0.5 meter square.
Electric Motors
A. Electric Motors furnished with this equipment shall be rated for continuous duty at
45oC ambient and insulated with a minimum of Class F insulation, with Class B
temperature rise. All motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled or non-ventilated.
All motors supplied shall be rated at 150% nameplate horsepower of the required
horsepower for maximum service condition. All motors shall have invertor grade
insulation and suited for variable frequency drive as required.
Electrical Requirements
A. Press manufacturer shall provide a control panel to operate the various components
on the press and other ancillary press related equipment. The control panel shall
include the following components:
1. Main circuit breaker with disconnect
2. magnetic motor starter for hydraulic system
3. 2 – variable frequency drive unit for belt drive motors
4. 2 – magnetic motor starter Polymer mixers
5. variable frequency drive for Polymer feed Pump
6. variable frequency drive for Sludge Feed Pump
7. magnetic starter for conveyor motors
8. Sludge flow meter
9. Polymer flow meter
10. Running lights for all motors
11. Run Time meters for all motors
B. Alarm lights for:
1. Belt misalignment – each belt
2. Broken belt
3. No sludge flow
4. Loss of tension
5. Sludge Electromagnetic Flow Meter and Transmitter
6. Excessive tension
7. Low hydraulic pressure
C. Control panel shall be completely assembled in a NEMA 4 enclosure all termination
shall be at a numbered terminal strip numbered to correspond with the press panel.
D. General Requirements
1. Each belt filter press shall be provided with a local full operating, wall mounted
NEMA 4x control panel complete with all motor control and supervisory devices
for press mounted equipment. The panel shall also include such ancillary drives
as hereafter specified. The panel shall be designed to interface with main
control power and other plant control provided by others. All electrical work
shall be performed in accordance with applicable local and national electric
codes.
2. Three phase, 400 volt, 50/60 Hertz power shall be supplied to the main control
panel.
3. A control transformer will be provided in the control panel to provide a 120 volt,
single phase power source for motor starter coils, lights, relays, timers,
controllers, local operating panel and other related items.
4. The local control panel shall be provided with terminal blocks for power wiring
to and from the panel. The incoming terminal blocks shall be provided with a
single magnetic circuit breaker disconnect switch. Fuse protected motor
starters with thermal overloads shall be supplied for each motor furnished with
the press.
5. All electrical equipment controls located on the belt filter press shall have
NEMA 4X enclosures and wired, through PVC conduit, to a single common
NEMA 4X terminal box.
6. All devices within the panel shall be permanently identified. Nameplates shall
be provided on the face of the panel or on the individual device as required.
Nameplates shall be made of laminated phenolic materials with a white face
and a black core. Panel shall be supplied with start/stop pushbutton, run lights
and starters for all components meant to be controlled by the control panel.
7. The panel shall be designed for manual starting and stopping of all drives. A
master run-jog switch shall be supplied to override the alarm system and allow
operation of any drive through a momentary contact push button.
8. All drive stations shall be equipped with a start/stop switch and run light. The
main press drives and gravity belt drives, sludge feed pump, and polymer feed
pump as hereafter specified, shall also incorporate a variable speed
potentiometer and speed indicator.
9. Alarm lights, sensors, and related circuitry shall be provided for the following
functions: belt misalignment, high and low belt tension, emergency trip cord on
each side of the press, and low hydraulic pressure. In the event of any of the
above malfunctions, the machine will shut down and an alarm sound. The alarm
system shall include an audible horn rated at 90 DBA at 3m. The system shall
include silencing provisions, but the function alarm indicating light shall remain
lit until the alarm condition is satisfied.
10. The manufacturer shall provide a complete electrical wiring diagram and
schematic for the belt press control panel to the Employer. The wiring
schematic shall indicate correlated terminal and field wiring which will be
required between the control panel, the belt press, and ancillary equipment
11. Sludge Ultrasonic Flow Meter and Transmitter

Instrument
A. The sludge flow meter and transmitter shall be supplied by the Belt Filter Press
Supplier.
B. Spool Piece Flow Tube and Sensors
C. The nominal diameter of the flow tube shall be 100 mm.
D. The spool piece flow tube shall be made of carbon steel and shall be epoxy enamel
painted finish inside and outside, and shall include Type 316 stainless steel bolts. O
ring seals shall be made of Viton, and standpipe gaskets shall be made of nitrile
rubber.
E. The flow tube shall be furnished with an insulating liner. The flow tube liner shall be
AWWA approved epoxy enamel that conforms to National Sanitation Foundation
Standard 61 for use with potable water and American Water Works Association
Standard C652-86 for use with potable water.
F. The flow tube shall be supplied with raised face carbon steel flanges to ANSI 150.
G. Each flow sensor shall contain a coil, a pair of sensing electrodes, and an integral
grounding electrode. External grounding rings and straps shall not be necessary. The
sensors shall use solid state design, with the coils, electrodes, and other sensor
components encapsulated in Kynar. The sensors shall be field-replaceable and field
interchangeable without the need for recalibration.
H. The electrodes shall be made of Type 316 stainless steel.
I. The sensors shall use unipolar pulsed electromagnetic excitation, with typical
magnetizing current of not less than 2 to 5 A peak to peak, coil voltage of not less
than 80 V, and frequency of not less than 2/3 of power supply frequency (40 Hz for a
50/60 Hz power supply frequency), and capable of a quality factor (magnetizing
current in amps peak to peak times frequency in Hz to the 3/2 power) of 500 to 1260
to ensure a high signal-to-media noise ratio.
J. The minimum medial conductivity shall be 0.5 microS/cm.
K. The maximum media temperature shall be 80 degrees C.
L. The flow meter shall include multiple sensors to measure mean velocity in full pipes.
M. The mean velocity measurement range shall be from (0 to 0.6 meters per second) to
(0 to 15 meters per second).
N. The minimum detectable mean velocity shall be 0.006 meters per second.
O. The mean velocity shall be measured with a maximum error of ±0.0015 meters per
second over a range of less than 0.3 meters per second, and ±0.5% of flow rate over
a range of 0.3 to 15 meters per second. A mean velocity of 0.03 meters per second
shall be measured with a maximum error of ±5% of flow rate. Accuracy shall be
traceable to the US National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) and shall
be guaranteed on-site for applications such as drinking water, raw sewage, and
similar media, even with a permanent coating of raw sewage or similar on the
electrodes, provided that specification parameters and installation recommendations
are met. A NIST traceable calibration certificate shall be provided with each flow
meter.
P. The temperature coefficient shall be less than 0.09% per 10 degrees C.
Q. The flow transmitter shall use the electrodes on the sensors, or a user-supplied signal
into a contact input on the flow transmitter, to detect a non-full pipe condition. When
a non-full pipe condition occurs, the 4 to 20 mA output on the flow transmitter shall
go to 4 mA, the pulse frequency output and totalizer shall stop, and a relay in the flow
transmitter shall be activated.
R. Maximum pressure shall be 10 bar.
S. The wiring from the flow transmitter to the sensors shall be 3 separate 2-conductor
cables, 0.75 mm2, twisted and shielded. The wiring from the flow transmitter to the
sensors shall be as required. The flow transmitter shall be mounted in the office/lab
area of the treatment facility.
T. The flow tube and sensors shall be permanently submersible to NEMA 6P (IP68) to
10 m.
U. An integral ¾” tap to allow sampling shall be provided.
Flow Transmitter
A. The specification of the flow measurement shall follow the description contained in
chapter 5 (Measurement Instrumentation & Control) of Volume 2 of this tender
documents .
Ultrasonic Dual Channel Clamp-On Flow Meter
A. The specification of the flow measurement shall follow the description contained in
chapter 5 (Measurement Instrumentation & Control) of Volume 2 of this tender
documents .
Ancillary Equipment
A. General: Ancillary equipment is specified by name, manufacturer and model number
to show the minimum system requirements for performance and details of
construction.
Sludge Feed Pump
A. The sludge feed pump shall be 2 stage sludge pump in cast iron/tool steel/Buna N
construction with packed stuffing box and complete with base plate, gear type
coupling, OSHA coupling guard, totally enclosed fan cooled premium efficiency gear
motor with an output of approximately 350 RPM.
Sludge Flow Monitoring
A. A sludge flow meter and transmitter shall be supplied with the Belt Filter Press
Equipment.
Conveyor
A. The conveyor system shall be complete with frame, supports, belt, drives, head
pulleys with shaft and bearings, tail pulley with shaft and bearings, take-ups, idlers,
cleaning devices, chutes, skirts, zero speed switch, stop switch, and belt
misalignment switch alarm.
B. The conveyor shall be designed to convey the belt filter press sludge cake from the
discharge of the belt filer press vertically 4 meters (as measured from finished floor
in the belt filter press room) at an angle of 19 deg.
Polymer Feed System
A. The Polymer feed system shall consist of two polymer mix/feed tanks, two polymer
mixers, polymer feed pump, two polymer wetting devices and rotometer.
Polymer Tanks
A. The Polymer tanks shall be spun wound fiberglass flat bottom tank with intragally
cast mixer mounting bracket.
Polymer Mixers
A. The polymer mixers shall be agitator with a 350 RPM speed output and a 0.3 m
diameter high efficiency A310 impeller with stabilizer. The mixers shall be complete
with a stainless steel shaft.
Polymer Feed Pump
A. The Polymer feed pump shall be constructed of cast iron housing with tool steel rotor
and Buna N stator with a packed stuffing box and mounted on a base with high torque
coupling, coupling guard, totally enclosed sever duty premium efficiency gear motor.
The motor shall be 380 volt, 3 phase, 60 cycle motor.
Polymer Wetting Device
A. The polymer wetting device shall be venturi operated, and shall have a cone shaped
funnel for feeding polymer. The polymer wetting device shall be easily disassembled
for cleaning. Two (2) polymer wetting devices shall be provided.
3.42 Recessed Chamber Filter Presses
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Each recessed fixed-volume chamber filter press unit and accessories shall
efficiently dewater sludge for handling as dry cake.
GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials for common equipment used throughout this specification shall conform to
the following requirements. Materials for specific components and accessories shall
be as specified.
3.42.2.1 Standard Products
A. Provide materials and equipment which are the standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products and that essentially duplicate
items that have been in satisfactory use in similar facilities for at least 2 years prior
to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the
opinion of the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the site
3.42.2.2 Nameplates
A. Filter presses, pumps, tanks, mixers, panels and motors shall have the
manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog
number on a stainless steel plate permanently secured to the item of equipment.
3.42.2.3 Protection of Moving Parts
A. Completely enclose belts, chains, couplings, and other moving parts by
B. guards to prevent accidental personal injury. Guards shall be removable or
C. arranged to allow access to the equipment for maintenance. If equipment is
D. in a lockable housing, no additional guards are necessary.
3.42.2.4 Special Tools
A. Provide one set of special tools, calibration devices, and instruments
B. required for operation, calibration, and maintenance of the equipment.
MATERIALS
3.42.3.1 Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars
A. ASTM A36/A36M.
3.42.3.2 Pipe and Fittings
3.42.3.2.1 Steel Pipe
A. ASTM A53/A53M.
(1) Flanged Fittings: ASTM A105/A105M.
(2) Welded Fittings: ASME B16.9, ASME B16.11.
(3) Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A193/A193M, Grade B5; ASTM A194/A194M.
3.42.3.2.2 Ductile-Iron Pipe
A. AWWA C115/A21.15.
(1) Flanged Pipe: AWWA C115/A21.15, with ASME B16.1, Class 125 flanges.
(2) Rubber-Gasket Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11.
(3) Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10.
(4) Push-On Joints: AWWA C151/A21.51.
(5) Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307, Grade B.
3.42.3.2.3 Stainless Steel Pipe
A. ASTM A312/A312M, Schedule 40, Type 316 or Type 304.
(1) Flanged Pipe: ASTM A182/A182M, Class 150, drilled to ASME B16.5.
(2) Rubber-Gasket Joints: [ASME B16.5] [ASME B16.21].
(3) Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11.
(4) Bolts: ASTM A193/A193M, Class 1, Grade B8.
(5) Nuts: ASTM A194/A194M, Grade 8.
3.42.3.2.4 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
A. PVC pipe and fittings less than 100 mm diameter shall be in accordance with ASTM
D1785 or ASTM D2241. PVC pipe and fittings 100 mm in diameter and larger shall
be in accordance with ASTM D2241 and shall have push-on joints.
(1) Push-On Joints: ASTM D3139 or ASTM F477.
(2) Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564.
3.42.3.3 Pipe Hangers and Supports
A. Hangers and supports shall conform with the requirements identified in MSS SP-58
and MSS SP-69.
MANUFACTURED UNITS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.42.4.1 Electrical Products
A. Electrical products shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the applicable
requirements of Section 4 of this sepcifications
3.42.4.2 Electric Motors
A. Motors shall conform to NEMA MG 1. Motors with nameplate horsepowers equal to
or greater than 380 watt 1/2 hp shall be suitable for 380 volt, 3 phase operating
service, unless otherwise specified. Motors equal to or greater than 760 watt 1 hp
shall be high efficiency type. Motors less than 380 watt 1/2 hp shall be provided with
internal thermal overload protection or motor starters suitable for 220 volt, single
phase, operating service.
3.42.4.3 Tank Requirements
A. The tanks specified include the filtrate collection and weir, sludge conditioning,
precoat, acid wash, membrane water, and filter media wash tanks. These tanks shall
be provided in accordance with the following general requirements, unless otherwise
indicated. Additional requirements are also provided in the paragraph that describes
the application of each specific type of tank.
3.42.4.3.1 General Tank Requirements
A. Each tank shall include flanged fittings for inlet, outlet, overflow and drain. The nozzle
size, elevation, and orientation shall be provided in accordance with construction
drawings. Hold down lugs shall be provided to anchor the tank to the base. A cover
shall be provided with a piano type hinged access door for inspection and cleaning
of the tank. Single pole double throw level switches shall be provided. Switch contacts
shall be rated 3 amps, 220 volts ac inductive load minimum. Switch leads shall extend
to a NEMA 4 junction box located 1.5 m above floor level. Leads shall terminate on
terminal strips using ring tongue connectors and shall be identified.
3.42.4.3.2 Tank Construction Materials
A. The tank construction material shall be compatible with the material stored. Tanks
constructed of polyethylene, polypropylene, and fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP)
shall conform to applicable material and construction provisions of ASTM C582,
ASTM D3299, and ASTM D4097. Stainless steel tanks shall be Type 304 stainless
steel conforming to ASTM A167 with structural supports conforming to ASTM A276.
3.42.4.3.3 Access Ladders
A. Access ladders and platforms for access to the tank tops shall conform to
ALI/LADDER A14.3. The ladder shall be fabricated of fiberglass reinforced plastic
shapes, or stainless steel coated with a 3 mm minimum thickness of reinforced resin.
Rungs shall be serrated or grooved longitudinally to provide a nonslip surface.
Splices and connections shall have a smooth transition without projections that are
sharp or more extensive than required for joint strength. Rails shall be fitted with
rackets for anchorage to structure. The top of the cage shall be extended 1.1 m above
the tank and shall be connected to the tank roof. A minimum of 200 mm clearance
between the tank wall and the ladder rungs shall be maintained. The last rung of the
ladder on top shall be at the same level as the top of the tank.
3.42.4.3.4 Tubular Glass Gauge Assembly
A. A tubular glass gauge assembly shall be provided complete with valves and protector
to provide local indication of liquid level in the tank. The tube shall be 19 mm O.D.
borosilicate glass and shall provide indication from 0.3 m above bottom of tank to the
overflow level. The valves shall be offset pattern and of outside screw and yoke
design. Valves shall be provided with a floating shank union vessel connection.
Valves shall be stainless steel ball checks that seat to prevent loss of tank contents
should the glass break. Valves shall be operated by handwheel. A plastic window
gauge glass protector shall be installed the entire length of the indication. A yellow
board graduated gauge scale shall be attached to the tank behind the glass in 0.10
m graduation increments for tank gauging.
3.42.4.3.5 General Mixer Requirements

A. Mixers shall be in accordance with the following requirements unless otherwise
indicated. Each mixer shall be mounted in the center top of the tank and shall be
suitable for continuous operation. The tank shall be supplied with baffles as
recommended by the mixer manufacturer. Mixers shall be provided with totally
enclosed fan cooled electric motors, for an operation service of 380 volt, three phase,
50 hertz. The mixer shaft and turbine blades shall be rubber covered carbon steel.
The motor short circuit protective device and magnetic starter shall be remotely
located in a motor control center or panels as shown on the drawings. A local
disconnect shall be provided at the motor.
SLUDGE DEWATERING EQUIPMENT
A. The sludge dewatering equipment shall consist of the filter press components,
including the filter press unit and its ancillary equipment, and accessories required to
support the filtration operation. The filter press unit shall consist of a main structural
frame, filter press plates, and filter media.
3.42.5.1 Ancillary Equipment
A. The ancillary equipment shall include the press closing mechanism, plate shifter,
sludge feed and discharge piping, diaphragm inflation manifold, air and core
blowdown assembly, filtrate collection and weir tank, drip trays, automatic filter media
water washer assembly, safety options, a filter press control panel, and dewatering
system control panel. The ancillary equipment required for press operation shall be
integrally incorporated within each filter press unit and controlled through the filter
press control panel and coordinated with control for accessories provided through the
dewatering system control panel.
3.42.5.2 Accessory Systems
A. The accessory systems shall include a sludge feed pump system, a raw sludge
conditioning system, a precoat system, an acid wash system, an air compressor
system, and a filter media water wash system.
3.42.5.2.1 Sludge Feed Pump
A. The sludge feed pump system shall transfer sludge from the sludge conditioning
system to the filter press through an automatic pump control system.
3.42.5.2.2 Sludge Conditioning System
A. The sludge conditioning system shall include a chemical feed (conditioning agent)
point and shall receive raw sludge and provide sludge to the filter press feed pump
system.
3.42.5.2.3 Precoat System
A. The precoat system shall be provided to precoat the filter media prior to feeding the
filter press with conditioned sludge
3.42.5.2.4 Air Compressor System
A. The air compressor system shall provide compressed air for instrument control and
process operations for the filter press
3.42.5.2.5 Filter Media Washing
A. The manual filter media water wash system and acid wash system shall be provided
for filter media washing.
3.42.5.3 System Technical Data
Submmit the following:
A. Drawings that contain complete electrical interconnecting wiring and schematic

diagrams for power, piping, control,and instrumentation circuits to equipment
specified; equipment layout and anchorage; process flow diagrams, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will
properly function as a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of
equipment and appurtenances and equipment relationship to other parts of the work
including clearances required for maintenance and operation.
B. complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturer's descriptive and
technical literature; performance charts and curves; catalog cuts; power requirement
demand; and installation instructions. As a minimum, the list shall include the
following data:
(1) Filter Press. Equipment dimensions; materials and details of construction;
inlet/outlet sizes and locations; controls; size, make and type of electrical
motors; and flow rates.
(2) Pumps. Base and pump dimensions; pump type; materials and details of
construction; inlet/outlet locations; size, make, and type of electrical motors;
and flow rate and pressure capacities.
(3) Tanks. Dimensions; materials and details of construction; inlet/outlet sizes and
locations; and chemical feed pipe and diffuser size, location, and materials.
(4) Mixers. Identification/location; impeller size, type, and material; shaft size,
material, and number of sections; size, make, and type of electrical motors;
electrical control equipment type; specifications, details, input and output
speeds, exact gear ratio, and service factor (24-hour continuous service) of
gear reducers; and connection and mounting details.
FILTER PRESS COMPONENTS
A. Components shall be new, free of defects or mechanical damage and in operating
condition.
3.42.6.1 Main Structural Frame
A. The filter press shall be designed for 690 kPa service. The filter press frame shall be
fabricated of ASTM A36/A36M steel and consist of a fixed head, movable follower
head, tail stand, and side bar beam assembly
3.42.6.1.1 Fixed Head
A. The fixed head shall be fabricated steel construction with welded ribs and shall
provide uniform strength over the entire surface against the filter plate pack. The head
shall be free standing with integral attachment points for anchor bolts. The fixed head
end shall incorporate connections for two side bars for the side bar assembly.the four
corner tie bars. The fixed head end shall contain the necessary connections for the
filter feed and discharge. The fixed head end shall contain one center sludge feed
connection and four corner filtrate discharge connections
3.42.6.1.2 Movable Head
A. The movable follower head shall be fabricated of steel construction with welded ribs
and shall provide uniform strength over the entire surface against the filter plate pack.
The follower head shall be mounted on supports over the two side bars for alignment
and smooth parallel movement against the plate stack. If the plate stack is in excess
of 80 chambers, connections shall be supplied for sludge feed as described for the
fixed head. Follower movement shall be transmitted by a double-acting hydraulic
cylinder attached to the thrust block on the follower.
3.42.6.1.3 Tail Stand

A. The tail stand shall be fabricated steel and shall be free standing with anchor bolt
attachment points. The tail stand shall have a sufficient area to provide acceptable
load distribution to the filter foundation. The tail stand shall support the press closing
mechanism. The tail stand shall also have connections to accept the two side bars of
the side bar assembly.
3.42.6.1.4 Beam Assembly
A. The two side bars of the side bar beam assembly shall interconnect the fixed head
and tail stand. The beam assembly shall support the weight of the plates and follower,
and shall provide tensile strength for maintaining closing pressure. The two side bar
beams shall be of sufficient width and depth to prevent deflections in excess of 1/900
of the length of the beam assembly when fully loaded. Intermediate supports of the
beams will not be acceptable. Beam flanges shall be stainless steel clad or have
stainless steel caps to facilitate smooth operation of the filter plate shifter.
3.42.6.2 Filter Press Plates
A. The fixed-volume recessed type filter plates shall be of the center or corner feed,
corner filtrate discharge design for operation at 690 kPa pressure at ambient
temperature. The filter plates shall be constructed of polypropylene conforming to
ASTM D638, ASTM D785, and ASTM D790. Plates shall be monolithically molded
with integral stay bosses. Plates shall be designed with a short rib quadrant or piped
design that maximizes filtrate flow and provides maximum cloth support. Plate sealing
surfaces shall be machined to maximum parallel plate tolerance of 0.3 mm. Chamber
recess depth dimensions shall have a tolerance not to exceed 0.5 mm. Plates for
side bar assembly presses shall have handles that are integrally cast and not
mechanically fastened or welded in. Plates shall be of the non-gasketed or gasketed
design.
B. Gasketed plates shall have a round bottomed caulking groove machined around the
perimeter of each drainfield for installation of filter cloths. Gasketing shall be on the
perimeter sealing surface and around each of the corner eyes. Grooves of the
dovetail design shall be machined around each corner port and around the cake
chamber on the sealing surface for the installation of gasketing.
C. Non-gasketed plates shall come completed with five equally spaced cloth dogs along
the uppermost edge of the plate for installation of filter cloths.
D. A head liner plate and follower liner plate shall be provided with a recess on only the
side facing the adjacent filter plate. Plates shall be complete with filter media installed
3.42.6.3 Filter Media
A. One set of filter media shall be provided with each press. A standard filter media
constructed of polypropylene, having a multi-filament warp and monofilament (satin)
weave, and a porosity of 2.4 L/s, shall be provided, unless justified by the press
manufacturer for the intended service. Cloths shall be of the barrel neck design. Neck
material shall be of the same or less porous material.
B. Filter media for non-gasketed plates shall have a series of grommets along three
edges. Grommets shall be used to install media on filter plate cloth dogs and shall be
used along vertical sides to insert nylon cloth ties to hold media taut on the plate.
C. Filter media for gasketed plates shall be held in place on the filter plates by a woven,
high density polypropylene cord sewn into the perimeter of the cloth. The filter media
shall be pressed or caulked into place on the filter plate and held by an interference
fit.]
3.42.6.4 Closing Mechanism

A. The closing mechanism shall consist of a hydraulic cylinder and hydraulic power
pack.
3.42.6.4.1 Hydraulic Cylinder
A. Sealing pressure for each press unit shall be provided by a double acting, hydraulic
cylinder which opens and closes the press unit. The hydraulic system shall be
designed to maintain an adequate force to keep the press closed against the full
slurry feed pressure of 690 kPa plus a minimum safety factor of 25 percent. The
cylinder and rod shall be mounted on the tail stand and positioned so that the piston
and rod movement are horizontal. The piston rod end shall be connected to the
follower plate by a ball fit connection to allow limited rotation of the follower head. A
minimum stroke shall be provided to permit sufficient movement of the follower plate
to allow each plate to be shifted and drop filter cakes, and to provide sufficient space
for maintenance between plates. The press manufacturer shall provide the
requirements for the cylinder size and stroking speed and a drawing of the cylinder
attachment points. The hydraulic cylinder shall be provided with a steel rod with a
polished and chrome plated finish fabricated in accordance with ASTM A276 to
minimize wear on the rod packing. A neoprene boot shall fit over the piston rod to
preclude entry of foreign material.
3.42.6.4.2 Hydraulic Power Pack
A. The hydraulic cylinder shall be pressurized by an electric or a pneumatic hydraulic
pumping unit. The pumping unit shall provide a nominal 34.5 MPa oil pressure to
maintain closing forces during the filtration cycle. The power pack shall automatically
sense the changes due to temperature changes, pressure elongation, and media
compression and adjust to maintain closing pressure for extended cycles completely
unattended.
B. The power pack shall be equipped complete with a hydraulic pump, valves, fittings,
pressure regulators, filters, visible and fully exposed sight glass, and thermal relief
valve.
C. The electric driven power pack shall be a totally enclosed fan cooled motor designed
for operation with 380 volt, 3 phase or 240 volt, single phase service.
D. The power pack shall be readily detachable from the filter press frame. The power
packs shall be free standing and attached to the filter press by hydraulic hoses
equipped with integral valves in quick connectors that are readily detachable from the
filter press if necessary for maintenance. The oil reservoir shall be equipped with a
filter-breather cap, local temperature indicator and switch, oil level indicator and
switch and shall be designed so that the oil can be drained from the unit at a point
300 mm minimum above the floor and refilled without the use of pumps.
E. The oil reservoir shall be integral to the hydraulic cylinder mount acting as a heat sink
to prevent overheating of the hydraulic system.
3.42.6.5 Plate Shifter
A. Plate movement for cake discharge shall be accomplished by means of a
semiautomatic plate shifter.
B. The semiautomatic plate shifter shall consist of one shifter carriage, mounted within
the beam plate suspension system of the filter press to pick up and transport only
one plate at a time.
C. The shifter shall be an electric/hydraulic driven variable speed reciprocating type.
D. Shifting shall be accomplished by the operator opening the follower and shifting the
plate shifter into automatic operation. The shifter carriage shall extend and pick up
each plate by the plate suspension bracket and pull it to the fully opened position,
discharging the plate against the follower.
E. The plate shifting mechanism shall be driven by a variable speed reversing electric
or hydraulic motor/gear reducer, totally enclosed fan cooled assembly for an
operating service of 380 volts, three phase. The unit shall then reverse and return to
pick up the next plate.
F. Plate suspension brackets shall be designed to provide parallel movement of the
plates without pendulum movement. The brackets shall have an integral latching
system that shall prevent shifting of more than one plate at a time. The exposed
portions of the shifter latching mechanisms shall be made from 316 stainless steel or
high density linear polyethylene with 300 series stainless steel springs actuating the
engagement pawls.
G. A pendant or trigger control station shall be provided to allow the operator to interrupt
the shifting sequence to inspect, remove cake, clean or otherwise attend to any
individual plate. Sufficient extended urethane pneumatic cable shall be provided to
allow the operator to manipulate the control from anywhere along the length of the
plate stack. The system shall be designed to provide a restart button only from the
filter press control panel.
3.42.6.6 Sludge Feed and Discharge Piping
A. Feed and discharge piping shall be fabricated of PVC or 316 stainless steel. The
piping shall be provided with connections through the head from the center feed slurry
port and corner filtrate discharge ports in the filter pack through the fixed-end head.
Threads shall be NPT standard.
3.42.6.6.1 Air Blowdown Manifold
A. The air blowdown manifold shall be fabricated of schedule 80 PVC or 316 stainless
steel and shall consist of the necessary piping and valves to join the four filtrate
discharge ports located on the fixed head into a common discharge pipe.
B. Automatic closing of the valves and introducing air into an upper filtrate port shall
force air through the filter cake in each press chamber and result in discharge of
excess filtrate to the alternating lower filtrate discharge port.
C. The system shall be rated for a minimum operating pressure of 280 kPa. A 0 to 420
kPa air regulator and pressure gauge to control and monitor air blowdown shall be
supplied.
3.42.6.6.2 Core Blow System
A. The core blow system shall consist of an air line and valve fabricated of schedule 80
PVC316 stainless steel and attached to the tail plate.
B. The system shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 550 to 690 kPa to force excess
sludge feed in the core of the press back out of the center feed inlet.
C. Closing and opening of valves shall be provided by controls operating the press. This
process shall be performed after air blowdown.
3.42.6.7 Filtrate Collection and Weir Tank
A. Each filter shall be provided with a filtrate collection and weir tank to measure and
indicate terminal filtrate flow. The weir tank shall be capable of passing the maximum
filtrate rates discharged from the filter press filtrate connection. The tank shall be
provided with an inlet and outlet connection, an overflow weir extending from wall to
wall within the tank between the inlet and outlet, and a liquid sensing device located
on the inlet side of the weir to transmit an electrical signal to the Dewatering System
Control Panel when stable terminal flow has been achieved. The tank shall have a
sufficient capacity and shall be constructed of fiberglass reinforced plastic and shall
include a hinged, vented cover
3.42.6.8 Drip Trays
A. Each of the cake storage bunkers shall be equipped with a set of bomb-bay type drip
trays located in the floor opening. The trays shall consist of two shelf sections to
extend from the location of the follower, in its fully extended position, to the tail stand
of the filter, and shall be designed to convey water from the trays or from washing
operations into a launder.
B. The top tray shall slightly overlap the lower center half at the center line to yield a
pitched surface when closed. Trays shall be hydraulically operated by means of a
double acting hydraulic cylinder.
C. Power pack controls shall automatically interlock drip tray closure with opening and
closing of this press.
D. In the fully closed position, the trays shall be mechanically locked; reliance on
hydraulic pressure to ensure full closure will not be acceptable.
E. Limit switches shall be incorporated in the drip tray mechanism, and interlocking shall
be incorporated in the system design to ensure against accidental discharge of filter
cake when the doors are not in a fully open position.
F. A manual override shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The supporting frame
for the drip trays shall be fabricated steel construction. The top surface of the trays
shall be polypropylene or 304 stainless steel.
G. Each drip tray assembly shall be equipped with a launder extending the length of that
assembly.
H. The launders shall be at least 150 mm wide, shall be of polypropylene, PVC, or 304
stainless steel construction with a minimum material thickness of 16 gauge, and shall
terminate in a flanged drain outlet.
3.42.6.9 Sludge Cake Handling and Storage (Direct Dschareg System)
A. The direct discharge system size depends on the size of the filter press and required
sludge cake storage capacity. This paragraph provides two direct discharge system
options: a drum system for smaller applications (210 L drums) and a roll-off box
system for larger applications (greater than 210 L receptacle) located beneath the
press.
B. The direct disposal system shall consist of a platform and disposal chute that shall
direct the sludge cake discharged into the disposal drumor roll-off box.
C. The platform shall include railing, catwalk, and stairs and shall conform to the design
requirements in AISI SG03-3. The platform shall be constructed as indicated to allow
an operator adequate access between all sides of the filter press and the safety
railing and access to critical components of the press not accessible from the floor.
D. The platform deck and stair treads shall be fabricated of ASTM A36/A36M carbon
steel grating 25 mm by 5 mm bars on 20 mm centers and shall be constructed so
that deflection will not exceed 1/300 of the span, considering dead and live load
requirements and applicable safety factors.
E. The platform frame shall be fabricated of ASTM A36/A36M structural steel I-beam,
angle and plate shall support all equipment loading plus applicable safety factors.
F. The operator walkways shall have a toe plate of carbon steel and safety rails of 25
mm schedule 80 carbon steel pipe.
G. Each disposal chute shall be fabricated of 6 mm thick ASTM A36/A36M carbon steel
sheet and shall be attached to the platform to limit spillage of sludge cake.
3.42.6.10 Blanking Plate
A. A blanking plate shall be provided which can be vertically inserted at any point in the
plate stack to isolate the filter plates between it and the follower head, allowing a
partial load to be processed.
B. A movable follower liner which can move with the blanking plate shall be provided to
allow filtration in the last cavity. The core blow air line shall move with the blanking
and follower plates.
3.42.6.11 Automatic Filter Media Water Washer Assembly
A. Each of the filters shall be equipped with a fully automated filter media water washer
assembly.
B. The washer shall be supported from the beam assembly of the filter and shall
normally be stored between the filter follower and tail stand.
C. The washer shall be designed for operation with water at 10 MPa and shall be
capable of washing two plate sides at a time using one or multiple passes as required.
D. Controls and appurtenances shall be provided to allow the washer, once initial
settings have been established, to wash each plate in a filter without further operator
attention.
CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The level of control presented in this specification is based on a semiautomatic
control scheme. The semiautomatic control scheme involves manual operator startup
of the sludge dewatering system, automatic control during the filtration cycle, and
manual startup and shutdown of supporting sub-cycles such as filter media washing.
The filter press components are controlled by a Filter Press Control Panel with control
of the accessories by a Dewatering System Control Panel.
B. A semiautomatic complete electrical power, control, and instrumentation system as
specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturer for the safe operation and
supervision of the filter press units and related equipment shall be provided, except
those items specified to be furnished under other sections.
C. Schematics and interconnection wiring diagrams for power, control, instrumentation
circuits shall be provided to equipment specified. Terminal blocks (plus 25 percent
spare terminals) shall be provided in panels to terminate field and interconnection
wiring.
D. Control power transformers, relays, adjustable timers, auxiliary contacts, switches, or
additional equipment required to interconnect the filter press package equipment to
a remote plant monitoring system, and control circuits as shown on schematic or
instrument control system drawings shall be provided. Conduit and wiring between
control panels and control devices shall be furnished.
3.42.7.1 Normal Operation
A. The normal operation of a fixed-volume recessed plate and frame press will consist
of the following sequence:
(1) The operator shall close filter press with controls at the press.
(2) The drip trays shall be closed from Filter Press Control Panel.
(3) The operator shall manually close valves to filtrate weir tank and valves to slurry
feed pump.
(4) The operator shall manually open valves for precoat recycle to filtrate storage
tank, precoat tank to pump, and precoat pump to press.
(5) The operator shall start the precoat pumps from the Dewatering System Control
Panel.
(6) The precoat system shall operate long enough to complete three cycles
through the press while recycling back to the precoat tank.
(7) The operator shall manually open valve from sludge conditioning tank to slurry
feed pump.
(8) The operator shall start the slurry feed pumps from the Dewatering System
Control Panel.
(9) The operator shall close valve from precoat pump to press while simultaneously
opening valve from slurry feed pump to the press.
(10) The operator shall close precoat recycle valve and open valve to filtrate weir
tank.
(11) The filter press feed pumping unit shall be operated as recommended by filter
press supplier or as indicated.
(12) The filter press shall operate until it is automatically shut down by high filter
press inlet pressure, terminal filtrate weir tank flow rate, low level in the sludge
conditioning tank, or any additional process or safety related shutdowns
recommended by the filter press supplier or as indicated.
(13) After the filter press feed pumping unit is shut off, there shall be a one minute
delay before the control system shall automatically: (1) close the filtrate pipe
valve, (2) open the valves on the filter press feed line to air/core blowdown tank
and open the air supply valve to the air/core blowdown tank, and (3) at
completion of air/core blowdown, reposition valves on the filter press feed line
to the filter feed position.
(14) After air/core blowdown, the completed filtering operation shall be indicated on
the Filter Press Control Panel. The operator shall then open the filter press and
initiate plate shifting and discharging of sludge cake from the Filter Press
Control Panel.
(15) The drip trays shall be interlocked with the sludge discharge operation and shall
provide an enable/disable interlock for press opening. Internal filter press
pressure in the feed port shall not allow press opening.
(16) The plate shifter shall automatically move plates at an adjustable delay of 5 to
10 seconds between shifts. A trigger control station located at the filter press
shall allow interruption of the plate shifting process. The plate shifting process
must be reinitiated from the Filter Press Control Panel. When each plate has
been shifted the closing mechanism shall remain in the open position until the
next press cycle is initiated.
3.42.7.2 Filter Press Control Panel
A. Each filter press unit shall be provided with a control panel mounted on or near the
unit to monitor and control pneumatic and hydraulic press parameters during
shutdown and maintenance. The panel shall be prewired to the associated press
components. The press control panel shall also include, but not be limited to, the
following items:
(1) A floor mounted NEMA [4X] [4] Control Panel with front accessible door.
(2) Air supply pressure gauge and control.
(3) Hydraulic supply to press cylinder gauge and control
(4) Hydraulic supply to drip tray gauge and control.
(5) Hydraulic supply to plate shifter gauge and control.
(6) Open-close drip trays.
(7) Open-close plate follower.
(8) Start-Stop plate shifter.
(9) Precoat cycle ON/OFF indication and control.
(10) Filter media washer ON/OFF indication and control.
(11) Air blowdown and core blow cycle indication, including destination of the air
and core blown sludge.
3.42.7.3 Dewatering System Control Panel
A. Each filter press shall be provided with a remotely mounted running and operating
control panel as indicated on the drawings. The control panel shall house electrical
equipment and accessory items required in the operation of the dewatering
equipment as specified. The dewatering system control panel shall include, but not
be limited to, the following items:
(1) A handrail or unit, or floor mounted NEMA 4X enclosure with front access door
and nameplate.
(2) ON-OFF selector switch for each press.
(3) A push-pull emergency shutdown push button for each filtration system
treatment trains.
(4) Off-Auto selector and start push button shall be furnished for each of the
following cycles: filtration cycle, precoat cycle with timer controls, air and core
blowdown cycles with timer controls.
(5) Pump Controls. Local/remote selector switch and lighted Start-Stop push
buttons for the acid wash pump. H-O-A selector switch and lighted Start-Stop
push buttons for each filter press feed pump. Selection control and operating
status of filter press feed pumps.
(6) Valve Controls. Lighted push button controls shall be furnished for each core
blow compressed air valve and three way filter feed pump discharge valve.
Lighted OPEN-CLOSE push-button controls shall be furnished for each of the
filtrate top drain and the filtrate bottom drain.
(7) Limit switches on each valve shall indicate position on the Dewatering System
Control Panel. Switches shall be NEMA 9 or shall be intrinsically safe devices.
(8) Alarms. A filter press filtrate terminal flow switch and a filter press inlet high
pressure switch shall be furnished with the filter press package and shall be
input to the Dewatering System Control Panel. Either of the conditions shall
shut down filter press operation. The filter press feed pumps indicating lights
for "low hydraulic pressure" and "end of cycle" due to a full filter press shall be
provided on the Dewatering System Control Panel.
(9) Outputs. Isolated dry contact closures shall be furnished for the following
remote indications: filter press run status, press equipment malfunction alarm,
press feed pump run status.
3.43 Mechanical Equipment for Thickener Tank

Requirements
B. The Contractor shall supply and erect the mechanical and electrical equipment for
sludge thickener tanks.
Equipment
A. The following equipment shall be provided for each tank:
3.43.2.1 Central Pivot
A. A cylindrical hot dip galvanized steel central pivot shall be supplied for supporting the
scraper mechanism and the bridge. The pivot shall be fabricated from galvanized
steel of suitable thickness, anchored to the concrete base with anchor bolts, and the
top of the pivot shall be machined for mounting the driving mechanism.
3.43.2.2 Driving Unit
A. The scraper shall be rotated by an adequately rated electric motor coupled to a totally
enclosed oil filled reduction gear unit of approved manufacture.
B. The driving unit shall be run freely and uniformly without any troubles for all conditions
of sludge accumulation at the tank floor and for all weather conditions which may
occur.
C. Protection shall be incorporated in the driving motor to prevent its over loading.
3.43.2.3 Control Panel
A. Starter, relays, fuses, etc., for the driving motor of the sludge thickener tank shall be
housed in a control panel.
B. Provision shall be made for additional remote stopping of the Scraper Bridge and
indication of motor run/stop/fail from the main control center.
C. An emergency stop push button of the latch-off type shall be provided beside the
driving motor on the scraper bridge.
3.43.2.4 Access Bridge (full bridge) and Hand Railing
A. The access bridge shall be as per drawings. The handrail shall be aluminum tubular
type with bauble rails not less than 40 mm diameter pipe and height shall be 1100
mm.
3.43.2.5 Scraper Arms
A. Two sludge scraping arms equipped with steel scraper blades to scrape the
thickened sludge along the floor of the tank to the sludge hopper at the center and
shall be rigidly connected to the center cage. The blades shall be arranged so that
the entire tank floor is scrapped once for each half revolution. Adjustable stainless
steel springs shall be provided for all blades and fastened with stainless steel bolts,
washers and nuts. Also sludge hopper scrapers shall be provided to each arm.
3.43.2.6 Dispersion Drum
A. The dispersion drum shall be a part of the supporting shaft of adequate size and
design to disperse the flow into the tank.
3.43.2.7 Outlet Weir Plates
A. An adjustable V-notched peripheral weir plates shall be provided and installed, to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings. The weir plates shall be constructed of st.st. 316
and complete with an approved type of rubber sealing strips. The complete assembly
shall form a watertight seal against the concrete surface. Provision should be made
for vertical adjustment.
3.43.2.8 Outlet Weir and Channel Cleaning Equipment
A. The outlet weir and channel cleaning equipment shall generally consist of a system
of hinged spring loaded brushes to be mounted on the rotating bridge.
B. Effluent weir Type: V- notch
C. Height of weir plate: 200 mm
D. Thickness of weir plate: 3 mm
E. Weir plate material: Stainless steel 316L
3.43.2.9 Pipes and Valves
A. All pipes shall be made of ductile cast iron, with flanged joints. The sludge withdrawal
pipe extends from the collecting sludge hopper up to the dislodging valve chamber
at the outer periphery of the tank. The price of the pipe shall include the special
pieces, fittings and adapting pieces up to the dislodging valves.
B. The sludge discharge pipe shall be controlled by two valves installed in succession,
and telescopic (hydrostatic) valve, and a sluice valve. These two valves shall be
similar to those of the sedimentation tanks.
C. Influent, effluent and thickened sludge pipes shall be extended up and including the
flexible couplings at the tank peripheral wall.
3.43.2.10 Valves for Sludge Discharge
A. The sludge discharge pipe shall be equipped by shut-off sluice valve for draining of
the tank.
3.43.2.11 Dislodging Process
A. The sludge withdrawal from the thickening tank shall be intermittent at a constant
rate. The dislodging telescopic valve shall deliver the sludge from the thickener by
gravity to drying beds or to the suction header of the thickened sludge pumping units.
3.44 Workshop Equipment (Not included in this Contract)
General:
A. The offer shall include the supply and erection of the following equipment in the
workshop building.
B. All workshop machines supplied should be self-contained of the modern and up-to-
date models and standards. The driving motors of machines shall work on 3-phase,
380 volts, 50 Hz.
Sliding and Screw Cutting Lathe
A. One Sliding and Screw Cutting Lathe, two meters between centers, 500 mm height
of center over bed, self-acting, sliding, surfacing and screw cutting (wit worth and
metric) automatic feed, gap bed, precision lathe, with electric motor and starter
standard shall be supplied. The lathe shall be complete with the following:
1. Cooling system.
2. 300 mm chuck and 500 mm chuck.
3. Change wheels.
4. Two complete sets of different types of tool cutters.
5. Spanners.
6. All other necessary equipment.
Column Drill
A. One high speed precision drilling machine to admit work up to 400 mm diameter, to
drill holes up to 35 mm diameter in steel, feeding and stopping either by hand or
automatic, multi speed, swiveling table, and with motor and starter. Standard
equipment supplied shall include the following:
7. One vice.
8. One complete set of suitable drills up to 40 mm.
9. Cooling system.
10. All other necessary equipment.
Portable Electric Welding Apparatus
A. The portable electric welding set shall be suitable for use with electrodes of up to 5
mm diameter. One set shall be of the transformer type, the other shall be generator
diesel engine drive set.
B. Each unit must be complete with switchgear, voltmeter and ammeter for incoming
and outgoing current, and connection of twenty meters length of flexible cable for the
incoming current. Tenders shall include for the supply of four sets of the necessary
cables of ten meter length for outgoing current, necessary accessories as gloves,
cleaning hammer and wise brush, and a supply of assorted 5kg electrodes up to 5
mm diameter and protection glasses.
Floor Mounted Grinding Machine
A. One double-wheel floor mounted grinding machine 2×8 one for course and other for
fine grinding, complete with guard hoods, driving motor and starter.
Portable Drill-Grinder
A. One portable, electrically driven drill with breast plate and adapted for grinding. It
shall be suitable for the following:
11. It shall be capable of drilling holes up to ½ inch diameter, complete inch steps,
with one spare chuck and two assortments of drills from 1/16 up to ½ 10 meters
of flexible cable.
12. It shall be adapted for grinding purposes and including two sets of rough, fine
and brush wheels.
Two Trolleys
A. Two hand operated, straight table trolley, of capacity one ton, platform dimensions
not less than 150 × 75 cm. and complete with four solid rubber wheels, the front
wheels being of such design so as to enable the trolley to turn a radius of
approximately 70 cms.
Subsidiary Equipment
A. One wooden vice bench 2.5×1.2 ms. size at least complete with drawers, locks and
keys.
B. To Two parallel vices one 6" and the other 8" with removable steel jacks be mounted
on the above bench.
C. Two portable 6" pipe vices.
D. One suitable oil stone.

E. One leveling block about 40 × 40 cm.
F. Four hack saw for 12" blade with 4 dozens of blades.
G. One 20" wood cutting saw.
H. 6", 8" and 10" files rough second cut and smooth of each of the a total of following
sections; flat, half-round, square, round and triangular making 45 files supplied. flat
I. 6" and 10" scrapers of each of the following types “flat knife-edges, bull nose, curved
and triangular making a total of a 8 scrapers.
J. 50 assorted handles for files and scrapers.
K. Two wire brushes for files.
L. Two steel hammers 250 gm., two 500 gm., and two 4 kg. The six provided with their
handles.
M. 100 sheets of different grades of sand paper equally divided.
Measuring Instruments and Gauges
A. One of four precision type micrometer screw gauge in a box to measure diameters :
1. One from 0 to about 25 mm.
4. One from 75 to about100 mm.
5. One set of two Vernier calipers combined with micrometers :
6. One for a range of measurement of about 150 mm.
7. One for a range of measurement of about 300 mm.
Electrical Workshop Equipment
A. Tenders shall include the following equipment in the electrical workshop:
1. 1 No. portable electrically driven drill with 20 mm chuck and from 3 mm to 20
mm ranging by 0.5mm drillings and 20 meters of flexible cable connection.
2. 1 No. electric soldering iron.
3. 1 No. multi-meter suitable for measuring volts, amperes and resistance in both
DC and AC.
4. 2 No. pincer-type ammeters.
5. 1 No. insulation tester (battery) up to 20 kv, AC. & 20kv, DC.
6. 2 No. voltage testers up to 500 v- AC.
Maintenance Tools
A. Four sets of the following tools shall be provided. Each set shall be accommodated
in a lockable box and shall comprise;
7. 1 No. set chrome vanadium spanners to fit each size of nut and bolt used
throughout the installation.
8. 1 No. 1/2 kg. Hammer.
9. 1 No. adjustable stilson wrench 12".
10. 1 No. screwdriver 300 mm.

11. 1 No. screwdriver 150 mm.
12. 1 No. star screwdriver.
13. 1 No. pliers 180 mm.
14. 1 No. packing extractor.
15. 1 No. grease Gun.
16. 1 No. set Allen keys.
17. 1 No. ladder 3 mts. long, made of square steel pipe.
18. 1 No. ladder 6 mts. long, made of square steel pipe.
19. 1 No. clothes cupboard ideal type 2 leaflets.
B. Bidders shall include in their prices for the above maintenance tools in the summary
of the schedule of prices.
Portable Equipment.
A. Portable diesel de-watering pump-set with accessories, Q= 25 litre/sec H=15Mt with
30 Mt rubber reinforced hose.
3.45 Laboratory Equipment
General:
A. The offer shall include the supply and erection of the following Laboratory equipment,
and all Laboratory equipment shall be according to the roles, basis and requirements
of CAPW centralized laboratories department and according to NOPWASD
centralized laboratories and research department:
Laboratory Apparatuses:
A. No. 1 top loading balance of up to 1000 gm with accuracy of 0.05 gm.
B. No. 1 analytical balance of up to 160 gm with accuracy of 0.1 milligram.
C. No. 1 bench top PH meter with range from zero to 14 PH measuring unit and accuracy
0.1 unit.
D. No. 1 portable PH meter with range from 1 to 11 PH unit and accuracy 0.5 unit
complete with probe, rechargeable battery and charger.
E. No. 1 portable DO meter of range from zero to 10 mg/lit complete with probe,
rechargeable battery and charger.
F. No.1 portable free and combined residual chlorine meter of range from zero to 6 mg/lit
complete with probe, rechargeable battery and charger.
G. No. 1 BOD incubator with capacity of at least 20 standard BOD bottles, temperature
range of zero to 30o C and accuracy 0.5 o C.
H. No. 1 Oxygen gas cylinder capacity 50 liters complete with control and diffusers.
I. No. 1 stirring hot plate with temperature range of 150 to 700 Fahrenheit and stirring
rod speed of 1800 r.p.m
J. No. 1 furnace of temperature up to 150 oC.
K. No.1 water distiller of capacity not less than 2 gallon/hr.
L. No. 1 bench top electric timer with alarm of at least 60 minutes and accuracy 1
second.
M. No. 1 automatic sampler

N. No. 1 membrane filtration apparatus complete with vacuum pump.
O. No. 1 set of 3 aluminium pipet cans.
P. No. 1 set of 5 boxes of standard filter papers
Q. No. 1 set of 5 boxes of membrane filters.
Laboratory Glassware:
A. No. 1 set of 4 precision burettes.
B. No. 1 set of 4 automatic burettes.
C. No. 1 set of 6 measuring pipets of 1, 5 and 10 millilitre.
D. No. 1 set of 5 volumetric pipets of 1, 5, 10, 20 and 50 millilitre.
E. No. 1 set of 5 eye dropper transfer pipets.
F. No. 1 set of 5 Erlenmeyer flasks of sizes between 125 millilitre and 2 litres.
G. No. 1 set of 3 filter flasks complete with evacuation tube.
H. No. 1 set of 4 volumetric flasks of sizes 50, 100, 500 and 1000 millilitre.
I. No. 1 set of 6 graduated cylinders of sizes 10, 50, 100, 200, 500 and 1000 millilitres.
J. No. 1 set of 6 beakers of sizes 50, 150, 250, 600, 1000 & 2000 millilitre.
K. No. 2 set of settle meter (Malory meter) of 2 litre size.
L. No. 1 set of 20 test tubes including 5 conical tubes of 15 millilitre size to be used with
the centrifuge.
M. No. 1 set of 10 plastic bottles of 50 millilitre to 5 litre sizes of dark colour.
N. No. 1 set of 10 glass stopper bottles of 30 to 2000 millilitre sizes.
O. No. 1 set of 5 BOD bottles of 300 millilitre size.
P. No. 1 set of 5 dropping bottles.
Q. No. 1 set of 5 plastic squeeze bottles.
R. No. 1 set of 3 carboys of 2, 5 and 12 litre.
S. No. 1 set of 6 evaporating dishes of 70 and 150 millilitre.
T. No. 1 set of 3 Gosh crucible of 35 millilitre.
U. No. 1 set of 3 Inhofe cone of 1 litre.
V. No. 1 set of 6 polypropylene funnels of 75, 100 and 150 millilitre.
W. No. 1 set of 4 Buchner funnels of 80 and 115 millilitre.
X. No. 1 set of 2 crucible tongs 9 and 12 inch.
Y. No. 1 set of 3 stainless steel evaporating dish tongs
Z. No. 1 set of 3 beaker tongs.
AA. No. 1 set of 3 flask tongs
BB. No. 1 set of 20 Petri dishes for bacteriological analysis.
Laboratory Chemicals:
A. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all chemicals required for wastewater
standard analysis (BOD) and laboratory tests as per the standard methods. The
supplied quantities should be enough for two years (one year of operation by the
contractor and one additional year)
Laboratory Furniture:
A. Laboratory furniture and fittings should be of a quality appropriate to a water works
laboratory and conform to all relevant standard specifications in addition to the
requirements given herein.
B. The bidder shall submit, drawings of the overall arrangement of the laboratory area.
These drawings shall be of such scale. The items within the tender should be shown
in detail.
C. The Contractor should take into consideration the following conditions:
D. The price shall include the supply, installation on site and hooking up of all supplies
to benches.
E. The Contractor will make sure that his fixtures will match with water, gas and drainage
piping.
F. The Contractor will supply all internal piping and drainage of the benches with fume
hood, exhaust piping and suction system.
Working Benches:
A. The following specifications are considered as minimum acceptable requirements for
both double working benches and wall working benches.
Base Units:
A. Should be constructed of either solid wood, treated for chemical resistance or
constructed of excellent chemical and corrosion resistance steel of heavy gauge
(flake board or artificial wood not accepted). Drawers should operate quietly.
B. Doors must be furnished with roller steel catches and constructed from the material
given above. Plastic drawer bodies are rejected.
Working Tops:
A. The work top materials should be made of flat surface slabs, not tiled to avoid cracks
and grooves.
B. It should be made of natural stoneware of large area, joint-less 30mm thick at least
with brown or black color. Material should be clay ceramic according to DIN28062
with physical properties in accordance with the standards of the country of
manufacture.
C. The work top material must be resistance to:
20. Chemical attack.
21. Stain.
22. Heat attack.
23. Moisture.
24. Load bearing.
D. Exact data about the previous properties should be introduced with the offer.
Reagent Shelves:
A. Should be made of the same work top material.
Sink Basins:-
A. Sink basins should be made of heavy-duty epoxy resin and supported in the base
unit by hangers.
B. Plumbing traps and outfits must be impervious to chemicals, heat resistant. Drainage
pipes either P.V.C. or high quality copper pipes.
Service Fixtures:
A. Gas fixtures shall be made of drop forged and heavily nickel plated with custom
chrome finish of enduring bluster has color code and labelled tag.
B. Water fixtures shall be made of the same material have double thread valves stem
with stainless steel valve seat.
C. Electrical boxes match European outlet system. All boxes furnished with shank
assemblies. Single-phase electrical pedestal boxes with two cables should be
supplied in all double working benches. For all benches single- phase boxes with two
outlets.
Cases:
A. The following specifications for both wall cases and floor cases should be considered.
B. Match in design and construction the base unit to be constructed of not less than
1.25mm steel sheets throughout. Strong upright channels should reinforce ends.
C. Wall cases doors shall be glazed with single sheet of D.S.A. glass. Two adjustable
doubles channel formation shelves in all wall cases. Floor storage cases should
consist of reinforced panel construction with steel-framed sliding doors supported at
bottom by concealed rollers.
One Storage Cabinet Wardrobe:
A. Has one side a wardrobe section with hanger. The other section has four adjustable
half width shelves and fixed full width top shelf, doors operate easily and lock
securely, having approximately dimensions of 90cm width, 45cm depth and 200cm
height.
Six Laboratory Stools:
A. Upholstered type with 2 “urethane foam sheets covered with white vinyl fabric. Frame
shall be of chromed metal mounted on casters. The seat height shall be adjustable.
Refrigerator:
A. One refrigerator of 16 feet capacity complete with freezer compartment shall be
supplied.
3.46 CHEMICAL DIAPHRAGM METERING PUMPS
A. The metering pumps shall be of materials suitable for pumping each chemical. The
metering pump operation shall be paced by the 4-20 mA signals from flow meters,
and shall pump to the respective application points. The chemical feed equipment
supplier shall provide signal converters, if required, to ensure compatibility with
pacing signals being provided. All the hydraulic diaphragm metering pumps shall be
provided by a single pump manufacturer.
B. Metering pumps shall be positive displacement hydraulically actuated diaphragm
type. The pump shall have a volume-measuring piston reciprocates within a cylinder
and forces the hydraulic fluid to flex the diaphragm. The diaphragm shall be returned
by hydraulic means. Packed plunger and mechanically actuated diaphragms are not
allowed. Pumps shall be of duplex (RAS header) and triplex (EPS header and RW
header) types.
C. The chemical pump manufacturer shall provide a two-year warranty on the pump
drive and one year warranty on the pump liquid end including diaphragm and O-rings.
D. The pumps shall be fully tested to meet rated flows and pressures by the
manufacturer.
E. The pump’s moving parts shall be enclosed with no opportunity for moving parts to
be exposed during operation. All triplex type pump drive mechanisms shall be
submerged in lubricating oil during operation.
F. The metering pump shall have mechanical lost motion type flow control where the
worm gear set actuates a reciprocating piston to drive the hydraulically actuated
diaphragm.
G. Diaphragm shall be capable of operating at 100% capacity and full rated pressure for
a minimum of 9,000 hours of service. The diaphragm shall be capable of sealing
under full head-bolt torque limits without stressing the diaphragm. The diaphragm
shall be of pre-shaped PTFE/elastomer composite type. The PTFE shall apply to the
process fluid side, and the elastomer shall apply to the hydraulic fluid side
H. The pump feed rates shall be adjustable by changing stroke length or motor speed
in response to a 4-20 mA process signal. Adjustment shall be accomplished while
the pump is operating or idle. Capacity controls shall be capable of a 100% duty
cycle. Manual capacity adjustment by changing stroke length from 0 to 100% shall
be provided for each pump unit.
I. Pumps shall have a manually actuated hydraulic purge valve. The valve shall be
integrated and field adjustable type relieve valve to protect pump from over pressure.
Pump must be capable of operating under a completely dry or starved suction
condition.
J. The pump shall incorporate non-vented gearbox and eccentric designs to protect the
pump from the ingress of water or debris. The fluids of the gearbox and the eccentric
box shall be separated by positive type seal arrangement.
K. The pump shall have the ability to be hydrostatically tested in the actual installation
at 1.5 times the rated pressure of the pump.
L. Each pump shall be supplied with a leak sensing device. The device shall have two
pieces of diaphragms separated by a hollow intermediate ring. A pressure gauge with
pressure switch signal shall provide the indication in case of leaks and diaphragm
rupture. Local and remote alarms shall be provided in case of diaphragm ruptures.
M. All pumps shall be supplied with an integral degassing system capable of relieving
any off gas contained in the pump suction line. The degassing system shall operate
automatically and shall have a manual purge override valve. The degassing system
shall require no external tubing or piping for proper operation.
N. Chemical dosing pump drive motors shall be AC with adjustable speed range
capability. Each chemical system shall be furnished with a control panel. The VFD
shall be installed in the respective system control panel. All required appurtenances,
(current limiting input fuses, line reactors, circuit breaker disconnect, motor isolation
contactor, control transformer overload relays, process signal follower card, and all
required relays and terminals), wherever applicable, shall be provided. Drives and
control panels shall be UL listed
Accessories
A. Calibration Chambers: Each pump shall be furnished with a calibration chamber for
measuring pump output. The calibration chamber shall have materials compatible
with intended chemical use; pyrex, plexiglass, acrylic or butyrate. Calibration
chamber shall be furnished with flanged connection to suction piping, and end cap
fitted with ball valve for air venting, as indicated on Drawings.
B. The height and diameter shall be sized that the measurable capacity of the chamber
is approximately 30-second discharge of each pump at maximum pumping capacity.
Each pump suction pipe shall be furnished with valves and flanges for attachment of
calibration chamber. Calibration chambers shall be rigidly installed not supported
from the piping system. Pump suction and discharge pipe shall be arranged so as
not to interfere with location and use of the calibration chambers
C. Pulsation Dampeners: Pulsation dampener shall be hydro-pneumatic type and of
vertical design. A pulsation dampener shall consist of two chambers, an upper
pressure chamber and a lower process fluid chamber. Two chambers shall be
separated by a flexible, elastomeric bladder, a PTFE bellow or a diaphragm.
Pulsation dampener shall be designed at a minimum safety margin of 4:1 burst
pressure to maximum working pressure. Pulsation dampener shall be capable of
handling pump’s maximum stroke volume. The pressure chamber shall be charged
with compressed air to pump manufacturer’s recommended charging pressure.
Construction shall prevent charged air from being dissolved in process fluid. Lower
chamber shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or inert plastic material to prevent
corrosion by process fluid. Materials shall be suitable for intended service.
D. Pressure Relief Valves: Pressure relief valves shall be provided in the discharge
piping of each metering pump, prior to any valves, to eliminate the buildup of excess
pressure in the system. The pressure relief valves shall be fully adjustable from 0 –
150 psi with bodies and seats suitable for sodium hypochlorite and with Teflon
diaphragm and have no metal parts in contact with the chemical. Valves shall be field
adjustable with initial setting set at factory. Output of the pressure relief valves shall
return to pump suction header.
E. Pressure Gauge Assembly: Pressure gauge shall be furnished on the discharge side
of each pump to indicate pump discharge pressure and to shut down the pump in the
event of excessive discharge pressure and to transmit an alarm signal to the variable
frequency drive. Pressure gauge shall be furnished as part of a complete factory
assembly, including gauge, snubber, diaphragm seal, liquid fill, isolation valve and
interconnecting piping. Each pressure gauge assembly shall be equipped with an
isolation valve and diaphragm seal to protect the gauge from contact with fluid in the
pipeline. The isolation valve shall be ball valve. The valve and diaphragm seal
housing shall be constructed of the same material as the applicable chemical piping
system and shall have either socket weld, socket fuse or flanged process connection.
The diaphragm shall be Teflon. Mineral oil fill between the diaphragm seal and the
gauge shall be furnished with the unit.
F. Back Pressure Valves: Back pressure valves shall be provided to provide a constant
back pressure at the chemical metering pump discharge. The back pressure valve
shall be fully adjustable from 0 – 150 psi with bodies compatible with the chemical
listed, Teflon diaphragm and have no metal part in contact with the chemical.
G. Vented Ball Valves: Vented ball valves shall be, flanged or true union, with PTFE
seats.
H. Inlet Strainer:
1. A suction line wye strainer shall be furnished on the suction line as shown on
the Drawings. Wye strainers shall have 1/32-in perforations. Strainers shall be
one size larger than the suction line in which they are installed.
2. Strainers shall be as manufactured by ASAHI, George Fischer or approved
equal.
Piping
A. Single walled and double walled piping systems shall be installed in those locations
as shown on the Drawings.
B. The equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be standard types of
plastic pipe and fittings for use in conveying chemicals.
C. Containment pipe size shall be based on the size of the primary carrier pipe as
follows:
Carrier Pipe Diameter Containment Pipe Diameter
0.5-in 2-in
3/4-in 3-in
1-in 3-in
1.5-in 4-in
2-in 4-in
3-in 6-in
Chemical Injection Nozzle and Corporation Stop

A. Chemical injection nozzle units shall be equal to diffuser tube assembly.
B. Corporation Stop units shall be brass, equipped with connections compatible with the
connecting service pipe type, in accordance with AWWA Standard C800.
4 ELECTRICAL WORKS
4.1 General Specifications for Electrical Equipment and Cabling
Applicability
A. The following clauses specify general requirements and standards of workmanship
for the equipment and all installations.
Installation Standards
A. The work shall be executed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All work shall be
carried out in accordance with the requirements of:
1. Regulations in force in the Clients country, where applicable;
2. Relevant DIN specifications;
3. Recommendations issued by the International Electro-Technical Commission
IEC:
No. 298 High voltage enclosed switchgear
No. 694 Basic installation level for 11 kV
No. 56 High voltage circuit breakers
No. 60 High voltage test requirements
No. 185/186 Current transformer
No. 694 Common clause
No. 76 Power transformers
No. 129/265/420 Load breaker fuse combination and isolators
No. 502/540 MV cables lying
No. 28A LV creepage distance and clearances
No. 157 LV circuit breakers
No. 158 LV contactors
No. 185 LV current transformers
No. 337 LV auxiliary circuits
No. 439 LV general part
No. 408 LV air breaks switch disconnectors and fuse
No. 144/529 Degree of protection
No. 34-1:14 Rotating Electrical Machines

B. Where VDE Standards are quoted in these Technical Specifications, equivalent

international Standards may be applied provided the requirements of Clause 1.1 are
fully complied with.
Main Electricity Supply
A. The electric power required for the operation of the sewage treatment plant
components and auxiliaries shall be received from the Electricity Company via the
medium tension network of the City at 11 KV, 50 Hz.
B. The Medium tension power supply to the site shall be secured by the Contractor up
to the main ring unit or the medium tension switch board inside the plant borders, as
detailed in Clause 1.3 and Clause 1.5.12 of this technical specification.
C. The contractor is responsible for supplying the medium tension equipment within the
plant boundaries such as R.M.Us, MV Switchboard & power transformers and install
these equipment under full supervision of Electricity Distribution Company. The
contractor shall apply for approval of all medium tension Equipment and transformers
from the electricity distribution company and fulfil any requirement without any
additional cost.
D. Generally the electricity supply shall be:
MV 11,000 Volt 3 phase 50 Hz;
LV 380 Volt 3 phase and neutral 50 Hz;
220 Volt 1 phase and neutral 50 Hz.
Materials
A. All materials incorporated in the Works shall be the most suitable for the duty
concerned. All materials shall be new and of first classification commercial quality,
free from imperfections and selected for long life and minimum maintenance.
B. The use of dissimilar metals in contact shall be avoided, but where unavoidable these
materials shall be selected so that the natural potential between them does not
exceed 250 mV. Electroplating or other treatment of contacting surfaces shall be
employed as necessary to reduce the potential difference to the desired limit.
C. All materials and materials finishes shall be selected for long life under the Site
conditions specified and shall be de-rated by the approved factors given in the latest
issue of the IEC standards and the relevant VDE system or equivalent. Tropical grade
materials and panel components shall be used.
D. All electrical components shall be of robust construction and de-rated to ensure long
life and trouble-free operation under the extreme site environmental conditions,
selected for minimum maintenance, capable of withstanding and operating under
voltage surge and fluctuation conditions. The minimum de-rating for all electrical
equipment including cables shall be in accordance with the relevant approved
national electrical standards appertaining to the Site climatic and environmental
conditions.
Polarity
A. The polarity of all apparatus used for the Works specified shall be arranged as
follows:
B. For two poles apparatus the “phase” or “live” pole to the top (or left hand side) and
the “neutral” or “earthed” pole at the bottom (or right hand side). On plug and socket
outlets the polarity shall conform to IEC standards and DIN/VDE.
C. Layouts are viewed facing the front of the apparatus.
D. All cables shall be so connected between main switchboards, distribution boards,

plant and accessories so that the correct sequence of phase colours is preserved
throughout the system.
E. All cable cores shall be identified with phase colours. Where more than one phase is
incorporated on a common system in one room then the live cores shall be red,
yellow, blue as appropriate and fittings and switch accessories shall be permanently
labelled and segregated in accordance with IEC standards No. 502 and 540.
Workmanship
A. Particular attention shall be paid to the appearance of all cable runs, the
arrangements of which shall be agreed by the Project Manager before the
commencement of installation. The installation shall be completed to the highest
standard of neatness with respect to the visible cable runs, the arrangement and
alignment of apparatus and fittings. Conduit shall be surface run with the exception
of the control/office room where all fittings shall be suitable for flush installation.
B. There shall be included for the fixing of all switches, fuse boards, switchgear, cables,
fit-tings, cable trays, accessories and all other items comprising the electrical
installation.
C. All holes for fixing shall be made by means of a rotary drill, not of the percussion type,
screws shall be secured with raw plugs or similar approved devices.
D. A single shot cartridge tool may be used only at the discretion of the Project Manager.
E. Should the installer propose to use junction boxes in auxiliary control cable circuit for
the purpose of marshalling a number of cables feeding to a common item of
equipment full de-tails shall be given to the Project Manager. The installer shall only
proceed after receipt of the written approval of the Project Manager. Any such
junction boxes shall be of the wall mounting pattern with double terminals. All cores
shall be ferruled and identified in accordance with the system schematic and cable
diagrams.
F. All electrical installations, other than lighting and socket outlets, mounted externally
to buildings shall be provided with a permanent sub-shade canopy.
4.2 Medium Voltage Ring Main Units (Rmu)
General
A. Medium voltage ring main units RMUs shall be of the indoor type to IP42 as a
minimum.
B. Outgoing of RMU shall be vacuum or SF6 C.B for feeding the transformers with rating
1600 KVA and above . With regard to transformers up to 1250 KVA the outgoing
feeder of the RMU shall be equipped with fused manually operated load break switch,
conditioned with the Electricity Company Approval and it is the contractor sole
responsibility with no extra cost on the Employer
C. Each ring main unit shall be provided with the required measuring instruments,
protective relays, to the Electricity Company requirements ..
D. All operating devices and switches shall be accommodated at a certain location to be
kept away from the high tension taking into consideration safety precautions during
maintenance operation.
E. All RMU’s cubicles shall be front opening so, the maintenance can be done from the
front of the switchgear.
F. Each ring main unit shall be provided with weatherproof name-plate indicating the
following related data in both Arabic and English:
1. Manufacturer
2. Serial number
3. Year of manufacture
4. Nominal Voltage (kV)
5. Nominal Current (A)
6. Short Circuit withstand Current (kA)
7. Rated Frequency (Hz)
8. Rated Current (A)
9. Rated Breaking Capacity (kA)
10. Total weight
G. Name plate shall be affixed on the front view of the ring main unit’s cubicles.
International Standards
A. Ring main units’ cubicles shall comply with the requirements of the International
Standards IEC 60298, IEC 60694, DIN VDE 0670-6 and DIN VDE 0670-1000 or
approved equal and in full compliance with the local regulations of the related
electrical power authority.
B. Contractor shall revise all RMU’s components together with the related details to
ensure conformity with the requirements of the local regulations and standards for
medium voltage works of the local electrical power authority. It is the full responsibility
of the Contractor to obtain related local authorities approval of the RMUs components
at an appropriate time before ordering and at no extra cost to the Client.
4.3 Transformers
A. Transformers shall be manufactured so as to comply with the requirements of the
International Standards IEC 60076; parts 1 thru 5, DIN VDE 0532 and DIN VDE 42-
500 or approved equal and conform to the electrical characteristics of the power
supply as follows:
Medium Voltage:
Nominal voltage 12 kV
Rated voltage 11 kV ± 2.5% ± 5%
Low Voltage 380/220 V ± 5%
No. of phases 3
Frequency 50 cycle/sec
Vector group Dyn 11 or Dyn5
Impedance voltage Not to exceed 7%
Medium voltage side neutral Solid earthing

Low voltage side neutral Solid earthing
B. Transformers shall not be loaded with more than 80% of its rated power.
C. The transformers shall be naturally cooled, oil immersed, core type and supplied
complete with a first filling of oil; Class 1 according to requirements of IEC 60296 or
equivalent.
D. Transformer tank shall be constructed from high grade strengthened steel of
thickness not less than 3 mm. Tank construction shall be tight to prevent oil leakage
by means of a special leakage resistant paint. The transformer tank shall be designed
so as to withstand internal pressure of 100 KN/m2 at 40°C ambient temperature and
also withstand unlimited internal pressure variations through the day time. The tank
shall be provided with sloped cover, securely fixed to the tank and equipped with
neoprene and synthetic rubber gaskets.
E. Transformers shall be completed with tapings on the M.V. side to verify ±2.5%, ±5%
of rated voltage. Tap selection shall be by means of an externally operated manual
control off-circuit tapping selector of rating at no-load. The transformer tap-changer
shall be adjusted only when the transformer is completely isolated. Tap-changing
equipment shall be tightly covered to assure transformer safety under normal
operating conditions.
F. Transformer core shall be constructed from high grade, low loss, cold rolled, silicon
steel laminations while the transformer windings shall be of high conductivity copper,
isolated by means of a suitable heat resistant paper.
G. M.V. and L.V. windings shall be fully insulated from each other and insulated from
the transformer core, so as to withstand electromagnetic stresses resulting from short
circuit.
H. The transformers M.V. and L.V. windings shall be wound to vector group Dyn 11 or
Dyn5 according to the requirements of IEC 60076. The star point of L.V. windings
shall be brought out through the transformer tank and fully loaded under all
conditions.
I. Internal surfaces of the transformer tank shall be painted using oil resistant varnish
so as to prevent contact between the oil and the tank. The tank external surfaces
shall be coated by means of weatherproof paint and the final color shall be according
to RAL 7033.
J. Tubes and fins which are used for transformer cooling shall be externally welded to
the transformer tank to limit temperature rise.
K. The transformer tank and accessories shall be protected against corrosion according
to BS CP 1014 at the ultimate climatic conditions.
L. Transformer shall be complete with terminals and insulators complying with the
requirements of IEC 60076.
M. M.V. and L.V. insulators shall be of robust construction and of a type to secure easy
erection and dismantling. Also, they shall be provided with galvanized and tinned
terminals.
N. M.V. and L.V. insulators shall be clearly and indelibly marked with the terminal
designations U,V,W,N and u,v,w,n respectively.
O. Transformer shall be provided with galvanized steel earth terminal.
P. Transformer shall be designed according to the requirements of IEC 60354 related
to the ability to work under emergency loading conditions.
Q. The flux density at any point in the magnetic circuit shall not exceed 1.65 Tessla at
normal voltage and 50 Hz frequency and the tenderer shall define the flux density in
his tender.
R. The maximum short circuit current for 2 seconds under the primary and final windings
temperature shall be according to IEC 60076.
S. The tenderers are requested to define the transformer losses in the guarantee tables
so as not to deviate from the requirements of IEC 60076 and/or the requirements of
the Electrical Distribution Company or Authority requirements and standards. The
transformer losses shall be measured at the rated capacity.
T. The transformer shall be complete with the following accessories:
1. Buchholz relay (for transformers with rated power 500 KVA and above ).
2. Oil conservator vessel
3. Tank filling plug
4. Drain valve
5. Oil level gauge
6. Free air breather of weatherproof design
7. Oil temperature indicator
8. Earthing terminal
9. Silica gel breather
10. Rating diagram plate
It shall be made of weatherproof material indicating the following:
a. Transformer type
b. Standard of manufacture
c. Manufacturer
d. Serial number
e. Year of manufacture
f. No. of phases
g. Capacity
h. Frequency
i. Voltage
j. Current
k. Vector group
l. Impedance voltage % at rated current
m. Cooling method
n. Design temperature
o. Oil temperature rise at normal loading
p. Total weight
q. Oil volume
r. Weight of core and windings
U. Transformer shall be designed in a way so that the sound level shall not exceed the
requirements of IEC 60551 and DIN VDE 45 635 T30 and/or the requirements of the
Electrical Distribution Company or Authority requirements and standards. or
approved equal.
4.4 Switchboards and Motor Control Boards
A. Switchboards and multi-motor control boards shall comply with the following
requirements:
General Specifications of Switchboards
Medium Voltage Switch Boards
A. The medium tension switchboards shall conform to the IEC standard specifications
meanwhile they shall comply with the local regulations applied in the Egyptian
Electrical Authority (E.E.A). The M.T switchboard shall be totally type tested,
B. The Medium Tension Circuit Breaker shall be SF6 or vacuum circuit breaker with
nominal rated current 630A or 800A or 1250A, according to rated power and EEA
recommendations.
C. The Medium Tension Circuit Breaker shall have breaking capacities corresponding
to the relevant voltage classification as follows:
1. 500 MVA for 11 KV voltage class.
2. 750 MVA for 22 KV voltage class.
D. The Medium tension Circuit Breaker rated insulation voltage shall be corresponding
to the relevant voltage classification as follows:
1. 3.6 kV for 3.3 kV voltage class.
2. 12 kV for 11 kV voltage class.
3. 24 kV for 22 kV voltage class.
E. The medium tension switchboard shall be iron clad, floor mounted, indoor, enclosed
type with chemical treatment (against corrosion), made from steel with wall thickness
not less than 2 mm. The enclosure protection degree shall be (IP42)
F. For incoming feeder panel the protection system shall comprise of the following :
1. over-current
2. short circuit
3. earth fault &earth leakage.
4. over & under voltage .
5. reverse power
6. phase sequence &phase failure
G. for bus coupler of the medium tension switchboard, the protection system should
contain the minimum protection elements as following:
1. Over current.
2. Short circuit.
H. For the incoming of the medium tension switchboard, the measuring should contain
the following:
1. Phase current.
2. Voltage.
3. Power factor.
4. Frequency.
While the bus coupler circuit breaker measures the phase current and voltage.
I. for the outgoings of the medium tension motor control center (MCC, with 3.3 KV or
6.6 KV or 11 KV), the motors greater than 400KW should be protected with the
following:
1. Over current.
2. Short circuit.
3. Earth leakage.
4. Under/over voltage.
5. Phase sequence/phase failure.
6. Over temperature for winging and bearing.
7. Excessive starting time locked rotor number of starts per hour.
J. for the outgoings of the medium tension motor control center (MCC, with 3.3 KV or
6.6 KV or 11 KV), the following measuring devices for motors should be as following:
1. Phase current.
2. Line and phase voltage.
2bLow Tension Switchboards
A. The low Tension Switchboard should comply with the latest version of the IEC.
B. The low Tension Switchboard should be totally type tested.
C. The low-tension switchboard should be form 2b to allow easier maintenance and
better dismantling of apparatus.
D. The degree of protection of low Tension Switchboard should be IP42 for indoor
panels and IP 54 for outdoor panel or located in wet area.
E. The low Tension Switchboard should be chemically treated (against corrosion), made
from steel with wall thickness not less than 2 mm.
F. The low Tension Switchboard bus bar should be sectionalized type made from tinned
electrolytic copper with maximum current density of 1.5 A/mm2.
G. The low voltage circuit breaker inside low Tension Switchboard should be designed
for rated voltage of 1 kV and rated current rating of 125% of nominal current according
to Egyptian Code.
H. The low voltage circuit breaker inside low Tension Switchboard should be withdraw-
able and motorized Air Circuit Breaker for current rating higher than 3200A. . Circuit
breakers with rating from 63 A up to 3200 A shall be MCCB
I. The low voltage circuit breaker inside low Tension Switchboard should be withdraw-
able Circuit Breaker for current rating higher than 600 A.
J. The low voltage circuit breaker inside low Tension Switchboard should be operated
with start and stop buttons for ratings higher than 400 A.
K. The selection for the motor starter should be carried out in accordance with any
configuration for the “Typical variation of combination starter and protected starter
“as mentioned in IEC – 947-4-1 in sub-clauses 2.2.7 and sub- clauses 2.2.8. In
addition, the motor starter shall be type-2 coordination.
L. For the outgoings of the low tension motor control center (MCC, with 0.4 KV), all
motors should be protected with the following:
1. Over current.
2. Short circuit.
3.
4. Under/over voltage.
5. Phase sequence/phase failure.
6. Over temperature for winging and bearing.
The following are the needed measurements:
1. Phase current.
2. Line and phase voltage.
3. Hour meter.
4. Power factor.
M. They should be suitable for the rated current of the equipment supplied under normal
working conditions as well as the abnormal working conditions, which may occur. The
switchboards should comprise all equipment’s, apparatus, instruments and the all
necessary connections required for efficient operation. The control and the protection
of all components in a way should ensure simple and easy access, full reliability of
service, security and maintenance of any section without interruption of the service
N. The different components and apparatus should be housed in steel sheet panel of
bolted structure with double access to allow for easier maintenance and better
dismantling of apparatus. Each shall be self-contained, divided into compartments by
means of barriers. The interconnections should be effected by porcelain insulated
terminals, furthermore the connections between different parts of equipment should
be made in a way so that the different circuits could be easily traced and should have
tracing marks every two meters.
O. The mechanical and electrical interlocks should be provided to ensure safety to
equipment’s and staff and avoid malfunctioning operation. The Contractor shall
submit during detailed design stage a detailed schematic connection diagrams and
original catalogues for the supplied equipment. Switchgear units and switchboard
panels should include the following:
1. Safety shutters, interconnections, cables, secondary wiring, fuses, links, plug
and socket type, insulating contacts, hinged instrument panels and cable
sockets ... etc., as should be necessary for purpose.
Busbars
A. Busbars and connections shall be identified by phase colour marking and adequately
supported by suitable insulators the whole to be mechanically and electrically
designed to withstand the full fault capacity as specified.
B. All busbar and connections shall be rated for continuous operation. The mechanical
and dielectric strength of busbars and support shall be capable of withstanding the
worst conditions of electrical surge which can occur in the installation.
C. Busbars and primary connections shall comply with DIN 40705 as appropriate and
shall be housed in air insulated enclosures with a time rating compatible with the
switchgear.
D. Busbars shall be of high conductivity tinned copper with PVC sleeving and moulded
PVC shrouds shall be provided over joints.
E. Bolted copper busbar links shall be provided as necessary to allow a switchboard to
be manufactured in sections. These links shall only be used to allow the
transportation and erection on site of a modular switchboard. The links may also be
used as necessary for maintenance purposes. The link section shall be easily
accessible from the front or top of the board and shall have a lockable cover.
Provision for storing the links, nuts and bolts shall be made in the switchboard.
F. Busbars for 380 V switchboards and MCC’s shall be rated at least 20 kA for 3
seconds.
Fuses
A. All fuses shall be H.R.C. according to IEC 129, 265 and 420 and one spare fuse for
each fuse fitted in the panel shall be supplied clipped adjacent to the position in which
it would be in service.
B. A complete schedule of all fuses in the panel shall be affixed in convenient position
in the panel.
C. Neutral links shall not be arranged in fuse holders but shall be separately bolted
copper links with one link for each fuse.
Terminals
A. All terminals for outgoing connections shall be located at a low level in the
compartment adjacent to the cable gland trays.
B. Provision for accommodation of rising armoured cables shall be provided with
adequate cable supports and a form of cable entry seal either of hardwood or similar
approved material shall be provided.
C. Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of appropriate size for
incoming and outgoing circuits and non-ferrous gland plates shall be supplied where
single core cables are terminated. All glands and trays shall be adequately earthed.
D. Cable disconnecting links shall be provided where specified and shall be used for
maintenance purposes only. The links shall be fitted to the busbar risers immediately
before the cable terminations and shall be easily accessible. The links shall be
labelled “ISOLATING LINK” and the circuit or cable reference shall be quoted.
Auxiliary Switches
A. Auxiliary switches for indication, protection, interlocking and supervisory purposes
shall be readily accessible and enclosed in a transparent dust-proof cover.
B. Adequate secondary disconnection shall be included between the fixed portion of a
circuit breaker and the moving portion.
C. Spare auxiliary contacts two normally open and two normally closed shall be provided
on each unit and wired to suitable accessible spare terminals.
Labels
A. The Contractor shall supply and fit engraved labels to all items of system, etc.
throughout all installations. System reference numbers shall correspond to those
used in the operating and maintenance manuals. Labels shall be white laminated
plastic with engraved black letters and shall have chamfered edges using either
stainless steel nuts and bolts or permanent adhesive. Labels shall be engraved in
English. The main circuit label shall measure 150 x 60 mm.
B. All door mounted instruments and controls shall have labels of 40 x 15 mm. All
devices installed inside the enclosure shall be labelled.
C. For electrical panels, switchgear etc. labelling shall be as follows:
1. All external labels shall be white laminated plastic with engraved black letters
in English. Edges shall be chamfered. The labels shall be affixed with stainless
steel nuts and bolts.
2. All internal labels shall be engraved multi-layered plastic (Traffoloyte or similar)
affixed with stainless steel nuts and bolts.
3. Each compartment door shall have a title label and each door mounted
component or control shall have a function label.
4. Every internal component shall be identified and each fuse shall be labelled
with identification of fuse type or fuse current capacity.
5. Compartments with doors or covers not interlocked at an isolator shall have an
external label affixed thereto as follows:
Danger - Live Terminals
a. With flash and voltage in red letters on white background in English and
Arabic.
b. In addition to the above system identification labels the Contractor shall
ensure each item of machinery shall have manufacturer’s identification /
rating plate detailing in English the following:
1) Manufacturers name and address;
2) Model / type identification;
3) Serial number;
4) Year of manufacture;
5) Appropriate rating details;
6) Other relevant details, limitations etc.
Panel Earthing
A. A continuous copper earth bar shall run the length of the switchboard with terminal
for connection to the station earthing system; the cross-sectional area shall be in
compliance with and meet the requirements of IEC publication 364-5-54.
Small Wiring and Terminal Blocks
A. All switchboards and instrument panels wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated
cable, in a neat and systematic way and securely fixed and arranged so that access
to the apparatus is not impeded. The minimum wire size shall be of 1.0 mm² cross
sectional area.
B. Terminal blocks shall be arranged to facilitate easy access to both terminals and
wiring ends. Connections for outgoing circuits to auxiliary pilot cables shall be
provided with test links.
C. Identification ferrules or reference numbers shall be fitted on the wires at both ends
and letter and number shall correspond to the appropriate wiring diagram and colour
codes to IEC 444.
D. Terminations shall be of the latest practice and restricted to no more than two wires
per terminal.
Indicating Lamps
A. All indicator lamps shall be multiple LED type and shall be low voltage with self-
contained transformer or low voltage DC.
B. Lamps shall be well ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp glass and
bulb from the front of the unit.
C. Indicating lamps shall be supplied by an individually fused circuit.
Cable Connection
A. A cable termination gland box at least 150 mm above floor level and pointing
downwards shall be provided for each circuit except where otherwise indicated.
B. Where single core cables are to be accommodated a non-magnetic gland plate shall
be provided. For cables size 400 mm2 and above insulated glands shall be fitted.
C. The individual terminals shall be provided with pressure type cable lugs of ample size
and connected to the current carrying elements by means of corrosion resistant bolts
nuts and washers.
D. Where cables are metal sheathed or armoured the sheathing and/or armouring shall
also be earthed at the end box.
E. Un-drilled gland plates shall be provided approximately 300 mm above floor level for
the reception of conduits and threaded glands. Boxes and glands shall be within the
cubicles except where otherwise approved.
F. Prior to manufacture the Contractor shall confirm cabling termination requirements
with the Project Manager.
Instruments
A. All indicating instruments shall be of 90o scale type flush mounted and generally of
the same appearance throughout. They shall comply with IEC recommendation and
be of industrial grade accuracy. Instruments shall be hermetically sealed or
tropicalized. Instruments shall have external zero adjustment and have black bezels.
They shall be positioned such that they can be easily read and the dial centres shall
be not less than 400mm and not more than 1800 mm above finished floor level.
Meters shall be fitted with an adjustable pointer or shall be inscribed on the scales to
indicate the normal circuit rating for the associated plant.
B. Instruments shall have a square front appearance with width dimensions as follows:
1. 72 mm Ammeters up to 20 A, voltmeters up to 600 V
2. 96 mm All other instruments
C. Ammeters fitted in a motor circuit shall have a suppressed scale to indicate the
maximum starting current.
D. Kilowatt hours meters shall be arranged to register 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced loads
except as otherwise indicated.
E. All instruments shall be mounted adjacent to the relevant circuit breaker switch or
starter unless separate panel suites are specified herein.
F. At points of connection of potential circuits to LV busbars etc., HRC fuses shall be
provided to protect the auxiliary wiring. For cubical gear these fuses shall be housed
inside and readily accessible. Additional fuses to clear individual instrument faults
shall be provided and accessible from the front of the cubical where otherwise
specified.
Current Transformers
A. Current transformers shall comply with IEC 185 and should be suitably rated and de-
signed to carry out the desired appropriate function - viz. metering or protection.
B. The short time current rating should not be less than 3 seconds.
C. Identification labels giving type, ratios, accuracy limit factor, rating output and serial
numbers shall be fitted.
D. Duplicate rating labels are to be fitted on the exterior of the mounting chambers
suitably located to enable reading without removal of any cover. Labels shall be
supplied for multi-ratio current transformers indicating the connection required for
alternative ratios.
E. Bar type current transformers shall be supplied in preference to those with wound
primaries. Short time current factors shall relate to the full fault level for three
seconds.
F. For over-current protection the product of VA rated burden and rated accuracy limit
factor shall be less than 150 unless otherwise agreed with the Project Manager.
G. One secondary terminal of each current transformer shall be earthed through a
removable link at the switchgear.
Voltage Transformers
A. Voltage transformers shall be of the isolatable type with a secondary three phase
voltage of 110 Volts and shall comply with IEC 186.
B. Epoxy resin insulated shall be acceptable.
C. The primary shall be protected by HRC fuses which together with the connection
between the fuses and the primary conductors shall be adequately rated to withstand
the short circuit rating of the switchgear.
D. Fuses shall be included to protect the secondary windings and they shall have safe
access for renewal.
E. Safety shutters shall be provided to automatically cover the fixed contacts when the
trans-former is isolated. Shutters shall be coloured yellow when isolating contacts are
connected to the feeder side of the circuit and inscribed CIRCUIT.
Safety Notice and Equipment
A. For each switchboard the Contractor shall supply the following equipment which shall
comply with IEC standards No. 694 and 349:
1. 1 No. Pair of electrical grade rubber gloves;
2. 1 No. Notice in English advising treatment for a person suffering from electric
shock.
4.5 Circuit Breakers
Air Break Circuit Breakers
A. The air break circuit breakers shall comply with the following and be suitable for
control-ling loads, the site climatic conditions and comply with IEC 157 for 380 V, 3-
phase, 50 Hz wire operation for use on the breaking capacity of the fault current in
accordance to the short circuit calculation for the fault level for each system. ASTA
or KEMA test certificates or equivalent shall be forwarded with the quotation. Moulded
Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) will not be accepted for use where Air Circuit Breakers
(ACB) are specified. Contractors shall include with their offer a schedule showing
circuit breakers and their respective loads.
B. The circuit breakers should be horizontally isolated draw-out pattern air break type
complete with operating mechanism for closing by 48 Volt DC motor and manual
operated and the circuit breaker operation when in the isolated and withdrawn
position shall be provided, auxiliary jumper connections being included if necessary.
C. Locking by means of padlock or removable key in the open position shall be possible.
D. The operating mechanism shall have a mechanical “ON/OFF” indicator and a manual
trip device fitted with means for locking test terminal blocks healthy trip lamp
(coloured white) and associated pushbuttons set of auxiliary switches “SUPPLY
AVAILABLE” lamps (blue) (on incoming units only) cable boxes complete with glands
of suitable size for the accommodation of the incoming and outgoing cables entering
from below.
E. Each circuit breaker shall be provided with an operation counter.
F. Closing and tripping batteries shall comply with these Specifications.
G. Auxiliary contacts for the indication of breaker state for use at 220 V AC shall be
provided.
H. All incoming circuit breakers shall be provided with interlocks to ensure that:
1. Circuit breakers cannot be plugged in or isolated when it is closed.
2. The Circuit breaker cannot be closed until it is fully plugged in or completely
isolated.
3. The Circuit breaker cannot be closed in the service position without completing
the auxiliary circuit between the fixed and moving positions.
4. With the circuit breaker earthing device in position tripping may only be effected
by a manual device in the operating mechanism.
I. The following flush mounting equipment shall be fitted to the front of each of incoming
circuit breaker panel (both mains and standby):
1. 1 No. Under / over voltage relay
2. 1 No. Phase sequence relay
3. 1 No. Triple pole flush mounted over-current relay arranged for two poles
over-current and one pole earth protection with auxiliary relay for instantaneous
remote trip and indication.
4. 1 No. Kilowatt hour integrating meter
5. 1 No. Kilovar integrating meter
6. 1 No. Kilowatt meter
7. 1 No. Pilot lamp of the transformer type with protection fuses, colour blue, for
“SUPPLY AVAILABLE” when illuminated.
8. 1 No. Pilot lamp with protection fuses, colour white, for “Trip Circuit Healthy”
when illuminated.
9. 1 No. Set of Test Blocks for C.T’s and P.T’s.
NOTE: Interlocks are required between mains, incomers and standby incomers such
that it shall be impossible to have both closed at the same time (except in the
with-drawn position). These shall be arranged such that all permissive and all
prohibitive signals are present before a circuit breaker may be closed.
J. Any other interlocking shall be provided as necessary to ensure the safe operation
and maintenance of all electrical equipment provided under the Contract.
K. All low voltage circuit breakers shall be housed in control boards which comply with
the requirements of this specification.
L. There shall be a purpose designed separate attachment earthing device. The device
shall be arranged to earth either the cable box or busbar side of the circuit breaker
and shall be stored in a suitable robust container which shall include details of
assembly and use.
M. To facilitate the removal of circuit breaker for maintenance there shall be supplied, if
necessary, a purpose designed hand operated trolley.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
A. The enclosure shall be so constructed that the cover cannot be opened until the
switch is fully opened and the construction shall be such that when the cover is
opened a competent examiner can override the interlock and operate the switch.
After such operation the cover shall be prevented from closing with the switch position
indicator in a false position.
B. Switch shall be provided with mechanical “ON/OFF” indicators and operating
handles.
C. Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the “OFF” position only.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, circuit breakers shall be manually operated and shall
provide thermal-magnetic, inverse-time-limit overload, and instantaneous, short
circuit protection.
E. The solid state trip circuit breakers shall be supplied with a portable testing unit to
allow for periodic trip setting testing.
F. Time current characteristic curves and other necessary information and data for each
size of breaker furnished shall be provided. Where M.C.C.B. are used for feeding
they shall be equipped with the same instruments as described for air circuit breaker.
4.6 Fuse Switches General
A. Fuse switches shall comprise flush mounted heavy duty composite air break switches
and fuse units complying with IEC 439 and shall be rated and equipped as detailed.
Composite units shall be contained within an enclosure of metal and shall be fitted
with an earthing terminal irrespective of any means or connections such as is
provided for attaching armouring or other metallic covering of the cable supplying the
composite unit.
Enclosure
A. The enclosure shall be so constructed that the cover cannot be opened until the
switch is fully opened and the construction shall be such that when the cover is
opened a competent examiner can override the interlock and operate the switch.
After such operation the cover shall be prevented from closing with the switch position
indicator in a false position.
B. Switch shall be provided with mechanical “ON/OFF” indicators and operating
handles.
C. Means shall be provided for locking the switch in the “OFF” position only.
Fuses
A. The fuse shall either include a suitable fuse carrier or it shall be capable of isolation.
If the fuse carrier is included it shall be such that when it is being withdrawn normally
or when it is completely withdrawn the operator is completely protected from
accidental contact with any live metal of its fuse link, fuse contacts and fixed contacts.
B. If the fuse is capable of isolation it shall be so interlocked with the switch that isolation
is complete before the fuse enclosure can be opened, further the switch shall be
prevented from closing while the fuse-cover is open.
4.7 Isolating Switches
A. The compartment isolating switch shall interrupt all supplies into the compartment to
enable safe maintenance to be undertaken. Isolators shall be of the fault break load
make design. Isolators shall have metal handles and a facility shall be provided to
enable the isolator to be padlocked in the “OFF” position only. One padlock with 4
keys shall be supplied for each isolator on the board.
4.8 Fuses and Links
A. All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge pattern to IEC 439 and suitable for site climatic
conditions.
B. Fuse holders and fittings shall be made of moulded plastic insulating material of an
approved make. Ceramic materials will not be accepted. Fuse fittings shall be fully
shrouded and it shall be possible to change the fuses without danger of contact with
live metal. For every fuse in service a spare shall be provided, clipped local to the
duty unit.
C. HRC fuse cartridges, where used in distribution boards, shall be manufactured in
accordance with IEC 129, 265, 420 and 439.
D. Fuses and links in the same circuit shall be mounted above each other in separate
rows and shall not alternate in the same row.
4.9 Motor Starters General
A. The starter cubicles as required are to form part of a Motor Control Centre and as
such circuit connections protection devices and the like shall comply with the
installation standard specified. The cubicles shall be easily accessible for
maintenance purposes and shall be damp, dust and corrosion-proof. The motor
starter shall be of rating to carry the full load current of its rated duty at its most severe
load conditions. The motor starter shall be of rating to carry the full load current of its
rated duty at its most severe load conditions.
B. The following equipment shall be mounted on the front of control panel:
1. 1 No. Ammeter fitted with suppressed scale to read motor running and
starting current.
2. 1 No. Pilot lamps to indicate “SUPPLY ON” (green) and “MOTOR RUNNING”
(red).
3. 1 No. Pilot lamp to indicate “MOTOR FAILED” (amber).
4. 1 No. “MANUAL/OFF/AUTO” selector switch.
5. 1 set “START/STOP” push button.
6. 1 No. Externally operated overload reset push button.
7. 1 No. Motor and cubicle heater “OFF/AUTO” control switch.
8. 1 No. Hour counter reading to 9999 hours.

9. 1 No. Duty label.
C. In view of the fact that overload indication of all drives may be required each starter
should be designed for this purpose.
D. The signal for this remote indication will be taken via auxiliary contact fitted to the
isolators and contactors or relay of the individual starters.
E. The motors in some groups will be required to operate in a predetermined sequence
and starters should include suitable auxiliary relays and contacts.
4.10 Interlocking
A. Mechanical interlocking shall be provided where possible. All electrical interlocking
shall be of the double type having separate permissive and prohibitive interlocks.
Thus to allow a device to operate there must be an absence of prohibitive signals
and a presence of permissive signals from the remaining devices in the interlocked
system.
B. Suitable equipment shall be provided mechanically to prevent a device being
manually operated when a prohibitive signal from another part of the interlocked
system is present.
4.11 Protection
A. All protective relays shall conform to the latest edition of IEC Standard 157-1 and be
suit-able for the climatic site conditions fully sealed against ingress of moisture, or
dirt and tropicalized.
B. The relay shall have automatic thermal compensation for variation in the temperature
between 0 to 55°C.
C. All protective relays shall be supplied in flush mounted metal cases with glass
windows.
D. Relays shall be mounted on a withdrawable chassis with plug-in facilities.
E. Each individual element of the relay shall initiate a flag to indicate that the element
has operated. The element and flag shall be reset by operating an external reset
button mounted on the front of the relay case.
Motor Protection
A. For all motors up to 75 kW three single pole wound magnetic adjustable overloads
high set for starting and stalling protection and three single pole thermal overloads
for overload and single phasing prevention shall be provided.
Protection Relays
C. Protection relays shall alternatively be accommodated in the housing of the circuit
breakers for protection of their downstream line sections against various kinds of
fault.
D. The Contractor shall in any case provide suitable back-up protection for short-circuit
re-lays and earth-fault relays by proper time setting of successively arranged relays
and their mutually inter-connected controls so that in case of a fault in any section of
the 400 V grid only the faulty section will be disconnected, whereas all healthy parts
of the grid will remain in operation. Subsequently relay setting schemes shall be
furnished by the Contractor for approval by the Project Manager.
E. The following relays and associated current transformers shall be applied for all
400 V circuit breakers to be installed.
1. Overload or overcurrent relays with either an inverse time delay overcurrent re-
lease or a definite time delay overcurrent release whichever type is more
suitable and interconnected to it.
2. Short-circuit relay with instantaneous overcurrent release.
3. Earth-fault relay or earth leakage relay with a three phase sum current trans-
former acting on a response current from 0.2 to 0.7 times the rated current
which can be set in several steps. The delay time of the release shall also be
variable in several steps between 100 and 500 millisecond in order to attain the
above mentioned back-up protection.
4. Undervoltage relays shall be installed only in circuit breakers used for feeders
of large motors in order to avoid automatic restarting of motors after voltage
recovery following a power failure.
F. All relays shall be equipped with respective fault communicators and indicators for
audible and visible fault indication in the control room for each type of fault. A fault
panel shall be part of the supply. Connection works shall be included.
G. Auxiliary switches to be actuated by the operating mechanism shall be available in
sufficient quantities to cover all control, indication, operation and protection
requirements.
H. The Contractor shall submit circuit diagrams of all main, control and protection-
circuits of the circuit breakers to be used.
4.12 Electric Motors General
A. Motors shall be selected from the following to satisfy the Specification requirement
and shall comply with the following norms IEC 60034 and the Local Electricity
Authority power current restrictions:
B. All motor frames shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC).
C. In addition, all outdoor motors shall be provided with suitable covers to protect them
from direct sunlight.
D. All motors shall be provided with the windings being connected to 6 terminal
arrangements in the terminal box to allow either DOL starting or a method of assisted
start.
E. Motors up to 7.5 kW shall suitable for DOL starting having a starting current not
greater than 6 x full load current (FLC).
F. Unless specified elsewhere, motors above 7.5 kW shall have their starting current
restricted to 2.5 x FLC and shall use one of the following starting methods:
1. Star / Delta start;
2. Solid State Reduced Voltage (Soft) Start;
3. Variable speed.
G. Submersible pump motors because of inherent design are to generally comply with
the foregoing.
H. The number of frequent starts of the motors and ingress protection must be as per
Egyptian code recommendations.
I. Centrifugal pumps on unscreened sewage shall give at least 100% full load torque
on starting.
J. All motors shall be suitable for operation on a 380 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase supply.
K. All motor enclosures shall satisfy and be selected from IP44, to IP68 according to
installation condition (above ground, underground, submersible, etc.).
L. The motors shall run in ball and/or roller bearings and the weight of the motor shall
be carried by thrust bearings incorporated in the motor body.
M. The efficiency and power factor of the motors shall be high over a wide range of load
conditions and the motors shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance
with IEC 34 for continuously rated industrial electric motors with Class F insulation in
accordance with IEC 60085 but limited to Class B temperature rise. The maximum
continuous rating (MCR) of each motor shall be as set out below and shall be rated
and designed for operation in ambient temperatures up to 45°C and capable of
prolonged operation in sand laden atmospheres.
NOTE:
1. The reserve power requirements shall be added to the calculated power prior
to any other adjustments, e.g. high ambient temperatures at site.
2. All motors shall have Classification “F” insulation but Classification “B”
temperature rise limitations shall apply. It should be noted, however, that this
requirement is in addition to any adjustments necessary for high ambient
temperatures at site.
N. The motors shall be balanced in accordance with ISO 2373 vibration class N and
shall be commercially silent in operation and run free from vibration and the rotors
shall be perfectly balanced both statically and dynamically and shall be tested and
adjusted for dynamic balance in an approved manner.
O. Terminal boxes shall be provided with glands suitable for XLPE or PVC armoured
cable. The motor stool base where appropriate shall be drilled at works vertically blew
the terminal box gland for the passage of the cables and the edges of the hole slightly
countersunk or the hole bushed.
P. Electric motors shall be fitted with anti-condensation heaters embedded in the motor
windings and the terminal boxes shall be labelled with “Traffolyte” type labels white
letters on red back-ground, to read in English and Arabic:
Warning Live Heater Terminals - Isolate Before Removing Cover
Q. All motor drives shall be labelled to correspond with their respective starters.
R. All submersible pump motors shall be provided with slot temperature detection
(resistance thermometers) embedded in each phase of the stator winding, the leads
of which shall be brought to the terminal box.
S. Out of these measurements, at least one maximum temperature contact shall be
derived either thermostatically or electronically and this thermal contact shall give
alarm and or trip its associated motor starter circuit breaker when the motor winding
temperature reaches its maximum allowable value.
T. Motors with sleeve bearings shall be fitted with one dial type thermometer on each
bearing for local control and either thermo-couple or resistance thermometer for
remote indication, with oil level indicators marked for running and stand-still., oil flow
indicators.
U. Arrangements shall be made with the manufacturer so that the Project Manager may
witness tests.
4.13 Reactive Power Compensation
A. A "capacitor bank" for central reactive power compensation according to IEC
publication No. 70 shall be incorporated in each switchboard or MCC. The capacitor
bank shall consist of a definite number of parallel operated 380 V capacitors and their
associated feeders of individual fuse switch combinations.
B. All this equipment shall be readily mounted inside suitable 380 V panels and shall be
connected ready for operation.
C. Individual capacitor banks shall not exceed 150 kVAr in rating. If a larger capacity
capacitor bank is required it shall comprise a number of banks of equal rating, each
bank not exceeding 150 kVAr in rating.
D. The power factor correction shall be permanently connected in circuit via the
associated fuse switch and shall be such as to keep the power factor to a figure not
more than 0 and not less than 0.92 lagging.
E. When dimensioning the total capacitance, as well as the number of parallel operated
capacitors, a design analysis shall be carried out based on the actual power factors
of motors as given by the manufacturer.
F. Over compensation, i.e. self-excitation of the circuits shall be avoided in all cases.
4.14 Distribution Boards
A. All distribution boards shall be of the totally enclosed metal clad pattern manufactured
in accordance with IEC standard publication No 28A5, 157, 158, 185, 337, 439, 144
and 529.
B. Fuses, MCB’s and MCCB’s as incorporated in distribution boards shall comply with
the relevant IEC standard and be fitted with thermal overload and instantaneous
magnetic short circuit protection. Earth leakage protection, when specified, shall be
current operated.
C. The enclosure shall be made from zinc coated mild sheet steel formed to a clean line
and complete with a lockable hinged cover with gasket. Covers shall be fitted with
gaskets and shall be easily removable to preserve the finish and simplify installation.
Each distribution board shall be arranged for top and bottom cable entry and shall be
provided with an ample cable termination plate and chamber to enable cables to be
neatly glanded with tails grouped and terminated onto appropriate internal
terminations.
D. Distribution boards shall be wall or floor mounted and shall incorporate load break
fault make incoming isolators which shall be front of panel operated with “ON/OFF”
indicator and capable of being padlocked in the “OFF” position. Distribution boards
shall incorporate HRC cartridge fuses or combinations of single pole and neutral and
triple pole miniature circuit breakers (MCB) as specified. For DC circuits and power
outlets double pole shall be used.
E. Each bank of MCB/fuses shall be clearly identified with its appropriate phase colour
code and the mounting framework for the banks of MCB/fuses shall be easily
removable to simplify installation. Adequate phase barriers and shields shall be fitted
to ensure that after installation and wiring, all bare terminals and wires are covered
to prevent accidental contact with live conductors during the normal procedure of fuse
changing and resetting of MCB.
F. All fuse distribution boards shall be complete with HRC fuse cartridges manufactured
in accordance with IEC standards with fusing factor of 1.5 to afford “close”
overcurrent protection to circuits as defined in the IEC No. 408.
G. All neutral bars shall have a separate terminal for each fuse/MCB way within the
distribution boards.
H. The termination of circuit cables at distribution boards shall be neat and slack left at
each fuse/MCB bank or neutral bar to enable the complete assembly to be removed
for inspection without disconnection. Neutral conductors shall be connected to the

bar in the same order as the phase conductor to the fuse/MCB way.
I. Each distribution board shall be complete with a permanent circuit identification chart
preferably mounted within the front door. This chart shall be permanently and legibly
filled in as circuits are completed the circuit description including the fuse MCB rating.
The chart shall be in English and Arabic.
4.15 Remote Control Push Button Station
A. Adjacent to all motors and in the positions specified there shall be supplied, installed
and mounted on a suitable structure, a metal, weatherproof, heavy duty remote
control station.
B. The support structure shall be a robust floor mounted mild steel hot dip galvanised
structure, comprising a tube mounted to a base plate with a mounting plate for the
remote controls positioned 1,500 mm above floor level. The base plate shall be
designed for bolting down to a concrete foundation and the tube shall provide the
conduit for the control cables from ground level to the position of the remote controls.
C. Each control station shall have an Emergency stop push button actuator of the auto
latch-turn to release type. The actuator head shall be red, mushroom shaped and
clearly labelled STOP in English. The Emergency stop button shall work in all modes
of control.
D. Each control station shall have two, 2 position, rotary switch units. One switch unit
shall effect the manual operation of the associated drive and shall be labelled START
and STOP. The other switch unit shall effect the selection of automatic or manual
control and shall be labelled AUTO and MANUAL. In auto the function of the local
start stop switch shall be disabled.
E. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the pushbutton stations
provided are all from the same manufacturer.
4.16 Power Cables
A. Medium Tension inside the W.W.T.P shall be stranded copper conductors while Low
Tension cables shall be stranded copper conductors. The voltage level shall be
12\20KV for medium voltage cables0.6\1\1.2KV for low voltage cables. Medium and
low voltage cables shall be XLPE\PVC while. Outdoor cables shall be steel wire
armoured. Outdoor unarmured cables shall be laid on cable ladder or in cable trench.
Indoor cables shall be unarmoured. Outdoor cables shall be steel armored and direct
buried to the standard regulations .
B. The power cables shall be constructed with the requirements of the latest standard
IEC regulations No. 502-1 or equivalent.
C. Cables shall be 0.6/1 KV for low voltage class, the size of the cables shall be such
that not only suitable for the current rating of the equipment connected to, but will be
also suitable for the voltage drop (not more than 2.5%) and for short circuit rating at
the considered voltage.
D. All control and instrumentation cable shall be stranded and shielded. Cross section
of control cable shall not less than 1.5mm2.
E. The cable laying and termination should be such that testing and/or replacement
could be handled easily. The cable connecting the transmitters to their instruments
at control panels.
4.17 Cabling Installation Methods

General
A. The electrical works shall include all cables and wiring necessary for the equipment
including supply and installation of cables and accessories, e.g. fastenings and
mountings, screw connections, cable lugs etc.
B. Power cables shall be separate from control and measuring cables.
C. Non-corroding materials shall be used exclusively. All cables shall be marked
permanently on both ends and at all separating and measuring points by way of
durable marker labels. The shielding of measuring and control cables shall be
separately and adequately grounded at the switch box.
D. Cable laying shall be affected by way of cable tray on walls and ceilings and ducts
and trenches in the floor or ground, duly executed in orderly fashion and sufficiently
spaced (especially power cables) in order to provide adequate ventilation. All cable
tray installation techniques shall not be used in excess of 60% of their capacity.
E. On all cable trays, power transmission cables shall be installed in single layers,
signal, measuring and control cables may be installed in multiple layers. Separate
cable trays shall be provided for power cables and measuring and control cables.
Accumulations and crossings of cables shall be avoided.
F. Adequate measures shall be taken in design and construction to prevent water from
entering dry chambers through empty ducts.
G. Every cable shall be installed in accordance with the relevant IEC Standards
Specification.
H. Where cables are terminated at a particular item of equipment care should be taken
to ensure that the cables finally approach the equipment from a common direction
and are individually terminated in an orderly and symmetrical fashion.
I. All necessary materials for cable jointing and junction boxes required to complete the
installation shall be included. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable chambers bolted
to terminals of circuit breakers and other equipment. Every cable shall be supported
where necessary by an approved method. All cable glands shall have a non-
corrodible finish and shall be supplied complete with PVC shroud.
J. Paper insulated cables with lead or lead alloy sheath shall be terminated in a suitable
wiping gland.
K. Paper insulated cables shall only be joined or terminated by staff fully qualified to
work on this classification of cable. Before proceeding with the joint or termination
the ability of the staff employed on the work shall be demonstrated on site by making
trial joints to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
L. Where cables enter or leave buildings the ducts shall be sealed at the points of entry
into the building. Caulking shall be carried out in fiberglass followed by not less than
40 mm of bitumen compound or a weak sand/cement mixture as directed by the
Project Manager. Care must be taken to ensure that the PVC sheathing of cables is
not damaged during caulking due to excessive temperature if heated bituminous
compound is employed.
M. Every cable shall be permanently identified at each end by its cable number. Cable
markers shall be of adequate size and of a style approved by the Project Manager.
Cable markers shall be securely fixed to the cable.
N. Cable route marker posts shall also be installed at entry and exit points of buried
ducts, exits from buildings (if necessary wall mounted) and in such other position as
are necessary to identify and trace the route of any cable. All power cables shall be
connected to the main switchboard and other items of plant so that the correct phase
sequence and phase colour coding are preserved throughout the system. All such
cables shall be identified with phase colours for 3 and 4 wire systems and blue and
brown for single phase. On rotating plant where to achieve the required direction of
appropriately identified terminals then special core ferrules shall be fitted to identify
each core with the terminal to which it is finally connected.
O. Control and instrument cables shall have individual cores identified by means of
suitable permanent ferrules bearing the same numbers or letters at both ends and
corresponding with terminals on equipment. Core identification shall be shown on the
wiring diagrams of the equipment at which the change is made.
Cable Trench Work
A. The Contractor shall prepare drawings showing his precise requirements for cable
trench work, detailing the width and depth of trenches utilising the road crossing cable
ducts. These drawings shall be prepared in consultation with the Project Manager
and be approved before issue.
1. The excavation and backfilling of trench work will be carried out by the
Contractor.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the trench work is
adequate for his requirements and in accordance with his trench work
drawings.
A. The Contractor shall supply and lay the sand bedding, supply and lay the cables,
supply and lay sand blinding and supply and lay cable covers; he shall also supply
and lay cable route marker posts after the backfilling and top soiling has been carried
out by the Contractor.
B. The sanding and laying of cables shall satisfy the following requirements:
1. Cables shall be laid at a depth of 0.8 meter for LV and 1.0 meter for MV cables.
The depth shall be assessed from finished ground level unless otherwise
directed by the Project Manager.
2. Generally, LV and MV cables should not run in the same trench but should be
laid staggered. However, where necessary to pass through ducts it will be
necessary to lay one above the other and MV cables should be laid first and
cable cover tiles laid before laying the LV cables.
3. Before laying cables the Contractor shall ensure that the bottom of each trench
is firm and of smooth contour and free from broken stones or rock.
4. 75 mm of sand shall be placed in the trench to form a bedding for the cables.
5. Cables shall be laid with adequate separation and shall be gently ‘snaked’ to
avoid tension during backfilling and subsequent settlement.
6. The Contractor shall provide all necessary plant for the installation including
feeding rollers, winches, draw-in stockings, etc. and all the necessary labour.
7. The Contractor shall deal with or dispose of water to prevent risk to cables and
flooding of interconnected buildings.
8. To this end the Contractor shall not unduly delay laying of cables once a trench
has been opened and temporary sealing of building entries shall be provided
by the Contractor if all cables are not laid in one session.
9. After cables have been laid they shall be covered with a further 100 mm of sand
which shall be well tamped around the cables. Mechanical means shall not be
used for this work.

10. After sanding cable covers shall be placed in position to overlap the cables by
a minimum of 50 mm either side of the cables.
11. The Contractor shall carry out backfilling and ensure that tiles are not disturbed
and that no large rocks or stones are dropped on tiles or included in the backfill
material.
12. After backfilling the Contractor shall reinstate to finished ground level and
provide and lay topsoil.
13. There may be interval between the backfilling and top soiling, if so the
Contractor shall provide temporary wooden route markers and erect these as
directed by the Project Manager.
C. The Contractor shall supply cable cover tiles. These shall be of the pre-cast concrete
type and engraved Electricity or other suitable symbol.
D. Cable route marker posts shall be to approval of the Project Manager and fitted with
permanently engraved label showing legend Danger Electric Cables, the appropriate
voltage and danger symbol of lightening stroke, legend to be in both English
languages.
E. The final cables routes shall be agreed with the Project Manager before any work in
connection with the cable installation is commenced. All cables shall be installed in
strict accordance with the requirements of the Specification.
F. All single core cables of the same circuit shall be grouped in trefoil and secured.
Cable Tray Work
A. The Contractor shall supply and erect all required cable tray work.
B. The following points are to be taken into account in selecting routes:
1. Number of drive power and control cables to be located on each cable tray;
2. The avoidance of existing pipe work and pipe work required for future
extensions;
3. The avoidance of maintenance areas of machinery pipes etc.
4. The avoidance of installation areas for the future extension to the system;
5. The avoidance of unnecessarily long runs of cable.
C. The cable trays should be designed to take all cables, including future extension.
D. Cable tray shall be manufactured from not less than 2.0 mm thick perforated steel of
the heavy duty return flange type, hot dip galvanised after manufacture and shall be
complete with approved type fixings.
E. Trays shall be supported by purpose made galvanised steel brackets or channel.
F. Brackets shall be provided at a maximum of 1,200 mm centres.
G. Bends and tees shall be prefabricated and have an inside radius of not less than
300 mm and where large cables are to be accommodated radius shall be sufficient
to fully support correct minimum cable radius.
H. Cables shall be fixed to trays by means of purpose made fixing clamps. Cable ladder
as opposed to tray will be accepted for large cables subject to the Project Manager’s
approval.
I. All cables shall be saddled or cleated in position as they are installed along the route.
J. Single core cables of the same circuit shall be laid and mounted in purpose made
trefoil cleats.
K. Particular care should be taken on vertical rise tray providing adequate cable fixings
to ensure distribution of load and security.
Laying Cables Direct In Ground
A. When buried in the ground, armed cables directly cables shall be left between the
parallel and all cables for a distance of not less than outside diameter of the diameter
of the big.
B. Taken into account before burying cables directly into the ground to verify that the
soil does not contain salts or chemicals that cause corrosion of the external layers of
the cable.
C. If the soil contains salts or chemicals, and take into account the use of cables
wrapped in plastic resistant to corrosion.
D. Installation of cables directly into the ground, dig trenches in the depth of not less
than 80 cm wide enough to allow easy installation, and then settle at the bottom of
the trench and brushing by a layer of soft sand of thickness less than 10 cm do not
and then placed cables on this layer and bridging them to the thickness of another
layer of fine sand of 20 cm according to the drawings
E. In the case of curvature of the path of the cable shall not be less than half diameter
of the cable for bending (3 to 12) times the cable diameter according to cable
diameter according to the Egyptian code.
Laying Cables in Pipes (Cable Duct)
A. The cables feeding the different buildings or when crossing the road shall be laid in
cable duct, consisting of UP.V.C. Pipe with different size diameter at condition that
the cable C.S.A. shall not exceed 40% of the pipe area.
B. One pipe will accommodate more than one cable is expressly forbidden, except on
the specific circumstances.
1. Pipes shall have a concrete surround of minimum thickness of 10cm.
2. All joints between pipe sections or lengths shall be properly fitted and the
smooth
3. Internal surface of the pipes maintained. Ingress of soil, sand and other
undesirable materials into the pipes should be flushed out prior of cables
pulling.
4. The open ends of the pipes shall be sealed by caps, wooden plugs, sealant
pastes or other approved means until the cables are drawn into them.
5. Spare pipes for future use as cable ducts will be installed if specified by the
Project Manager.
4.18 Electrical Lighting
General
A. Supply and fix all the materials necessary for the efficient lighting of all parts of the
contract as specified hereinafter
B. All equipment shall conform in all respects to the latest International Standards
C. Installations shall be carried out according to the conditions and systems for electrical
equipment for buildings in the wet and corrosive atmospheric locations and to safety
regulations.
D. The contractor shall submit complete and detailed calculation sheet for interior
lighting of the different locations. Also, the contractor shall submit the detailed
specification of the lighting units he proposes to be used for approval.
Design Criteria For Internal Lighting

A. Indoor lighting works design shall be prepared based on the following intensity level
indicated hereinafter as follows:
- Office : 500Lux
- Meeting Rooms : 300Lux
- Operation building & Workshops : 300Lux
- Control room and laboratories : 500Lux
- Store Building : 175Lux
.
4.18.2.1 General
A. Fixture parts shall be made of aluminum, brass, copper, steel or plastic. Metals shall
be of composition and temper required by the manufacturing process involved and
most suitable for the duty and function of the particular fixture part. All lamps insides
luminaires shall be led type unless otherwise indicated .
B. Materials and accessories, whether specifically mentioned or not, shall of the highest
grade of manufacture. Workmanship shall be first-class in every respect and shall
produce lighting fixtures and lighting equipment of high character, equal in every
respect to the highest commercial standard. All fixtures shall comply with IEC 598.
4.18.2.2 Housing
A. The housing of surface-mounted lighting fixtures shall be either of sheet metal as
described above or of rigid reinforced glass fibber plastic made from one piece, and
solid along its entire length. The housing shall have sufficient knock-outs for
convenient mounting by normal methods. Painting reflector and control gear housing,
louvers, diffusers and earthing shall be the same as for recess- mounted lighting
fixtures.
4.18.2.3 Protection Code
A. Lighting fixtures for interior installation in dry locations shall have a protection code
of at least IP- 40 and lighting fixtures for installation in wet or outside locations should
be weather-proof.
4.18.2.4 Open-type Lighting Fixture
A. Open-type fixtures shall generally comply with above-listed requirements. The
housing shall form a channel to enclose the control gear and the wiring. If a reflector
is specified in the Project Documents, this reflector shall be designed for direct
attachment to the channel cover with suitable threaded fittings and shall be
constructed of heavy gauge aluminum or steel white enamel. The reflector shall be
for ant symmetric or symmetric distribution as specified. Fixtures shall be for
continuous rows or for individual mounting for chain, pipe or messenger cable
hangers. The fixture shall be provided with tube retention devices to prevent lamp
dropout due to shock or vibration.
Conduit Systems
A. Approved conduit systems shall comply with BS 31 (for rigid steel conduit and
fittings), BS 4568 (for rigid steel conduits with metric threads) or BS 731 Part I (for
flexible steel conduit and adaptors), as appropriate. All exposed conduit, fittings shall
be hot dip galvanised and embedded conduit, fittings shall be PVC.
B. Conduits shall be fixed to the surface of the wall or concealed in the floor screed
when they cross the floor.
C. Non-metallic conduit systems shall not be used without the written permission of the
Project Manager. Conduit shall be run on the surfaces or sunk as specified and be
neatly arranged and ways shall be provided for additional conduits at all distribution
boards. The sizes of conduits used shall be determined by the number of cables to
be drawn in as scheduled in the IEC regulations or as specified for a particular
position but in no case shall conduits smaller than 20 mm diameter be used. Sunk
and concealed conduit system shall support fittings independently of any false ceiling.
D. All conduits shall be installed in an approved manner and arranged with adequate
ventilation and drainage where necessary. Where practicable, all bends or sets shall
be formed in the conduit itself. Inaccessible junction boxes shall not be used. The
radius of bends shall not be less than that given in the latest IEC wiring regulations.
E. The whole of the conduit system shall be completely swabbed through to remove any
loose matter or dirt before cables are drawn in. Where conduits connect to switch
boxes, draw-in boxes, etc., the conduits must have a machined faced socket screwed
onto the end which when tightened is flush with the outside of the box. The conduit
is then to be secured to the apparatus by means of a hexagon smooth bore brass
bush screwed from the inside of the apparatus into the conduit socket, in order to
make a sound and tight mechanical joint.
F. Surface run conduits shall be supported at intervals in accordance with the following
schedule:
Size Interval
20 mm 1.2 m
25 mm 2.0 m
32 mm 2.5 m
G. Where bends and sets occur in the conduit run, the conduit shall be securely fastened
at a distance of 225 mm either side of the diversion.
H. Standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at sharp
changes of direction in addition to any special positions where they are called for by
the Project Manager.
I. Only continuous lengths of buried conduit shall be installed between boxes, no joint
boxes being allowed in the floor screeds. Conduit crossing expansion joints shall be
fitted with couplings of approved manufacture with an earthing clip at each side of
the coupling connected by the correct size of tinned copper stranded wire.
J. The ends of conduit laid or set in formwork prior to concreting shall be temporarily
sealed off with a coupler and a solid brass plug.
K. No conduit shall be installed on the exterior surface of buildings without the written
approval of the Project Manager. All exterior fittings shall be suitable for rear access.
L. Fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely fixed by
screws. Where conduits are concealed or laid in construction floors, they shall be
held in position with substantial fixings of make and pattern to be approved by the
Project Manager.
M. Conduit shall be of the screwed pattern galvanised by the hot process. All conduit fit-
tings not carrying accessories shall be supplied with flat covers fixed in position with
round head brass screws. Neoprene gaskets shall be supplied on all fittings.
N. Adaptable boxes shall be constructed of minimum 3 millimetres sheet steel or best
quality cast iron finished as previously detailed for conduit bores and sized to prevent
the undue packing of cables in them.
O. Weatherproof boxes and accessories shall be used.
P. Conduit shall be installed such as to permit complete rewiring without the need to
carry out builders works.
Q. No Single conduit serving single phase socket outlets, lighting points and switches
shall contain more than one phase.
R. Wiring shall be carried out on the looping-in system and no joints other than at
looping-in points will be allowed.
Flexible Conduit
A. Where the conduit system terminates at any equipment requiring a non-rigid
connection, a flexible conduit shall be installed of the PVC or PVC sheathed metallic
type fully watertight with purpose made connection adaptors.
B. Each flexible connection shall include not less than 400 mm length of flexible conduit
and a separate earth conductor shall be run within the conduit connected to the earth
terminals in the equipment and the fixed conduit run. The flexible conduit shall not be
used as an earth continuity conductor.
Cable Trunking
A. The trunking shall be manufactured from heavy duty rigid unplasticised PVC which
shall be self-extinguishing and shall be unaffected by sunlight or water. The material
shall be suitable for continuous ambient temperatures of 65°C. Each length shall be
supplied with the necessary connection sleeves and shall have joggled sides to allow
flush fitting.
B. Each length trunking shall be fitted with easily removable covers attached to the
trunking by an efficient screw type fixing.
C. The trunking system shall be complete with purpose made angle and set accessories
designed to afford easy installation of and to avoid tight right angle bends in the circuit
cables installed in the trunking. All trunking accessories shall be complete with
removable covers. No site made mitred joints shall be allowed.
D. Where cable trunking is installed in vertical runs, efficient circuit cable clamps are to
be installed at not greater than 500 mm intervals.
E. A continuous earth conductor shall be installed throughout the trunking system, with
provision for the connection of local circuits as necessary.
F. All trunking shall be of adequate size to suit the number of cables passing through it
but as a minimum the size should be 50 mm by 50 mm. All bends, tees and
intersections to be of the gusset type and manufactured by the maker of the trunking
and to similar standard. The trunking shall be fixed to the walls and ceilings by means
of a secure and permanent fastening to be approved by the Project Manager.
Socket Outlets
A. Socket outlets for installation throughout the Works covered by this Specification shall
all be of the waterproof corrosion resistant type and shall generally be mounted 1.30
m above floor level as follows:
1. 220 Volt, 10 A, 2 pin CEE 7/4 socket outlets;
2. 220 Volt, 16 A, 2 pin CEE 7/4 socket outlets;
3. 380 Volt, 32 A, TP & N and E switched and mechanically interlocked. Each
socket outlet shall be supplied via current operated earth leakage circuit
breaker mounted within the distribution section of local switchgear/motor
control/distribution panel.
Lighting Switches
A. Surface switches shall be of the ironclad protected pattern heavily galvanised type.
Where appropriate they shall be of the “multiple phase” type and where possible shall
be arranged in multi-gang boxes.
B. Exterior lighting switches shall be metal clad galvanised watertight, with rotary switch
action. Rear entry shall be provided to allow concealed conduit installations.
C. Switches employed in Control Buildings shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall
comply with IEC 364-3-1. Moulded, white finish, rocker operated.
D. Switches in damp areas or for external use shall be heavy duty surface pattern.
E. Special care shall be taken to ensure that all switches are securely fixed truly vertical
and that flush mounted switches are flush with the wall finish so that the overlapping
cover plates seat on to the rims of the boxes.
F. Switches shall be mounted at 1.50 m from floor level.
G. Not more than 12 Nos. fluorescent light fittings (24 Nos. of tubes) shall be connected
to any 16 amp lighting switch. Lighting fittings shall be distributed evenly between
phases and throughout that loss of any one phase or contactor does not leave any
area in total darkness.
H. Operating switches and contactor energising coils shall also be distributed between
phases.
LED Luminaires
A. All luminaires shall be manufactured to IEC 598-1 and 598-2 for LED lighting
luminaires.
B. All luminaires supplied by the contractor shall be photometrically tested.
1. The contractors shall produce upon request, the photometric data for any
luminaire specified or supplied
C. All LED luminaires shall be supplied complete with LED controller as per the
manufacturer recommendations.
D. All Indoor LED lighting luminaires shall work at 40 ºC ambient temperature and 90 ºC
relative humidity and storage temperature of 80 ºC
E. All lamp holders for flexible pendants shall be of the all insulated shirted pattern with
cord grips and for batten or wall mounting shall be of similar pattern. All lamp holders
shall be the bayonet cap pattern.
F. The Whole luminaire minimum efficacy shall be ≥ 80 llm/cctW at designated ambient

temperature of 40 ºC for Indoor LED lighting luminaires and 50 ºC for Outdoor LED
lighting luminaires in accordance to LM-82 Test Report.
G. The contractor should stick to the specified lighting fixture manufacturer for each type
of lighting fixture, if the contractor is intended to use any other manufacturer he is
fully responsible to re-calculate the Lux level in all areas and to be submitted to the
consultant for approval before submitting his offer.
H. The LEDs shall only be from MacAdam Ellipse Steps ''1-3 Bins'' for Indoor LED
lighting luminaires and steps ''1-6 Bins'' for Outdoor LED lighting luminaires.
I. TM-21 reported life time should be run for 10,000 hrs confirming Tsp used in (coming
from Thermal Management Test report at elevated ambient temperature 40ºC) for
Indoor LED lighting luminaires.
Emergency Lighting
A. Emergency light fittings shall be designed to provide a level of illumination under
mains failure in compliance with IEC 598-2-24.2.
B. Emergency lighting fittings shall be self-contained, incorporating lamp(s), battery,
charger and mains failure relay.
C. The fittings shall be fully automatic in operation, providing instant illumination in the
event of mains failure. The battery shall be automatically recharged when the main
supply is re-stored.
4.19 Earthing General
A. The metal framework of all electrical and associated equipment, metal enclosures
and associated screenings, supports, any other metalwork that is not normally used
to conduit electricity shall be effectively earthed at all times. Particular care shall be
taken where moving parts are involved that they are earthed in any normal position
e.g. circuit breaker carriage, cubicle or sub-station door.
Earthing Systems
A. The earthing system shall comply with the requirements of IEC Publication 364-5-
54& BS 7430.
B. The non-current carrying metal of electrical equipment provided under the Contract
shall be securely bonded to earth. Earthing shall be effected by means of the metal
sheath of cables which shall be securely bonded to the metalwork of the apparatus
concerned at each end or a separate earth conductor. A separate earth conductor
shall be provided for all items of plant rated 20 kW or greater.
C. Armour wires on main cables shall be solidly bonded as additional earth path but
cables from the standby generators shall be insulated from the main earth system.
Particular care shall be taken on cable termination boxes bonded to the associated
item of plant. If continuity is adequate copper connections shall be made between
the apparatus frame and the cable sheath.
D. Where the cable sheath and armour is used as the earth path return then it shall be
established that the resistance is less than 1.0 Ω. If not, a separate copper earth
conductor shall be installed.
E. Particular care shall be taken to ensure earth continuity across items of equipment
situated within a cable run and should the design of such equipment not give
adequate and lasting continuity through its structural body then additional earthing
clips and conductors shall be provided to independently bond the cable sheaths
together. Similarly, additional earthing clips shall be provided to bond the cable
sheaths to any piece of apparatus fitted with a special earth terminal should the earth
connection of the termination gland prove inadequate. Any additional earthing clips
shall be contained within the apparatus wherever possible.
F. The earth tapes shall be protected against corrosion and be complete with test links
and be run on walls held in position by saddles fixed by rawl plugs and screws.
G. Connection shall be sweated and riveted and shall be electrically and mechanically
continuous. Joints between the main conductor and the earth electrodes shall be
readily accessible for periodic inspection and shall be protected against damage and
corrosion.
H. Where rigid or flexible conduit and/or trunking is incorporated into the Works, a
separate internal earth conductor shall be run which shall be securely bonded to the
terminating apparatus by means of a special earth terminal.
I. The earth electrode system shall consist of two electrode beds or nest independently
arranged and each comprising a system of vertically mounted rods.
J. On completion of the earth installation the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Project
Manager that the resistance of the electrodes and the earth network is within the
specified limits. Test equipment shall be supplied by the Contractor.
Earthing Nests
A. Each nest shall comprise of a number of interconnected earth rods, 25 mm in
diameter by 4.2 m long, driven vertically into the ground at intervals of not less than
3.0 m apart with heads located at a depth to suit disconnecting chamber position.
B. Earth rods shall be copper or steel-cored with a metallic bonded copper outer surface.
Rods shall be provided with special hardened tips and caps, to avoid distortion when
connecting the rod to the copper strip.
C. Leads from each electrode shall be brought to concrete disconnection chambers to
enable each electrode to be disconnected for testing purposes.
D. Concrete disconnecting chambers with removable cover and disconnecting lid, for
test purposes, shall be provided over each earth rod. The top of chamber shall be at
finished ground level.
E. The test link shall be of copper and not be less than the connecting cables cross
sectional area and have a generous contact area.
F. Disconnecting bolts, nuts, locknuts and washers shall be made from phosphor
bronze.
G. The copper strip connecting the earth rods to the test link shall be exothermically
welded at the test link and sweated to the top of the earth rod.
H. The earth rod interconnections shall be an electrically unbroken ring and
interconnections shall be PVC insulated stranded copper conductor earthing cable
sweated to the test links. The cable shall be of sufficient low resistance to carry the
maximum fault current for a period equivalent to the clearing time of the protective
equipment without undue temperature rise.
I. Joints at the head of the earth rods shall be easily accessible for periodic inspection.
J. Earth nests shall be connected to their station associated earthing system by 2 Nos.
PVC insulated stranded copper conductor earthing cables. The cable shall be
sweated to opposite ends of the earth nest and to two different spaced points on the
station earthing system.
K. The earthing system shall be protected against damage by corrosion wherever
necessary.
Location of Nests
A. An earth nest shall be installed at sub-stations where such forms part of this contract.
B. Earth nests shall be located adjacent to the building housing the switchgear as
practical. Where two nests are specified, they shall be located at opposite ends of
the system.
4.20 Fire Alarm System
General
A. Supply, install, test, commission and put into operation a complete operable
addressable system for fire alarming at each plant. The required system shall cover
all buildings of the wastewater treatment plant (electrical, generator, pump station,
administration, guard, store, , etc).
Standards
A. The codes and standards generally applicable to the work under this section are
listed herein. Codes and standards current at the time of tender shall be used.
1. NFPA 72A Local Protective System;
2. NFPA 72B Auxiliary Protective System;
3. NFPA 72E Standard for Automatic Fire Detectors;
4. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating System;
5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
Drawings and Data
A. Complete shop drawings and instructions, including complete wiring diagrams and
catalogue data for all components shall be submitted for acceptance prior to the start
of installation for the fire alarm system and its components. Shop drawings shall
indicate locations, installation details, and operational details of all equipment
associated with the fire alarm system.
B. Submit fire alarm riser diagrams for all systems showing all devices and
interconnecting conduit and wire.
C. Submit shop drawings for the fire alarm control panel showing the arrangement of all
panel mounted devices, interior equipment layout, dimensions, finishes, and bill of
materials. Provide schematic point-to-point wiring diagrams and ladder type logic
diagrams showing all interlocks and external connections. External wiring shall be
brought to terminal strips numbered to correspond with the submitted shop drawings.
System Configuration
A. Building should be furnished with advanced addressable fire detection and alarm
system. It should be composed of following:
Fire Alarm Control Panel
A. Addressable type.
B. Max. No. of detectors per loop shouldn’t exceed 90 detectors. Number of loops shall
be not less than two.
C. Should be equipped with sealed lead acid standby battery for not less than 8hrs and
at occurs fault for 5 minutes.
D. It should be wall mounted at a height of 1.5 mrs.
E. Should be located at main entrance of ground floor.

F. It should be connected to following systems:
G. IP-42 at indoor type.
H. The control unit shall contain an internal audible signal with audible acknowledge
switch, and auxiliary master box disconnect switch.
I. Control unit shall be double-supervised so that a trouble signal shall sound in the
event of loss of either operating or supervising power. Two light-emitting diodes
(LEDs) shall be installed and shall remain illuminated to indicate both operating and
supervisory power are energized. Trouble audible acknowledge switches shall be
furnished with its associated LED so that indication of trouble on alarm initiating
circuits, alarm indicating circuits and supervisory circuits shall initiate a control panel
audible and be silenced independent of each other.
J. When trouble conditions are restored to normal, the audible acknowledge switch shall
not require restoration to normal.
K. Provisions shall be made for four alarm indicating circuits.
L. A visual indication shall be provided so that operating personnel can readily
determine that the signals have been discontinued.
M. The alarm initiating circuits shall be class “A” and shall allow the receipt of alarms
even in the event of a single open or a single ground in the alarm initiating circuit.
N. Means shall be provided to sound the control panel audible upon a ground fault
between any supervised circuit and ground.
O. This ground fault shall also light a visual indicator on the control unit for rapid
identification of the trouble cause.
P. All visual indicators on the control panel shall be supervised so that an open or short
in any visual indicator shall provide a trouble indication.
Q. Provide a 24 Volt DC power supply in each alarm panel for the fire detection alarm
system. The power supply shall consist of battery and battery charger. The battery
charger shall operate to maintain the battery in a fully charged condition.
R. The battery shall have the capacity to operate the system for a minimum of 24 hours
and then shall sound all alarm signalling devices for 5 minutes. The battery charger
shall be suitable for use on 220 Volt, 50 Hz, AC power supply.
Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations
A. The station shall be double action, with non-break glass, coded type with a pull-down
lever and a push-in tab. The housing shall be cast metal or moulded material, and
the body shall be hinged to a backplate assembly having an Allen head locking screw.
After operation, the device shall be reset by opening the station and relocking the
body to the backplate. Mounting shall be surface or semi flush. The device shall
contain an alarm lamp and a key operated switch. Rating shall be nominal 24 Volt
DC. Connections shall be made to screw terminals. Pigtail splices or in-line taped
splices are not allowed.
Smoke Detectors
A. Detector heads shall be plug-in, twist lock units which may be installed or removed
from the base with one hand or by the use of a special installation tool. The base
assembly shall be the twist lock type with screw type terminals. Connections shall be
made to terminal blocks.
B. Detectors shall operate on the ionization principle having normal sensitivity and
activated by the presence of combustion products. Sensitivity shall be adjustable.
Detectors shall contain two ionization chambers. One chamber shall be for fire
detection, and the second chamber shall function as a reference to stabilize the
detector for environmental changes in temperature, humidity, and pressure. The units
shall contain a solid state amplifier switching circuit and an indicator lamp. There shall
be no moving parts. Operating voltage shall be a nominal 24 Volts dc. The detectors
shall meet UL standards. The detector sensitivity shall remain within proper limits at
an ambient temperature up to 50°C.
C. Detectors shall have a signal (to alarm) to noise ratio exceeding 2.0 and a minimum
of two senses before alarm to decrease probability of false alarms. Detectors shall
not give false alarm or change sensitivity substantially when subjected to wind
velocities of 5 meters/second or when subjected to wind gusts to 10 meters/second
lasting two seconds.
4.20.7.1 Thermal Fire Detectors
A. Each thermal fire detector shall be a combination fixed temperature and rate of
temperature rise detector and shall be for the areas unsuitable for smoke detectors.
Detectors shall operate at a fixed temperature of 58°C and shall also respond to rapid
rates of temperature rises. Design shall include two thermistors, one for measuring
and the other for reference. Base assembly shall be of the twist lock type with screw
terminals. An indicator lamp shall be provided. Operating voltage shall be a nominal
24 Volts DC.
4.20.7.2 Alarm Horns
A. Alarm horns shall be the combination audio-visual type rated 97 dB at a distance of
3 meters. Horns shall be the vibrating type with stainless steel diaphragms. Vibration
shall be generated by an electromagnet operating at 24 Volts DC. Frames and single
projector horn shall be cast aluminium, surface mounted. Finish colour shall be red
with the word “FIRE” (in English and Arabic language) in white lettering. Additional
signage shall be provided in Arabic.
B. Combination audio-visual horn / lamp units shall be installed on supervised circuits
and visual portion shall flash on alarm condition. Audio-visual units shall be Auto call.
Installation Requirements
A. The system shall be wired with 1.5 mm2, solid copper, Type XHHW cable throughout
in accordance with the manufacturers’ diagrams and requirements. All wiring shall be
installed in conduits.
B. Upon completion of the installation, check and test the entire system with and to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
C. The fire alarm system shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under
normal use and service as specified elsewhere in these specifications for a period of
one year from the date of final acceptance of the building by the Employer. All
equipment shown to be defective in workmanship or material shall be repaired,
replaced or adjusted, free of charge.
D. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization
and the name of this organization shall be furnished to the Project Manager and
Employer. The local service organization shall be available to furnish maintenance
and inspection in accordance with NFPA 72 A, B, and D.
Certification of Compliance
A. Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm equipment, provide to the Project
Manager a signed written statement substantially in the form as follows:
“Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm equipment, the Contractor confirms
that the fire alarm equipment was installed in accordance with the specification and
also in accordance with wiring diagrams, instructions and directions provided by the
equipment manufacturer.”
4.21 Exterior Lighting
General Requirements
A. The average illumination level at the site shall be not less than20lux and the
contractor shall submit complete and detailed calculation sheet including but not
limited to illumination level, pole height, and cable cross-section area and voltage
drop.
B. All equipment and materials shall be as approved and manufactured by a reputable
manufacturer.
C. All equipment and materials for outdoor use shall be suitable for use in corrosive,
dusty and salty atmosphere and up to an ambient temperature of 45C.
D. All equipment and materials, design and workmanship shall comply in all respects
with international standards and shall be approved by the Project Manager.
E. All poles, lighting fixtures, circuit breakers, photo cells, time switches, conduits,
cables, wires, earthing, and connections shall be in accordance with these
specifications, the manufacturer's instructions and to good engineering practices.
The installation work shall be performed in an approved manner by skilled workers
only.
F. After the installation has been completed, the Contractor shall provide all testing
facilities and instruments to perform an operating test, in the presence of the Project
Manager, to demonstrate the compliance with the requirements and serviceability.
References, Standards and Codes
A. Electrical materials and equipment furnished and installed shall comply or meet the
requirements of internationally known standards and codes. Specific standards and
codes used as guides for the design are:
1. BS British Standards
2. IEC International Electro technical Commission
3. IES Illuminating Engineering Society
B. Any contradictions between the requirements of two or more of such standards or
codes pertaining to a particular installation shall be brought for the Project Manager's
attention by the Contractor prior to placing orders for any cable, equipment or
material. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager information concerning
contradictions and qualifying information. The Project Manager will direct the
Contractor as to the governing standard or code, and the decision of the Project
Manager will be final. Materials and equipment not meeting the requirements of the
above standards and codes shall not be used unless approved in writing by the
Project Manager.
Electrical Design
A. The exterior lighting electrical load shall be balanced and distributed evenly over the
three phase in each circuit.
B. The voltage may be subject to a variation of plus or minus five percent (±5%).
C. The maximum allowable voltage drop shall be not more than 2.5% at the farthest pole
ballast in any circuit. The Contractor shall ensure that after taking into account the
possible system voltage variations, the lamps can still receive the correct ballast
voltage tapings.
Cables
A. Cables shall be CU/PVC/STA/PVC, direct laid in ground.
B. The cable shall enter the first lighting pole in its circuit and shall be made off to a
three phase and neutral service cut-out where a single phase and neutral supply shall
be teed off for each lantern protected by MCB 6 Amp. The supply cable shall then be
similarly looped to the next and following poles. The lamps on each pole along the
circuit shall be connected alternately to each of the three phases.
Lighting Design Parameters
A. The Contractor shall submit full details of the photometric performance of each
lantern-lamp combination included in the tender and of the illuminance in lux and
luminance in cd/m2 which shall be achieved along each section of roadway when
these lantern-lamp combinations are mounted at the heights and spacing specified.
Earthing
A. All non-current-carrying metalwork throughout the installation shall be made
mechanically and electrically secured to form a continuous system with all metal
components effectively earthed. Bonding and earthing jumpers shall be copper wire
or copper strap with a cross sectional area not less than 10 mm2.
B. A separate earthing shall be provided for each pole and for the lighting panel.
C. An earth conductor 10 mm2 shall be laid to connect the lighting poles.
D. The Contractor shall test and prove for all earth rods that the resistance to earth does
not exceed 2 Ohm. The test shall be done in the presence of and as directed by the
Project Manager. The earth rods shall be driven to a sufficient depth to achieve the
required low resistance at summer conditions and additional rods shall be used if
necessary at no extra cost.
Test On Completion
4.21.7.1 Demonstration:
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall be required to demonstrate
that the Works and materials are in accordance with the Specification and complete
in all respect.
4.21.7.2 Tests:
A. The Contractor shall undertake all tests required by the Project Manager and
preparation of test results which shall be approved by him. Three (3) copies of test
results shall be provided. As a minimum the following tests shall be made:
B. For lighting poles, insulation test on pole wiring and components.
C. Using the illumination and luminance meter (which shall be certified as calibrated
correctly by the Manufacturer) a check shall be made of the illumination and
luminance on the road as per the CIE recommendations (CIE = Commission

Internationale de l'Éclairage or International Commission on Illumination).
Schedule and Records
A. The Contractor shall take all records of equipment, cables, joints and terminations.
B. The record shall be carefully taken from site during the execution of the Works. The
record shall show the routes, the exact location of each cable and equipment and the
direction of lay of cable. Any other service that cross the route of the cable shall be
recorded.
Lighting Poles
A. The poles used for exterior area lighting shall be constructed from galvanized steel
with not less than 4 mm thickness, which resist corrosion affected by the sewage
gases, sewage water. The lighting fixture should be high pressure die cast aluminum
housing, weatherproof type with IP54 and with high quality sheet metal reflector.
B. The pole should have a shape of circular cross section, complete with a conical
plastic globe and led lamp having a modified type reflector, each pole has to be
provided with aluminum box that complete with MCB, all lighting fixture should be
weatherproof. This box should be provided with tight inspection cover and fixed at a
height not less than 120 cm from clear ground, the pole should be fixed in the ground
to a depth not less than 1 m by means of concrete foundation according to the
manufacture recommendations. The connection between the cable box of the foot of
the pole and the globe at the end of top shall run inside the pole and to be composed
of three wires 3 x 3 mm2 conductor and PVC insulated, metal pole shall be earthed.
C. The upper and lower pole cross section area, base plate dimensions, concrete
foundation dimensions, anchor bolt and nut should be designed to withstand the wind
speed, the lighting pole weight and the manufacture recommendations.
Fence Lighting Units
A. Fence lighting shall be spherical glob of complete with led lamp, fixation facilities
(Fixing flange, bolts) and all required accessories to complete the work in perfect
condition.
Entrance Gate & Door Lighting
A. Entrance gates for workshops, pump-station and plant entrance gate shall be lighting
by wall fixed lighting unit.
Lighting Luminaires
4.21.12.1 General
A. Luminaries shall be of a totally enclosed type made of die cast aluminium housing
unless otherwise indicated and shall be corrosion resistant integrated unit equipped
with control gear in separate compartments. The lamp inside luminaire shall be led
type .The degree of protection shall be IP 65 for optical components. The lantern
shall be equipped with a carbon filter. The control gear shall be mounted on a
removable aluminium tray completely prewired with plugged-in connections.
B. The wire shall be rated for 600 Volt AC, PVC insulated, and shall be capable of
withstanding high temperatures. The terminal block / connectors shall be easily
accessible and suitable for 2.5 mm2 conductor. A suitable earthing terminal shall be
provided in the lantern. Care is to be taken in positioning the terminal block that whilst
being readily accessible, there is no possibility of accidental contact during
maintenance. The design lighting intensity of roads shall be ranged (10-50 Lux).
4.21.12.2 Construction:
A. The housing shall be made of die-cast aluminium with refractor bowl of high thermal
resistance glass, mechanically strong and sealed in the cover. The reflector shall be
of high purity aluminium polished and post anodized. Lamp holder shall be porcelain
type E40 base.
B. The lanterns shall be supplied with adjustable lamp holder but fixed in a pre-designed
position compatible with luminance study, on a die cast aluminium flange mounted in
the housing in such a way that re-lumping or inadvertent mis-handling shall in no way
change the pre-designed lamp position.
C. Luminaire shall have rust proof collars equipped in rear compartment for supporting
the lantern on pole arm up to 60 mm diameter.
4.21.12.3 Control Gear:
A. The control gear shall be designed to operate the lamp at the specified power rating
and shall be able to start the lamp and control it continuously for ambient temperature
ranging from 18C to 50C.
B. The control gear shall be capable of accepting a supply voltage of 220 V.
C. The following specification shall be met by the control gear:
1. The control gear shall be suitable for 50 Hz, 220 V ± 10% operation.
2. For output voltage fluctuations of ±10% from the nominal specified voltage, it
shall regulate the lamp watts to ±5 percent.
3. The control gear shall have an overall power factor of at least 0.9 when
operated under rated lamp load.
4. The control gear shall operate the lamp without adversely affecting the lamp
life and performance as specified herein.
5. The ballast shall withstand a 2,500 V dielectric test between core and windings
for one minute.
6. The ballast shall be impregnated, tropicalized with compact winding and
insulation class "H". The maximum permissible winding temperature increase
shall not exceed 130C.
Lighting Distribution Panel
A. The lighting distribution panel shall be made of steel, with wall thickness not less than
1.5 mm, antirust paint (electrostatic).
B. Enclosure of the panel board shall be totally closed for outdoor installation IP 54 using
two doors one for switches and indicator and the other for closing the panel
completely and thickness 2 mm.
C. The panel shall be designed for free standing directly close to the wall (or hang fixed
to the wall). The panel board shall be included the following but not limit:
1. Incoming MCCB.
2. Contactor.
3. Indicator Lamp.
4. Manual operation.
5. Automatic operation by a 24 h timer and photocells.
5 MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENTATION &

CONTROL
5.1 General
Innovation
A. It is recognised that manufacturers will continue to develop new products, and
improve existing products, as part of the commercial and design processes. It is not
the intention of this specification to stifle improvement and innovation and new
products incorporating innovative features that enhance process performance and/or
reduce whole life costs will be considered. However it is also recognised that
standardisation on particular instruments or manufacturer has operational and
maintenance advantages. Staff training costs associated with the introduction of new
technology or equipment must be taken into account. The end user must always be
consulted and his/her agreement obtained before a new product is specified or
accepted.
Units and Dimensions
A. Measured values shall be indicated in units and dimensions specified in the following
tables:
Measured Value Units and Dimensions
Plant Flow Litres/second [l/s]
Works input/output (WTW)/(STW) Megalitres/day or Cubic Metres/day [Ml/d],

[m3/day)]
Water Pressure Metres Head Water Gauge [m]
Air Pressure Bar [bar]
Hydraulic Pressure Bar [bar]
Differential Level or Head Loss Metres [m]
Level (in Contained Structure) Percentage (with 0% and 100% being [%]
defined)
Level (in borehole, trench etc.) Metres (below a datum) [m]
Speed of rotating plant Revolutions per minute [rpm]
B. Measurement and indication of chemical parameters shall be in accordance with the

following table:
Chlorine Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
Turbidity Formazin turbidity unit [FTU]
Ammonia (as N) Milligrams/litre [mg/l]

Nitrate (as NOR3R) Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
Dissolved oxygen Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
Iron Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
Conductivity Micro Siemens/cm at 20°C [µS/cm]
pH pH Units [-]
Phosphate (as P) Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
Ozone Milligrams/litre [mg/l]
C. Totalizer precision for regulatory purposes:
Annual licensed quantity Units of measurement
10 to 99 m³ 10 litres
100 to 999 m³ 100 litres
1,000 to 9,999 m³ 1 m³ (1,000 litres)
10,000 m³ (10 Ml) and above 10 m³

General
A. The design, construction, inspection and testing of the equipment and component(s)
shall comply with all relevant Statutory Regulations, and the latest editions (current
at the time of Tender) of all relevant British and Harmonised European Standards,
including:
1. The Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 1994;
2. The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 1992/1994;
3. The Low Voltage and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directives;
4. BS EN 50081-1 1992 for emissions - EMC;
5. BS EN 50082-2 1995 for immunity – EMC;
6. BS EN 61010-1 1993 low voltage directive;
7. BS EN 60529 Specification for Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures
(IP rating);
B. Equipment shall be CE marked to demonstrate compliance with:
1. the Low Voltage Directive; and
2. the essential requirements of the relevant British Standard
C. Electrical installation works shall generally comply with BS 7671 and Part 3 General
Electrical Specification.
D. Mechanical installation works shall generally comply with Part 2 General Mechanical
Specification.
E. The performance of instrumentation as detailed in the Performance table, clause

5.20, shall not be affected by:-
F. Fouling of sensors and sampling systems with biological slimes along with organic
and mineral deposits.
G. Ingress of moisture into sensitive electronic circuits.
H. Sensitivity to electrical interference.
I. Poor accuracy due to variability of sample or presence of interferences.
J. Sensors sensitive to variations in sample flow rate, pressure or other measured
parameters.
K. Long response times due either to the instrument or its installation.
L. Changing environmental factors.
M. Unrepresentative sample due to change occurring in the sampling system or
unsatisfactory sample point location.
N. Instruments shall be protected against unauthorised operations of all controls.
O. Instruments shall have readily available supplies of spares and consumables
including reagents and standard solution.
P. Instruments and their measuring capability shall be unaffected by changes in ambient
temperature or pressure.
Enclosures and Environment
A. Individual instrument cases and sensor enclosures shall have an IP rating (in
accordance with BS EN 60529) suitable for the intended location. Where instruments
are mounted on a control panel the IP rating of the panel shall not be compromised.
B. Individual instrument cases and sensor enclosures shall also be of a material
resistant to any degradation by any chemicals, materials and/or UV radiation likely to
be encountered within the surrounding operating environment or; be suitably
protected or be located elsewhere.
C. Instruments shall not be located externally in such position that they are likely to be
exposed to direct sunlight for long periods. Where this is unavoidable a suitable
screen shall be provided.
D. Where the individual instruments own enclosure or case is unsuitable for mounting
in the intended location it shall be installed within another enclosure suitable for the
surrounding operating environment and which shall be fitted with a viewing window
to enable any display to be read without opening the enclosure. An anti-condensation
heater, operating at 220 V AC, shall also be fitted within the enclosure.
E. Enclosure IP ratings and materials / coatings shall normally be:
Operating IP Rating Approved materials / coatings
Environment
Internal, dry, industrial IP54 Galvanised, manufacturers standard

paint finish, GRP or reinforced
polycarbonate (RPC).
Internal use where IP55 Galvanised, manufacturers standard

water may be used for paint finish, GRP or reinforced
hosing down or as part polycarbonate (RPC).
of the process.
Operating IP Rating Approved materials / coatings

Environment
Internal, dry, industrial IP65 Stainless steel, GRP or RPC

environment with the
presence of corrosive
atmospheres
or
External use
Where potentially IP67 Stainless steel, GRP or RPC

subject to flooding
Where subject to IP68 to a depth of Stainless steel, GRP or RPC

flooding or likely to be 10 metres for an
submerged indefinite time
F. All cable glands used shall have the same IP rating as the enclosure or greater and
any unused cable entry holes shall be sealed or be fitted with suitable blanking plugs
to maintain the IP rating.
G. Enclosures shall only be affixed to structures and supports by means of any integral
mounting facilities or special brackets provided by the manufacturer for the purpose.
Additional holes shall NOT be drilled in the enclosure.
H. Instruments shall not normally be installed in a hazardous area. Where this is
unavoidable individual sensors and/or instruments and enclosures shall have a
hazardous area classification appropriate to the particular zone.
Performance
A. “Warm up time” or performance following a power failure shall not unduly affect the
operation of the instrument and its associated plant.
B. The instrument shall operate within the performance specification for periods detailed
below without manual calibration or scheduled maintenance.
C. Minimum time between maintenance
Conductivity 6 months
Turbidity, dissolved oxygen, pH Nitrate and suspended solids 30 days

phosphate, iron, ammonia
Other analytical instruments 7 days
All other instruments 6 months
D. Routine maintenance and re-calibration shall not require the instrument to be off-line
more than 1 hour with the exception of flowmeters.
E. The instrument shall be designed for a minimum operating life of ten years providing
it has been maintained and operated according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Instrumentation shall be in accordance with the relevant British Standard
Specifications
Identification
A. Every instrument shall be clearly identified as to its purpose and function by means
of durable, permanently engraved label securely fixed on or immediately adjacent to
the instrument.
B. Where an instrument is contained within another enclosure the presence of the
instrument within that enclosure shall also be indicated by means of durable,
permanently engraved label securely fixed on or immediately adjacent to the
enclosure.
C. Sample pumps shall be clearly identified. The label should also indicate the
instrument or meter with which it is associated.
Design and Installation
A. Power supplies to instruments, meters and sensing devices, shall not exceed 220V
AC or 48V DC.
B. The design, configuration and installation of the instrument or sensor/transducer shall
provide:
1. The required accuracy to enable any associated process to be controlled
reliably and efficiently.
2. High reliability and repeatability.
3. Ease of on-site maintenance, calibration and verification.
4. Minimum skilled technician involvement.
5. A visible indication that the instrument or sensor is functioning correctly or is
faulty.
C. Volt-free form ‘C’ contacts intended for external alarm, indication and control
purposes shall be rated 5 A at 220 V AC 50 Hz non-inductive.
D. Terminal blocks shall be capable of accepting wiring cables with a core conductor
not exceeding 1.5 mm2.
E. Analogue output signals shall be 4-20mA dc isolated. The range of the analogue
output(s) from any instrument or meter shall be scaled to correspond to the scale of
the instrument or meter display. Input signals shall be fully isolated from output
signals.
5.2 Flow Measurement – Regulatory
A. Any flow meter intended for regulatory data reporting and audit purposes shall comply
with the following:
1. All flow meter installations that are to be used for regulatory data reporting and
audit purposes must comply with the relevant regulatory authority’s
requirements and recommendations and be correctly installed and certified to
ensure the accurate recording of all flow data.
2. A notice shall be displayed on or immediately adjacent to the flow recording
instrument / transmitter as follows:
3. “Do not interfere with this installation or change any parameters without
authorisation. If any component is repaired or replaced or any changes made
to the installation re-calibration and re-certification by a responsible authority
may be required.”
4. On completion of a flow meter installation that is to be used for regulatory data
reporting the installation shall be checked, verified and certified by a competent,
independent authority for calibration, accuracy and compliance with the

relevant standards. Any defects found shall be rectified by the contractor and
the installation rechecked, verified and certified by the competent, independent
authority.
5. Every flow meter shall be provided with a dedicated integral or separate
totalizer in accordance with the following requirements:
a. Be properly identified as to its purpose and units of measurement
displayed;
b. Wiring between the meter and a separate totalizer shall be visibly and
electrically auditable;
c. Mains powered totalizers shall be protected from interruptions in the
power supply;
d. Battery powered totalizers shall have a minimum battery life of 5 years;
e. The totalizer shall be non-resettable and sealed against unauthorised
tampering;
f. Electronic totalizers shall retain the last recorded reading and not reset
to zero in event of any power failure.
6. For abstraction meters the totalizer must:
a. Display the total forward flow. Where bi–directional meters are used net
flow i.e. forward minus reverse is NOT acceptable;
b. Be capable of recording a minimum of 5 times the annual licensed
abstraction quantity without returning to zero.
7. Where the flow meter is connected to telemetry for central monitoring, data
collection and recording the flow meter installation referred to above includes
the telemetry connections and interface. The verification and certification
required includes the correct scaling and range of the appropriate telemetry
analogue inputs and outputs associated with the meter installation.
8. An alarm output contact shall be connected to telemetry to indicate a
meter/sensor fault or failure condition.
Flow Measurement – Closed Pipe Systems
5.2.1.1 Flow Meters – Electro-Magnetic
A. Electro-magnetic flow meters shall comply with BS EN ISO 6817 and shall only be
used in full pipe systems.
B. Any components and materials that will come into contact with water intended for
public consumption shall comply with the appropriate Regulations.
C. Certification and Documentation: Immediately upon receipt / delivery to site the
original Calibration certificate (including any computer diskettes, programs etc.)
supplied with the meter shall be retained and kept safe by a responsible person who
shall photo copy the certificate for inclusion in any O&M manuals. As soon as
practicable the original Calibration certificate (including any computer diskettes,
programs etc.) shall be formally issued to the designated end user or the end users
representative and a signed receipt obtained.
D. Should any original documentation (including any computer diskettes, programs etc.)
be lost or mislaid the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining replacements at
his own expense.
E. Meter type: Electro-magnetic flow meters shall be of the pulsed dc field type and
where there is a likelihood of reverse flows in normal operation, bi-directional.
F. For difficult conditions i.e. very low conductivity materials or low flows, associated
with chemical dosing, ac pulse type meters may be used.
G. Sizing & location: The meter shall be sized so that the velocity of fluid passing through
the meter is within the limits specified by the manufacturer for accurate metering and
the pressure drop across the meter is minimised.
H. The system shall be designed to prevent air being entrained within the meter or
adjacent pipe work.
I. Electro-magnetic flow meters shall be positioned such that there is a minimum length
of straight pipe equivalent to 5 pipe diameters directly upstream before the inlet to
the flow meter and a minimum length of straight pipe equivalent to 2 pipe diameters
immediately downstream of the meter. Performance requirements and potential
disturbances to the flow may dictate an increased length of straight pipe upstream or
downstream is required.
J. Where the size of the meter is smaller than the diameter of the pipe the reduction in
diameter shall be a minimum of 5 pipe diameters upstream and the return to the
original bore a minimum of 3 pipe diameters downstream. Reduction and expansion
in pipe size shall be effected via concentric tapered adaptors to provide a smooth
transition.
K. The maximum included angle of reducing / increasing tapers, if required, shall not
exceed 15°.
L. Pipe and flow meter flanges shall be PN10.
M. Where isolation valves are fitted these shall be a minimum of 10 pipe diameters
upstream and 5 pipe diameters downstream of the meter (subject to manufacturer
recommendation ).
N. Earthing shall be in accordance with the meter manufacturer’s recommendation for
the particular installation and must comply with BS 7671.
O. Earthing rings must be fitted if the pipes upstream or downstream of the primary head
feature a corrosion resistant internal lining or coating, or are manufactured from a
non-conducting material unless there is clear documentation from the manufacturer
that they are not required or the sensor has an equivalent ‘built-in’ feature. Earthing
rings, where fitted, must be installed on both sides of the primary head.
P. Cathodic Protection: Where the meter is to be installed in a metallic pipeline that is,
or will be, protected by a Cathodic Protection system the following shall be provided:-
Q. Insulating gaskets shall be fitted between both meter flanges and the pipe flanges
and all flange connecting bolts shall be fitted with insulating sleeves and washers.
R. An insulated, adequately rated, bonding cable shall be connected between the
outermost pipeline flanges to maintain the electrical continuity of the pipeline. The
bonding cable connections and terminals shall be adequately protected against
corrosion.
S. The body of the meter must be earthed in compliance with BS7671.
T. Upon completion of the meter installation any existing Cathodic Protection system
must be tested to ascertain that it is functioning correctly (BS 7367).
U. Location underground: All below-ground meters shall be installed in a water tight
chamber.
V. Where meters are installed in pipelines and within underground chambers or directly
buried in ground the precise location of the meter shall be indicated by means of
marker posts and indicator plates.
W. Environment & Accessibility: Where meters are installed in chambers or buried
directly in ground remote mounted transmitters shall be provided and which shall be
mounted in readily accessible positions without the need to enter confined spaces
and the like.
X. All pipeline mounted electrical equipment enclosures including sensors, integral
transmitters and the like shall be IP68 suitable for continuous submergence to 10
metres head of water in accordance with BS EN 60529.
Y. Where meters are installed in readily accessible positions and without the need to
enter confined spaces and the like, transmitter units may be integral with the sensor.
Z. Outputs: The transmitter shall provide, as a minimum, a 4-20 mA DC analogue output
scaled directly proportional to flow, programmable pulsed outputs for forward and
reverse flows and an alarm contact to indicate a fault/failure condition.
AA. Accuracy: The accuracy of the proposed flow meters and the flow range to which
these accuracy figures relate shall be provided by the Contractor to the Project
Manager for information and acceptance.
BB. Cabling & Termination: Where remote mounting transmitters are to be used the
interconnecting cable is typically a special type specified and supplied by the meter
manufacturer and must be ordered to the correct length. Where the sensor /
transmitter combination is matched to the length of cable supplied the length of cable
shall not be reduced or extended under any circumstances, any excess must be
coiled neatly and properly secured at one or both ends. Intermediate joints in the
cable are not permitted.
CC. Termination of the cable shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the meter
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
DD. Where the interconnecting cable is to be buried in ground and/or in ducts it shall be
steel wire armoured with a PVC over sheath.
5.2.1.2 Flow Meters – Turbine
A. Turbine meters shall be constructed from stainless steel with carbon steel or stainless
steel flanges. Rotors shall generate pulses within pick-up coils fitted to the outside of
the meter housing. Rotor bearings shall be tungsten carbide construction.
B. Turndown ratio shall not exceed 10:1.
Weir Plates & Open Channel Systems
A. The uncertainty of the primary element shall not exceed ±8% and that of the
secondary element ±2%.
B. All primary devices will be permanently fixed.
C. Where appropriate and channels and chambers shall be covered with GMS open
mesh flooring.
D. Weir plates shall be fabricated from either a plastic polymer (PTFE) or stainless steel
and be sufficiently rigid or supported so as not to deflect.
E. Manually operated penstocks shall be fitted to both bottom baffles and weir plates to
facilitate flushing.
F. The flow computer shall, where possible, be located adjacent to the primary device
in either a wall mounted or pedestal mounted enclosure.
G. A retractable weather resistant calibration reference plate system shall be provided

for all installations. This shall be set to mimic a reading at approximately 90% of
maximum flow.
H. All key flow measurement calibration parameters including the reference point data
shall be recorded on a weather resistant plate and fixed adjacent to the primary
device.
I. The Contractor shall issue, to the Project Manager, for all compliant flow systems, a
traceable certificate. The Contractor shall issue two paper copies and one electronic
version (in an editable PDF format). Each system shall have a 20-point ‘look-up table’
showing:
1. point number;
2. head [mm] – {for open channel flow systems};
3. flow [l/s];
4. uncertainty (± %).
Weirs and Flumes
A. New hydraulic structures for flow measurement and/or flow control shall be
constructed to the best tolerances that current engineering and construction practices
allow and be sufficiently stable to maintain their dimensions for a minimum of 20
years.
B. The overall system hydraulic design, construction and location of the flow measuring
structure shall be such as to ensure that flow measurement is not adversely affected
by any downstream conditions that may reasonably be anticipated to occur e.g. high
river levels resulting from storm conditions should not cause the structure to flood or
be drowned out
C. Where an existing structure is intended to be used or reused a full and proper
evaluation of its condition and dimensional stability shall be conducted.
D. The design, construction and installation of the primary element shall fully comply
with BS 3680.
E. Thin plate weirs shall be in accordance with BS 3680 part 4A. Weir plates shall be
fixed in position, of sufficient thickness as to ensure rigidity under all flow conditions
and installed true vertical and horizontal. Plates shall be fabricated from either
stainless steel or a plastic polymer that is not affected or degraded by exposure to
sunlight / UV.
F. For sewage applications flumes shall normally be flat bottomed rectangular or U-
throated in accordance with BS 3680 part 4C.
G. The flume primary element may be a factory built prefabricated assembly to be
incorporated and installed true and level without distortion into the overall hydraulic
structure.
Flow Metering – Ultrasonic
A. The measurement of flows utilising primary elements such as weir plates and flumes
in open channels shall be effected using a non-contacting ultrasonic head / flow
monitoring device.
B. Head / flow measurement shall be a high frequency, ultrasonic non-contact system.
C. The transducer shall be temperature compensated and protected to IP68 BS EN
60529.
D. The type of transducer chosen shall be located such that the emitted beam covers
an area that avoids obstacles and reflections to prevent spurious readings.
E. Any separate temperature sensor shall be located adjacent to the transducer but shall
not be positioned such that it may receive direct sunlight.
F. The transducer shall be installed in an approved and serviceable position and/or
mounted such that it may be easily and readily replaced.
G. The control unit shall provide the following features:
1. Digital alphanumeric display of settings and conditions using standard
engineering units. The display must be visible in low light conditions (e.g.
illuminated by means of a back light.
2. Visual indication of loss of echo either by utilising the display or a separate
indication.
3. Have user configurable password or code number protection to restrict access
to parameter and configuration settings to prevent unauthorised changes.
4. Entry of operating parameters and calibration without the need to physically
measure the distance to water level or to remove the transducer head and the
facility to simulate the programmed operations.
5. Integral non-volatile memory for retention of all parameter settings and data in
event of power failure.
6. Integral real time clock for time related operations.
7. Accuracy to within not more than 0.5% of the operating range
8. Volt-free changeover (form ‘C’) relay contacts configurable to provide sufficient
control and alarm points to meet the requirements of the particular application.
9. Isolated, 4-20 mA analogue output scalable to the configured measured range.
10. Be suitable for rack, panel and/or wall mounted applications as required for the
particular application.
H. The control unit shall also automatically self-monitor for correct operation and provide
a common alarm for system faults, memory failure and loss of echo. This common
alarm shall be connected to telemetry.
I. A plate, mounted and set to simulate known head of water and corresponding flow
rate shall be provided such that it may readily be temporarily rotated under the
transducer to provide a reference level to aid calibration and routine checking. A latch
or retaining device shall be provided to enable the plate to be locked in either position.
J. For general process flow measurement applications the control unit shall be mounted
on the main control panel unless the distance between the transducer and the control
unit exceeds the maximum stated by the manufacturer. If the maximum distance
would be exceeded the control unit may be mounted externally within a vandal proof
lockable enclosure with viewing window and providing protection to IP55 BS EN
60529. Such enclosure to have an anti-condensation heater operating at 220 volts.
K. Where the instrument is to be used for Regulatory purposes the control unit shall
either:
1. be mounted externally within a vandal proof lockable enclosure with a viewing
window and providing protection to IP55 BS EN 60529 installed in such a
position as to be readily and safely accessible to the Regulatory Authority for
flow reading purposes without its staff requiring access to any building, control
room etc.
or
2. a remote readout be provided for such purpose.
L. Where the instrument is to be used both for Regulatory purposes and process control
particular care shall be taken to ensure that the there are no adverse effects upon
the correct functioning of the meter by the process control connections or interface.
Signal isolators shall be used in the analogue circuits.
5.3 Level Measurement and Detection
A. For general water and sewage applications the preferred method of continuous flow
measurement shall be a high frequency ultrasonic, non-contact system.
Level Measurement – Ultrasonic
A. Level measurement shall be a high frequency, ultrasonic non-contact system.
B. The transducer shall be temperature compensated and protected to IP68 BS EN
60529.
C. The type of transducer chosen shall be located such that the emitted beam covers
an area that avoids obstacles and reflections to prevent spurious readings.
D. Any separate temperature sensor shall be located adjacent to the transducer but shall
not be positioned such that it may receive direct sunlight.
E. The transducer shall be installed in an approved and serviceable position and/or
mounted such that it may be easily and readily replaced without the need to enter
any confined space e.g. sewage P.S. wet well.
F. The control unit shall provide the following features:
1. Digital alphanumeric display of settings and conditions using standard
engineering units. The display must be visible in low light conditions e.g.
illuminated by means of a back light.
2. Visual indication of loss of echo either by utilising the display or a separate
indication.
3. Have user configurable password or code number protection to restrict all
access to parameter and configuration settings to prevent unauthorised
changes.
4. Entry of operating parameters and calibration without the need to physically
measure the distance to water level or to remove the transducer head and the
facility to simulate the programmed operations.
5. Integral non-volatile memory for retention of all parameter settings and data in
event of power failure.
6. Integral real time clock for time related operations.
7. Accuracy to within not more than 0.5% of the operating range
8. Volt-free changeover (form ‘C’) relay contacts configurable to provide sufficient
control and alarm points to meet the requirements of the particular application.
9. Programmable agitator discrimination and damping.
10. Isolated, 4 - 20 mA analogue output scalable to the configured measured
range.
11. Be suitable for rack, panel and/or wall mounted applications as required for the
particular application
G. Where required by the particular application e.g. pump control the controller shall
provide additional features e.g.:
1. Be configurable to operate around at least two sets of time dependant control
set points to allow peak lopping event and one time related low level pump
down event.
2. Provide volumetric conversion of tank/sump level into volume and the capability
to gather total pumped volume data.
H. The control unit shall also automatically self-monitor for correct operation and provide
a common alarm for system faults, memory failure and loss of echo. This common
alarm shall be connected to telemetry.
I. The control unit shall normally be mounted on the main control panel unless the
distance between the transducer and the control unit exceeds the maximum stated
by the manufacturer. If the maximum distance would be exceeded the control unit
may be mounted externally within a vandal proof lockable enclosure with viewing
window and providing protection to IP55 BS EN 60529. Such enclosure to have an
anti-condensation heater operating at 220 Volts.
Level Measurement – Pressure
A. This shall be by the utilisation of suspended pressure transducers
Level Measurement – Capacitance
A. The capacitance probe shall be immersed directly and vertically into the water.
B. Changes in water level shall produce a linear change in a frequency signal.
C. The transducer shall be installed so that access to its transmitter can be achieved
without the need to enter the actual reservoir, tower, tank etc., or step onto a
hatchway ladder, and in any event access must be possible by one person without
the need for special safety precautions.
D. The transducer shall be capable of being powered locally or remotely.
E. For spans of greater than 1 metre discrimination shall be ± 0.1% or ± 3 mm whichever
is the greater.
F. Surge suppression shall be fitted.
G. Adjustments shall be provided for span, zero and output signal amplitude.
H. Calibration shall be possible by raising and lowering the transducer and sufficient
slack cable shall be available.
I. The transducer shall be coupled to a suitable receiver / power unit / re-transmitter
having surge protection and a 4 - 20 mA output proportional to level.
J. Where level probes, transducer cables etc. enter or travel through the roof, hatch or
covers of storage structures the cable entry points should be sealed to prevent
ingress of non-potable water and/or other foreign object matter into the storage
structure.
Level Measurement – Boreholes
A. The preferred method shall be by the utilisation of suspended pressure
B. The transducer shall be located approximately 2 metres above the pump suction and
routed via a dip tube suspended from the head plate and covered to prevent ingress
and contamination. Particular care in component selection and installation shall be
exercised to ensure that the system cannot be affected by particularly humid
conditions experienced in borehole applications.
C. The system shall be reverse acting, i.e. shall indicate the distance between the water
surface and the head plate.
Level Detection – Point
A. For raw sewage applications the preferred device for single point level detection for
alarm, indication and control purposes is a float switch.
B. For potable water, raw water and final effluent applications the use of either float
switches or level probes is acceptable.
C. The maximum voltage applied to float switch circuits shall be 48 V AC or DC.
D. Where a float switch is located in a hazardous zone it shall be connected via an
intrinsically safe barrier.
E. Where probes are located in a hazardous zone each individual probe and the earth
return path shall be connected via Intrinsically Safe barriers.
Level Control – Sewage Pumping
A. Level control shall normally be effected by means of an ultrasonic level measurement
system. Where an ultrasonic system is unsuitable pressure transducers with the
appropriate control unit may be used as an alternative.
B. If required by the application the controller shall also:
1. Be configurable to operate around at least two sets of time dependant control
set points to allow peak lopping event and one time related low level pump
down event;
and/or
2. Provide volumetric conversion of tank/sump level into volume and the capability
to gather total pumped volume data.
C. In the event of the level control unit being out of service or when the rising level is in
danger of immersing the face of the ultrasonic transducer, level control shall be taken
over by one control backup float switch. This float switch shall be mounted such that
the switching differential shall prevent excessive frequency of start/stop operation of
the pumps. If necessary the switching differential may be obtained by use of a
suitable timing device in conjunction with the float switch. The float switch signal shall
be wired to the main control panel where it shall be used to sequentially start all
available duty units.
D. An additional float switch shall be positioned at a level above the control backup float
switch. This float switch shall be wired back to the control section of panel to provide
an emergency high level alarm connected to telemetry.
Level Control – Water
A. Level control shall normally be effected by means of an ultrasonic level measurement
system. Where an ultrasonic sensor is unsuitable pressure transducers with the
appropriate control unit may be used as an alternative.
B. All materials in contact with potable water shall be approved.
5.4 Pressure Measurement
A. Pressure measurement shall be by means of pressure transducers that shall be
either of the resistance strain gauge or variable capacitance type. The diaphragm
material shall be suitably corrosion resistant to the fluid being measured. The
transducer shall be capable of withstanding transient surge pressure without affecting
the accuracy of the system.
B. The associated transmitter shall provide a linear 4-20 mA dc output signal

proportional to the pressure measured over the normal operating range. The
transmitter shall have the facility to adjust span and zero.
C. The pressure transducer shall be mounted in a serviceable position complete with a
suitable isolating valve and be protected to IP68 BS EN 60529.
D. A suitable dc power supply shall be located within a control panel.
E. The power supply must fully comply with the specification / requirements of the
manufacturer of the pressure transducer.
Pressure Gauges
A. Gauge connections complete with isolating cocks shall be provided on each pump
delivery branch and, with the exception of submersible units, on each pump suction
branch.
B. One set only of 150 mm diameter diaphragm type pressure gauges is required for
each different size of pump.
C. For injection water booster pumps (e.g. chlorine treatment) or sample water pumps,
50 mm gauges may be utilised.
D. In addition to the pressure gauge connections there shall be included in a suitable
position on common delivery pipework a tapped 1" BSP connection with a valve for
isolation purposes.
E. Pressure gauges for use on sewage applications containing solids shall be supplied
with diaphragms of the clean out type. It shall be possible for the diaphragm to be
separated from the housing for cleaning purposes without breaking into the sealed
system. The pressure shall be transmitted from the diaphragms to remote gauges.
All necessary isolating valves and connections shall be included and the gauge
calibrated in metres head of water.
5.5 Dissolved Oxygen Measurement and Control
A. The instrument shall measure the concentration of dissolved oxygen (DO) in the
potable water / sewage process (as appropriate).
B. Applications and performance requirements:
1. Type I: Raw water monitoring of direct abstraction
2. Type II: Raw water monitoring of storage and potable water treatment
process stages
3. Type III: Sewage effluent
4. Type IV: Activated sludge plant liquors; control
5. Type V: Activated sludge plant liquors; monitoring
Type Inaccuracy Repeatabili Response Ranges
ty Time
Type I + 2% span 1.5% span < 40s

0-10, 0-20 mg/l
Type II + 2% span 1.5% span < 3 min 0-100, 0-200%
sat
Type III + 5% span 2.5% span < 3 min
Type IV + 2% span 2.5% span < 40s 0-2.5, 0-10 mg/l

Type Inaccuracy Repeatabili Response Ranges

ty Time
Type V + 5% span 2.5% span < 3 min 0-25, 0-50% sat
C. General requirements:
1. The electrode shall be temperature compensated.
2. The sensor element shall be of ‘one-piece’ construction and easily removable.
3. The transmitter shall have an integral indicator scaled to match the selected
input range.
4. The analyser shall not be sensitive to flow, conductivity and pH.
D. Sensor cleaning:
1. Any sensor cleaning operation shall not affect the accuracy of the instrument
for a period greater than:
a. 40 sec response unit - 5 min in any hour, aggregate 30 mins in 24 hours
b. 3 min response unit - 15 min in any hour, aggregate 60 mins in 24 hours
E. Calibration (on-site): Calibration and zeroing methods must be clearly detailed within
the maintenance manual.
5.6 Suspended Solids and Sludge Density Meters
A. The measurement of suspended solids shall either be in mg/litre or percentage dry
solids depending on application.
B. Applications and Performance Requirements:
1. Type I: Sewage Treatment: final effluent, activated sludge control
2. Type IIa: Sewage Treatment: settled sewage
3. Type IIb: Sewage Treatment: raw sewage (influent)
4. Type III:
a. Sewage Treatment: mixed liquor suspended solids, returned activated
sludge and waste activated sludge solids (low MLSS processes)
b. Water Treatment: sludge bleed from clarifier blankets
5. Type IV:
a. Sewage Treatment: returned activated sludge and waste activated
sludge solids (high MLSS processes)
b. Sludge Solids Content: desludging of settling tanks and monitoring input
of solids into digesters
c. Solids loading of sludge to land
d. Sludge dewatering
B. Water Treatment: thickened sludge
Type Inaccuracy Range
Type I + 5 mg/l or + 10% of reading whichever is 0-100 mg/l suspended solids

greater
Type IIa + 50 mg/l or + 10% of reading whichever is 0-1,000 mg/l suspended solids
greater
Type IIb + 50 mg/l or + 20% of reading whichever is 0-1,000 mg/l suspended solids
greater
Type III + 10% of reading 1,000-15,000 mg/l suspended

solids
Type IV + 10% of reading 1%-10% dry solids
C. Sensors: For dip and insertion sensors, the sensor shall be safely and easily removed
from the process stream without shutting down the process. Self-cleaning and
integral automatic calibration facilities shall be included.
5.7 Turbidity – Monitoring and Control
A. The measurement units of turbidity shall be in formazin turbidity units (FTU), however
Nephelometric turbidity instruments may be used.
B. Applications and performance requirements:
1. Type I: Coagulation control, filtered water turbidity, filter backwash control,
backwash and supernatant return
2. Type II: Raw water monitoring, final treated water monitoring including
final effluents for STW’s
Type Inaccuracy Response Time
(T90)
Type I + 2% of full scale deflection or + 0.2 FTU whichever Less than 2

is greater minutes
Type II 2% of full scale deflection, or + 0.2 FTU whichever is Less than 15

greater minutes
3. The total response time, including all sampling lags, shall not exceed 3 minutes
(T90) for type I analysis.
4. Range: The range shall be capable of selection by the user and shall be
suitable for the application.
5. Repeatability: Repeatability shall not exceed + 1% of span or + 0.1 FTU,
whichever is greater.
C. Sensor Cleaning: Self-cleaning integral automatic calibration and manual cleaning
facilities shall be included if required to achieve the required time between
maintenance. Incorporation of these systems shall not affect the availability of the
instrument for a period greater than 1 minute in any one hour for type I instruments
and 15 minutes in any one hour (maximum aggregate of 2 hours in 24 hours). For
type II instruments.
D. Entrainment of Air: The instrument shall incorporate a facility for ensuring that
inaccurate readings due to entrained air will be minimised.
E. Sensors: For dip and insertion sensors, the sensor shall be safely and easily removed
from the process stream without shutting down the process.
F. Calibration shall be by the use of a Dry Secondary Calibration Standards designed
and supplied for the instrument. The standards shall be traceable to an FTU standard.
One number of standards appropriate for each specific model and range of
instrument are required on any one site.
5.8 Ph Measurement and Control
A. Instrument: The instrument shall measure the pH value of natural water, partially
treated water or potable water over a range from pH2 to pH12. The output signal zero
selection shall be in increments of < 1pH over the range of the instrument.
1. The output signal span selection shall be in increments of < 1pH. Indicators
shall have a resolution of 0.01pH units.
A. Applications and performance requirements:
1. Type I: Raw water monitoring; aeration monitoring
2. Type II: Coagulation pH control
a. Manganese removal;
b. Final water pH / monitoring (no chemical dose control);
c. Precipitation softening;
d. Recarbonation;
e. Aeration control.
2. Type III: De-alkaliser waste control
Type Inaccuracy Repeatability Response Time
Type I ±0.1 ±0.05 3 mins
Type II ±0.1 ±0.05 15 secs
Type III ±0.3 ±0.1 15 secs
B. The instrument shall meet the performance requirements of this specification when
operated continuously and without manual intervention for a minimum period of 30
days. Auto-calibration, auto-cleaning or multi-sensor techniques may be used to
maintain this stability.
1. If self-cleaning and/or auto-calibration is incorporated the accuracy of the
instrument shall not be affected for a period greater than 10 minutes in any 1
hour period. The aggregate of the off-line periods shall not exceed 2 hours in a
24 hour period.
C. Sampling systems should make provision for:
1. Clean water flush and/or air purge (i.e. avoid deposition of suspended material).
2. Chemical cleaning with acids or biocides.
3. Mechanical cleaning arrangements.
4. Ultrasonic cleaners (NB: Control output to be inhibited during cleaning until re-
stabilisation achieved).
5. Sample take-off point at a position that is representative.

6. Care in avoidance of aeration of the sample on the release of dissolved gases.
7. Avoidance of change in temperature of the sample.
8. Short sample time, achieved by fast bypass loops where necessary.
5.9 Nitrate Measurement – Water Treatment Works
A. Measurement shall be by the ultraviolet absorption method. The analyser shall:
incorporate automatic cleaning, Xenon flash tube and concave mirror diffraction
grating. At each measurement, a minimum of 15 flashes shall be analysed for errors
and be used in measurement calculations.
1. A minimum of one high level alarm is required, rated at 220 Volts AC.
2. A discrete termination section is may be supplied.
3. The sensor and flow cell shall be designed to withstand a fault condition
pressure of up to 4 bar.
5.10 Other Instruments and Devices
A. Performance Table
1. Performance shall be equal to or exceed the following
2. Note: Span and Full Scale Deflection relate to the calibrated span of the
instrument as installed, not the maximum span.
Inaccuracy: Combined
Temperature Long Term Operating range, all
effect of non-linearity,
Device effect all Stability 12 components unless
hysteresis and
components Months otherwise specified
repeatability
% FSD % FSD/°C % Span °C
Signal conditioning devices ± 0.2 ± 0.02 ± 0.1 - 15 to +55
Pressure transducer ± 0.25 ± 0.025 ± 0.2 -15 to +55
Pressure Transmitter ± 0.5 ± 0.025 -15 to +55
Pressure transducer for level

± 0.25 ± 0.02 ± 0.02 -15 to +55
measurement
Pressure Transmitter for level

± 0.5 ± 0.02 ± 0.02 -15 to +55
measurement
Level Measurement by ± 0.25 or 6mm, whichever

--- --- -15 to +55
ultrasonic methods is greater
Pressure Gauge, 100mm and

acc. to BS 1780 class 1
above
Pressure Gauge, below

acc. to BS 1780 class 2
100mm
Differential Pressure
± 0.5 ± 0.02 ± 0.02 ---
Transmitter
Panel Indicator (analogue) ±1 --- --- -15 to +55
Recorder ± 0.5 ± 0.02 ± 0.02 -15 to +55

Inaccuracy: Combined
Temperature Long Term Operating range, all
effect of non-linearity,
Device effect all Stability 12 components unless
hysteresis and
components Months otherwise specified
repeatability
% FSD % FSD/°C % Span °C
Ammonia analyser ± 2.0 --- --- +5 to +45
Conductivity Analyser ± 1.5 --- --- -10 to +50
Fluoride analyser ± 2.0 --- --- +5 to +45
Flowmeter, Turbine ± 1.0 % of reading --- --- -15 to +50
Flowmeter Variable Area ± 5.0 --- --- -15 to +50
Gas leak detectors ± 2.0 ± 0.075 --- -15 to + 40
1 to 50 mg/l ± 1.0mg/l
Nitrate Analyser 50 to 100 mg/l ± 2% of --- --- + 5 to +45
reading
Ozone in water analyser ± 1.0 --- --- -15 to +40
Organic pollution analyser ± 0.5 --- --- +0 to +40
Phosphate analyser ± 2.0 --- --- +5 to +45
-10 to +50,
Temperature transmitter ± 0.5°C ± 0.02 ± 0.02
transmitter only
Weight by load cell ± 0.5 ± 0.03 -15 to +50
5.11 Ammonia Monitors

A. Ammonia monitors shall be of the ion selective electrode type.
5.12 Sampling Systems
A. All sample take-off point(s) shall be chosen to ensure that the sample being taken is
truly representative of the source water / liquid being monitored. Take-off point(s)
should be avoided from long pipeline runs supplying hydrants, stilling basins or ‘dead
legs’.
B. Sample take-off point(s) shall be located such distance downstream of any chemical
dosing point as to ensure that the chemical has adequately mixed with the water
before sampling.
C. The design of the sampling system shall be such as to ensure that the sample is not
contaminated by any material, chemical or reagent other than one intentionally
introduced as part of the ‘test’ procedure or process.
D. Sample pumps shall be located as close as possible to the sample point and where
they can be easily maintained. Pumps shall not be located in confined spaces within
underground chambers.
E. The pumps and sample lines shall be located and sized such that the sample transit
time, from sample point to monitor instrument is appropriate to the purpose of the
measurement being undertaken. Where the measurement is used for monitoring, or
monitoring and plant/works shutdown, the sample transit time shall not exceed 4
minutes.
F. Sample lines shall not be run in the same duct(s) as electric cables, and shall be non-
metallic.
G. Where sample lines are connected to pipework, the connection shall be via a dip tube
and isolating valve. This connection shall preferably be taken from the side of the
pipe to prevent entrained air being drawn into the sample system.
H. When sample lines are exposed above ground they shall be lagged and trace heated
to maintain a temperature of 5 degrees Celsius when the ambient temperature falls
to minus 20°C.
I. Sampling systems, in particular those used in raw water and sewage applications,
are susceptible to fouling and blockages with biological slimes, organic and mineral
deposits, fats & greases. The design of the system shall be such as to readily facilitate
cleaning and flushing including dismantling when appropriate.
J. In any potable water installation samples shall always be discharged to a suitable
waste water drain and under no circumstances should any sample be returned to the
process flow or sample source.
K. Used samples, particularly where chemicals or reagents have been introduced as
part of the measurement process, shall not be discharged direct to a watercourse
unless such discharge complies with an appropriate discharge consent.
L. Where the measurement is used for monitoring, or monitoring and plant / works
shutdown duty / standby sample pump(s) shall be provided. Any other requirement
for duplicate or duty / standby sample pumps will be dependent upon the purpose of
the monitoring or measurement being carried out. For large works with multi-sampling
& monitoring the provision of boxed spare(s) may be appropriate.
M. Motors fitted to sample pumps shall operate at the most suitable voltage appropriate
to the installation and type / size of pump being utilised. Motors shall be capable of
long term continuous running without maintenance e.g. 3ph 400 V AC 50 Hz. Single
phase 230 V or 110 V AC 50 Hz motors shall be of the capacitor start / run type.
5.13 Control and Monitoring System
General :
A simple control system shall be supplied and installed under the scope of this contract
comprising of the following :
–Three (NO ) remote I\O units to be installed in the Headworks,Biological treatment and
chlorination building respectively .
–One PLC &HMI units to be installed in the control room .
–Fiber optic cabling for interconnection of the system
Complete details of the system together with relevant catalogues , literature and design details
shall be submitted by the contractor .
Introduction
A. This specification covers the design, manufacturing and factory testing, as well as
preparation and submission of documentation for control, main PLC With HMI Ready
for stage 2 and to be connected with SCADA System in the future, to be used for the
WWTP. This section shall be utilized only for guidance while the contractor is
requested to submit his proposal based on his own design taking the requirements
stipulated in this section as minimum requirements. The plant control and monitoring
system should be designed in complete coordination with all other plant equipment
and treatment process components
Scope of Work
A. The contractor scope of work description of instrumentation under this item should
cover, but not limited to, the following :
1. Submission of the process and control philosophy for the system
2. Submission of the basic design for the control system.
3. Preparation of detailed design of the complete system including (but not limited
to) the following:
a. Detailed Piping and Instrumentation Drawings (P&ID).
b. PLCs I/O Lists.
c. Interlock /Logic diagrams.
d. Loop diagrams.
e. Control room layout drawing
f. Workshop drawings .
4. Preparation of all designs related to control and instrumentation cabling works(
including but not limited to the following :
a. Cables from/to sheets
b. Cable path and cable routes design.
c. Termination diagrams .
5. The contractor shall submit the original technical catalogues for all selected
components for PROJECT MANAGER approval prior to fabrication.
6. Preparation of as-built soft copy of engineering documents and gets consultant
approval.
7. On-site training to the plant operators.
8. Equipment and materials shall comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following standards:
a. International electrical code (IEC) and ISA standard.
b. NEMA, NEC, IEEE, CSI Standard and OSHA Standard.
c. German standard specifications and code of practice (DIN), (VDE) and
d. German instrumentation society and Japanese standard society
General Requirements In The Bidding Stage
A. Main component/technical submittals/datasheets of the offered Control system
based on the system description mentioned hereinafter.
B. The contractor shall submit the PLC's I/Os list.
C. The contractor shall submit a table of contents for all his equipment and spare part
list.
D. The contractor shall submit a specified original catalogue not general catalogue and
shall specify the type and the tag number of the submitted item(s).
E. If any catalogue was missed or the contractor didn't specify the type and the tag
number of the submitted item(s), this item(s) will not be accepted and considered not
submitted item(s).
F. The Contractor's submittal shall include all spare parts including their quantities, The
spare parts shall include at least 10% of all component used of each panel (relays
with different types, C.Bs, indication lamps with different types, terminal blocks, push
buttons, labels, run hour meter, selector switch, digital indicators …….) and 100%
spare of the fuses. The spare parts should at least one of each cards used (not less
than 25% from the total PLC’s cards) including the power supply and CPU .
G. The contractor shall submit the heat dissipation calculation and temperature rise
calculations.
System Description ( Refer to the general item above ).
5.13.4.1 General
A. The required system shall be used to control and monitor the operation of the waste
water treatment plant equipment and process. However, all PLCs, HMIs and Local
Control Panels (LCPs) must have built in Ethernet Connections and Switches
modules to connect to SCADA system. The system should have enough capacity for
enhancement of automatic control program for future development of the waste water
treatment plant.
B. The system should be so designed to have the highest possible reliability and
minimize the system failure in order to achieve safe and satisfactory start up and shut
downs, continuous and accurate operation with minimum maintenance.
C. The system shall comprise, but not limited to, the following components:
1. Main Operator Workstation complete with 36’’ inches for monitoring and control
the essential Plant operations and parameters according to the control
philosophy. The control feature shall be protected and activated by an
authorization password.
2. Main Control Panel in each pump substation in the plant for remote and Auto
control functions, this panel shall include the PLC.
3. Local control panels beside each equipment for Local control and emergency
functions.
4. pH, conductivity, DO, Pressure, flow and level transmitters as required.
5. System cabling including power, control and signals cables.
6. The system should be provided with an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
with a minimum 30 minutes to keep the system functionality and till generator
feeding or main power resumes.
D. PLC system is a modular type and shall have the appropriate number of Digital and
Analog inputs and outputs to meet the different types of equipment used in the water
treatment plant in addition to 25% spares and should be but not limited as follows:
1. Pump:
a. 3 DI Run/Stop, Fault, Remote
b. 1 DO Start/Stop command.
2. Actuated Valve :
a. 4 DI Open, Close, Fault, Remote
b. 2 DO Open, Close commands.
3. Needle Valve :
a. 4 DI Open, Close, Fault, Remote
b. 2 DO Open, Close commands.
c. 1 AI Position Indication.
d. 1 AO Positioning Command.
4. Switches (Level, Pressure ... etc):
a. 1 DI Limit Leve
b. 1 DI Limit Pressure.
5. Transmitters (Level, Pressure, Temperature, etc):
a. 1 AI Measured Value per each.
E. The total number of signals and commands of the control system shall be determined
according to level of control and number of Input/output of each equipment.
F. The system should provide three different control modes of operation for all plant
units as follows:
 Local Manual Operation:
U U
This mode can be selected manually from the MCC to activate the control function
at the local panel close to each equipment .
 Remote Manual Operation:
U U
This mode can be selected manually from the MCC to activate the manual control
function at the main control panel located in each pump substation.
All manual modes shall not affect the automatic program running behind.
 Automatic Operation:
U U
This function is continuously running and according to an approved control

program based on an approved control philosophy
5.13.4.2 Motorized Gates, valves
A. Penstocks at aeration process shall be motorized type. Delivery valves for air blowers
and process pumps (wastewater/sludge) excluding services pumps such as (chorine
booster pumps, dewatering,..etc) shall be motorized type. All other gates and valves
shall be manually operated. Valves on sludge drying beds shall be manually
operated. All suction valves of pumps and air blowers shall be manual type. The
actuator shall be motor starter built in type. All motorized valves shall connected with
PLC and also can be operated manually in case PLC failure.
B. All manual Valves bigger than 100mm and penstocks shall include limit switches. The
PLC shall monitor the status of each manual gates and manual valve totally opened,
totally closed.
5.13.4.3 Transformers Monitoring
A. Transformers shall be equipped with both oil level switches for alarm and trip
conditions.
B. Transformers shall be equipped with thermal switches (thermostat) to indicate alarm
and trip conditions.
C. Transformers with ratings exceeding 2MVA shall be equipped with PT100 sensor.
5.13.4.4 Medium Voltage Panel Monitoring

A. The status of all of the circuit breakers is to be monitored by the PLC.
B. All circuit breakers are to be equipped with microprocessor based trip units. The trip
units shall be equipped with Modbus communication port that is to be connected to
the PLC the communication shall not be affected by the status of the circuit breaker
(ON or OFF position). The trip unit must be capable of measuring the following:
1. Three phase current.
2. Three phase voltage.
3. Active and reactive power in unbalanced condition.
4. Active and reactive Energy.
5. Power factor.
6. Frequency.
7. Maximum demand.
C. In case of withdrawable circuit breaker, the breakers shall be equipped with limit
switches indicating the position of the breaker. The PLC shall monitor the position of
the withdrawable breakers.
D. The PLC must be able to calculate, store and communicate with other systems the
statically information related to the circuit breakers.
5.13.4.5 Generators Monitoring
Local monitoring for the generator set performance shall be supplied and installed as part
from the unit control .
Control System Equipment’s ( Refer to the general item above ) .

5.13.5.1 Control Panel
A. The PLC panel should be built of high quality steel sheet of thickness not less than 2
mm, anti-corrosion and providing a degree of protection IP54 and sections fully
protected and finished to a high standard. The operation of the control panel is
described in the following items:
1. The control panel shall be equipped with HMI unit.
2. Level electrode shall be displayed status (HIHI-HI-LO-LOLO) on control panel.
5.13.5.2 Programmable Logic Controller PLC
A. The PLC shall be rack mounted with separate CPU and power supply.
B. The I/O modules shall be mounted on I/O racks.
C. The PLC shall be compatible with all of the requirements of IEC1131. The CPU must
be equipped with floating point capability and process control capabilities and real
time clock (RTC).
D. All empty slots in the racks shall be covered by empty slot cover module.
E. The used number of I/Os must not exceed 75% of the maximum capacity of the CPU.
F. I/O spare point should be at least 25% of used I/O points.
G. The CPU shall be equipped with a built memory of at least 2Mbytes of RAM according
to IEC1131-3.
H. Analogue I/O modules shall be with minimum resolution of 18bit channel to channel
isolated. In case of PLC malfunction, the state of the PLC outputs shall turn to a safe
condition. This condition shall be programmable to either high, low or keep last state.
The PLC digital I/O modules shall be high density 24VDC.
I. All actuators shall be operated by the PLC during Auto mode, from the control panel
during manual remote mode and from local position in manual-local mode.
J. All actuators shall be capable of operation in manual mode even in case of PLC
malfunctioning.
K. The PLC will perform the sequence of operation of the pumps and the relevant
interlocks according to the level measured by the level transmitters. Level switches
shall be used for safety interlocks.
L. The PLC must be equipped with sufficient number of digital inputs and outputs,
analogue I/Ps and analogue outputs.
M. The operator must be capable of forcing the status of certain actuators to ON or OFF
positions.
N. The operator can define a sequence of operation.
O. Temperature, relative humidity inside which effected in process and control and MCC
panel room shall be monitored.
P. The PLC programming will be backed on a flash type removable memory.
Q. PLC environmental conditions as per (IEC1131-2). The attention of the contractor is
drawn to the fact that wastewater station is a highly polluted with corrosive gases.
The contractor shall take protective actions to ensure long service life of the
components proposed, and to use conformal coating to all PLC modules
5.13.5.3 Human Machine Interface HMI
A. The HMI unit shall be as minimum 12” diagonal 18 bit color touch screen TFT active
matrix.
B. The unit shall be LCD, XGA 1024X768.
C. The ingress protection of the unit shall be not less than IP55.
D. The unit must be capable of operation in ambient temperature of 50°C.
E. Relative humidity up to 95% without condensation
F. The HMI shall be connected to the PLC with a communication bus 10Mbit/s baud rate
at least.
G. The HMI shall enable the operator to take full automatic and manual control of the
functional zone.
H. The HMI shall be capable of alarming and log keeping.
I. The HMI unit shall be of the heavy industrial type with membrane protection against
the environment on site.
J. The equipment can be operated from the PLC only if the selector switches are placed
in the automatic mode and in the remote mode.
K. The HMI will in all modes of operation monitor the status of the equipment.
L. The operator is to select from the HMI the mode of PLC operation of the equipment
Forcing In sequence. (In case that forcing mode is selected, the operator will be able
to force the equipment to be in ON or OFF condition from the PLC disregarding the
sequence of PLC program but in case that IN Sequence is selected, the PLC will
control the equipment in accordance to the pre-programmed sequence of operation.).
M. The HMI will indicate all of the status of the equipment including but not limited to
total run hour, last running time, last cooling time total number of starts, number of
starts in the last hour, last starting time, etc…
N. The HMI unit shall be conformal coating type.
5.13.5.4 Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS.
A. The system (PLC) must be equipped with a UPS unit in each control panel, which
will provide the PLC, HMI and Instrumentation with power for at least 30 minutes in
case the main power source failure
B. The UPS shall contain a Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) and the
necessary protection equipment.
C. The contractor shall submit the original catalogues and calculation of the UPS.
5.14 Process and Operational Control Strategies
A. The design of the wastewater treatment plant needs to reflect how each process of
the equipment will operate and the appropriate level of automation. Wastewater
treatment plant often uses a combination of manual, semiautomatic controls. The
appropriate design will balance the increase in complexity and long-term
maintenance costs against the automation benefits.
Head Works
A. Inlet wastewater shall be equipped with instrumentation to determine wastewater
properties (pH, conductivity, Temperature, and Flow).
B. Mechanical screen shall be continuously cleaned by selecting between three ways
manual or cleaned on a time or ultrasonic differential level transmitter controlled
cycle. Mechanical screen shall be equipped with ultrasonic differential level
transmitter to measure, indicating the level and to transmit the level signal to the PLC
to operate. When the level at the mechanical screen reached the set point (adjustable
by PLC) it must turned on to clean up the screen and then turned OFF.
C. Level Float (LSH) in main inlet chamber.
Biological Basin
A. The biological basin shall include but not limited to the following:
1. MLSS suspended solids analyzers, to provide continuous measure of Mixed
Liquor Suspended Solids (MLSS), pH transmitter and Dissolved oxygen
analyzer and transmit the signal to the PLC.
Contact Tank
A. Based on residual chlorine measuring will be control of chlorine dosing pump,
measuring the pH and conductivity.
Tanks and Sump
A. Each tank shall be equipped with Ultrasonic level Transmitter (anti-foam type) and
level electrode (LSLL-LSL-LSH-LSHH). Each sump shall be equipped with Ultrasonic
level Transmitter (anti-foam type) and level electrode (LSLL-LSL-LSH-LSHH).each
dewatering pit shall be equipped with level electrode (LSL-LSH).
Blowers and Pumps

A. The pressure on each delivery line of pumps and delivery shall be measured by using
pressure transmitter and pressure gauges.
B. The pressure on each main delivery pipe of sludge pumps, effluent pumps, and
blowers shall be measured by using pressure transmitter.
Flow Meters
A. Different signals shall be measured from different flow meters types.
6 Testing Requirements
6.1 General
A. The requirements of this section cover all areas of the Works and shall be applied to
each area.
B. The Contractor shall submit, to the Project Manager for approval, a detailed
Commissioning Plan for the commissioning of all the various elements of the Works
and the Works as a whole prior to commencing Precommissioning.
6.2 Testing and Commissioning Sequence
A. The following stages of testing and commissioning shall be undertaken for all
sections of the works under this Contract.
Stage Number Testing and Commissioning Stage
Construction Completion
1 Factory Acceptance Test
2 Construction Completion Test
3 Dry Testing
4 Wet Testing
5 Safety Inspection
6 Construction Completion Report
7 Construction Completion Certificate
Precommissioning
8 Process Commissioning & Reliability Test
9 Training
10 Takeover Report
11 Completion Certificate
Commissioning: Guarantee Tests
12 Tests
13 Addressing Defects
14 Operational Acceptance
B. All tests shall be fully documented by the Contractor and included as part of a
Commissioning Manual.

6.3 Construction Completion Tests

General
A. These tests shall cover specific inspections and testing of all individual items of civil
& hydraulics, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation equipment, building services
installations and civil works.
B. All individual items of plant and equipment as well as functional groups of equipment
shall be tested to establish and prove the correct operation and functional interaction
of equipment and the safe starting and stopping functions and faults and alarm
conditions.
C. These tests shall demonstrate the following:
1. Correct equipment installation
2. WWTP functionality
3. WWTP operability
4. WWTP safety
D. The Contractor shall also test all pipelines and structures constructed as part of the
Works for water tightness and suitability to support or carry loads to be imposed upon
them.
E. All structures and pipelines shall be tested in accordance with the Employers
Requirements.
Factory Acceptance Testing
A. Factory inspection and testing shall be carried out for all the following mechanical
and electrical plants provided in this Contract and certificates shall be provided:
1. Motor control centres
2. Main power transformer
3. Variable speed drives (as part of the motor control centres)
4. Aeration system
5. SCADA system
6. Pumps
7. Sedimentation Tanks bridge scrapers
8. Screens
9. Grit removal tanks
10. Sludge thickening and dewatering equipment and/or facilities
11. Mixers
12. Backup power system
A. The Project Manager, at his discretion may witness the tests taking place. The
Contractor shall make necessary arrangement for access to the supplier’s factory. At
least two weeks’ notice of a test shall be given to the Project Manager.
Dry Testing
A. Dry testing shall comprise testing of installations to ensure that they will operate as
required by the Specifications when put into operation. These tests shall comprise as
a minimum ensuring that cables are correctly connected, pumps are operational,
pipework and structures are watertight and all plants are ready for further stages of
testing. Lifting equipment shall be tested at this stage.
B. For commissioning work, a full method statement and programme shall be prepared
by the Contractor and submitted to the Project Manager for acceptance before
commencing of Testing and Commissioning.
Wet Testing
A. Wet testing shall comprise operation of all plant and equipment to ensure that it can
pass the design flows and loads. Pumps and pumping systems shall be tested to
ensure they pass required flows and that they operate within appropriate limits. All
valves, penstocks and control equipment shall be tested in isolation from the
complete WWTP to demonstrate that localised control and feedback systems are
operational. These tests shall be performed with clean water to allow modifications
to be made without extensive disinfection of WWTP or equipment.
B. Specifically, the Contractor shall demonstrate:
1. The flow splitting throughout the works including to the Sedimentation tanks,
biological reactors, other process tanks, (when operated in parallel mode)
operate correctly with even distribution of flow.
2. The design flow regime (plug flow or complete mix) is achieved throughout the
WWTP including the biological reactors.
3. The bypasses operate over the range of flows required
4. The flowmeters measure the flow accurately
C. The Contractor shall make arrangements for any temporary recirculation and
pumping to wet test the WWTP over the range of flows required.
Safety Inspection
A. The completed Works shall be inspected to ensure that all appropriate access routes
for operation and maintenance have been provided, lifting equipment has been
supplied and operational. Lifting arrangements shall be verified with the Operation
and Maintenance manuals. In the event of discrepancies being identified the
arrangements shall be reconsidered. Installations shall be inspected to ensure that
the correct hazardous area zonings have been applied and appropriate signage has
been installed. The Contractor shall make modifications to the Works at this stage if
needed.
B. In addition to the Contractor’s statutory obligations, the following applies:
C. The Contractor shall not commence Precommissioning until the Works has been
inspected by the Project Manager and deemed to be acceptable by the Project
Manager in respect of the health and safety requirements in the Contract. The Project
Manager will undertake an inspection within 7 days of the request from the
Contractor. The Project Manager will report on the findings of the inspection within 7
days.
Provision of Resources
A. Throughout the tests the Contractor shall ensure that at least one commissioning
engineer is on site during working hours and is contactable 24 hours per day with a
response time to site of less than 1 hour.
B. The Contractor shall provide everything necessary for the satisfactory testing,
including but not limited to auto-samplers, temporary pumps, valves, pipework, flow
meters, sample points, consumables and chemicals for testing and operation. Where
temporary on-line sampling equipment is required, the Contractor shall provide power
and drainage. The Contractor shall provide a means of access to all points where a
sample or test is required.
C. For each test where sampling is required, all samples taken shall be in tripartite such
that one part is analysed in approved laboratory by the Contractor, one part by the
Employer and one part is retained below 4°C for analysis by an independent third
party should there be any discrepancy regarding the results of the Employer’s and
Contractor’s analysis.
D. All samples shall be representative of the appropriate stream. Sample location shall
be detailed in the Contractor’s Commissioning Plan subject to agreement with the
Project Manager.
E. Analysis of the Contractor’s and Employer’s samples shall be undertaken within 24
hours after collected (except for temperature and dissolved oxygen (DO) which shall
be measured at once on site) and reported to the Project Manager within 48 hours,
except for BOD and microbiological parameter which shall be reported within 7 days.
F. Samples shall be tested in accordance with the current version of “Standard Methods
for the Examination of Water and Wastewater” published by American Public Health
Association, American Water Works Association, Water Environment Federation
(ISBN 9780875530130).
Water For Testing
A. Potable water shall be used for the testing of the aeration system of the biological
tanks and this shall be provided by the Contractor. However, clean river water could
be used for other hydraulic testing on the Contractor’s request and subject to
agreement with the Project Manager.
Construction Completion Report and Certificates
6.3.8.1 General
A. Tests on all building systems including ventilation, lighting (levels tested and specified
illumination levels achieved), lighting conductors and telephones.
B. All factory acceptance tests have been completed and test certificates issued. (The
Project Manager may wish to witness the tests taking place. If this is the case, then
the Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for access to the supplier’s
factory). At least two weeks notice of a test shall be given to the Project Manager.
C. A preliminary safety inspection has been carried out and the installation deemed safe
to use.
D. All roads and accesses are completed
6.3.8.2 Civil
A. All civil works and pipelines have been tested in accordance with the Contract
including:
1. Leak/infiltration test on roofs, tanks, sumps, chambers, shafts, tunnel and the
like.
2. Water retaining tests on structures designed as water retaining.
3. Testing of non-pressure and pressure pipework
4. Load testing of piles and ground anchors
6.3.8.3 Mechanical
A. Mechanical equipment has been tested in accordance with the Contract including:
1. Gearboxes, bearings and the like have been checked for first fill of oil to
manufacturer’s recommended level and all items lubricated.
2. Pumps, scrapers and other mechanical equipment checked for alignment.
3. Pumps, blowers, scrapers, valves and other mechanical equipment have been
checked for direction of rotation.
4. Pipework cleaned of all debris and hydrostatically tested.
5. Testing of pressure vessels, feed lines and instrument air lines, including issue
of certificates.
6. Tests completed on lifting equipment including issue of certificates.
7. Dry run tests of mechanical plants.
8. Gas opening systems shall be tested to ensure that they automatically
discharge, where appropriate, and re-pressurise following operation.
9. Tests completed on relief valves.
10. Balancing certificates and rotating parts of plants.
6.3.8.4 Electrical
A. Electrical equipment has been tested in accordance with the Contract including:
1. Electrical function tests; operate each section of the plant to prove correct
functioning/running as part of dry run tests. Ensure the plant is running at the
duty specified.
2. HV installation tests
3. Complete electrical installation certificates incorporating LV installation tests
4. Installation and testing of fire detection, fire suppression and security systems.
5. Testing of lighting protection
6. Motor Control Centres (MCCs) shall be tested
6.3.8.5 Instrumentation and Control
A. Instrumentation and control equipment has been tested in accordance with the
Contract including:
1. Calibration of instrumentation equipment and control systems loop testing from
primary to final control elements. Adjustment of set-points for optimum process
performance and stable operation.
2. Control system including PLCs, MMIs, SCADA, Telemetry, SCADA and
associated equipment shall be pre-tested on site to ensure that all interfaces
are functioning and that all digital and analogue signals are functioning and
displayed as required.
3. SCADA systems shall be tested to ensure correct communication and
identification of alarms.
4. Verification of the operation of all alarms including transmission of the signals
to telemetry where available.
Specific Plant Tests Undertaken During Process Commissioning

6.3.9.1 General
A. All Plant installed shall be tested to demonstrate full automatic and manual control
functions and to show that the Works has capacity in accordance with the Contract
for normal and emergency conditions.
B. Where an item fails its test, before the test period is restarted, the Contractor shall
make any adjustments to the Works that are required to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
C. Specific tests shall be performed to demonstrate the following:
6.3.9.2 Hydraulics
A. Observed freeboard is as detailed in the Contractor’s design.
B. The WWTP bypasses listed in the Specification allow the required Peak Flows to
bypass to the balance tank while maintaining the required freeboard and without
spillage
6.3.9.3 Pumps
A. Pumps are individually and as a system able to perform at the specified duties.
6.3.9.4 Distribution system and flow splits
A. At a known incoming flow, as measured using appropriate flow meter, the flow into
each Preliminary Treatment Facilities, Biological Treatment Tanks, Sedimentation
Tanks (when operated in parallel mode) and other structures shall be measured by
the Contractor. Measurement shall be taken over 7 days to ensure that flow splits are
achieved over a representative range of flows. Flow measurement shall be taken at
least once every 3 hours every day, such that night time conditions are also
assessed. Failure to achieve a flow split of ± 5% of the intended level (normally an
even split over all similar structures performing same function) shall be deemed a
failure and the Contractor shall modify flow split accordingly. The test shall then be
repeated.
6.4 Precommissioning Tests
Introduction
A. Up to the Precommissioning Tests, clean water tests can be used to demonstrate
performance with appropriate recirculation pumping across the WWTP to simulate
the range of flows. For the Precommissioning Tests, these must be performed using
wastewater from the network. Up to this point, the Contractor shall operate the
WWTP with the appropriate modifications to achieve the Final Effluent Discharge
Standards. At no point can wastewater be discharged directly to the river. The
Contractor shall submit a detailed commissioning plan to the Project Manager.
B. The Precommissioning Tests comprise:
1. Trial operation of each process of the Works and
2. A process test during which the entire WWTP is operational but only a portion
is used to test
Trial Operation
Preliminary Treatment
6.4.2.1 Coarse Manual Screens
A. All flow into the works may be diverted for treatment through the coarse screens. The
flow through the screen channels shall be within the designed coping level and there
shall be no spillage. Screenings capture and discharge into the skips shall be
observed. The plant shall be operating consistently under normal condition in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract before it can be ready for the
subsequent process test.
6.4.2.2 Medium Mechanical screens
A. All flow into the works shall be diverted for treatment through the medium mechanical
screens. The flow through the screen channels shall be within the designed coping
level and there shall be no spillage. Screenings capture, washing, compaction and
discharge into the skips shall be observed. Washwater usage and return of liquor
back into the work shall be observed (if applicable in the Contractor design). The
plant shall be operating consistently under normal condition in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract before it can be ready for the subsequent process test.
6.4.2.3 Grit removal plant
A. All screened flow shall automatically be diverted to the grit removal plant for further
treatment. The flow through the grit channel shall be within the designed coping level
and there shall be no spillage. Grit capture, washing, compaction and discharge into
the skips shall be observed. Grit lifting pumps, grit classifier, washwater usage and
return of liquor back into the work shall be observed (if applicable in the Contractor
design). The plant shall be operating consistently under normal condition in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract before it can be ready for the
subsequent process test.
B. Once both the screens and grit removal plants are showing consistently reliable
operation for a continuous period of 14 days, the Contractor shall inform the Project
Manager that the preliminary treatment plants are ready for process testing.
Biological and Secondary Treatment
6.4.3.1 Biological Aeration Tank (AT)
A. The following tests on theAT shall be carried out before the start of the of the process
tests when the Works shall be tested to demonstrated compliance with the
Specification. The treatment works shall be operating under normal conditions with
whatever flows and loads that are being received at the time.
6.4.3.2 Aeration system
A. The aeration system shall be tested for its oxygenation capacity (oxygen transfer and
efficiency measurement test). A total of 3 tests shall be conducted to confirm the
oxygen transfer rate and efficiency of the aeration system.
B. A detailed method statement for carrying out this test shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Project Manager for approval before commencement of this test.
The aeration test shall be carried out on AT aeration zone..
C. The aeration system shall be able to deliver the peak oxygen demand and achieve
specified turndown. Failure to be able to supply the oxygenation capacity or specified
turndown shall be deemed a failure of the test.
D. The aeration system shall also be tested for efficiency and aeration pattern. Failure
to achieve the rated design efficiency or to demonstrate a uniform aeration pattern (if
diffused aeration is used) shall be deemed a failure of the test.
E. During the establishment of normal biological conditions in the AT, and following wet
commissioning tests, the plant shall be run to demonstrate that the correct control
systems are in operation under all operating conditions. A minimum of 14 days
continuous operation of the plant shall be demonstrated before commencement of
the process test.
F. During the trial operation period, one daily flow weighted 24 hour composite sample
for the feed flow to the AT and the tank effluent shall be taken and tested by the
Contractor.
G. The samples shall be analysed for BOD, COD, TSS, NH3, pH and alkalinity. 24 hour
flow proportional composite samples shall consist as a minimum of one hourly spot
samples mixed by volume in proportion to the flow in that hour to the total flow over
the 24 hours period. The 24 hour period shall be one calendar day.
H. When the AT is in continuous and stable operation and the Contractor judges that
normal biological conditions have been established, the Contractor shall take 4 spot
samples at 6 hour intervals on each of 2 consecutive days of the MLSS and from the
discharge of the AT to demonstrate that it is achieving the design performance
requirements and the Final Effluent Discharge Standards. The spot samples shall be
analysed for MLSS, SSVI, BOD, TSS and NH3. Should the compliance fail on any
one of the tested parameters, the 2 day spot sampling exercise shall be repeated for
the failed parameter(s) and the results resubmitted to the Project Manager for
acceptance.
I. On acceptance by the Project Manager in writing that the preliminary tests indicate
the AT is achieving a compliant effluent, the process test period shall commence.
Sludge Treatment
A. Operation for the sludge treatment processes shall commence when the sludge has
built up in the Biological Reactor to the extent that sludge wastage is required and
there is a sufficient quantity of secondary streams of sludge to be thickened. This will
have commenced before Precommissioning.
6.4.4.1 Sludge thickening
A. Once there is enough secondary sludge generated to allow a sustained operation of
the thickeners, a 7 days operation trial shall be carried out to demonstrate a
consistent and stable operation of the thickeners. Given that the full loads to the
works will not be received, the continuous operating period may be for a shorter
duration on each day during the 7 day operation trial to demonstrate sustained
operation at the design flows.
B. The thickened sludge shall be sampled daily during the trial period to demonstrate
that dry solids content solids capture and the polymer consumption (if any) are as per
the Contract requirement.
C. Following a successful trial of 7 days, the Contractor shall inform the Project Manager
of his readiness to carry out the process tests for the thickeners.
6.4.4.2 Sludge dewatering
A. Once there is enough thickened sludge captured in the thickened sludge storage
tank, a continuous 7 days operation trial shall be carried out to demonstrate a
consistent and stable operation of the dewaterer.
B. The polymer dosing plant and usage for the dewatering process shall also be tested
at the same time as the dewaterer.
C. The dewatered sludge shall be sampled daily during the trial period to demonstrate
that the dry solids content, solids capture rate and polymer consumption are as per
the Contract requirements.
D. Following a success trial of 7 days, the Contractor shall inform the Project Manager
of his readiness to carry out the process tests for the dewaterer.
6.5 Process Test
A. The Process test is intended to demonstrate stable performance of the entire WWTP
over a 28 day test period at the design hydraulic and treatment capacity of the
WWTP. As the full flows will not be available, the process tests shall take place using
part of the Stage 1 ADF through a portion of the main treatment processes to
demonstrate performance. The Project Manager shall select one of the constructed
AT tanks, and one of thickeners that will be used throughout the process testing and
inform the Contractor of their selection 7 days prior to the commencement of the
process test. The Contractor shall ensure that the flow to the tested portion of the
Works is maintained and controlled to simulate the equivalent of the full Stage 1 ADF
and Peak Flows equivalent with one process out of service for the duration of the test
period. Any excess flows can be diverted to alternative treatment in line with the
Contractors original commissioning plan for initial flows to the WWTP.
B. The process test on this portion of the WWTP shall comprise of: -
6.5.1.1 Screens
A. Test shall be conducted during the test period:
1. Screenings capture rate from the sewage flow shall not fall below the threshold
stipulated in the Contract.
2. The moisture content of the screenings shall not exceed the required moisture
content. The size of one sample shall be at least 250 ml.
A. One sample shall be taken and analysed for each day during morning peak flow into
the works for each of the above parameters and failure to achieve the above shall
constitute a failure of the test.
6.5.1.2 Grit removal plant
A. The following tests shall be conducted during the test period:
1. One 100 ml spot sample of thickened sludge shall be taken each day and
ashed at 550 °C and the ash passed through a 200 micron sieve. Any particles
retained with a Specific Gravity greater than 2.5 shall constitute a failure of the
grit plant.
B. One sample shall be taken and analysed for each day during morning peak flow into
the works for each of the above parameters and failure to achieve the above shall
constitute a failure of the test.
Secondary Treatment Processes
6.5.2.1 Biological Aeration Tank (AT)
A. During the test period the Contractor shall record the flows being treated by all
treatment and return streams.
B. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the AT can meet the requirements of the
Contract to treat the flows and the loads to the prescribed Final Effluent Discharge
Standards.
C. The Contractor shall sample raw sewage influent, the return flows and the final
effluent discharged from the secondary treatment works and analyse for BOD, TSS,
NH3 by taking:
1. One 24 hour composite flow weighted sample of the pumped raw sewage
inflow to the headworks each day during the process testing period,
2. One 24 hour composite flow weighted sample of the return flow from the liquor
return pumping station to the headworks each day during the process testing
period,
3. One 24 hour composite flow weighted sample of the AT effluent each day
during the process testing period,
4. Two number of spot samples per day shall also be taken at the above locations
at times to be agreed with the Project Manager.
D. In addition to the above parameters each of these samples shall be analysed for pH
and alkalinity.
E. Duplicate samples taken by the Contractor and shall be handed over to the Project
Manager for analysis by the Employer. The Employer will provide duplicate copies of
his test results to the Contractor.
F. The AT shall be judged against the 95 %ile effluent quality limit as detailed in the
Particular Specification. The effluent from the chosen AT in operation for when all AT
lanes are in operation and when one lane is taken of service at full flow to treatment.
6.5.2.2 Aeration System Control
A. During the period of the ASP testing, the aeration system shall be tested to
demonstrate that it is capable of stable operation against a range of dissolved oxygen
(DO) set-points under normal flows and loads. Failure of the aeration system to
maintain a stable DO value within ±0.1 mg/l of the specified value at any time during
the process testing period shall be deemed a failure of the test.
Sludge Treatment
A. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the sludge thickening, and the sludge
dewatering meets the specified requirements during the process testing period.
6.5.3.1 Sludge Thickener
A. The Contractor shall sample the sludge, by taking:
1. 3 spot samples of unthickened sludge, taken at two hour intervals each day
during the process testing period.
2. 3 spot samples of thickened sludge from the picket fence thickener (PFT),
taken at two hour intervals each day during the process test period.
3. Each time a thickened sludge sample is taken from the picket fence thickener,
a filtrate sample shall also be taken.
B. Each of the unthickened and thickened sludge samples collected shall be analysed
for percentage dry solids. Filtrate and centrate samples collected from the PFT
thickener shall each be analysed separately for BOD, TSS and NH3.
C. The Sludge Thickeners shall be evaluated based on the following over the test period:
1. Feed sludge throughput
2. % dry solids of thickened sludge achieved

3. Solids capture rate
D. More than 3 number sample failures for each item of each sludge stream (thickened
sludge dry solids, solids capture rate) shall be deemed a failure of the test.
6.5.3.2 Thickened sludge dewaterer
A. The Contractor shall sample the sludge, by taking:
1. 3 spot samples of the dewaterer feed, taken at two hour intervals each day
during the process testing period.
2. 3 spot samples of the dewatered sludge cake, taken at two hour intervals each
day during the process testing period.
3. 3 spot samples of the dewatering belt press filtrate, taken at two hourly intervals
each day during the process testing period.
B. The dewaterer feed sludge and the dewatered sludge samples shall be analysed for
percentage dry solids.
C. The amount of polymer used shall also be quantified and kg of polymer used per
tonnes of sludge dry solids processed and shall be compliant with the Contract
requirements. The centrate samples shall be analysed for BOD, TSS and NH3.
D. The thickened sludge dewaterer shall be evaluated based on the following over the
process test period:
1. Feed sludge throughput
2. % dry solids of dewatered sludge achieved
3. Polymer dose rate and consumption for thickened sludge dewatering
4. Solids capture rate
E. More the 3 number sample failures for each item (dewatered sludge dry solids, solids
capture rate or polymer consumption) during the process testing period shall be
deemed a failure of the test.
6.5.3.3 Polymer preparation and dosing plants
A. All polymer dosing plants shall be tested to demonstrate that they can deliver their
required polymer concentrations at the required flow rates in accordance with the
Contractor’s design.
Failure of Process Tests
A. The failure of every section of the Works plant and equipment to operate correctly
and failure to achieve the preliminary effluent, final effluent, sludge thickening, sludge
dewatering quality parameters as stipulated in this Contract shall be deemed a failure
of the process test of that area of the works.
B. If additional maintenance or operational input is required above the levels stated in
the O&M manuals during the test periods, this shall be deemed a failure of the
Process Test.
C. If the malfunction of the duty plant and equipment brings into use the standby plant
and equipment, this shall not be deemed a failure. However, a repeat malfunction
shall be deemed a failure of the reliability test.
D. In the case of a failure of the reliability test, the plant shall be fully adjusted or repaired
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and the test shall be restarted thereafter.
On restart, the test shall run for the full test period stipulated in the Contract.
6.6 Provision of Consumables During Precommissioning

A. The costs of the sampling and analysis during the process testing period shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility. The Contractor shall supply all on-site consumables,
including polymer and chemicals required to operate the plants and equipment of the
Works for Precommissioning. Where 24 hour composite samples are required, these
shall be preserved during storage in collection and during courier to the laboratory
under 4°C. Samplers and samples courier services shall be provided by the
Contractor.
Provision of Sewage
A. Sewage shall be delivered to the treatment works by the newly installed or
rehabilitated sewerage network system.
Provision of Seed Surplus Activated Sludge (SAS)
A. SAS will not be available for seeding the AT during its process commissioning. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the build-up of the AT biomass from the start of
the commissioning exercise. How he intends to do this shall be clearly detailed in his
commissioning strategy prior to commencing the commissioning of the AT.
Disposal of Waste Activated Sludge Was and Thickener Overflow During
Process Commissioning
A. The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient sludge treatment capacity is operational
when surplus sludge starts to be generated from the works, and that the return liquors
can be returned to the inlet works for treatment.
Power/Electricity and Temporary Pipework& Connection
A. The cost of providing electricity for the testing and commissioning of the works prior
Completion shall be met in full by the Contractor. Where temporary pumps, pipework
or storage is required during testing and commissioning of any part or parts of the
Works, this shall also be provided and paid for by the Contractor.
6.7 Report On Precommissioning
A. The Works shall not be taken over until:
1. All Precommissioning have been satisfactorily completed.
2. The safety inspection has been satisfactorily completed.
3. All training has been completed to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
4. Final operation and maintenance (O&M) manuals and as-built drawings have
been accepted.
5. All plants and equipment spares have been handed over to the Project
Manager.
6. Training records of Employer’s personnel has been handed to the Project
Manager
B. Upon the above being satisfactory, the Project Manager shall issue a Completion
Certificate to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract.
6.8 Commissioning (Including Guarantee Tests)
General
A. Commissioning for the WWTP shall be carried out by the Contractor and shall run for
the 26 weeks of the performance test period under normal works operation (average
and peak flow conditions), as soon as reasonably practicable following the issuance
of the Completion of the Works. At the end of the 26 weeks, Commissioning for the
WWTP shall be carried out by the Employer’s Staff under the full supervision of the
Contractor’s staff as stated in clause 1.8 of the technical Specification and shall run
for another 26 weeks of the performance test period under normal works operation
(average and peak flow conditions). The Commissioning will be carried out by
suitably trained and experienced Staff in accordance with the O&M manuals provided
by the Contractor and such other remedial instructions as the Contractor may give in
the course of carrying out such tests. If such instructions conflict in any way with the
manuals, the Contractor shall issue them in writing in the form of an amendment to
the manuals.
B. The Contractor shall give at least 14 days notice of his readiness to carry out the
Commissioning, including a proposal for the time at which the tests should
commence. The Employer acknowledges at most 7 days before the proposed time
by the Contractor, that he will monitor the tests.
6.9 Commissioning Area
A. The following performance parameters are to be tested:
1. Screenings capture rate, moisture content, and residual content of faecal
matter.
2. Grit particles capture rate, moisture content, and residual organic matter
content.
3. Secondary treatment (AT) effluent quality.
4. Secondary sludge (SAS) thickening in terms of % DS of the thickened sludge
and solids capture rate.
5. Energy consumption in the operation of major mechanical process plants and
equipment.
6. Chemical utilisation and their cost calculation of chemicals including polymer
for dewatering thickened sludge.
6.10 Weekly Sampling and Testing of The Liquid Streams
A. Each week, samples will be taken and analysed on a one day per week basis to
determine the following parameters:
1. Capture rate of the screens
2. Screenings moisture content
3. Capture of the grit
4. Processed grit moisture content
5. % of organic matter with the processed grit.
B. The day of the week (Saturday to Friday) for the composite sample will be randomly
distributed over the week during Commissioning.
Sequential Batch Reactor / Aerationtank
A. Each week - One daily 24-hour flow weighted composite sample will be taken at the
locations stated below and tested for BOD, TSS and NH3.
B. Composite samples will be taken at two locations: -
1. Inlet to the AT (Grit Chamber’s effluent)
2. Outlet from the AT (Decanter Effluent).

C. All samples shall be flow weighted 24 hours composite samples.
D. Duplicate samples taken by the Contractor will be made available to the Employer.
The Contractor will provide copies of his test results to the Employer when available.
Should the Employer wish to dispute the results of the Contractor’s analysis, this shall
be done in writing, clearly stating the reason for the dispute, within 5 calender days
of his receipt of the test results.
E. Three spot samples (equally spaced in the day) will also be taken from the above
sample locations and analysed for BOD, TSS and NH3.
F. The following samples/data/analysis flow will also be taken or carried out:
1. MLSS
2. dissolved oxygen level in the aeration lane
3. Waste sludge flow rate and concentration
6.11 Intensive Testing Period of The Liquid Streams
A. Two, 7 days intensive sampling and analysis periods will be carried out by the
Contractor with sampling and testing for the parameters stated in Clauses 6.9 and
6.10 above. One of the 7-day intensive sampling periods shall be carried out under
rainy season conditions and the second under dry season conditions. The Employer
will be informed one week in advance of the start of the intensive testing periods by
the Contractor.
B. Duplicate samples taken by the Contractor will be made available to the Employer.
The Contractor will provide copies of his test results to the Employer when available.
Should the Employer wish to dispute the results of the Contractor’s analysis, this shall
be done in writing, clearly stating the reason for the dispute, within 5 calendar days
of his receipt of the test results.
C. The works shall be deemed to have passed the intensive sampling performance test
if for that test period no sample test from the (various plants) exceeds the permitted
values in the Contract.
6.12 Failure of Guarantee Tests
A. If the effluent quality of the AT fails to meet the required standard. The Contractor
shall modify the Works as necessary to improve the performance of the works. The
Contractor shall advise the Project Manager when the Works is ready for retesting.
Retesting of the Works shall be for a full 26 weeks test period. The Operational
Acceptance Certificate will only be given once all tests are completed as per the
Conditions of the Contract.
B. The Contractor will be at liberty to abort the weekly testing of the final effluent at any
time and modify the Works as necessary. The weekly performance test shall then be
restarted when the Contractor advises the Project Manager the Works is ready for
retesting. Retesting will continue for a 26 week period.
C. If any item of the Works fails, the Contractor shall modify the Works and the test will
be restarted in full for the failed item of plant. The Operational Acceptance Certificate
will only be given once all tests are completed as per the Contract requirements.
6.13 Performance Testing of The Solids Streams
Sludge Thickening and Dewatering
A. On a daily basis, the Contractor will take spot samples of the following: -
1. Raw (unthickened) waste activated sludge feed to the thickener,

2. Thickened WAS sludge
3. Dewatered sludge cake
4. Solids in the discharge supernatant/centrate of the thickening and dewatering
plants.
B. These will be tested for dry solids concentration and recorded by the Contractor.
Records will be issued to the Employer on fortnightly basis. The Employer will also
be given access to these records at any time during the testing period.
C. The Contractor shall attend site at any time during the testing period to modify the
control or operation of the Works.
1. The picket fence thickener performance will be assessed against the minimum
requirement of the discharge thickened sludge having 3% dry solids (DS) and
95% solids capture.
2. The dewaterering belt press performance will be assessed against the
minimum requirement of the discharge sludge cake having 22% dry solids (DS)
and 95% solids capture whilst using a maximum of 9 kg polymer / tonne DS..
D. The thickening and dewatering operation shall be considered as having passed the
performance test if the number of test failures for each of the thickening and solids
capture test is equal to or less than the number of permitted failures given in Column
2 of the table below.
Column 1 Column 2
Series of samples taken in any one year Maximum permitted number of samples which
fail to conform to numerical limits
4-7 1
8-16 2
17-28 3
29-40 4
41-53 5
54-67 6
68-81 7
82-95 8
96-110 9
111-125 10
E. If the thickening and/or dewatering operations fail the tests, the Contractor shall
consult and agree with the Employer the modifications to the operation that should
be undertaken prior to being retested by the Contractor.
F. All equipment associated with sludge treatment processes must be operated in

accordance with the relevant operation and maintenance instructions to demonstrate
that their performance meets the Contract Requirements.
G. Results of the tests and any malfunction of any of the plants and equipment
associated with the sludge thickening and dewatering process will be reported to the
Contractor, who shall investigate the problem and make necessary adjustments to
the plant.
7 DATA SHEETS & GUARANTEE TABLES
7.1 Mechanical Screens

Make …………………………………………………….……
Type …………………………………………………………..
Origin ………………………………………………………………….……………
Spacing …………………………………………………………………………………
Bar dimensions …………………………………………………………………………
7.2 Screens Cleaning Mechanism

Make ……………………………………………….…………
Type …………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………………
Power of motor at site (KW) ……………………………………..…………………
Power factor …………………………………………………………
Speed (r.p.m.) ……………………………………………….…………
Voltage (volt) ………………………………………………..…………
Number of phases ………………………………………………..…………
Frequency (cycle/sec) ………………………………………………..…………………
Temperature rise of windings and core ………………………………………………
Material and class of insulation …………………………………………………………
Type of bearings …………………………………………………………….…………
Starter
Make………………………………………………….………….……………………
Type…………………………………………….……………………………………
Origin…………………………………………….……………….……………………
Method of starting ………………………………….……………………
Rated current (amps) ……………………………………….…..…………
Maximum current (amps) …………………………….………….….…………
Rated voltage (volts) ……………………………….……….….…………
Number of starting per hour it can afford ………..………………………………
7.3 Belt Conveyor
Make ……………………………………………………….…
Type ………………………………………………………..…
Origin ………………………………………………………….
Dimensions of Belt
Length (m) ………………………………………………………….
Width (m) ……………………………………………………….…
Material of Belt ……………………………………………………….………………
7.4 Belt Conveyor Motor
Make …………………………………………………………….……
Type …………………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………………….…………
Power at Site (B.H.P.) ……………………………………………
Speed (r.p.m.) ………………………………………………
Voltage between Terminals (Volt) ……………………………………………………
Efficiency of Motor at Full Load ………………………………………………
Power Factor at Working Load ………………………………………………
Number of Phases …………………………………………
Frequency (cycle/second) ……………………………………………………
Temperature Rise above Ambient Temperature………………………………………
7.5 Grit Removal Equipment
Cleaning Mechanism
Make …………………………………………………………….………………
Type ……………………………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………………….………………
Type of Scraper ….…………………………………………………………………
7.6 Motors for Each Type of Motor
Motors
Make………………………………………………………………………………………
Type / Model ……………………………………………………………………………
Origin…………………………………………………………….………………………
Normal rated output at site conditions (KW) …………………………………………
Speed at full load (r.p.m)……………………………………………….. ………………
Voltage between terminals (volts)………..……………………………… ……………
Frequency (cycle/sec.) ………………………………………………..…………

Number of phases ………………………………………………..…………
Starting current (amp.) ………………………………………………..…………
Current at normal output of pump (amp.)……………………………… ………………
Efficiency of motor at full load …………………………………………….……………
Power factor at fu11 load………………………………………………..………………
Temperature rise of windings and core (°C)……………………………… …………
Class of insulation ……………………………………………………..……
Type of enclosure………………………………………………………………………
Type of bearings…………………………………………………………………………
Starters
Make …………………………………………………….……
Type / Model …………………………………………………………
Origin ……………………………………………………….…
Rating of starter …………………………………………………………….……………
Kind of relay fitted to the starter …………………………………………… …………
No. of starts can afford per hour ………………………………………...… …………
No. of starts can afford per hour ………………………………………...……………
7.7 Pumping Units (for Each Type of Pumps)
 Pumps
Pumping Units
Make …………………………………………………………
Type / Model ………………………………………………………….
Origin ……………………………………………………….…
Discharge at duty point (lit/sec) …………………………………………….…………
Manometric head at duty point (m) ………………………………………….…………
Efficiency of pump at duty point (%) ……………………………………….…………
Power absorbed by pump at duty point (B.H.P.) ……………………………………
Maximum power absorbed by pump (B.H.P.) …………………………………………
Net positive suction head at the duty point (m) …………………………….…………
Casing material ……………………………………………………….…
Impeller material …………………………………………………………….…………
Shaft material ……………………………………………………….
Wearing rings material ………………………………………………..………………
Type, number and material of bearings ………………………………………………
Method of lubrication …………………….……………………………………

Type and material of seal ………………………………………………..…………
Diameter of delivery nozzle (mm) …………………………………………..…………
Motor
Make ……………………………………………………….
Type / Model ………………………………………………………….
Origin ………………………………………………………….
Normal rated output at site conditions (KW) ………………………………………
Speed at full load (r.p.m.) ………………………………………………..…………
Voltage between terminals (volts) ………………………………………………
Frequency (cycle/sec.) ………………………………………………..………………
Number of phases ………………………………………………..………………
Starting current (amp.) ………………………………………………..…………………
Current at normal output of unit (amp.) ………………………………………………
Efficiency of motor at full load ………………………………………….. ………………
Power factor at full load ………………………………………………..………………
Temperature rise of windings and core (°C) …………………………………………
Class of insulation ………………………………………………..………………
Type of enclosure ………………………………………………..………………
Starters
Make ……………………………………………………….…
Type / Model…………………………………………………………….………………
Origin ………………………………………………………….
Rating of starter……………………………………………………………….…………
Kind of relay fitted to the starter
No. of starts can afford per hour ……………………………………………………
7.8 Pipes and Fittings
 Pipes
Water Pipes /Air Pipes
Make …………………………………………………………….………………
Type ……………………………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………………….………………
Wall thickness (mm)
Working pressure (kg/cm2)
Test pressure (kg/cm2)
Type of joints ….………………………………………………………………………
Coating & lining material ….…………………………………………………………
Flange bolts & nuts materials………………………………………………………
Flanges drilling ….……………………………………………………………………
Weight per one meter length ………………………………………..………………
Flexible Coupling
Make ………………………………………………….………
Type …………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………….……
Material …………………………………………………………….……………………
Working pressure (kg/cm2)………………………………………….. ………………
Test pressure (kg/cm2) ….………………………………………………………
Coating …………………………………………………………
Lining ……………………………………………….…………
7.9 Dismantling Pieces and Flange Adaptors
Water Pipes /Air Pipes
Make ……………………………………………….…………
Type …………………………………………………………
Origin …………………………………………………….……
Material …………………………………………………………….……………………
Working pressure ……………………………………………..…………………………
Test pressure ….……………………………………….………………………………

Flange thickness (mm) ….…………………………………………….………………
Flanges drilling and No. of bolts …………………………………………...…………
Bolts and nuts materials ….…………………………………………….………………
Coating material ….………………………………………………………………………
Weight (kg) …………………………………………………………….……………
7.10 Valves, Gates and Actuators

Butterfly Valves
Make ………………………………………………….………
Type / Model ………………………………………………….………
Origin ……………………………………………………..……
Material of valve body & flap …………………………………………….……………
Material of shaft …………………………………………………………………………
Material of seating ……………………………………………………….………………
Material of shaft seal & package…………………………………………….…………
Working pressure (kg/cm)…………………………………………... …………………
Test Pressure:
Valve opened (kg/cm2) ……………………………………….……………………
Valve closed (kg/cm2) …………………………………………….……………………
Power of motor (kW) …………………………………………...………………
Type of gearbox & reduction ratio …………………………………...………………
Coating and lining materials …………………………………………...………………
Flange thickness ………………………………………………………….……………
Flange drilling…………………………………………………………….………………
Flange bolts and nuts materials………………………………………...………………
Sluice Valves
Make ………………………………………………….………
Type / Model …………………………………………………….……
Origin……………………………………………………………..………………………
Material of valve body & bonnet ………………………………………………………
Material of disc ……………………………………………………….…
Material of facing ………………………………………………………………………

Material of stem …………………………………………………………
Material of stem seal……………………………………………………………………
Material of gland ……………………………………………………….………………
Method of operation …………………………………………………….……
Working pressure (kg/cm2) ………………………………………...………………
Test Pressure:
Valve opened (kg/cm2) …………………………………………….……………

Valve closed (kg/cm2) …………………………………………….…………………
Type of gearbox & reduction ratio …………………………………...………………
Flange thickness …………………………………………………….…………………
Flange drilling …………………………………………………………….……………
Flange bolts and nuts materials…………………………………………..…………
Coating and Lining Materials……………………………………………..……………
Non Return Valves

Make ………………………………………………….………
Type / Model ……………………………………………………….…
Origin ………………………………………………………..…
Material of valve body & door …………………………………………………………
Material of door sealing face………………………………………….………………
Material of door hinged pins………………………………………….………………
Working pressure (kg/cm2)…………………………………………. ………………
Method of slam prevention …………………………………………….………………
Flange thickness (mm) …………………………………………….………………
Flange drilling …………………………………………………………….………………
Flange bolts and nuts material …………………………………………………………
Coating and lining materials …………………………………………….……………
Air Valves
Make ………………………………………………………….
Type / Model ……………………………………………………….…
Origin ………………………………………………………..…
Material of float chamber, flange and cover ………………………….………………
Material of floats …………………………………………………………………………
Material of orifice, guide and mechanisms ………………………….………………

Material of sealing rings …………………………………………….……………
Working pressure (kg/cm2) …………………………………………….……………
Test pressure (kg/cm2) …………………………………………….……………
Sluice Gates (Penstocks)
Make ……………………………………………………….…
Type / Model………………………………………………………….…………………
Origin ……………………………………………………..……
Material of gate and frame…………………………………………….…..……………
Material of frame and gate facing ………………………………….…………………
Material of spindle and thrust nut ……………………………………….……………
Material of sliding wear sealing ………………………………………….……………
Method of operation………………………………………….…………………………
Direction of operation ……………………………………….…………………………
Working pressure (kg/cm2)……………………………………………..… ……………
Test pressure (kg/cm2)……………………………….…………… ……………………
Valves and Gates Electric Actuators
Make ………………………………………………….………
Type …………………………………………………….…
Origin ………………………………………………………..…
Power of motor at site (kW) ………………………………………….………………
Voltage between terminals (Volts) ……………………………………….……………
No. of phases …………………………………………………………..
Frequency (cycle/sec.)……………………………………….………………… ………
Class of insulation………………………………………….……………………………
Type of enclosure………………………………………….……………………………
Power of gearbox & reduction ratio …………………………………….……………
7.11 Measuring Equipment

Flow Meters
Make ………………………………………………….………
Type ………………………………………………….………
Origin ………………………………………………………..…
Velocity range (m/sec.) …………………………………………….…..………………
Metering tube material…………………………………………….…..………………
Lining material ……………………………………………………….…
Accuracy …………………………………………………………….……………………
Electrode material…………………………………………….…………………………
Operating temperature range (°C) …………………………………….………………
Voltage (Volt) ……………………………………………………….…
Frequency (Hz) ……………………………………………………….…
Output (mA) ……………………………………………………….…
Level Measuring Equipment
Make ……………………………………………………….…
Type ……………………………………………………….…
Origin ……………………………………………………………..……………………
Measuring range (m)…………………………………………….….. ………………
Maximum over range (m)…………………………………………….….. …………
Body material……………………………………………………………..………………
Sensor housing material…………………………………………….…..………………
Operating temperature range (°C) ………………………………….…………………
Ultra-Sonic Open Channel Flow Meter

Make …………………………………………………………….…………………
Type …………………………………………………………….…………………
Origin ……………………………………………………………..………………………
Measuring range (m) …………………………………………….…..…………………
Maximum over range (m) …………………………………………….…..……………
Body material ……………………………………………………………..……………
Sensor housing material …………………………………………….…..………………
Operating temperature range (°C) …………………………………….………………
7.12 Air Blower

Make …………………………………………………………….……………
Type / Model ……………………………………………………….…………
Origin…………………………………………………………….……………
Discharge (lit/sec) ……………………………………………….…………
Manometric head (m) ……………………………………………………….
Efficiency (%)……………………………………….…………………………
Power absorbed (B.H.P.)…………………………………………... ………
Maximum power (B.H.P.)……………………………. ……………………
Casing material…………………………………………………………….…
Impeller material …………………………………………………………….
Shaft material …………………………………………………………….……
Wearing rings material ………………………………………………..……
Type, number and material of bearings ……………………………………
Method of lubrication ………………………………………………..……
Type and material of seal ………………………………………………..……
Diameter of delivery nozzle (mm) ……………………………………..……
Accessories
Engines ……………………………………………………….…
Motors ……………………………………………………….…
Turbines ……………………………………………………………..…
Variable Frequency Drives ………………………………………………..…
Butterfly Valves ………………………………………………………….……
Check Valves …………………………………………………………….
Filters ………………………………………………..……………
Silencers …………………………………………...…………………
Expansion Joints …………………………………………………………….
Gauges ………………………………………………………………
Smart Meter ……………………………………………………………..

Blower control Panels ………………………………………………..

7.13 Diesel Generator

Set output (V/HZ …………………………………………………….………
◦
Prime at 45 C ambient (KVA) …………………………………………….…
◦
Standby at 45 C ambient (KVA) …………………………………….
Cylinders ……………………………………………….…
Aspiration and cooling ……………………………………………………….
Battery capacity (A/hr) …………………………………….……………
Engine output – prime (KW/m) ……………………………………….
Engine output – standby (KW/m) ……………………………….………
Speed (rpm) ………………………………………….………
Alternator voltage regulation (%) …………………………………….…
Alternator insulation class …………………………………………….……
Fuel consumption (Prime) 100% load (l/hr) ………………………….……
Fuel consumption (standby) 100% load (l/hr) ………………………
◦
Air Flow – Radiator (45 C) ambient (m3/s) P P …………………….…
Air intake – engine (m3/hr) ………………………………………
Total heat radiated to ambient (KW) ………………………………………

7.14 Belt Filter Dewatering

Bearing housings………………………………………………………….
Belt support grids………………………………………………………….
Belt washing housing……………………………………………………..
Belt wash spray tube and nozzles………………………………………
Belt wash piping…………………………………………………………...
Chincanes………………………………………………………………….
Chutes (feed and discharge) (if required)………………………………
Doctor blades ……………………………………………………………..
Drain trays ………………………………………………………………..
Drain tray piping ………………………………………………………….
Electrical junction box ……………………………………………………
Electrical conduit …………………………………………………………
Electrical switch enclosures …………………………………………….
Frame ……………………………………………………………………..
Hardware, fasteners ……………………………………………………..
Hydraulic cylinders ………………………………………………………
Polymer mixer housing ………………………………………………….
Counterweight ……………………………………………………………
Injection ring ……………………………………………………………..
Splitter manifold …………………………………………………………..
Rollers (solid) ……………………………………………………………..
Rollers (perforated) ………………………………………………………
Roller shafts ………………………………………………………………
Sludge containment barriers …………………………………………….

7.15 Guarantee Tables
Note: Bidders shall fill in similar tables of guarantee for every type and size
U U
of pumps.
Table No. 1 : Pumps
Make:-------------------
Type:
Liquid to be pumped:
Maximum diameter of solid that pump can pass ------------------------- mm
At Lower Head At Duty At Higher Head

Manometric Head in Meters
Range Point Range
Discharge L/sec
Speed of pump r.p.m
Horse power (metric) KW
Manometric efficiency of pump %
Power absorbed by pump in KW
Overall efficiency of unit percent =
U W.H.P.H x 0.836
Energy consumed in K.W.H / W.H.P.H
W.H.P.H = Water Horse power
K.W.H. = Kilo-watt hours of the pump
We guarantee the above performance of the pump we are offering at site condition.
Date -----/------/20
Bidder Signature
----------------------
Table No 2: Pumps Electric Motors
Motor to drive:
Terminal voltage at 3-phase and 50 cycles/sec.
Load (%) 125 110 100 85 60 25 0

Speed r.p.m
Power factor
Output in B.H.P
Efficiency %
Input in K.W measured on the switchboard
Current amps
Maximum temperature rise of any part of the
motor being run as specifications
We guarantee the above performance of the motors we are offering at site condition.
Date: -----/-----/20
Bidder Signature
------------------
Table No. 2: Pumps
Make: ------------------- Type: Dry
Liquid to be pumped:
Maximum diameter of solid that pump can pass ------------------------- mm
At Lower At Duty At Higher

Manometric Head in Meters
Head Range Point Head Range
Discharge L/sec
Speed of pump r.p.m
Horse power (metric) KW
Manometric efficiency of pump %
Power absorbed by pump in KW
B.H.P Metric
Overall efficiency of unit percent =
U W.H.P.H x 0.836
Energy consumed in K.W.H / W.H.P.H
We guarantee the above performance of the pump we are offering at site
condition. Date -----/------/20
Bidder Signature
----------------------
Table No. 2: Pumps Electric Motors
Motor to drive:
Terminal voltage at 3-phase and 50 cycles/sec.
Load (%) 125 110 100 85 60 25 0
Speed r.p.m
Power factor
Output in B.H.P
Efficiency %
Input in K.W measured on the switchboard
Current amps
Maximum temperature rise of any part of the
motor being run as specifications
We guarantee the above performance of the motors we are offering at site condition.
Date: -----/-----/20
Bidder Signature
------------------
Table No. 3 : Diesel Engine
Rated output in percent 110 100 85/75 50
Indicated horse power (metric)

Mechanical efficiency %
Brake horse power (prime power)
Revolution per minute
Mean effective pressure in kg/cm2 P
Fuel consumption in gr./B.H.P.H

Temperature of exhaust gases in C
Lubricating oil consumption in gm/engine hr.
Max. indicated pressure in kg/cm2 P
Power cylinder compression pressure in kg/cm2 P
Stroke/bore ratio
Percentage of turbo charging
We guarantee the above performance of the diesel engine we are offering.
The gross calorific value of the fuel oil being taken ------ cal/kg.
Date: -----/-----/20
Bidder Signature
------------------
Table No. 4: Alternator
Percentage Load 110 100 85 50

Output K.V.A at volts
Power factor
Efficiency percent
Output of alternator in K.W
Excite current in amperes
Excite output in K.W
Max. temperature rise in C over the ambient temperature of 45
°C
We guarantee the above performance of the diesel engine we are offering.
Date: -----/-----/20
Bidder Signature
------------------

‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٫١‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٣٧٧‬ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ‪ ٩-١‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.ASTM-D 1557‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳـــﻑ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻗﺭﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺳﻭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳـــﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻣﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻟﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣـﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻛﺎﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻰ‪ ..‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺧـــﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ )ﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ( ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻟﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺟﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻛﺻﺧﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺧﺫ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ×‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ×‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ×‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ×‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﺑـﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣـﺩ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘـﻝ ﺍﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓــﺔ ﻭ‪١٢٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺳــﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺷﻭﻑ )ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ( ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔـﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋــﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﻭﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻘﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mott MacDonald in association with‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺟــﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺳــﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺟﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺳﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺻﺧﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺻﻠﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺷﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺊ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺳﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺗﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺷﺎءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻯ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺑﻼﻍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺄﻥ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺧﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺫﻟـﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻧﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ – ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻛﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﺦ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻧﻘﻁ ﺍﻵﺑﺎﺭ )‪ (Well Points‬ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﻻ ﺗُﺯﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺄﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳـﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻓﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪ -‬ﻫﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺗﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻋﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺭﻭﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ )ﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺩﻡ ( ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺄﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻻﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻣﻙ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻙ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻗﺻﺔ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧــﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗــﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﻼء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﻼﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﺭﻫﺎ ﻹﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺟﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪,‬ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ‪,‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺫﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺫﻭﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺇﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﺧﻼء ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎءﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﺫﻛﺭﺓ ﺧﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳــﻁﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻯ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٠٫٣‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺟﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺫﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺟﺯﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٨٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺟﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺟﺗﺛﺎﺛﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻣﻖ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻲ ‪٥٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺩﻛﻬﺎ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺳﺗﻔﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺷﻁ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻛﺷﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻳﻛﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﻳﻥ ﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺑﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠+‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ( ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﻁﺑﻳﻌﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻘﺭﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺎ ﺑﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ) ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪٢‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪(١‬ﻭﺃﻱ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ – ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ – ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺑﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﻼءﺓ ﺑﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ) ‪١٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪/‬ﻡ‪ (٣‬ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺷﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺷﻁﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺻﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺿﺧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﻏﻣﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻧﺷﺎءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻣﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺑﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻛﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺻﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻵﻻﺕ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺟﻳﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺟﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ‪. .‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻖ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻬﺑﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺯﻟﻖ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﺩ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪٦٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻸﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪٤٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺎ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ‪٧٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻭﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺣﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻻﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑـ)‪ (٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﻭﺗﺩﻙ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﺣﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺯﻻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺕ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺄﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺧﺎء ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺧﺎء ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺄﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳـﻧﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻔــﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺳﻧﺩ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺯﻻﻕ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺑﻭﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﻯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻷﻯ ﺳﺑﺏ ‪ -‬ﺇﻧﻬﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻌﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺗﺿﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻫﻧﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋــﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﻯ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺿﻁﺭﺍﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﻫﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﻳﺊ ﻻﺻﻠﻪ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﺧﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﻁﺎﺭﻩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ‪ ،‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻁﻠﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺿﻰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻛﺷﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻁﻔﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻳﺿﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻛﺷﻭﻓﺔ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﺩﻡ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳــﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔــﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻭﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺭﺗﻛﺎﺯﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻠﻘﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺻﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻰ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻛﻰ ﻳﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺃﻯ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻠﻘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧـﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧـﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻋﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﻌﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻓﺣﺻﻪ ﻭﺗﻔﺗﻳﺷﻪ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻣـﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻣﻭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺭﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﻘﺑﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻰ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ‪Concrete Blinding‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ‪ ,‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﺣﻼﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ ٢٥/٢٥‬ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٧٥‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻭﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔـﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﻯ ﺇﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﺗﻣﺷﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ )ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺹ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ( ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺗﺔ ﻭﺃﻯ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗــﻊ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ -‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪ -‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ )ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ( ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ )ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ( ﻭﻓﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺗﻳﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺅﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﻳﺭ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻅﻝ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﻭﺗﺳﻭﻯ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻯ ﺇﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﺍﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗــﻭﻯ ﻣــﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺫﻭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻳﻘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺫﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺭﻉ ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻧﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﺏ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻔﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺭﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻥ‪٤٠:٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﺋﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻭﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺃ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻣﻭﺣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ‪) :‬ﺍﻻﺣﻼﻝ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺣﻼﻝ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ – ﻭﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ – ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫– ﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ – ﻛﻭﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ – ٢٠٣‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ – ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪.٢٠٠٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪٢٠٠٦/١-٤٧٥٦ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪٢٠٠٥/٥٨٣ .‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﺍﻳﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٦/٣٠٧١ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٦/٣٠٧٢.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻰ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٤/٤٧٤ .‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪..‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩١/١٩٤٧ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٣/٢٤٢١ .‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ )‪ ٩‬ﺃﺟﺯﺍء(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٢/٢١٤٩ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪٢٠٠٢/١١٠٩ .‬‬
‫– ﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٠/١٨٩٩ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻁﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪٢٠٠٠/٢٦٢ .‬‬
‫– ﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻙ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٩٠/١٦١٨ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪٢٠٠١/٧٦ .‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻁﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٦٥٨ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٨٨/١٦٥٨ .‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٨٩/١٦٥٨ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٨٩/١٦٥٨ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺙ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ‫ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ‪١٩٨٩/١٦٥٨ .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ١٩٩١/١٦٥٨ .‫ﻡ‬.‫ﻕ‬.‫ﻡ‬

.‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬ ١٩٩٣/١٦٥٨ .‫ﻡ‬.‫ﻕ‬.‫ﻡ‬
.‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺑﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬ -
. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) : ‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
:‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬
BS 12 Specification for ordinary and rapid hardening Portland

Cement.
BS 812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand

and fillers.
BS 340 Concrete kerbs
BS 368 Concrete flags
BS 882 Aggregates from natural sources for concrete
BS 1377 Sulphate in aggregates
BS 1881 Methods of testing concrete
BS 2028 Concrete blocks
BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland Cement
BS 5075 Concrete admixtures
BS 3148 Water in concrete mixes
ASTM-C 39 Standard method of test for compressive strength of molded

concrete cylinder
ASTM-C 94 Ready mixed concrete designation
ASTM-C 143 Standard method of slump test for consistency of Portland

Cement concrete
ASTM-C 260 Air entrained admixtures
ASTM-C 289 Standard test method for potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of

aggregates
ASTM-C 618 Fly ash and raw or calcined natural pozzolans for use as
mineral admixture
ASTM-D 512 Chloride iron in mixing water
ASTM-D 516 Sulphate in mixing water

‫‪ASTM-D 1411‬‬ ‫‪Chloride in aggregates‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺷﺭﺡ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﻳﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ – ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﻐﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ – ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺅﻛﺩ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ -‬ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺯﻧﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ,‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﺅﻛﺩ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻏﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺎ ً ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻣﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﺟﻼﺕ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺳﺟﻝ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻭﻗﺗﻪ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪ -‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ – ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭﺍ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻭﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧـﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺩﺍﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺷﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳـﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻻﺧﺭ ﺍﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻻﺧﺭ ﺍﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳـﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷـﺂﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧـﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻣﻊ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺎ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺗﻪ ﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻪ ﺷﻙ ﻛﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯﺋﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗـﻪ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺃﻯ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗـﻊ ﺃﺭﺑﻌـﻳﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺷـﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺗﻪ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳــﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻓﻭﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻭﺍﻣﻊ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺧﺻﻳﺻﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻛﻳﺎﺱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺧﺎﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ‪٥٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺧﺎﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻘﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻭﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ١١٠٨‬ﻟﺳﻧﻪ‪. ١٩٧١‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺻﺣﺭﺍﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺗﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﻳﺭﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﻭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻣﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺫﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺣﺿﺎﺭ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﺃﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻏﺳﻠﻪ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ‪ ,‬ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺧﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻭ ﻳﺻﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻋﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ,‬ﻳﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻔﻝ ﻭ ﻓﻭﻗﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ % ٦‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻭﻋﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ ً ﻭﻣﻐﺳﻭﻻً ﻭﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ )‪. (١٩٧١/١١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﺭ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Shape‬‬ ‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪Surface Texture‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Silt Content‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻣﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Grading Curves‬‬ ‫ﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓــﺔ ‪Specific Gravity‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺇﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ‪Water Absorption‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Impact Value‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻــﻼﺩﺓ ‪Soundness‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Salt Content‬‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪Alkali Reactivity‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺎ ً ﻟﻺﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑــﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻺﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪BS‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٢٬٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٢٬٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪. 812‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً‬ ‫‪Soundness‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺻﻼﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪) ASTM-C 88‬ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪%١٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪%١٠‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺩﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪%١٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪%١٥‬‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺳﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ‪Salt Contents‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٠٬٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٠٬٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺋﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ‪SO 3‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ‪ %٠٬٠٤‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ‪ %٠٬٠٦‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪ -‬ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺋﺑﺔ ﻣﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ )‪(CI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗـﺩﺭﺝ ‪Grading‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %١‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٣‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ‪BS 200‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪Aggregate‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٢٠‬ﻟﻠﺯﻟﻁ‬
‫‪ Impact Value‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ‪BS‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ %٣٠‬ﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ‬
‫‪812‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺗﺭﻭﺟﺭﺍﻓﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ )‪ (ASTM - C 295‬ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻯ ﻁﺑﻘـﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ASTM‬‬
‫‪.( C 289‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﺍﺑﺔ ﻳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ‪ ١٧-٣-٢‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷــﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﻔﻅ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻛﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺏ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻩ ‪ -‬ﻓﻰ ﺭﺃﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪ -‬ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳــــﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧـﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣــﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿــﺎﻓﺔ )‪(Admixtures‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻟﺳﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﺢ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﺩﻯ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺹ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻓﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻣﺣﺑﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣـﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓـﺔ ﺇﻟـﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳـﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻡ‪.‬ﻕ‪.‬ﻡ ‪.١٩٩٠/١٨٩٩‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺄﻯ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻷﻯ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻭﻋﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺎ ﺑﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻭﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪٠٬٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٥٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠/٤٠‬‬
‫‪٠٬٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠/٣٥‬‬
‫‪٠٬٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠/٣٠‬‬
‫‪٠٬٤٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠/٣٠‬‬
‫‪٠٬٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠/٢٥‬‬
‫‪٠٬٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٤٠/٢٥‬‬
‫‪٠٬٥‬‬ ‫‪٣٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠/٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻳﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪ .٢‬ﻭﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻉ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪Free Water/Cement Ratio‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻷﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺗﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺗﻘﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺣﺳﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪) %٠٬٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺫﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪) %٠٬٢‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺫﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪) %٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ ‪(SO3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺫﻭﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ASTM D 1411‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪BS 1377 Test 9‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ASTM D 512‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ASTM D 516‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ASTM C 289‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻋﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷــﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻫﺯﻫﺎ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻹﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻭﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻــﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬــﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳــﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١٩٨٩/١٦٥٨‬ﻋﻥ ‪ ٠٬٨٥‬ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ،٠٬٩٢‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٠٬٧٥‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪.٠٬٨٠‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻳﺻﺑﺢ ‪ ٠٬٩٥‬ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺿﺦ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ‪٤٠‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪ grade‬ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ )‪.(grade‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﺷﺑﻌﺎ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺗﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٥‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪.٤٠ ،٣٥ ،٣٠ ،٢٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳــﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻭﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺿﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﻭﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺇﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗـﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳـﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟــﺎﺭﺏ ﻓﻭﺭ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ )‪.(٣-٣-١٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻘـﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘـﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺿﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧـﺩﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁـﺔ ﺗﺟـﺎﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳـﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳـﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗـﻡ )‪ (BS 1881‬ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺇﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ‪ ،(C39-66‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟـﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟـﺩﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ‬
‫)‪ (١٥-٣-٢‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺿﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺣﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺩﻙ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺩﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻷﻯ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻷﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘـﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ )‪ (٢-٣-١٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳـﺎﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﻳﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳـﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﻣﺄﺧﻭﺫﺍ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﺎﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺎﻣﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻩ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻯ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻷﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭﻯ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻛﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻝء ﻭﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﻣﺣﺑﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻔﺗﺢ ﺃﺣﺩﻫﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺎﺋﺽ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﺭﺿﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻣﺎﺑﻳﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻋﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺟﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺛﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺎﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻠـﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﻠﻁ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﻛــﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻡ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻼﻁ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺇﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻰ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻧﻅﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺳﺟﻼ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺧــﻠﻁ ‪Ready Mixed Concrete‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺍﻹﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺧﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺑﻧﺩ )‪ (٢-٣-٢٢) ، (٢-٣-٢١‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ"‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ”‪ “ASTM‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ‪. C-94‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻰ ﻟﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﻓﻭﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻓﻰ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ( ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺗﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺏ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻠﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺑﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﺫﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺫﻛـــﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻭﻟــﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻠـــﻭﺭﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﺟﺭﺍﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻐﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠـﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﺽ ﺃﻯ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﻠﻣﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﺫﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟـﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘـﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻـﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺳـﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺷﻅﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺷﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻘﺎﺽ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻛﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٧٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻐﺷـﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﺛﻳﻠﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٠٬٣‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘـﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﻏﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﻓﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻـﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺩﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻧﺯﻻﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻛﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺩﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺯﺍﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﻧﺯﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺇﺳﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻭﻑ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺟﺯﺋﻪ ﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻـﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳـﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﺗﻘﻠﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﻁﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﻟﻘﺎء‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻳﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻗﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﻣﺑﺎﺕ )‪ (Concrete Pump‬ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻏﻣﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺗﻔﻛﻛﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺯﻻﻗﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻯ ﺑﺈﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳـﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣـﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻋﻥ ‪ °٣٢‬ﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻣﻧﺩﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻅﻼﺕ ﺷﻣﺳﻳﻪ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻰ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻳـﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺧﺯﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﻣﻼﺡ ‪ -‬ﺃﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻭﺍﺗﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳـﺔ ﺍﻷﺳـﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟـﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺩﺵ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺩﺵ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺑﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺳﻣﻳﻛﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣـــﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٥٠‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺩﺓ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺎ ﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺩﻣﻛﻪ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻷﻯ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻛﻭﻛﺔ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺣﺏ ﺑﺳـﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺑﺑﻁء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺃﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺯ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻧﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷــﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺣﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻛﻑء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻧﺟﺎﺭ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻌﺗﻧﻰ ﻭﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟـﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺎﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣـﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻓـﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻘﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﺗﻣﺗﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﻝ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻼﺻﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﺷﺎء ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻰ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷـﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺫ ﺑﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺣﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻘﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺭﺵ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﻔﺭﺷﺎﻩ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻟﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺳﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ‪(Sand‬‬
‫)‪ Blasting‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﻛﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺇﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪(BS‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫)‪ 8007‬ﻭ)‪ (BS 8110‬ﻭﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻘﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ‪ PVC‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻖ ﻭﺳـﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﺩﺭﺍﺳﺗﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺃﻯ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻷﻯ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺕ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺷﺎء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺑﺈﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛــﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻰ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﻭﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ‪ -‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻷﻯ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻳﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺇﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ‪ -‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻷﻯ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻳﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺇﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺯﺋﻰ ‪ -‬ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺭﻛﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻹﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻘـﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘـﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻭﻝ ﻋﻁﺎﺋﻪ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺛﻼﺛـﺔ ﺃﺳـﺎﺑﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ )‪ ،(٢-٣-٣٠-٤‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺑﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺭﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ )‪ (Butt Joint‬ﺑﻁـﻭﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳــﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺇﻯ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁ ﻣﺳـﺗﻘﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻋﻳﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺧﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻭﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﻡ ﺛﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺻﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎﻟﺋﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻠﻑ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻰء ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ ﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﺩﺍﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺩﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻠﺋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺗﻣﻸ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻟﻲ ﺳﻠﻔﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻔﻅﺎ ً‬
‫ﺑﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﻧﺗﻪ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻭ ‪٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻻﺻﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ – ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﺋﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ )‪(Water Stop Joints‬‬

‫ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻻﺣﻛﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺄﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻳﻥ )‪ (Heavy duty‬ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ‪ PVC‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻳﻭﺑﺭﻳﻥ ‪(NBR‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫)‪or SBR‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪ °٧٠‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ )ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪% ٣٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﻧﺔ )‪(E-module‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺹ )‪٧٥ (Shear - strength‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪١٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳــﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﺋﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﻳﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣـﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ )ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ(‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺑﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺛﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺭﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺭﺷﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺧﺫ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺳﻁﺣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺏ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻣﻠﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺻﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺩﻓﻖ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻹﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ ﻫﻲ ‪ U 3 , U 2 , U 1‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘـﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔــﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻡ( ﻓﻰ‬ ‫ﻧـــــﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘــﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷــﻁﻳﺏ‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪١٢ ‬‬ ‫‪U1‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪U2‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪U3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘـﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(U1‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ (U1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﻛﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺳﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﻓﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺳـﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳـﻛﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺑــﺩﺃ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻻ ﻳﺳـﻣﺢ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻐﺭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺣـﺩﺙ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻰ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻯ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻯ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(U2‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ (U2‬ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻭﻳﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﺑﺧﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻛﻧﺳﺔ ﺷﻌﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻖ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺣﺳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(U3‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ (U3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻯ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺎ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻣﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺑﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﻔﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳـﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗـﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻧﺷـﺎء ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻠﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻛﺣﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻧﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺛﻘﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ F3‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ U3‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٦ ±‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ٦ ±‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻣﻡ )ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ(‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻡ )ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ‪ ١٬٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ(‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳـﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻـﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ ﻫﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳــﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻧــﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺣــﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩٩١/١٧٩٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪(٢٠٢٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪(٣٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪(٣٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪(٥٦٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ )‪(Sills‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪(١٢٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺗﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ )‪(Lintels‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻯ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺻﻖ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯء ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﻭﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻯ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٤٩٫١‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻛﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪ BS 1881‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺟﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺑﻭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﻓﻰ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻧﺧﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺟﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟــﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٠٫١‬ﻗﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ‪Consistency‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﺎﺱ ﻗﻭﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ )‪ (Slump‬ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ASTM Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement‬‬
‫‪Concrete‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ )‪ (Slump‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺑـﻭﻁ ﺳﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻳــﺎﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷــﺄ‬
‫‪٥-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫‪٨-٥‬‬ ‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳــﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٠ - ٧‬‬ ‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺳـﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٠ - ٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ )‪ (Slump Tests‬ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٠٫٢‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺯﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷـﻐﻳﻝ ‪Workability‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻌﻁﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻣﻙ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻫﺯﻫﺎ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻳﻝ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ )‪ (Compaction Factor‬ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘـﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪.(BS 1881‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌـﺭﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣــﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﺳـﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎ )ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻫﺑﻭﻁﻬﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﻭﻛﺔ ﻛﻠﻳﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺩﻣﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٠٫٣‬ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ : Grades 25, 30, 35, 40‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪٢٥‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ : Grade 20‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪٥٠‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﺷﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧـﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣـﺎ ً ﻷﻯ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳـﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋـﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ )‪ (characteristic strength‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٧٬٥‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺩﺭﺟـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧـﺔ ‪.٤٠ ،٣٥، ٣٠ ، ٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎ ً ﻓﺈﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎ ً ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎ ً‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻭﺗﻪ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٢٥‬ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺧﺫ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻻﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﺗﺿﺢ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺷـﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺗﻳـﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑـﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﻷﻯ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺷﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‬
‫ﻳـﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ )‪ (Cylindrical core‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺑﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳـﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻁـﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘـﻁـﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗـﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳـﺩ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳـﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩٩٥/١٦٥٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (BS 1881‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻻﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ‪.ASTM DESIGNATION C 39-72 :‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺗﺳـﺎﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ‪ %٨٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣـﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺃﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٧٥‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷــﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻻ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٠٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻓﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺎ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺗﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٧‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢١‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ‪ -‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ‪ -‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺑﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻓﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻪ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻥ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻔﺣﺹ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻓﺣﺻﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻳﺷﺭﺡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﺳﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻭﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺗﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻰ ﻟﻪ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺗﻳﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺃﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻬﻭﻫﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻐﻣﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳـﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻧﺎﺟﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺛﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻠﻣﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﺳﺏ ﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺄﻥ ﻭﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻘﻳﻡ ﻣﺷﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺩﻓﻊ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺧﺎﺹ ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻬﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻻﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﺏ" ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﺏ ﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺈﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻭﺿﺢ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ" ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ )ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﻯ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٦٫١‬ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪External Concrete Protection Systems‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ‪ U 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪F 2‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٦٫٢‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬
‫‪Prefabricated Sheet Membrane Tanking‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٤٬٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺗﻳﻧﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﻭﻯ ﺑﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻪ ﻭﻳﻠﺻﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻳﻠﺻﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ”‪ “blinding concrete‬ﻭﺗﺻﻠﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻔﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﻭﻳﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺭﺹ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ”‪ “Curing‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻧﺗﻬﻰ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﺩﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٢‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٢٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٦٫٣‬ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ ‪Bituminous Latex Emulsion‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟـﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻏﺷﺎء ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٬٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺎء ﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻱ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء – ﻭﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٬٥‬ﻟﺗﺭ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ – ﺛﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﺻﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﺭﺍﻓﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻫﺎﺭﺩﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٢٫٥٦٫٤‬ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ‪Polyethylene Sheets‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﺩﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ‪(Blinding‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫)‪ Concrete‬ﺑﺄﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻟﻳﺛﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﺗﺩ ‪٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺛﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﺩﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺷﻳﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪Concrete Protection Procedures for External Faces of Concrete‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻫﺎﺭﺩﺑﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺣﻪ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺿﺩ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺩﻫﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ُ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ‪ ٩-٤-٢‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳــﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻳﻁ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻳﻁ ﻭﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻳﻁ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻋﺯﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻣﺎ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺗﺧﻠﻳﻖ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺎﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺟﺯﻩ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺭﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺣﺩ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺑﻳﺵ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺳـﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺳـﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌـﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺃﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻯ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷـﺂﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻔﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻷﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻁﻥ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻯ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺇﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻟﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻁﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٣‬ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬

‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻧﻰ ﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ ‪Submissions‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ ...‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳـﺢ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩٨٨/٢٦٢‬ﻻﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ١٩٩٠/١٦١٨‬ﻟﻠﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻭﻡ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﺿﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻁﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻠﺱ‬ ‫‪٣٥/٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻯ*‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫‪٥٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ‪٣٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪٥٢/٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬

‫ﻧﺗﻭءﺍﺕ‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪٦٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٦٠/٤٠‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٥٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ‪٤٥٠‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻠﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﻰ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ‪٥٢/٤٥‬‬
‫ﻧﺗﻭءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪Accessories‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻁ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻣﻘﺑﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﻛﻝ ﻫﺭﻣﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳــﻠﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻛﺷﻭﻑ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻭﻑ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻔﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻯ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺗﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷــــﻛﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻭﺛﻧﻰ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺣﺳـﺏ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺛﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳـﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (BS 4466‬ﺳﻧﺔ ‪" ١٩٨٩‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﻰ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺛﻧﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺻﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺛﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻭﻭﻗﺎﻳـﺔ ﺍﻟﻣـــﻭﺍﺩ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺭﺹ ﺍﻻﻗﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺫﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﻳﺻﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﻅﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺎ ً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻬﺎﺩ ‪Prestressing Bars‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﻭﺍﻗﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳــﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺭﺑﻁﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺻﺏ ﻭﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﻻﺳـﻳﺎﺥ ﺣﺩﻳـﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻫﺭﻡ ﻳﺗﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺿﻠﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻟﻁ ﻭﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺗﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﻓﺽ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻯ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻰ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻧﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﺻﻐﺭ ﺳﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺭﺍﺳﻰ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻁﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻛﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻟﺳﻧﺩ ﻭﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ – ﺑﻧﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺣﺿﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺗﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٤‬ﺍﻟﺷـﺩﺍﺕ ‪Formwork‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻙ ﻟﻠﻔﺭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ ‪Submissions‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣــﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺷﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻰ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺻﺏ ﻭﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻋﻥ ‪٣‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﻬﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﺱ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭﻩ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﺣﺭ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ‪٣‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺟﺎ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻟﻺﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺄﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﺛﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧـﻭﺍﻉ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷــﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓـــﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (F1‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (F2‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (F3‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ )‪. (F1‬‬
‫ﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ )‪(F3‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ )‪(Fair Face‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﻁﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻣﻠﺱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﻧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻘﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺫﻯ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻧـﻭﻉ )‪(F2‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺟﻣﺎﻟﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﻘﺔ – ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﺎﻣﻳﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﻧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷـﻁﻳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ )‪(F1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﺳــﻳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻟﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﺑﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺟﻬﺯ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺑﺷﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷـﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟـﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷـﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳـﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﻛﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻫﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﺷﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻰ )ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﺟﺭﻑ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻖ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺳﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻯ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺗﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻳﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻯ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺷﻁﻑ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻁﻑ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪٢٠ × ٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﺅﺧﺫ ﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺗﺑﻳﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﺟﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﻭﺳﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﺩﻓﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‪١٥٠ ،‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺣﺷﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺯﻳﺕ ﻓﺭﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻘﻊ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻹﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﻳﺻﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﺎﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓـﻙ ﺍﻟﺷــﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺟﻭء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺗﻠﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺁﺧﺫﺍ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺣﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻯ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟـﺩﻭﻝ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﻋﺎﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻓــﻙ ﺍﻟﺷـــــﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺟـﻭ ﻋـﺎﺩﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻭ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳـﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻣﺣﺕ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻅﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺑﻛﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻧﺷﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺄ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻰ ﻭﺃﻯ ﺃﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔـﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳـﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷـﻛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳــﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺈﺳـﺗﺛﻧﺎء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧـﺹ ﻋﻠﻳــﻪ ﺻﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺡ "ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ" ﻭ "ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ" ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﻉ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳـﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔــﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻡ( ﻓﻰ‬ ‫ﻧـــﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘــﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷــﻁﻳﺏ‬
‫‪٦- ، ١٢+‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪١٢ ‬‬ ‫‪F1‬‬
‫‪٦- ، ١٢+‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬
‫‪٦+‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪F3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳـﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷــﻛﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﻡ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻯ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﺝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﺋﺩ ﺑﺣﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺑﻭﺭﻧﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺟﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻥ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﺟﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﺝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪٨٫٥‬‬

‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺑﻳﺵ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳـﻭﻝ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳـــﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑــﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳــﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳــﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ١٩٩١/١٧٩٢‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﻋﺭﺽ )ﻣﻡ(‬ ‫ﻁﻭﻝ )ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬ ‫‪١٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠٠‬‬ ‫‪١٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٤٠٠‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫‪١٢٠‬‬ ‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﻣﻼﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻠﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﺭﺽ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺫﻛﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺭﻛﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻪ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺧﻠﻁ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺯﻳﺞ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﺣﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻧﺩﺍﺓ ﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻯ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻯ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﺻﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔـﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑـﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷـﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺷﻬﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻯ ﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ .١٩٩١/١٤٩٢‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٤ ‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ )ﺍﻟﺳﺣﻖ( ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺳﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺿﻐﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻥ‪/‬ﻣﻡ‪٢‬‬

‫)‪(٣٠‬‬ ‫‪٣٫٠٠‬‬ ‫)‪(٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٫٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻹﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺄﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﺩﺍﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺈﻋﻁﺎء ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺗﻪ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺩﻋﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ) ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ )‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭﻱ ) ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ( ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﻭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻗﻭﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺎ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪٢٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪.٢‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٤٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺑﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺑﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ ) ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫( ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﻋﻁﺎﺋﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻳﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﺄﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻧﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁﻳﻥ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪٣‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ‪٨٠‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻏﺔ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ ‪٢٠،‬ﺳﻡ ‪٢٥،‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻛﺛﺭ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ‪٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻫﻲ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺷﺭﻭﻉ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺎ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﻣﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺄﻣﺭ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻳﻣﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻳﺎﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻅﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻰ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻳﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﺎﻟﻰ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺧﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺫﺍ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻓﻳﺎ ً ﻟﻺﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﺎ ً ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺭﻗﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻭﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﻖ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺑـﺔ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳـﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻫﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧـﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁـﻭﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺧﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺵ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻐﻣﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻭﺃﻳﺿﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺑﻧﻰ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﻭﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻗﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻝء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻠﺳﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺗﺔ( ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﻣﺎﻛﻳﻥ ﻳﺑﻧﻳـﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻳﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﺦ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٫٥٠‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ) ﻁﺭﻑ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ – ﺷﻧﺎﻭﻱ ( ﺃﻱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺯﺍﺡ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺗﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺍﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫( ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ "‪ "١‬ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ – "‪ "١‬ﺟﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻔﺄ – "‪ "٦‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻭﻛﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻧﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺗﺭﺣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﺗﺿﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻌﻁﻰ ﺳﻁﺣﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ﺃﻣﻠﺳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻛﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﺻﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺗﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺳــﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳــﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪١٢‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻭﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢٠٠‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪١٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻧـﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ‪٣٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﻰ ﻟﺣـﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ )ﺷﻁﺭﻧﺟﻰ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ ‪١٢٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ‪٤٣٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﺯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪(BS‬‬
‫)‪.1243‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻼﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﺑﻳﻳﺕ ﻛﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻊ ﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺩﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺵ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻁﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺭﺗﻛﺎﺯ ﺃﻯ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻭﻳﻑ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺇﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺈﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﻣﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﻣﻙ ﻟﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻁ ﻭﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺎﺏ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺎﻙ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻧﺎء ﻣﺗﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺷﻧﺎﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻧﺩﺳﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﻧﺗﺭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺣﺗﻲ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢٠‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﺎﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻓﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻵﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻘﺎﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻧﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﻓﺋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻩ – ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺑﺵ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺩ ﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ) ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺳﻳﺎﺕ ( ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺷﻭﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﻧﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺷﻳﻘﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺩﺑﺵ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺗﺭﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﻁﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻔﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﻭﺟﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﻧﻳﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﺵ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺭﺷﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﻛﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﺍﻷﺑــﻭﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﻳﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﻠـﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺧﻠﻭﺹ ‪٣‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺷﻳﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻔﺎﺭﻯ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﺷﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻖ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ١:١‬ﻣﻊ ﺧﻠﺧﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﺣﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﺟﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﺎ ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻰء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻖ ﻟﻸﺭﺽ ﻓﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ ﺟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٦‬ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺯﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻘﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻌﺔ ﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺟﺎﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑـﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺻﻧﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻟﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﻭﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺳﺑﻖ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﺃ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﻭﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﻻﺫﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻛﺎﻻﻟﺗﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻖ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ 0.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻭ ‪ 0,5‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣـﻥ ﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺣﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺛﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻣﺣﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪١٧٨٧‬‬
‫ﻟﺳﻧﺔ ‪ ١٩٨٩‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻫﻰ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﻛﺗﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳــﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻧﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﻓﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺛﻘﺏ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳـﺋﻭﻟﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻻ ﻋﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻬﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ )ﻁﻭﻝ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ -‬ﺳﻣﻙ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻰ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻹﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﺯﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﺻﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـــﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻧﺑﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ ﻭﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻟﻳﻖ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﻼﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻯ ﺳﺑﺏ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﻼﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻳﺻﺑﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻐﻠﻔﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﻐﺷﺎء ﻭﺍﻗﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺗﻪ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﻼﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻻﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻳﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻏﺳﻝ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻁﻼء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺑﻁﻼء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺛﺎﻛﺭﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺑﺑﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﻼﺋﻪ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻁﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺛﻡ ﻳﺻﻳﺭ ﺷﻁﻔﻪ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ )‪ (١-١٠-٥‬ﻟﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻯ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻭﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻟﻳﺄﺧﺫ ﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺩﻋﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳــﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺑﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ ﺇﻗﺗﺭﺍﺣﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﺫﻭﻯ ﺧﺑﺭﺓ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳـــﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓـﺫ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻋــــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻔﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺯﺟﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺯﺟﻳﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺑﻳـﺵ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺷـﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺋﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺑﺛﻖ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺿﻌﻑ ﻣﺗﺎﻧﺗﻪ ﻭﺇﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺇﺳﻣﻳﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٫٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻛﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻻﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٫٢٥‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺷﺎﻡ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺳــﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻐﻧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣـﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻻﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻬــﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻐﻧﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻻﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻁﺎﻁ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻰ )ﻧﻳﻭﺑﺭﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺃﺧﺎﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺯﺟﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺑﺔ ﻟﻺﻁﺑﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻣﺗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﺑﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳــﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ ﻭﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟـﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳـﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (١-١٠-٥‬ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺗﺭﺡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳــﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ( ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻰ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻰ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻷﺭﺑﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻐﻧﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺻﺎﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﻣﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺟﻑ ﻭﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺻﻠﺑﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳــﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻥ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ‬
‫ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﻓﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﺿﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎء ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺗﺭﺑﻳﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺳﻼﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻧﺷﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻻﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟـﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﻓﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧــــﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٨٫١‬ﻋــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓـﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٨٫٢‬ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﺧـﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺿـﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٨٫٣‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳـــﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻓﻧﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﻘﺗﺭﺣﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٨٫٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳــﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺗﺭ )‪ (MASTER KEYING‬ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﺗﺭﺣﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺳﺧﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻸﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﺎﺳﺗﺭ )‪.(MASTER KYES‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٨٫٥‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪TEMPLATES‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪Iron and Metal Works‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٩٫١‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺳﺧﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪BS 1161‬‬ ‫‪Aluminum alloy sections for structural purposes.‬‬
‫‪BS 1245‬‬ ‫‪Metal door frames (steel).‬‬
‫‪BS 1449‬‬ ‫‪Stainless and heat resisting steel plate, sheet and strip.‬‬
‫‪BS 1470‬‬ ‫‪Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for general engineering‬‬
‫‪purposes plate-sheet and strip.‬‬
‫‪purposes-drawn tube.‬‬
‫‪purposes-bars extruded round tubes and sections.‬‬
‫‪BS 1494‬‬ ‫‪Fixing accessories for building purposes.‬‬
‫‪BS 1615‬‬ ‫‪Anodic oxidation coatings on aluminum and its alloys.‬‬
‫‪ASTM A 167‬‬ ‫‪Corrosion resisting chromium nickel steel plate, sheet and strip‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٩٫٢‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ‪ (Shop Drawing‬ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﻻﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٩٫٣‬ﻣﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻼ ﺗﻭﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫٩٫٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺻﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫١٠٫١‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ‪ (Shop Drawing‬ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫١٠٫٢‬ﻣﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٧٫١٠٫٣‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺩﺍﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺭﺻﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺑﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻔـﺭﻏﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﻳﺏ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٣٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺍﺑﺯﻳﻥ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪١٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺑﻌﺎﺝ ﻋﻥ ‪%٠٫٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٠٫٨‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻓﺭﺯ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺷﺑﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺷﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻖ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺗﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻟﻠﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻷﺟﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ‪ Stainless Steel‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻁﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺛﻘﻝ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻻً ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻭﻅ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻁﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺩﻫﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ – ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﺗﺭ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺟﺭﻳﻠﻳﺎ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻹﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺗﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺻﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻁﻁﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻉ ‪١٠×٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ‪٥٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﻣﺗﺩ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪٢٢‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁـﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﺣـﻡ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺳﻳﺧﻳﻥ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﺃ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻠﻊ ﻟﺗﻐﻅﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺻﺎﺝ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ )ﻋﻳﻭﻥ( ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ ﺑﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﻭﻛﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻥ ‪٧٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻉ ‪٥٠×٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺟﻧﺵ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫‪١٫٠٠‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻳﻠﺣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺳﻳﺦ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺣﺯﺣﺗﻪ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪٨٫٨‬‬

‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻸﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻛﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﻛﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ‪٢-١٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﺳﺗﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺗﻰ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﻣــﺔ ‪:Scratch Coat‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ‪/‬ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٤٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪٣‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧـﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪١٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﺭﺑﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺧﻔﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻹﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻧﺩﻯ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﺷﺎﺵ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻛﻰ ﻳﺟﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋــﻰ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ( ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺩﻳﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺈﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘـﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺈﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻓﻰ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺻﻠﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻯ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺧﻠﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻬﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺧﺷﺏ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ً ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺃﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ "ﺍﻟﺯﻣﺑﺔ"‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻲ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺟﻔﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻣﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻠﺢ ﻭﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻟﻭﺵ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﺡ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻪ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٤٠×٣٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻪ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺧﺷﺑﻲ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﺭﻓﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻳﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﻳﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﻳﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻭﻁﺔ‪ :‬ﺳﻼﺡ ﺗﻣﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﺎء ﺧﺷﺑﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻫﺭﻡ ﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻣﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺿﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺩﺓ – ﺍﻟﺑﺟﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺧﻡ ﺑﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﻧﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺩﺓ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺃﺳﻧﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺃﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﻭﻋﺎء ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪٥٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠:٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺳﺩﺍﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻪ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﺑﻁﻁ ﺑﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﻭﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻧﺎﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻟﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﺗﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪٣:٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺍﺯﺓ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺍﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺧﺷﺑﻲ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﺎ ً ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻧﺻﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﻭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻐﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻭ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺋﻁﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻁﻣﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻟﺻﺏ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﺃﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﻣﺑﺔ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻫﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺫﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﻠﺢ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ﺑﻧﺳﺏ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ %٨٠:٣٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺃﺣﻳﺎﻧﺎ ً ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٢٥‬ﻟﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻥ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺍﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻳﻛﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﺭﺍء ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻔﻳﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺭﺵ ﻭﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ %١٫٥‬ﻁﻔﻝ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﺫﻭﻗﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺏ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻟﺳﻳﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٩٠٠:١٠٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺩﺭﻭﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻳﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻲ ﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٤٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺃﺳﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻁﻔﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪ :‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻬﺯﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻋﻳﻭﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪٣‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻫﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺑﻧﺎﺭ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ‪ :‬ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﻧﻪ ﺍﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺧﻠﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻠﺑﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺧﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﻧﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻭﺍﺑﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ‪ :‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻭﻧﻪ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺷﺎﻫﻖ ﻳﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﺧﻭ ‪١٠‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺗﺑﻁﺊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﻭﺗﺿﻌﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺟﺑﺱ ﻣﻘﺗﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﺣﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻳﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻠﻳﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻭﻣﻳﻧﺎ ﻭﺃﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻟﻭﻧﻪ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺯﻣﻥ ﺷﻛﻪ ﺍﻹﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ‪٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺗﺑﻁﺊ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻳﻌﺑﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻛﺎﻳﺭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ‪٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ‪٠٫٣‬ﻡ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﻟﻪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻣﻳﺯﻩ ﺑﻠﻭﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺻﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻛﺎﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻸﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻪ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻭﺭﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﺍﻧﻳﺵ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻁﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺗﻪ ﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺑﻠﻠﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻋﻔﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﻭﺃﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻛﺎﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺎﺕ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﻳﻖ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺱ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺭﻭﺟﻊ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ ﻟﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﺧﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺟﺩﺍ ً ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﻲ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺫﻭ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻧﻪ ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﻌﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻳﺎﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﺿﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺎﻣﺗﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻔﻭﺵ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺇﻁﻔﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻁﺑﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺛﻳﺭﺍ ً ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻘﺗﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﻣﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻏﺫﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻏﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﻗﻭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺷﻛﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻧﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻌﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺫﻭ ﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺷﻌﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻁﻘﻁﻖ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻘﺷﺭ‪ :‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺇﻧﻔﺻﻠﺕ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻣﻠﺢ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻐﺳﻝ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻓﺗﻣﺗﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﺗﻧﻁﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻼﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ َﺟﻧَﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﻛﻭﺵ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﺋﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻘﻑ‪...‬ﻭﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺷﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﺎﻡ ﻭﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﺩﺍﻥ ﺑﺷﺑﻙ ﻣﻣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ ) ﺷﺑﻙ ﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ( ﺍﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟــ ‪ p.v.c‬ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻳﻁﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﻭ ﺳﺩ ﻋﻠﺏ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺑﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻘﻭﻯ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺷﻛﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺳﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻯ ﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﺍﻭ ﺷﺣﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺵ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺭﺵ ﻏﺯﻳﺭﺣﺗﻰ ﻻﻳﺷﺭﺏ ﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻟﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻐﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﺵ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺭﺷﺎ ً ﻏﺯﻳﺭﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺣﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻳﺎﺿﻪ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪450‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪ /‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﺷﻛﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪ ١‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺭﺵ ﻭﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻟﻭﺵ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ )ﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﻠﺔ( ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻳﺔ )ﻣﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ( ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺫﻓﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻭﻻﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺳﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺩﻭﺍﻣﺔ ﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺍﻳﺎﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻋﻠﻰ ﻻﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺩﻻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻼﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺑﺣﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺻﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﺻﻼﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻔﺗﺕ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻣﻌﻧﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺻﻠﺩﺓ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻣﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻧﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺟﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺭﺑﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻁﻳﻝ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩﻩ ‪١٠×٣‬ﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻘﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺳﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﺎ ) ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﺧﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ( ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪٧٥:٥٠‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻣﻥ ‪٢:١٫٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﻭﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻭﻋﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﺍﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ﻓﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﺭﺍﺳﻳﺎ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻝء ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﻁﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٦:٢:١‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٩:٣:١‬ﻭ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻁﻭﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻻﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺅﺟﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺩﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳُﻣﻸ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺩﺭﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪T12‬‬ ‫‪T12‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪١ /‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺣﺭﺵ ﺍﻯ ‪ ٦٦‬ﺷﻛﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ‪ ١‬ﻡ‪٣‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ‪.‬‬ ‫♠‬
‫‪T0 T120‬‬ ‫‪T12‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﻻﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ‬ ‫♠‬
‫‪T0 T120‬‬ ‫‪T12‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﻣﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺑﻭﻥ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫♠‬
‫‪T0 T120‬‬ ‫‪T12‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺷﺭﻳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺎﻣﻳﻡ ﺳﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ) ﺑﻣﻌﻧﻰ ﺍﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺑﻧﻔﺱ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻠﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ( ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﻻﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻬﻭﺩ ﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻭﻫﺵ ﻭﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﻪ ﺷ َِﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٨:٣:١‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺷﻌﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺑﺱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺟﻑ ﻭﺗﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﺯﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺭﺵ ﻗﺑﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺭﺷﺎ ً ﻏﺯﻳﺭﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪١٫٥‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٦:٢:١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩:٣:١‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺩﺭﻉ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻣﺱ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺍء ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻣﻠﺱ ﺧﺷﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺧﺷﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻣﺷﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻧﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺯﻣﻠﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺳﻳﻠﻲ ﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ً ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻧﺫﻛﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻳﺹ " ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻠﻳﺔ"‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺟﺑﺳﻳﺔ " ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻠﻳﺔ"‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ " ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪".‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ " ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪".‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ " ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪".‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻰ " ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪".‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺭﺍﺗﺯﻭ " ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪".‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬

‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻯ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺵ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺭﺷﺎ ً ﻏﺯﻳﺭﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﻭﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺧـﻭﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ً ﺻﺑﺎﺣﺎ ً ﻭﻣﺳﺎءﺍ ً ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺗﻳﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺷﺑﻙ ﻣﻣﺩﺩ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧـﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻯ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺣﺩﺑﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪١٫٨‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻣﺛﻘﺏ ﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻻﺑﺩ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻕ ﻣﻁﻔﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺽ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻻ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻁﻔﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﻧﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧـــﺔ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﻧﺩﻣﺎﺝ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳﺎ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺎ ﻹﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺈﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺟﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺷﻙ ﺇﺑﺗﺩﺍﺋﻰ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻻﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺄﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻔﻳﻑ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻗﺗﺭﺍﺡ ﺧﻠﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺭﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳـﻘﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪٠٫١٠‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﻋﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳــﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟــﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ‪٢٠‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٥‬ﻣﻡ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺷــﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﺛﺎﺑــﺔ ﻓﺭﺷــﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺳﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺑﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺧﺷﻥ ﺫﺍﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﻳﺞ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺣﺳﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺣﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳــﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ‪٣‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٤٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺟﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺟﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻳﺳﻣﻰ ﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ُﺭﺷﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻳﻭﻣﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺳﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻣﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺍﺯﺓ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﻭﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻳﺹ ‪ +‬ﻣﻥ ‪٥:٤‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺟﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ ) ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ (‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻛﺎﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻣﺷﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺟﻔﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﻊ ﺣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺎ ً ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺃﻋﺗﺎﺏ ﻭﺟﻠﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺻﻳﺹ ‪٥ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺟﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ ‪٥ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ‪+‬ﺃﻛﺎﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ) ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻥ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺣﺟﺭ ‪١٠ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ‪٥ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺟﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻔﻲ ‪ +‬ﺃﻛﺎﺳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ) ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺣﺟﺭ ‪ ٠٫٢٥ +‬ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ٠٬٢٥ +‬ﺷﻳﻛﺎﺭﺓ ﺟﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻔﻲ ) ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪ ٢٠:١٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﻣﺳﻣﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺏ ﻓﺈﻧﻧﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺧﺷﻧﺎ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ ﺭﺵ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻁﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻁﻠﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻻ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺭﺩ ﻭﺩﺭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺗﻬﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺩﻣﺞ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺣﺑﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺎ ً ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ‪٠٫٥ +‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺟﻳﺭ ‪ ١٥٠ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ) ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥٠:٤٠‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻥ ‪٢:١٫٥‬ﺳﻡ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻼﺑﺔ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻧﻅﺭﺍ ً ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻘﻖ ﻭﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻧﻣﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻪ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺎ ً ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻭﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪١‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺃ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻏﺳﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺅﺝ ﻭﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻣﺎ ﺳﺑﻖ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺧﺷﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺱ ﻭﺗﻣﺷﻁ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻧﺟﻝ ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ‪١‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ‪٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﻭﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻻﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪١‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﻭﺯﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪١٫٥×٤‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺝ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺣﺟﺭ ﻭﺣﺻﻭﺓ ﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٣:٢:١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ) ٣:١:١‬ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪١٠‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ‪٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ (‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻭﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻭﺗﺩﺭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫)ﺩ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻘﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺟﻼء ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩﻫﺎ ﻧﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺳﺎء ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻫـ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭ( ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻣﻊ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﻛﻪ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻭ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺧﺷﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﻅﺭﺍ ً ﻟﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻪ ﻭﻧﺣﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺷﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺻﻭﺓ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺩﻗﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﻁﺎء ﺃﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﺧﺷﻧﺔ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻳﺗﺻﻑ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﺑﻳـﺎﺽ ﺻﻠﺏ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻣﻪ ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺿﻳﺎ ً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻧﻣﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻫﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻭﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺃ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻣﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪4‬ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺣﺻﻭﺓ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺣﺟﺭ ‪٣ +‬ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺣﺟﺭ ‪ +‬ﺟﺯء ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ )ﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ‪١٠‬ﻡ ﻣﺳﻁﺢ (‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﻘﻠﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺗﺩﺭﻉ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً‪.‬‬
‫)ﺝ( ﺗﻘﺳﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﻣﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻌﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻹﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺟﻠﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺗﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻕ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻔﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﺣﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺷﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﻭﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺷﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻧﺱ ﺷﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ ﻭﻳﺣﺫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺧﻭﻓﺎ ً ﻣﻥ ﺗﻛﺳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﻛﺗﻔﻰ ﺑﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺻﻲ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﻣﻰ " ﻣﻳﺔ " ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻕ ﻭﻧﺣﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺗﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺣﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﻛﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻗﻁﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻳﻛﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻛﺭﺍﻧﻳﺵ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ً ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺃ( ﺗﺩﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ٦٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٦٠:٥٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺻﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺷﻧﻳﻭﺭ ﺩﻗﺎﻕ " ﻫﻳﻠﺗﻲ " ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻛﻭﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺟﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺅﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺏ( ﺗﺟﻧﺵ ﺍﻷﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺷﻳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻗﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺩ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪٨‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ‪٤٠×٤٠‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ‪٥٠×٥٠‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻳﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻣﺧﻣﺭ ﻧﻣﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻭﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺝ( ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺩﺩ " ﻣﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﺗﺎﻝ – ﺣﺑﻳﺵ " ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺭﺑﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻣﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻛﻭﺏ ﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٥‬ﺳﻡ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻛﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٢:١‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻭﺗﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻙ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺭﻛﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺳﻳﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻘﻼﻭﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺦ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺎﻗﻁﺕ ﻣﻭﻧﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻫـ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﺭﻁﺷﺔ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٤٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ً ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫)ﻭ( ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺝ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻳﻳﺢ ﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺷﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺯ( ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﻌﺟﻥ ﺑﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺡ( ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻬﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ً ﻭﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺟﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻁﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٠٫٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻳﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ً ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫٩‬ﺃﻋﻣـﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟــﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‬

‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻟﻸﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻋﻬﺎ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋـــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔـﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻫﻰ ﻟﻠﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﻳﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻣﺳﻭﺡ ﻗﺩﺭﻩ ‪١٫٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻯ‪٠٫٧٥ ،‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺻﺣﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻗﻳﻖ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺃﻯ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ "ﺍﻟﺩﻫـﺎﻥ" ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻬﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑـﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻠﻳـــﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻯ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ‪٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﻠﻳﺩ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻷﺑﻠﻛﺎﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻁﻰ ﺑﻘﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ ﺭﺃﺳﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﺎ ﻭﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻭﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﺭﺑـــﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺷــــﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻸﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺷــﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﻋﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻭﻧﺗﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻖ‬
‫ﻗﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﻭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺭﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺷﻘﺑﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻘﺳﻡ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺷﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ MDF‬ﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺳﻣﻙ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻠـﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺑـــﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺑﻘﻁﺎﻉ ‪١٥٠ × ٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻼﻣﻪ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻭﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻧﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻸﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺯﻳﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺻﺎﻟﺣﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻙ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺄﻣﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻟﻳﺞ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻳﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻠﻳﻣﻬﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻭﺍﻟﻳﻥ ﺃﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺫﻯ ﺍﻻﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﻳﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﺳﻁﺎﻣﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺑﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻭﺗﺷﻭﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺑﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻭﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺟــﺎﺝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛـﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻪ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻻﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ )‪ (٣٥٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪٠٫٨‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻫﻭ ‪٩٫٧٥‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪٧٫٩٥‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﻡ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ "ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻯ" ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻔﺭ ﻓﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻯ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻣﻁﺎﺑــﻖ ﻹﺷﺗﺭﺍﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻣﻥ "ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ" ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻌﻧﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺫﻛﺭ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻣﻊ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺟﻳـﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗـﺭﻙ ﺧﻠﻭﺹ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺟﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺳﺩﺍﻳﺏ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺷـﻭ ﻁﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺑﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺩﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺧﺻﻳﺻﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٠‬ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻁﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﻭﻥ ﻓﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻟﺻﺎﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻘﻑ ﺗﺎﻣـﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻠﺩ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺷﻁﺑﺔ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎ ً ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺎ ً ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ‪Waterproofing Membrane‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪4.00‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺎ ً ﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺗﻳﻧﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻭﺍﻩ ﺑﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻋﺎ ً ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺎ ً ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻻ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻛﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻁﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﺣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﻪ ﻭﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻭﺏ ﻋﻥ ‪١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻭ ‪١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﺩﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٢‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٢٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ ‪Bituminous Latex Emulsion‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻺﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻏﺷﺎء ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٬٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻓﻪ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺧﻠﻭﻁ ﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺎء ﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻼ ﻳﺿﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء – ﻭﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﻭﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪١٬٥‬ﻡ‪/٢‬ﻟﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺣﻠﺏ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ – ﺛﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻸﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﺻﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻛﺭﺍﻓﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻟﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻣﺎﺳﻛﻪ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﺡ ﻫﺎﺭﺩﺑﻭﺭﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٤٬٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺗﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺗﻳﻧﺟﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﻭﺍﻩ ﺑﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﻣﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻛﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻋﻥ ‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻗﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﺗﻌﺎﻛﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﺗﻧﻅﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻋﺯﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺗﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻋﻳﺎﺭ ‪ 100‬ﻏﻳﺭ‪ 080‬ﻣﻣﺯﻭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻭﻻﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 00‬ﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻐﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻳﺑﺭﺟﻼﺱ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻛﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻳﺑﺭﺟﻼﺱ ﺑﺄﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﺦ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻌﺭ ﻣﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﻭﻛﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ )ﺃ( ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻧﺩ )‪ (٣-٧-٤‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪١٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺷﺂﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻣﻳﺯ ﺑﺧﺎﺻﻳﺔ ﺳﺩ ﻭﺣﺷﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻏﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺿﺩ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺑﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﻔﺟﻭﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻰ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺳﺎء ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻓﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻧﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻷﺭﺽ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻳﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﺑﺔ ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺎﺫﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺵ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻠﻭ ﻏﺭﺍﻡ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ 75‬ﺭ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺩ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﺎﻋﻑ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﺎﺕ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺃﻣﻠﺱ ﻻ ﺗﺧﺗﺭﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻁﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺳﻌﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻝ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻌﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺷﻣﻭﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١١‬ﺃﻋﻣــﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋــــــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺫﺍ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺃﺧﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻅﻬﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺗﺎﻧﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻟﻺﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳـﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺟـﺯء ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻓﺗﺭﻓﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺣﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟـﺑـﻼﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺿﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﻧﺳﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺩﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻛﻧﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺭﺹ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﺷﺔ ﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺗﻧﺩﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻏﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺍﻣﻳﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﻠﺻﻖ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٢٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺇﻧﺳﺟﺎﻡ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﺗﺎﻑ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺯﺍﺕ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺑﺔ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺫﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﻘﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺄﺧﺭﻯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺈﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻟﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻝ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻙ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺗﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺂﻛﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛــﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﻭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻘﻭﻕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻁﺣﻪ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺳﺣﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻟﻠﺑﻼﻁ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﺗﺷﻁﻳﺏ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﺻﻘﻪ ﺿﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﺻﻘﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻣﺭﻩ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﻙ ﺍﻻﻭﻟﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻠﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻛﻳﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣــﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺑﻭﺭﻧﺩﻡ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،١٤٠‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﺻﻘﻠﻬـﺎ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺭﺑﻭﺭﻧﺩﻡ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﻳﻔـﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳــﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻕ ﻓﺭﺯ ﺃﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ ﻭ‪ ٨‬ﻣﻡ ﻭ‪١٢‬ﻣﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪٣٠٠‬ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻼﻁ ﺳـﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋـﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻧﻑ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٦‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻭﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻛﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻖ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺻﻖ ﻛﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﺍﺣﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺟﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٣‬ﻣﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪٢‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻁﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪٢ ‬ﻣﻡ ﻛﻝ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﻘﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻁﺔ ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺭﺍﻧﻳﺕ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳــﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺭﺍﻧﻳﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﻕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﻠﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﻠﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﻠﺻﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﺷﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻣﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪١‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺗﻣﻸ ﺑﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺑﻭﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺭﺍﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻳﺻﻘﻝ ﻭﻳﻠﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟــﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﺧــــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺭﺍﻧﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﻕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﺥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤‬ﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛـﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺑﺈﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪١٥‬ﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﺳﻁﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻗﻭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻧﺯﻻﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺯﺃﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺟﺯء ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺃﻣﺎ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻓﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺟﺯء ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺟﺯﺋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻠﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺭﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻭﻳﺿﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺟﻳﺭ ﺑﻠﺩﻱ ﻣﻁﻔﻲ ﻭﻳﺳﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(Concrete Flooring‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻛﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘًﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻠﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻋﺯﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻧﻛﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻔﺎﻑ ‪.‬ﻭﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻣﺗﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 7‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪12‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﻳﻥ ﺑﺄﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ً 1.5‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٢‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫـﺎﻥ ‪Painting‬‬

‫ﻳﻐﻁﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋـــﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﺩﻭﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻰ ﺻﻔﺎﺋﺢ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻧﻭﻋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁــﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳــﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺧﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻷﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺅﻫﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺧﺑﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻛﻰ ﺗﺟﻑ ﻭﺗﺗﺻﻠﺏ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻙ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻔﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻟﺗﺟﻑ ﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﺍ ﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺯﺧﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺗﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻑ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺍﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﻓﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻻﻓﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺇﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻰ ﻏﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﻣﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻯ‬
‫ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻯ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻠﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﺷﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﻼﺣﻅ ﻛﻑء ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧــﺩﺱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳــــﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺈﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻯ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ‪ :‬ﻳﺻﻧﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻔﻑ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ % ٢٥‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﻧﻔﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻰ‬ ‫ﺃ‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ % ١٠‬ﺯﻧﻙ ﻧﻣﺭﺓ )‪ (١‬ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺟﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺿﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺑﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻔﻪ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ %٢٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺕ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻰ ‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺿﻰ ‪ ١٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻻﻭﻝ ﺑﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻔﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ % ٢٠‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺙ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻰ ‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺳﺎﻋﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﺑﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻔﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ % ١٠‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻟﻧﻬﻭ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ‪ -‬ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻻﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺢ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﻧﺩﺳﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٣‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬

‫ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻁﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻛﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ‪،‬ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ( ﺍﻟﻁﻣﻡ )ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ‪Shop Drawings :‬‬ ‫‪-١‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﻣﺎﻡ ‪ Sleeves‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺑﻳﻧًﺎ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺑﻳﻧًﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﻁﺭﻩ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺟﻠﺗﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻭﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺧﺷﺑﻲ ﻣﺑﻳﻧًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﻁﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻑ ﻣﻭﺟﺯ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ( ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ )ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﺎﻟﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺑﻳﻧًﺎ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺩﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺯﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ‪:‬ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪:‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺋﺑﻖ )‪ (GALVANIZED‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻭﺩ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻷﺻﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻧﻑ( ﺏ )ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺋﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﻛﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻧّﻘﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﺗﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ‪ .Dense Tape‬ﻭﺗﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ( ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ )ﺛﻡ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺯﻓﺗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻗﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺳﻳﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻼﻭﺓ( ‪. /‬ﺳﻠﻳﻑ )ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‪8‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻅﻑ ﺃﺳﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺩﻫﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻳﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٧‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺭﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٨‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٩‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺣﺎﺷﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﺗﻼﺻﻖ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻣﻊ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -١٠‬ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺟﺭﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫‪9‬ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -١١‬ﺗﻌﺯﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻣﻭﻓﻠﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳًﺎ ﻣﺳﺧﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺿﻐﻁ ) ‪ ( 100‬ﺑﺎﻭﻧﺩ )‪ (GALVANIZED‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺧﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺃﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻝ ﺧﻁ ﺗﻣﻭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﻠﻔﻧﺔ ﺻﻧﻑ( ﺏ )ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ‪ O.V‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻣﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻳﺑﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﻟﻣﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﻭﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻭﺗﻭﻣﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺧﻥ ﻣﺎء ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﺳﺧﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻪ ﺟﺎﻛﻳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻔﻧﻳﺯ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛًﺎ ‪:‬ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ PVC‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ( ﻛﺭﻳﻥ )ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ /‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﺔ ﻗﻁﺭ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻛﺧﻁ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻭﻉ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ‪3 4‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﻓﺭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺇﻧﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﺷﻳﺑﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫)ﻛﺭﻳﻥ( ﻣﻊ ﺷﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻥ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ ﺗﻐﺫﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻭﺑﻳﺩ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺯﻉ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﻣﺯﺃﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ‪ 3:1‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺷﺑﻙ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺇﻧﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺩﻫﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺄﻟﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ )ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ(‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺯﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻣﻭﻓﻠﻛﺱ ﻭﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺑﺭ ﺟﻼﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻓﺗﻪ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌًﺎ ‪:‬ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺍﺕ‪ " :‬ﺍﻥ ﻭﺟﺩﺕ " ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃ ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺎ ًﻣﺎ ﻭﻣﻠﺳﺎء ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺳﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻁﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﻭﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﺩﻣﻭﻏﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻧﻌﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺻﻧﻌﺕ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻬﺎ ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻧﻑ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻬﺩ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ ,‬ﻭﻳﺣﻖ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺃﺧﺫ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺣﻭﺻﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪-‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪. (BS 864‬‬
‫)‪PART2‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺋﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﺗﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻳﺳﺎﻭﻯ ) ‪ ( 2.1‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺟﺗﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺔ )‪ (POROSITY TEST‬ﻁﺑﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪. (BS 864‬‬
‫)‪PART2‬‬
‫ﺝ‪-‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ) ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻭﻱ ﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪ ,‬ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﻻﺫﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻌﺎﺩﻥ ‪ ,‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻣﺳﺢ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺧﺭﻗﻪ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺗﺩﻫﻥ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ)‪ (STEEL WOOL‬ﻛﻲ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ )‪ . (FLUX‬ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻬﺭ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺩﻳﺭ ‪ ,‬ﻭﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺭﺩ ﻧﺹ ﺻﺭﻳﺢ ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺗﺭﻁ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺿﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺗﻧﺳﺎﺏ ﻟﺗﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺻﺩﻳﺭ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪ ,‬ﺛﻡ ﺟﻌﻝ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﻳﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻭﻱ ﻟﺣﺎﻣﻬﺎ ‪ ,‬ﻓﻳﻧﺻﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﻭﻳﻣﻸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﻳﻥ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﻳﻭﻣﻳًﺎ ﻣﺩﺓ )‪ ( 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻠﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭﻻ ﻭﺛﺎﻧﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﺭﺿﻰ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﺭﺿﺎ ًء ﺗﺎ ًﻣﺎ‪.،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ )‪(As Built Drawing‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﻭﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻟﻛﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﺑﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺯﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺗﻔﻖ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻛﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺯﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫‪٨٫١٣٫١٠٫١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﻭﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﺭﺯ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺑﻘﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺯﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﺳﺟﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺭﻧﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻌﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﻭﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ‪.‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻳﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻫﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‪ 40*60‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﻭﺽ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻧﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺽ ﻣﺟﻠﻰ ﺧﻼﻁ( ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) UPVC‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺃﻭﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻟﺣﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻧﺻﻑ ﺇﻧﺵ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﻝ ﺣﻭﺽ ﻣﺟﻠﻰ‬
‫"‪6‬ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻧﻲ "* ‪.‬ﺣﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‪6‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻫﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﺦ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺧﺎﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ‪ 3‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻫﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪1 44‬ﺇﻧﺵ ‪1/ 40‬‬
‫ﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻐﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ * ‪ 4‬ﺳﻡ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪( 30‬ﺻﺑﺎﺏ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﺯﺋﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻐﺳﻠﺔ ﺧﻼﻁ( ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‪1 UPVC‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻖ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ /‬ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻗﻁﺭ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺧﺏ ﺃﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻣﺭﺁﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﻛﺭﻳﺳﺗﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﺟﻳﻛﻲ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ‪ 6‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭﻣﺷﻁﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻐﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪45‬ﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ * ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪45 120‬ﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﺎﺳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪. *65‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫‪56‬ﺳﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺩﻋﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ * ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪ 43‬ﻗﻁﺭ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺵ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪ UPVC‬ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻧﺵ ‪. UPVC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﻁﺭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 2.5‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺗﻭﺍﺑﻌﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﻭﻳﻭﻧﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﻧﺑﻼﺕ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺑﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺣﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺭﻕ ‪1‬ﺇﻧﺵ ‪ / 15‬ﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻗﻁﺭ * ‪ 2‬ﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﺕ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪) 15‬ﻋﻧﻖ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ( ﺗﺩﻫﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﺑﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﻓﺭﻧﺟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﻓﺭﻧﺟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻫﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ )‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (S‬ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻧﺵ ‪. UPVC‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﺭﺓ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺭﺳﻼﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪3‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﻭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ‪1‬ﺇﻧﺵ ‪.‬ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺣﻣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻗﻁﺭ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻩ ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ)ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺗﺭﺍﺏ( ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫‪20‬ﺳﻡ ﺿﻣﻧﻪ * ﻗﻳﺎﺱ‪ 4‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ 20 UPVC‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺭﻭﻡ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﺧﺏ ﺃﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺎً‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪٨٫١٣٫١٠٫٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟـ ‪:Upvc‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻪ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‪ ١٠‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﻥ ‪ UPVC‬ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻘﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺗﺳﺎﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ ‪ ISO.R/161‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻣﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻧﻁﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ‪ PVC‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﺔ‪German Standards DIN 8062,8062 and 19532‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺟﻠﺩﺓ ﻣﻁﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻓﺭﺯﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻁﻊ‪ (Push Fit) ،‬ﺗﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺣﺩﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻻﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻛﻎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻖ ‪ ١٬٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺫﺍ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٬٥‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺣﻠﻖ ‪ -‬ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ‬
‫‪25‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﻠﻳﺱ ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ١:٢‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻁﺎﺭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻏﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻻﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻲ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻻﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻧﺎء ﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻓﺭﻏﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍ ﻟﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ‪.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ( ﺳﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﺧﺭﻱ ﺃﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺑﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺎء ﻭﺻﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻋﻳﺎﺭ ‪ 350‬ﻛﻐﻡ ﺇﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﺢ ﻭﺇﻳﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳًﺎ ‪:‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪ 50‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻋﻣﻖ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 25‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﻭﻳﺳﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﻥ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﻥ ﻋﻥ ‪ 1,5 %‬ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ‪ 4‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﻭ ‪2%‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ‪ 6‬ﺇﻧﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﻣﻝ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻑ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪15‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺅﻣﻥ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩًﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳ ًﻣﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﻧﺗﻭءﺍﺕ ﻭﺳﻧﻥ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻳﺳﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺭﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ( ﺩ )ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﻛﻐﻡ ﺇﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﻭﺍﺭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻣﻘﻬﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪60‬ﺳﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺭﺩﻡ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻟﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ 30‬ﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻗﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺑﺄﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﺩﻙ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻟﺛًﺎ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺳﻳﻔﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺭﺣﺎﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻐﺳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺳﻳﻔﻭﻥ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻫﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺭﻛﺏ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻌًﺎ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺟﺞ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪0,50‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﻋﻣﻖ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 0,25‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﻠﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ‪. 0,50‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺑﺵ ﻣﺯﻱ ﺻﻠﺏ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ‪ 15‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﺗﻘﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ ﻭﻳﺣﺷﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻧﻭﻉ( ﺩ )ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ) ‪ ( 10‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻟﻳﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻭﻳﺑﻧﻰ ﺣﻭﻟﻪ ﺑﻁﻭﺏ ﺇﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻡ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﻭﻳﻘﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﻣﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ 3:1‬ﻣﻊ ﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺷﻑ ﻭﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻭﺟﺭﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺗﺧﻔﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺳﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﺑﺈﺫﻥ ﺧﻁﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻧﺩﺱ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻭﺟﺏ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﻗﻠﺔ ﺟﺭﻳﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺩ ﻓﻭﻫﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﺩًﺍ ﻣﺣﻛ ًﻣﺎ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺳﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻭﻣﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤‬ﺍﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﺫﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫١٫١‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﺩﻥ ) ‪ ( u.P.V.C‬ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺩﻥ)‪ (u.P.V.C‬ﻭ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻳﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ )‪ (u.P.V.C‬ﻣﺛﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺿﻌﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻭﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺧﺫ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺻﻭﺻﺎ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺷﻣﺱ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻋﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﻬﻭﺍﺓ ﺟﻳﺩﺍ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻭﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻛﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻛﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻳﻪ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺭﻓﻪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫١٫٢‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﻪ ﻓﻰ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺑﺳﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﻯ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﺿﻰ ﺍﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻻﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﺔ " ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ " ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﻳﻪ ﺭﻗﻡ )ﻡ ﻕ ﻡ ‪ ( ١٩٦٣ – ٣٥٠‬ﺍﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﺎﺛﻠﻪ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﺟﻠﻔﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺟﻠﻔﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺷﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻐﻣﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻧﻙ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻔﻧﻪ ﻭﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺿﻐﻁﺎ ً ﻫﻳﺩﺭﻭﻟﻳﻛﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻡ‪ ٢‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﺃﻯ ﺭﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪,.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﻠﻭﻅﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﻪ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻳﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﻔﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٫٢٥‬‬ ‫‪١٫٠٠‬‬ ‫‪٠٫٧٥‬‬ ‫‪٠٫٥٠‬‬ ‫‪٨/٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻰ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻰ )ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪١٢٫١٠‬‬ ‫‪٨٫٣٦‬‬ ‫‪٦٫٤١‬‬ ‫‪٥٫٠٢‬‬ ‫‪٤٫٥٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟــﻭﺯﻥ )ﻛﺟﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٢٫١‬ﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺍﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺣﺭﻑ ﺗﻳﻪ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻭﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺃﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺻﺩﺃ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﺭﺍﺳﻳﻬﺎ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺫﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭ )ﺍﻟﺟﻠﻧﺩ( ﺑﻌﻣﻖ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺍﻣﻳﻝ ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﻧﺯ ﻭﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻭ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ‪ ١٠ ،‬ﺟﻭ ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٢٫٢‬ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻼﺟﺎﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺻﻧﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺧﺭﻭﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﻳﺛﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺑﻼﻁ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﻳﺯﻭﺩ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺣﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﺑﻭﺑﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻭ ﺑﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺑﺳﺗﻭﺱ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻣﻡ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٢٫٣‬ﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺑﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻊ ﻟﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻻﻛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٢٫٤‬ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ ﺑﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺑﻳﻛﺔ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺻﺩﺃ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺑﺱ ﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻳﺩﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺎ ﻭﻓﻭﻕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﻼﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺭﻉ ﺑﺳﻳﺎﺝ ﺑﺷﺭﻁ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺎﺝ ﻋﺎﺋﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳﻡ ﺑﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٣‬‬
‫‪ -٤‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ )‪ ١٠٠‬ﻣﻡ ( ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺟﻳﻥ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ )‪ ٦٣‬ﻣﻡ( ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٥‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ‪ ١٨‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ‪ ١٤‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻓﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺍ ً ﻋﻥ‬ ‫‪-٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻭﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﺧﺭﻱ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺑﺑﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻁﻔﺎء ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-٨‬‬
‫‪ -٩‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺟﺎﻟﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺃﻱ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٫٥‬ﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﻭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٢٫٥‬ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﻧﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻲ ﻧﻳﻛﻝ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٠٫٧٥‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺣﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻻﻛﻭﺭ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺑﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫٤٠ × ٠٫٤‬ﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺣﻧﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ‪٣٠‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻭﺗﺟﺭﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﺏ ﻭﻛﺫﺍ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻘﻳﻡ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻬﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﺧﺻﺻﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺑﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﺭ ﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺭﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺃﻭﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﻳﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺑﺗﺻﺭﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺿﺧﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ ...‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯﺓ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺩﻱ ﻧﻅﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ )‪ (uPVC‬ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ" ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ ً ﺑﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٤٫١‬ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻧﻰ ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٤٫٤٫٢‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﻡ‪ ٣‬ﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﺻﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻖ ﺗﻼﺻﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﺏ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻷﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺑﻖ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺻﺭﻑ ﺻﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟـ ‪ uPVC‬ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ١٦٠‬ﻣﻡ ﻭﺑﻣﻳﻝ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ) % ٠٫٥‬ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻑ‬
‫( ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺿﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﻫﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺩﺭ ‪ ١٠‬ﻁﻥ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﻁﺎء ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻼﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺭﺍﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻳﺳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺎﺩﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺩﻡ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻏﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺭﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -١‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺗﻣﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺟﻔﻳﻔﻪ ﻭﻛﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٢‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻲ ﻣﻧﺳﻭﺏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻧﺩﻕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺻﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺧﺷﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺿﺢ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺳﻼﻣﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺈﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺏ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻼﺣﻳﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻧﻔﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺗﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ (‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٥‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺳﻭﺭ‬

‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ "ﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺭﺩﻡ"‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺭﺻﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ‪ -‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻸﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺩـ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺑﻧﻲ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫـ ‪ -‬ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻥ ﻻﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺻﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ "ﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺭﺩﻡ"‬
‫ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺣﻔﺭ ﻭﺭﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﻟﻁﻳﺔ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )ﺃ‪-١-‬ﺃ( ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ )‪.(AASHTO‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺭﺵ ﻭﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺑﻘﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺳﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٥‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ %٩٠‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺑﺭﻛﺗﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺳﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ‪٢ ±‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺭﺻﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﺳﻭﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻧﺷﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺏ )‪ (Grade25‬ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻡ ﻓﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻲ ﻧﻭﻉ )ﺃ( ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ١٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺣﻘﻘﺔ ﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺻﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻠﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﺩﻣﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﻬﺎ )]‪ (٤٠ × [١٥/١٢‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﺑﺄﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺳﻡ ﻟﻸﺭﺻﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺯﻟﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻭ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ‪ ٣٠٠ ،‬ﻛﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺳﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻠﺻﻖ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﻭﻧﺔ ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻓﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻁﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﻭﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻷﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳـﺩ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳـﺏ ﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻕ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﺝ( ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٠٫١٥ × ٢ × ٢‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﻛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺯﻟﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻭ‪ ،‬ﻧﺻﻑ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻝ‪ ٤٠٠ ،‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﺑﻭﺭﺗﻼﻧﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻣﻙ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺎ ً ﻭﺗﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺏ ﻛﻝ ﺑﻼﻁﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﻓﻰ ﻗﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺷﺏ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻁﺭﻧﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻭﻯ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻠﺳﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺩﻛﺎ ً ﺧﻔﻳﻔﺎ ً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺷﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻸ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺃﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺷﻙ ﻭﻳﺗﻣﺎﺳﻙ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٨‬ﻳﻭﻣﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ – ﻭﻓﻰ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﻡ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺣﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ )ﺍﻟﺳﻥ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻵﺗﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃ‪ -‬ﻣﺳﺣﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻰ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ‪ % ٦‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪.% ١٠‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﺭﻓﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻭﺍﺅﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺯﻓﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ %٩٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻟﺳﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ %١٥‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺣﻭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻬﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺳﺣـﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻠﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻁﺣﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻬﺯﺓ ﻧﻣﺭﺓ )‪ (٧‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺭﺓ ‪.٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ‪Asphaltic Cement :‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻰ ‪١٫٢٠ – ١٫٧ Specific Gravity‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ٩٠ – ٦٠ Isoftening Pointring‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪٢٥ - ٥ c Penetration at 25‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪% ٧٩ – ٧٥ ٢Ductility in C S‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺟـ‪ -‬ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺭ )ﺍﻟﺳﻥ(‬

‫‪ ‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺣﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻭﻣﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١‬ﺳﻡ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺗﺧﻠﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻓﻰ ﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻥ ْ‪ ،٢٣٠‬ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺟﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺿﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻔﺭﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻳﺎﺳﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ١‬ﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻧﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪٣٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻣﻛﻌﺏ ﺭﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻷﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ‪ Hardnen Number‬ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟـﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٥٣٥‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔـﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﻁﺎﻧﻳـﺔ ‪ B.S.S. 14/6/1948‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻧﺹ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺃﺳﻔﻠﺕ ‪ ١٢ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﺑﻳﺗﻭﻣﻳﻥ ‪ ١٥ +‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺣﺟﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺟﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺟﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﻓﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ٨٫١٦‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻯ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ‪- :‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﻭﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ – ﻭﺩﻭﺭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻭﻓﻳﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ . .٥‬ﻣﺑﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻭﺃﻭﻓﻳﺱ‬
‫‪ .٦‬ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻟﺩﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻟﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻟﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﻣﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﻁﺔ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫‪ .٨‬ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻭﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻻﺳﻁﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ‪ ١٥‬ﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٩‬ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺭ‪- :‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺳﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻡ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻛﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﺎﻛﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻭﺍﺑﺔ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪٦‬ﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺿﻠﻔﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻣﻔﺻﻼﺕ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﺟﻝ ﻭﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﻭﺍﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﺓ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪١‬ﻡ ﺑﻣﻔﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺯﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ‪- :‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻘﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻧﻰ‬

‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻝ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٫٥٠‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ‪+‬‬

‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻓﻳﺱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٢٫٥٠‬ﻡ‬

‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺯﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺗﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻟﺩ‬ ‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻘﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺯﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻭﺍﺋﻁ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺍﻍ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‬
‫ﻟﻼﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪١٠‬ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻧﻭﺍﻓﺦ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺩﻫﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﺑﻭﻛﺳﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﻋﻧﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻠﻣﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺗﺧﺷﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺭﺍﻣﻳﻙ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺣﻣﺎﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻠﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ١١‬ﻋﻧﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﺍﻳﻛﻭ)ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤‬ﺳﻡ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٢‬ﺳﻡ(‬ ‫‪ ١٢‬ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻟﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪- :‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻁﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺳﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻁﻳﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﺳﻣﻧﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٦٠‬ﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ‪- :‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻻﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﺎﺑﻳﻙ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺳﻣﻙ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻡ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﻭﻣﻧﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺑﻭﺍﺏ ﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﻠﻣﺑﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺭﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﻭﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻧﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﻁﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﻠﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺝ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺟﺭﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺑﻙ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
9 Operation and Maintenance Requirements

9.1 Introduction
A. During the Commissioning Period, the Contractor shall work with the
Employer’s operating and maintenance personnel to operate and maintain
the Facilities. The Contractor’s tasks shall includes but will not be limited to
the following:
1. ensuring that all components of the Facilities are able to effectively
operate at all times and so are able to meet the Specific Requirements
under Section 3.2 of the Technical Specifications.
2. recording and making available to the Employer on request all
necessary information relating to the monitoring of the performance of
the different parts of the Facilities
3. continuous maintenance and preventive repairs of components of the
Facilities
4. maintaining the Facilities in accordance with Good Industry Practice
and so as to avoid damage to third party property
5. keeping the Site, installations and buildings such that they remain in a
visually and aesthetically pleasing condition at all times, in accordance
with Good Industry Practice
6. repairs and replacement of equipment in accordance with the asset
management plan.
9.2 Staffing
A. The Contractor shall:
1. provide sufficient experienced personnel to provide the effective
management and operation of the Facilities on a continuous, 24 hours
per day, 7 days per week basis
2. provide all the staff for the managerial, technical, supervisory and
administrative responsibilities and labour necessary to operate and
maintain the Facilities, safely and efficiently
3. ensure that the qualifications and capability of personnel are
appropriate for the tasks they are assigned to perform
4. ensure that all personnel are properly trained and/or supervised in the
operation and maintenance of the Facilities
5. keep and maintain records of training of all personnel. The Contractor
shall make available such records for inspection by the Project Manager
on request
6. ensure that new staff and any staff reallocated to different duties, are
properly trained and supervised until they have been fully trained and
are sufficiently experienced to carry out their new duties independently.

9.3 Commissioning Period Plans

General
A. The Contractor shall prepare, maintain and comply with the Commissioning
Period Plans, describing how the Contractor will operate the WWTP to
achieve the Specific Requirements.
B. The Commissioning Period Plans shall include the following:
1. Asset Management Plan (including a detailed asset register)
2. Operation and Maintenance Plan (O&M Plan) (including operation and
maintenance manuals)
3. contingency plan
4. statutory emergency planning documents required by the applicable
Laws.
C. The Commissioning Period Plans shall be:
1. consistent with Good Industry Practice
2. sufficiently detailed to enable a competent operator, who does not have
previous knowledge of the Facilities, to take over the operations of the
WWTP without undue delay or disruption.
D. Each plan that forms part of the Commissioning Period Plans shall include,
as a minimum:
1. the relationship between that plan and other plans maintained by the
Contractor
2. the parties contributing to and affected by the activities covered by the
plan
3. the extent to which the Contractor will use Subcontractors
4. the personnel structure and management
5. named persons responsible for health and safety, with their contact
details
6. named persons responsible for fire safety for the Facilities’, with their
contact details
7. named persons responsible for all mechanical and electrical
components in the Facilities
8. details of responsible persons for each component of the Facilities and
details for both the daytime and out of hours contacts
9. a communications strategy and procedures for interfacing between all
relevant parties and parties within the Employer; the interfaces between
designers, constructors, operators and any Subcontractors and other
relevant Authorities
10. reporting procedures
11. data management, including the use of information technology and
software
12. procedures to comply with health and safety requirements
13. procedures for ensuring the minimisation of any environmental impact
14. quality procedures, including checking and approval, document
management and control, and change control

15. the names of all key human resources
16. additional requirements specific to the particular plan, as set out in the
subsequent sections of this Schedule 5.
9.4 Asset Management Plan
General
A. The Contractor shall prepare, maintain and comply with an Asset
Management Plan. The Asset Management Plan shall:
1. enable the monitoring of the risk of loss of operations
2. enable the condition and performance of the assets to be monitored in
order to develop cost-effective performance and equipment
replacement strategies
3. clearly demonstrate the processes and the procedures that will be
adopted to ensure that assets are managed, operated and maintained
and renewed such that they are fit for purpose and are capable of
meeting the Specific Requirements.
B. The Asset Management Plan shall include, as a minimum:
1. a detailed asset register
2. a regime of inspection, assessment, maintenance and renewal of
assets based on the condition and performance of individual assets and
their criticality to meeting the Specific Requirements
3. a regime for programming planned renewals and maintenance so that
the Contractor is able to meet the Specific Requirements
4. a methodology for forecasting the levels of investment in systems,
processes and resources to meet the Specific Requirements
5. detailed costing of maintenance and renewal activities
6. the planned and actual investment profile, showing investment by year
7. development of optimum operating requirements, integrating the
delivery of maintenance and any asset renewal activities, to minimise
any operational disruption.
C. The Asset Management Plan shall:
1. cover the Commissioning Period
2. cover the period to 15 years from the Commissioning commencement
and also demonstrate how the Contractor will handover the operations
of the WWTP to the Employer.
Asset Register
A. The Asset Management Plan shall include an asset register. The asset
register shall be a comprehensive database containing details of all the assets
used by the Contractor to operate the WWTP.
B. The asset register shall include, as a minimum:
1. all fixed assets
2. all moveable plant and equipment
3. all spares.
9.5 Operation and Maintenance Plan
General
A. The Contractor shall prepare, maintain and comply with the Operation and
Maintenance Plan. The Operation and Maintenance Plan shall detail the
Contractor’s procedures for operating and maintaining the Facilities. The
operation and maintenance plan must be consistent with the maintenance
programme.
B. The operation and maintenance plan shall include, as a minimum:
1. a brief description of the assets
2. a generic list of routine operational and maintenance tasks and
frequency thereof
3. a planned maintenance schedule for each asset
4. procedures for logging of routine operations and maintenance and
notifying that exceptional maintenance is required
5. procedures for the collation, recording and future interrogation of
operational data
6. procedures for updating operation and maintenance manuals
7. procedures for reporting incidents to the Employer
8. mechanisms and procedures for reporting breakdowns and faults, both
during and outside of normal working hours including procedures to be
employed for deployment of maintenance staff
9. procedures to ensure that the operation of the assets are maintained
safely, or alternative temporary facilities provided and operated, to
ensure that the Specific Requirements are met whilst
repair/maintenance is being undertaken
10. details of security procedures, fire safety and any health and safety
procedures not covered in the health and safety management plan,
11. details of staff training,
12. details of how other requirements of this Contract are to be complied
with.
9.6 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
General
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be prepared as instruction
manuals and presented in commercial quality, three ring binders with hard
plastic coated covers and maximum ring size shall be 75 mm.
B. The manual contents shall be organized into numbered section titles and each
section shall be separated by a tabbed fly sheet.
C. The Contract number and title of the “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL” shall be printed on the cover of each binder and list the contents
of each binder on the cover.
D. All manuals shall be prepared in both the local and English languages.
E. Manual Contents
F. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain the following minimum
information:
G. The Contractor shall develop, maintain and comply with the operation and
maintenance manual for each component of the Facilities. The operation and
maintenance manuals shall form part of the operation and maintenance plan
for the Facilities.
H. The operation and maintenance manuals shall include, as a minimum:
1. a description of the assets that comprise the Facilities
2. general arrangement, schematic and process and instrumentation
diagrams
3. set points and control parameters
4. general day to day operation and maintenance activities
5. weekly, monthly and other routine maintenance schedules
6. list of confined spaces and working procedures in those spaces
7. safe working plans for hazardous jobs
8. details of spare parts consumed/replaced with reason and date
9. stock of spare parts and where located
10. documented local procedures for controlling incidents and events in
accordance with the contingency plan
11. manufacturers’ plant and equipment manuals
12. log of routine maintenance and exception reports
13. list of consumables required
14. list of chemicals to be used and their forecast consumption level
15. schedules of water treatment unit process operating modes.
16. Cover sheet including project title, names, addresses and telephone
numbers of the Employer, Project Manager, Contractor and other
responsible parties;
17. Table of contents;
18. Product data identifying specific products and component parts, product
location and, where appropriate, supplement product data with
drawings, manufacturers manuals and typed explanatory text;
19. Warranties and bonds.
I. Manuals for materials and finishes shall include:
1. Product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, colour, and
texture designations;
2. Provide information for re-ordering custom products; and
3. Instructions for care and maintenance shall include:
4. Manufacturer’s recommended cleaning agents and methods;
5. Cleaning precautions (identify detrimental agents and cleaning
methods);
6. Recommended cleaning and maintenance schedule.
7. Moisture protection and weather exposed products shall include:

8. Product data listing;
9. Applicable reference standards;
10. Chemical composition, and details of installation;
11. Inspections, maintenance, and repair recommendations;
12. Additional requirements and design data as specified in individual
Specification sections.
J. Manuals for equipment and systems shall include for each equipment item
and each system:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts;
2. State function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions;
3. Performance curves, with engineering data and tests;
4. Details of manufacturers, recommended spares and maintenance task
descriptions;
5. Motor control centres single line diagrams, and wiring diagrams for
circuits and sub circuits;
6. Control descriptions as well as details of both controls and telemetry
systems;
7. For panel board circuit directories electrical service characteristics,
controls and communications shall be provided with ‘as-installed’
internal and external wiring diagrams;
K. Operating procedures which shall include:
1. start up and shut down procedures;
2. routine operating instructions;
3. emergency operating procedures;
4. summer, winter, and any special operating instructions as appropriate.
L. Maintenance requirements which shall include:
1. trouble shooting procedures;
2. disassembly, repair, and re-assembly instructions;
3. alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions;
4. servicing and lubrication schedule including lists of recommended
lubricants;
5. manufacturer’s recommended operation and maintenance instructions;
6. complete description of all operating sequences;
7. original manufacturer’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and
diagrams required for maintenance;
8. “as-installed” wiring diagrams by panel manufacturer;
9. Contractor’s record drawings, with “As-installed” mechanical installation
and process flow diagrams;
10. charts of valve tag numbers keyed to Contract Process and
Instrumentation Drawings including the location and function of each
valve;
11. lists of original manufacturer’s supplied spare parts with latest (dated)
prices;
12. test reports for dynamic balancing;
13. design data and other information as specified in individual
Specifications sections.
9.7 Contingency Plan
A. The Contractor, applying Good Industry Practice, shall develop and maintain
such contingency plans as he deems necessary and are required by the
relevant authorities and shall comply with these plans through the
Commissioning Period.
B. Each contingency plan shall:
1. set out detailed procedures, allocation of resources and personnel to
manage such incidents or events that have, or may present the potential
to significantly affect the operations, activities or staff of the Employer
or the Contractor, the public or the environment,
2. be consistent with the operation and maintenance plan.
C. In developing and maintaining the contingency plan, the Contractor shall
consult and coordinate to such extent as may be necessary with the
Employer, and any authority likely to be involved in handling any contingency
event, so as to ensure that the contingency plan is complementary to and
coordinated with the activities carried out by the authorities in case of
contingency event.
D. The types of contingency events covered by the contingency plan shall
include, as a minimum:
1. failures of treatment processes
2. breach of security at the Facilities
3. loss of operations
4. electrical power outages
5. significant asset damage that threatens ongoing operations
6. any event likely to cause significant press, public or media interest
7. labour strikes or shortages
8. any type of incident likely to cause pollution to the environment
9. an event relating to health and safety that is required by law to be
notified to the authorities.
E. The contingency plan shall include, as a minimum:
1. procedures for early identification, recognition and categorisation of
potential contingency events
2. procedures for reporting and communicating internally and to the
Employer and informing other affected parties and advising those
affected parties of any precautions and/or measures to be taken to deal
with the effects of the contingency event
3. the roles and responsibilities of the Contractor's staff in dealing with any
contingency events
4. guidance to the Contractor's staff on actions to be taken to minimise the

impact of a contingency event
5. contact details for all relevant bodies
6. details of how contingency events will be controlled or managed,
including a schedule of intended response times including thresholds
for escalation
7. the equipment proposed to be used to respond to each type of
contingency event
8. a description of how the staff would be trained to respond to
contingency events, including general guidance notes, details of and a
programme for seminars, exercises and simulations
9. a mechanism for testing the continued effectiveness of the contingency
plan
10. details of strategically stored stockpiles of sufficient types and quantities
of equipment and materials, including pipes and connectors, pumps,
tanks, hoses and chemicals, to deal with contingency events
9.8 Statutory Emergency Planning Documentation
General
A. In addition to the contingency plan, the Contractor shall develop all
documents required by the applicable Laws.
B. If required, the documents shall be approved by the relevant authorities,
according to the established procedure.
Prevention and Elimination of Emergency Situations
A. Mandatory documents to be developed by the Contractor as a minimum
include:
1. a plan of main actions for prevention and elimination of emergency
situations and provision of fire safety for the current year
2. an action plan for prevention and elimination of natural and man-made
emergencies
3. a plan for the organisation and implementation of evacuation measures
4. a plan to improve the sustainability of the operation of the Facilities.
9.9 Monthly Operating Report
Contents of Monthly Operating Reports
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit monthly operating reports. The
Contractor shall submit each monthly operating report to the Employer prior
to submitting the invoice for the relevant month.
B. Each monthly operating report shall:
1. provide the Employer with any information reasonably required to
assess the operational performance of the WWTP
2. include all information required to substantiate the support information
to be provided
3. include a summary in tabular and graphical format of any Performance
Deductions made in previous months since the start of the
C. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain full records for the Facilities and
shall supply information to the Employer, at such a time and in a format
specified by the Employer.
9.10 Inspections By The Employer
A. The Contractor shall provide the Employer with access to the Facilities and
assistance that the Employer or other parties as permitted by the applicable
Law to allow them to undertake periodic inspections of the Facilities.
9.11 Buildings and Grounds Maintenance
A. The Contractor shall maintain all buildings at the Site to ensure that the
buildings are able to provide thier intended functions during their expected
design lives. The activities to be carried out by the Contractor shall include
but not be limited to:
1. the full maintenance of all buildings, structures (internally and
externally), including roofs, windows, doors, rainwater drainage and
decor (including fittings and fixtures)
2. the maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems, ventilation and
air conditioning, plumbing and drainage installations
3. the repair of all unexpected damages
4. the overhaul and/or replacement of all components, in accordance with
what is to be expected for Good Industry Practice
5. the initiation and performance of surveys to determine the technical
status of buildings and installations, including proposals for future
maintenance and financial requirements
6. the renovation of all buildings, structures, equipment, installations
where the end of its lifespan has been reached
7. any other general housekeeping, including the maintenance of all
paintwork in good condition
8. any required maintenance of the Site water supply, industrial service,
cabling and earthing systems, surface water drainage, sewerage and
lighting at the Site
9. any required repairs and conservation, including the upkeep of site-
entries, roads, pathways, handrailing, fences, gates and landscaped
areas
10. maintenance of the telephone installations, security systems and fire
alarms
11. regular cleaning of all windows at the Site
12. removal of any graffiti, if applicable.
B. The Contractor shall carry out grounds maintenance including landscaping
activities so that the Facilities are kept neat and tidy and free of any item which
could constitute a nuisance or pose a threat to the safety of any person,
property or the environment or to the operations of the WWTP.
10 Training of Employer’s personnel

10.1 Purpose of Training
A. The Contractor shall provide training to the Employer’s personnel to ensure that the
operation and maintenance personnel supplied by the Employer over the
Commissioning Period are able to operate, maintain, service and repair the Facilities.
B. The Contractor shall use the trained staff (who shall be appropriately supervised) to
plan and carry out the Commissioning detailed in Part 6 [Testing on Completion].
C. The Contractor shall ensure that the operation and maintenance personnel acquire
full knowledge of the use of the Operation and Maintenance manuals. The training
shall be detailed to ensure that the nominated Employer’s operation personnel are
fully conversant with the works both operationally and for maintenance purposes.
D. The overall purpose of the training is to enable the staff to:
1. understand the wastewater and sludge treatment processes
2. operate equipment in an optimal way
3. carry out the necessary adjustments and corrections
4. undertake planned and reactive maintenance
5. undertake trouble-shooting and repair of equipment
6. adjust all equipment to optimise the plant
7. select the necessary spare parts
8. intervene in case of disturbance
9. understand and implement all health and safety and environmental procedures
at the Facilities
10.2 Employer’s Staff To Be Trained
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer and the Project Manager his plan for
training of the Employer’s personnel. There will be four main areas of training
required to cover all the personnel who will be involved with the operation and
maintenance of the works:
1. Operations/Management staff
2. Electrical maintenance staff
3. Instrumentation and Control staff
4. Mechanical maintenance staff
B. The candidates to be trained shall be selected by the Employer.
C. The Employer’s staff listed in Table 10.1 shall be made available throughout the

Table 10.1: Availability of Employer’s staff for training

Number Availability for training (days per
Staff member
week)
Plant Manager 1 Two
Facilities Manager 2 Two
(Civil/Electrical/Mechanical)
Deputy Facilities Manager 4 Three
(Electro Mechanical)
Electrical Engineer 4 Three
Electrical Foreman 5 Five
Instrumentation and Controls 4 Three
(ICA) Engineer
Mechanical Engineer 4 Three
Mechanic/Foreman 5 Three
Process 3 Five
Scientist/Microbiologist/Chemist
Lab. Technician 3 Three
General Laborer 6 Three
D. The Contractor shall inform the Employer at least 2 weeks in advance of any training
session the Contractor proposes. The Employer shall confirm to the Contractor the
availability of its staff for the proposed training session at the latest one week prior to
the start of the proposed training session. The Employees/staff listed in Table 10.1
shall be retained throughout the Commissioning Period.
10.3 Form of Training
A. Training shall include a combination of:
1. Classroom instruction
2. On-the job learning under the supervision of experienced staff.
A. The training programme shall include ongoing assessment to demonstrate the
developing capability of the staff being trained and, ultimately, their ability to meet the
stated purpose of the training.
B. Training shall primarily be given in the Arabic language. Documentation with regards
to the training, including a programme of planned training, shall be submitted to the
Project Manager in accordance with Appendix 7 to the Contract Agreement: List of
Documents for Approval or Review.
C. Instruction and demonstration shall be given at appropriate levels for all trainees.
Separate courses for different categories of staff may be necessary dependent on
number of staff to be trained.
D. All equipment and manuals needed for the training shall be provided by the
Contractor and handed over to the Project Manager in advance of the start of the
training.
E. Training manuals shall be developed and form the basis of the training programme.
Each operator will be issued with an operator training manual. The Contractor shall
provide training on the operation, routine maintenance and fault diagnosis of their
equipment. The Contractor shall ensure that the Employer’s nominated operations
personnel are fully conversant with the operating requirements for all plants and
equipment on all areas of the Works.
F. The operator training manuals shall summarise operation of the various plant items,
equipment and processes, fault finding and routine maintenance requirements. This
shall be supported by the information contained within the O&M manuals.
G. The degree of details and emphasis of the training will be different in all cases and
training shall be structured to meet the various needs. The Contractor shall submit
the training manual to the Project Manager for review and approval, at least six
weeks, before the start of the training program.
H. All the Employer’s staff to be trained will require a general overview of the various
plants and equipment of the Works together with instructions on fault diagnosis,
alarms and control system interrogation, breakdown maintenance and routine
maintenance. The training shall enable a detailed understanding to be gained of how
the process operates and the engineering involved.
I. The electrical maintenance staff will require a detailed description of the cabling and
a review of electrical drawings. ‘Hands on’ identification of site cable routes,
switchboards and their components shall be provided.
J. ICA staff shall be taught the composition of each control loop/system together with
details of all instrumentation installed. The way in which individual systems interact
with each other and their relationship to the central data acquisition system shall be
explained, together with fault finding and correction techniques.
K. Mechanical maintenance staff will require a detailed explanation of the main process
elements with emphasis on mechanical maintenance of their components.
L. In each training course, a portion of the time shall be dedicated to issues of health
and safety.
M. Should additional training be necessary to adequately convey the required levels of
information to the Employer’s staff, the Contractor shall also be responsible for this.
N. The Contractor shall maintain records of Employer’s staff who have been trained and
the level to which they have been trained.
O. The Contractor shall develop and conduct appropriate tests to demonstrate that those
who have attended the training understand the information that has been presented
and taught to them. The Contractor shall supply all training records of Employer’s
personnel to the Project Manager as part of Pre-commissioning.
10.4 Contractor’s Training Specialists
A. Personnel having an expert knowledge of the subjects and a proven record of
experience in teaching technical personnel shall undertake the training.
10.5 Training Programme and Reporting
A. The Contractor shall submit a programme of the proposed training and subsequently
produce an Annual Training Report, summarizing the training carried out over the
preceding year, as referred to in Appendix 7 to the Contract Agreement: List of
Documents for Approval or Review.
B. The Contractor shall also produce a Final Training Report at the end of the
Commissioning Period (365 days after Completion) or as amended by the Project
Manager in accordance with the Contract summarizing all the training that was
undertaken throughout the period. The training programme shall be designed to cater
for staff requirements both as individuals and as part of a unit/section with training
provided for each and every portion of the Plant, so that trainees are able to gather
sufficient knowledge and experience prior to them operating the Plant independently.
APPENDIX 1
BLANK PROCESS CALCULATION SHEET

In association with Gopa-infra, Utilities, CBI TADE
BASIC DESIGN DATA

AlSids WWTP Basic Data
Flow Rates at Year 2057 (Total Plant)
Average flow 10000 m3/day
Hourly average flow 416.7 m3/h
Peak flow 1167 m3/h
Peak factor 2.80
Peak flow rates 0.324 m3/sec
The design of the treatment plant shall be split on two stages

Stage 1 shall be capable to treat wastewater up to 2037 with the following data
Hourly average flow 208 m3/h
Peak Flow Rate 583 m3/h
Peak flow rates 162 l/s
Stage 2 shall be capable to treat wastewater received up to 2057

with the following data
Influent and Effluent Wastewater quality

Influent Effluent
Dissolved Oxygen, DO __ 4
Biochemical Oxygen Demand BOD5 650 60 mg/l
Chemical Oxygen Demand, Dichromate C 1200 80 mg/l
Total Solids, TS 1400 __ mg/l
Suspended Solids, SS 500 50 mg/l
Dissolved Solids, DS 900 <2000 mg/l
Settleable Solids 35 __ mg/l
Total Organic Carbon, TOC 190 __ mg/l
Total Nitrogen, TN 50 20* mg/l
Nitrate __ 50 mg/l
Phosphorus, P 30 10* mg/l
Chlorides 100 __ mg/l
Oil and Grease, O&G 50 10 mg/l
Alkalinity 250 __ mg/l
Min temperature Tmin 18 __ ⁰C
Max temperature Tmax 32 35 ⁰C
8
MPN, Total Fecal Coliform 6×10 5000 MPN/100 ml
* In case of applying Nitogen and Phosphorus control strategy
BASIC DESIGN DATA
Kafr Daboos WWTP Basic Data
Flow Rates at Year 2057 (Total Plant)

Peak flow 875 m3/h
Peak factor 2.80 2.3
Peak flow rates 0.243 m3/sec
The design of the treatment plant shall be split on two stages

Stage 1 shall be capable to treat wastewater up to 2037 with the following data
Hourly average flow 208 m3/h
Stage 2 shall be capable to treat wastewater received up to 2057

with the following data
Influent and Effluent Wastewater quality

Influent Effluent
Dissolved Oxygen, DO __ 4
Biochemical Oxygen Demand BOD5 650 60 mg/l
Chemical Oxygen Demand, Dichromate COD 1200 80 mg/l
Total Solids, TS 1400 __ mg/l
Suspended Solids, SS 500 50 mg/l
Dissolved Solids, DS 900 <2000 mg/l
Settleable Solids 35 __ mg/l
Total Organic Carbon, TOC 190 __ mg/l
Total Nitrogen, TN 50 20* mg/l
Nitrate __ 50 mg/l
Phosphorus, P 30 10* mg/l
Chlorides 100 __ mg/l
Oil and Grease, O&G 50 10 mg/l
Alkalinity 250 __ mg/l
Min temperature Tmin 18 __ ⁰C
Max temperature Tmax 32 35 ⁰C
MPN, Total Fecal Coliform 6×108 5000 MPN/100 ml
* In case of applying Nitogen and Phosphorus control strategy
INLET CHAMBER
The Contractor shall submit the calculation for each plant on separate sheets
Stage 2 (Design up to 2057)
Average flow m3/day
Hourly average flow m3/h
Peak flow m3/h
Breadth (B) B m
Length (L) L m
Water depth d max m
Volume V m3
Retention time at peak flow sec 30-90 sec
Stage 1 (Design up to 2037)

Average flow m3/day
Peak flow at 2037 m3/h
l/s
Breadth (B) B m
Length (L) L m
Water depth d max m
Volume V m3
Retention time at peak flow sec 30-90 sec
MECHANICAL SCREEN
Design of Screen for Stage 1 only
Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
No. mechanical screen set (set) n unit, duty
Flow per each screen m3/h
m3/sec
Bar width s mm
Frame thickness s' mm
Space between bars e mm
Inclination angle Degree
Assume velocity in the screen channel v' m/sec
Area of the screen channel A' m2
Selected screen channel width without

w m
frame
Depth of water at maximum flow d m
Actual velocity in the screen channel at

v m/sec
peak flow
No. of spaces bet. bars (space) nos
Selected No. of spaces bet. Bars

nos
(space)
Bars in each screen nos No. of bars = No. of spaces-1
Total width of the each screen

including frame
Inclined length of the screen
m
(immersed in water)
Effective inclined screen area A' m2
Normal velocity of water between bars V m/sec
Head loss coefficient for a clean bar

c
screen
Head loss through the screen m hL=1/c [(V2-v2)/2g)]
Liter/1000
ECP, 1997/2017
Amount of screenings m3
To be colected in 2 m3 bin and
Liter/day
Collected amount of screenings disposed outside the site
Design of Manual Screen
No. manual screen set n unit, duty
Flow per screen for Stage 1 m3/h
m3/sec
Bar width s mm
Assumed velocity in the screen

v' m/sec
channel

w m
frame
Depth of water at average flow m

vpeak m/sec
peak flow
Velocity in the screen channel at
vav m/sec
average flow
No. of spaces between bars (space) nos
Selected No. of spaces between Bars

nos
(space)

wt m wt=frame width*2+w
including frame
Design of Screen for Stage 2 only

Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
No. mechanical screen set (set) n unit, duty
Flow per each screen m3/h
m3/sec
Bar width s mm
Assume velocity in the screen channel v' m/sec

w m
frame

v m/sec
peak flow
No. of spaces bet. bars (space) nos
Selected No. of spaces bet. Bars

nos
(space)

including frame
Inclined length of the screen
m
(immersed in water)
Effective inclined screen area A' m2
Normal velocity of water between bars V m/sec
Head loss coefficient for a clean bar

c
screen
Head loss through the screen m hL=1/c [(V2-v2)/2g)]
Liter/1000
ECP, 1997/2017
Amount of screenings m3
To be colected in 2 m3 bin and

Liter/day
Collected amount of screenings disposed outside the site
Design of Manual Screen
No. manual screen set n unit, duty
Flow per screen for Stage 2 m3/h
m3/sec
Bar width s mm
Assumed velocity in the screen

v' m/sec
channel

w m
frame
Depth of water at average flow m

vpeak m/sec
peak flow
Velocity in the screen channel at
vav m/sec
average flow
No. of spaces between bars (space) nos
Selected No. of spaces between Bars

nos
(space)

wt m wt=frame width*2+w
including frame
GRIT & GREASE CHAMBER

Stage 1 Design (Up to 2037) Aerated Grit Chmaber Design
Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
No. of aerated grit and grease chamber n nos, duty Aerated type grit chamber
Peak flow per each chamber m3/h
m3/sec
Depth of water d m 2-5 m (ECP, 1997/2017)

Width w m 2.5 - 7m (ECP, 1997/2017)
Length L m Length = 7.5-20 m (ECP,
1997/2017)
Area of the each chamber A' m2
Volume of each chamber V m3
All units under operation
Surface loading rate at average flow SLR m <1000 m3/m2/day (ECP,

1997/2017)
Surface loading rate at peak flow SLR m <1000 m3/m2/day (ECP,
1997/2017)
Retention time at average flow t min 2-5 min (ECP, 1997/2017)
Retention time at peak flow t min 2-5 min (ECP, 1997/2017)
Horizontal velocity at average flow m/s No Reference for aerated

chamber
Horizontal velocity at peak flow m/s No Reference for aerated
chamber
Helical velocity Vhelical=(Q/Primeter*depth)
Helical velocity at peak flow m/s <0.10-0.20 m/sec (ECP,

1997/2017)
Grit production
Specific grit production rate GPR m3/1000m3 0.1-0.25 m3/1000m3 (ECP,

1997/2017)
Total grit produced at average flow m3 sand/d
Grit Concentration %
Grit Flow at average flow m3/d
Grit Flow at Peak Flow m3/hr

No. of duty pump in the grit tanks nos. One per each tank
Required grit pump capacity m3/hr
Selected grit pump capacity m3/hr

Pump head m Assumed to equal the static
head bewteen the grit
hamber and the grit silo +
head losses
Pump operation hours at average flow hrs/day
Grease production
Grease concentration removed mg/l Assumed
Total grease produced at average flow kg/d
Total grease produced at peak flow kg/hr
Specific gravity of the grease kg/l
Volume of grease produced at average flow l/d
Volume of grease produced at peak flow l/hr
Air requirement
Air flow rate m3/min/m' 0.2-0.5 m3/min/m' of

channel length
Required air flow m3/min
m3/hr Per each tank
Total required air flow rate m3/hr
Air flow rate (another guideline in ECP, 1997/2017) m3/hr/m3 ECP, 1997/2017
volume
Required air flow m3/hr
Required air flow rate for all chambers m3/hr The average between the
two values
No. of duty air blower nos total ( duty/ standby)
Required air blower capacity m3/hr
Selected air blower capacity m3/hr

Differential pressure Bar Assumed to equal the static
head beween the blower and
Stage 2 Design (from 2037 up to 2057) Aerated Grit Chmaber Design
Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
No. of aerated grit and grease chamber n nos, duty Aerated type grit chamber
Peak flow per each chamber m3/h
m3/sec
Depth of water (assume same dimension as d m 2-5 m (ECP, 1997/2017)

in stage 1)
Width (assume same dimension as in stage 1) w m 2.5 - 7m (ECP, 1997/2017)
Length (assume same dimension as in stage 1 L m Length = 7.5-20 m (ECP,

1997/2017)
Area of the each chamber A' m2
Volume of each chamber V m3
All units under operation
Surface loading rate at average flow SLR m <1000 m3/m2/day (ECP,

1997/2017)
Surface loading rate at peak flow SLR m <1000 m3/m2/day (ECP,
1997/2017)
Retention time at average flow t min 2-5 min (ECP, 1997/2017)
Retention time at peak flow t min 2-5 min (ECP, 1997/2017)
Horizontal velocity at average flow m/s No Reference for aerated

chamber
Horizontal velocity at peak flow m/s No Reference for aerated
chamber
Helical velocity Vhelical=(Q/Primeter*depth)
Helical velocity at peak flow m/s <0.10-0.20 m/sec (ECP,

1997/2017)
Grit production
Specific grit production rate GPR m3/1000m3 0.1-0.25 m3/1000m3 (ECP,

1997/2017)
Total grit produced at average flow m3 sand/d
Grit Concentration %
Grit Flow at average flow m3/d
Grit Flow at Peak Flow m3/hr
No. of duty pump in the grit tanks nos. One per each tank
Required grit pump capacity m3/hr
Selected grit pump capacity m3/hr

Pump head m Assumed to equal the static
head bewteen the grit
hamber and the grit silo +
head losses
Pump operation hours at average flow hrs/day
Grease production
Grease concentration removed mg/l Assumed
Total grease produced at average flow kg/d
Total grease produced at peak flow kg/hr
Specific gravity of the grease kg/l
Volume of grease produced at average flow l/d
Volume of grease produced at peak flow l/hr
Air requirement
Air flow rate m3/min/m' 0.2-0.5 m3/min/m' of

channel length
Required air flow m3/min
m3/hr Per each tank
Total required air flow rate m3/hr
Air flow rate (another guideline in ECP, 1997/2017) m3/hr/m3 ECP, 1997/2017
volume
Required air flow m3/hr
Required air flow rate for all chambers m3/hr The average between the
two values
No. of duty air blower nos total ( duty/ standby)
Required air blower capacity m3/hr
Selected air blower capacity m3/hr

Differential pressure Bar Assumed to equal the static
head beween the blower and
the grit chamber surface +
head losses
EQUALIZATION TANK
In case of not using equalization tank, the contractor shall demonstrate that the system is
capable to handle the peak flow for the hydraulic and process design
Stage 1 Design (Up to 2037)
Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
Using off-line equalization tank type

Assume storage time 4 hr
Required storage volume m3
Assume depth of the tank m3
Required surface area m2
Assume length m
Required width m
Mixing Requirements 0.004 - 0.008 Metcalf & Eddy
Kw/m3 of Tank 4th Ed. P. 344
volume
Required mixing power Kw
In case of using aeration to
prevent septicity
Aeration Requirements 0.01 - 0.015 m3 Metcalf & Eddy
air/m3.min 4th Ed. P. 344
Required air m3/hr

Adding this air requirements to the blower capacity of the SBR tanks
Stage 2 Design (From 2037 and Up to 2057)

Average flow m3/day
Peak flow m3/h
Using off-line equalization tank type

Assume storage time 4 hr
Required storage volume m3
Assume depth of the tank m
Required surface area m2
Assume length m
Required width m
Mixing Requirements 0.004 - 0.008 Metcalf & Eddy
Kw/m3 of Tank 4th Ed. P. 344
volume
Required mixing power Kw
In case of using aeration to prevent septicity
Aeration Requirements 0.01 - 0.015 m3 Metcalf & Eddy
air/m3.min 4th Ed. P. 344
Required air m3/hr

SBR TANK
Design influent parameters for aeration tank
Influent BOD BOD 650 mg/l

Influent TSS TSS 500 mg/l
Influent VSS VSS 400 mg/l TSS / VSS = 0.8
Influent TKN (Total Kjeldahl nitrogen) TKN 50 mg/l
Influent TP (Total Phosphorus) TP 30 mg/l
Min temperature T min 18 ⁰C
Max temperature T max 32 ⁰C
Design effluent parameters for SBR tank

Effluent BOD BODeff 60 mg/l
Effluent TSS TSSeff 50 mg/l
MPN for coliform bacteria <5000 /100 ml
Stage 1 Design (Up to 2037)

Average flow Q m3/day
Peaking factor
Peak flow m3/h
Average BOD load kg/d
Average TSS load kg/d
Average TKN load kg/d
Average TP load kg/d
Microorganism kinetic coefficients Refer to Metcalf Eddy Fourth Edition
Biomass Yield (theoretical) Y 0.4 gVSS/bCOD
Half velocity constant Ks 20 mg/l

Maximum specific bacterial growth
μm 6 gVSS/gVSS.d
rate (standard temp. 20oC)
Temperature activity coefficient [μ]
θ 1.07 Unitless
(standard temp. 20oC)
Maximum specific growth rate (at site
μm,T 5.24 gVSS/gVSS.d μm,T = μm θ(T-20)
temperature)
Endogenous decay coefficient Kd 0.12 gVSS/gVSS.d
Temperature activity coefficient [K] (at

θ 1.04 Unitless
site temperature)
Endogenous decay coefficient (at site

Kd,T 0.11 gVSS/gVSS.d Kd,T = Kd θ(T-20)
temperature)
Fraction of biomass that remains as
fd 0.15 gVSS/gVSS (0.10 - 0.15)
cell debris
Net Biomass Yield (theoretical) Yn 0.12 gVSS/g NOx
Endogenous decay coefficient for

Kdn 0.08 gVSS/gVSS.d
nitrifying microorganism
Kdn,T 0.07 gVSS/gVSS.d Kdn,T = Kdn θ(T-20)
nitrifier at field temp
Operating conditions
Filling+Anaerobic Aeration settling Decant Total cycle
kg BOD/kg 0.04 – 0.15 kg BOD/kg

Food to microorganism ratio F/M
MLSS/day MLVSS/day
Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids X mg/l 3000-5000
Sludge Retention Time SRT day 15-30
Volatile Solids Fraction MLVSS/MLSS

Sludge volume index SVI ml/g
NOx Concentration of NH4-N in the
mg/l 80% TKN
influent that is nitrified NOx
Tanks volume
Number of tank N Assumed number
Number of cycles/tank/d nos 24hr/time of cycle
total number of cycles/d cycles/d No of tanks*No of cycles
Fill volume/Cycle VF m3 Q/No of cycles.d
MLSS in settling Zone XS mg/l 1/SVI
Calculated settling fraction (VS/VT) X/XS
Provide 20% liquid above
Buffer zone percent %
sludge blanket
Settling fraction
Selected settling fraction
Filing Fraction VF/VT VF/VT = 1 - VS/VT
Volume of tank VT m3 VT = VF/tank/filling fraction
Total depth
Dimensions of each tank L W Decanting depth (d)
(D)
Required dimns
Selected dimns
Actual volume V m3
Food to microorganism ratio (w.r.t. gBOD/gMLVS
F/M QSo/XV
MLVSS) S.d
Volumetric BOD loading kg BOD/m3.d QSo/V
Decanting flow rate

Decanting volume m3 VF
Decanting time min Td
Decanting rate m3/min VF/Td
Sludge production
Influent substrate concentration So mg/l So=1.6*BOD

1
Effluent substrate concentration Se mg/l
1
,
1 1 1
Px, vss kg vss/d

Px, vss, total =Px, vss+(Q*nbvss)/1000
nbvss~0.2 vss mg/l
Sludge production including non
Px, vss, total kg/d
biodegradable vss
Sludge production including inert
Px, Tss, total
matters
Px, Tss, total=Px, vss/0.85+[(Q*nbvss)/1000]+[Q(TSS-VSS)/1000]
Px, Tss, total kg Tss/d
matters
Excess sludge
matters
Sludge specific gravity S.G.
Sludge concentration C2 mg/l C2=1/SVI
Sludge to be waste m3/d Px/C2/S.G.
Time of sludge pumping hrs =No. of cycles*decant time
No of sludge pumps inside SBR tanks No. Equal No. of SBR Tanks
Sludge pump flow rate m3/hr
Assumed equal the static
head between SBR tank
Pump Head m
and the sludge holding tank
+ head losses
Oxygen requirement (BOD

removal) ( o e)
Actual Oxygen Transmission Rate AOTR kg/d 1.42*Px,vss
total number of cycles/d

Total aeration hours/day hr
*Aeration period/cycle
Actual air transmission rate AOTR kg/hr

Correction factors for standard conditions from field conditions (Air diffuser)
α correction factor α 0.55
Salinity correction factor β 0.95 0.7-0.98 Typical 0.95
Diffuser fouling factor F 0.80
Plant elevation Zplant
Gravity acceleration g 9.81
Air molecular weight M 29 kg/kg-mole
Gas constant R 8314
Temp. in Kelvin (32 C) Tkelvin 305
Ln (Pplant/P) Pplant/P=exp-[(gM(Zplant-Z)]/RT
(Pplant/P)
Oxygen Saturation in SBR tank C mg/l
Oxygen saturation at 32 degree C32 mg/l Metcalf Eddy, Appendix D
Oxygen saturation at 20 degree C20 mg/l
Oxygen saturation at 32 degree &
CS,T,H mg/l
Plant elevation
Atmospheric pressure at plant
Patm, H m
elevation
Percent of oxygen concentration
Ot 18-20
leaving tank
Average oxygen concentration
CS-,T,H mg/l
adjusted at Temperature & Height
,
1.024 `
∝ , ,
Standard Oxygen transmission rate SOTR kg/hr

Percentage of oxygen in the air
Air density at 32 degree kg/m3
Air diffuser efficiency
Air flow
rate=SOTR/(Percentage of
Air flow rate m3 air/hr oxygen in the air*Air
density *Air diffuser
efficiency)
total 6 (4 duty
Number of duty air blower n
+ 2 stand by)
Air blower capacity m3 air/hr
Selected air blower capacity m3 air/hr
Assumed equal the SBR
tank depth + head losses
Differential pressure Bar
between air blower and
SBR tank
Stage 2 Design (from 2037 Up to 2057)

Influent BOD 650 mg/l
Influent TSS 500 mg/l
Influent VSS 400 mg/l TSS / VSS = 0.8
Influent TKN 50 mg/l
Influent TP 30 mg/l
Min temperature T min 18 ⁰C
Max temperature T max 32 ⁰C
Design effluent parameters for SBR tank

Effluent BOD 60 mg/l
Effluent TSS 50 mg/l
MPN for coliform bacteria <5000 /100 ml
Stage 2 Design (from 2037 Up to 2057)

Average flow m3/day
Peaking factor
Peak flow m3/h
Average BOD load kg/d

Average TSS load kg/d
Average TKN load kg/d
Average TP load kg/d
Microorganism kinetic coefficients Refer to Metcalf Eddy Fourth Edition
Biomass Yield (theoretical) Y 0.4 gVSS/bCOD

Half velocity constant Ks 20 mg/l
Maximum specific bacterial growth
μm 6 gVSS/gVSS.d
rate (standard temp. 20oC)
Temperature activity coefficient [μ]
θ 1.07 Unitless
(standard temp. 20oC)
Maximum specific growth rate (at site
μm,T 5.24 gVSS/gVSS.d μm,T = μm θ(T-20)
temperature)
Endogenous decay coefficient Kd 0.12 gVSS/gVSS.d
Temperature activity coefficient [K] (at
θ 1.04 Unitless
site temperature)
Endogenous decay coefficient (at site
Kd,T 0.11 gVSS/gVSS.d Kd,T = Kd θ(T-20)
temperature)
Fraction of biomass that remains as
fd 0.15 gVSS/gVSS (0.10 - 0.15)
cell debris
Net Biomass Yield (theoretical) Yn 0.12 gVSS/g NOx
Kdn 0.08 gVSS/gVSS.d
nitrifying microorganism
Kdn,T 0.07 gVSS/gVSS.d Kdn,T = Kdn θ(T-20)
nitrifier at field temp
Operating conditions
Filling+Anaerobic Aeration settling Decant Total cycle
kg BOD/kg 0.04 – 0.15 kg BOD/kg

Food to microorganism ratio F/M
MLSS/day MLVSS/day
Mixed Liquor Suspended Solids X mg/l 3000-5000
Sludge Retention Time SRT day 15-30
Volatile Solids Fraction MLVSS/MLSS

Sludge volume index SVI ml/g
NOx Concentration of NH4-N in the
mg/l 80% TKN
influent that is nitrified NOx
Tanks volume
Number of tank N Assumed number
Number of cycles/tank/d nos 24hr/time of cycle
total number of cycles/d cycles/d No of tanks*No of cycles
Fill volume/Cycle VF m3 Q/No of cycles.d
MLSS in settling Zone XS mg/l 1/SVI
Calculated settling fraction (VS/VT) X/XS
Provide 20% liquid above
Buffer zone percent %
sludge blanket
Settling fraction
Selected settling fraction
Filing Fraction VF/VT VF/VT = 1 - VS/VT
Volume of tank VT m3 VT = VF/tank/filling fraction
Total depth
Dimensions of each tank L W Decanting depth (d)
(D)
Required dimns
Selected dimns
Actual volume V m3
Food to microorganism ratio (w.r.t. gBOD/gMLVS
F/M QSo/XV
MLVSS) S.d
Volumetric BOD loading kg BOD/m3.d QSo/V
Decanting flow rate

Decanting volume m3 VF
Decanting time min Td
Decanting rate m3/min VF/Td

Sludge production
Influent substrate concentration So mg/l So=1.6*BOD
1
Effluent substrate concentration Se mg/l
1
,
1 1 1
Px, vss kg vss/d
Px, vss, total =Px, vss+(Q*nbvss)/1000
nbvss~0.2 vss mg/l
Sludge production including non

Px, vss, total kg/d
biodegradable vss
Px, Tss, total
matters
Px, Tss, total=Px, vss/0.85+[(Q*nbvss)/1000]+[Q(TSS-VSS)/1000]

matters
Excess sludge

matters
Sludge specific gravity
Sludge concentration mg/l C2=1/SVI
Sludge to be waste m3/d Px/C2/S.G.
Time of sludge pumping hrs =No. of cycles*decant time
No of sludge pumps inside SBR tanks No. Equal No. of SBR Tanks
Sludge pump flow rate m3/hr
Assumed equal the static
head between SBR tank
Pump Head m
and the sludge holding tank
+ head losses
Oxygen requirement (BOD

removal)
AOTR= Q(So-Se)-
Actual Oxygen Transmission Rate AOTR kg/d
1.42*Px,vss
total number of cycles/d
Total aeration hours/day hr
*Aeration period/cycle
Actual air transmission rate AOTR kg/hr
Correction factors for standard conditions from field conditions (Air diffuser)
α correction factor α 0.55
Salinity correction factor β 0.95 0.7-0.98 Typical 0.95
Diffuser fouling factor F 0.80
Plant elevation Zplant

Gravity acceleration g 9.81

Air molecular weight M 29 kg/kg-mole
Gas constant R 8314
Temp. in Kelvin (32 C) Tkelvin 305
Ln (Pplant/P) Pplant/P=exp-[(gM(Zplant-Z)]/RT
(Pplant/P)
Oxygen Saturation in SBR tank C mg/l
Oxygen saturation at 32 degree C32 mg/l Metcalf Eddy, Appendix D
Oxygen saturation at 20 degree C20 mg/l

Oxygen saturation at 32 degree &
CS,T,H mg/l
Plant elevation
Atmospheric pressure at plant
Patm, H m
elevation
Percent of oxygen concentration
Ot 18-20
leaving tank
Average oxygen concentration
CS-,T,H mg/l
adjusted at Temperature & Height
,
1.024 `
∝ , ,
Standard Oxygen transmission rate SOTR kg/hr
Percentage of oxygen in the air
Air density at 32 degree kg/m3
Air diffuser efficiency

Air flow
rate=SOTR/(Percentage of
Air flow rate m3 air/hr oxygen in the air*Air
density *Air diffuser
efficiency)
total 4 (3 duty
Number of duty air blower n
+ 1 stand by)
Air blower capacity m3 air/hr
Selected air blower capacity m3 air/hr
Assumed equal the SBR
tank depth + head losses
Differential pressure Bar
between air blower and
SBR tank
CHOLORINATION CONTACT TANK
The chlorine contact tank shall be designed to accommodate the decanting flow rate
for a contact time of 20-40 min.
Stage 1 (Up to 2037)
Effluent Flow Rate (Decanting Rate)/tank m3/min.
Effluent Flow Rate (Decanting Rate)/tank m3/h
No. of tanks N nos

Water Depth d m
Length L m
Width W m
Volume/tank V m3
Check
Retention time at peak flow min 20-40
Stage 2 (From 2037 and up to 2057)

Effluent Flow Rate (Decanting Rate)/tank m3/min.
Effluent Flow Rate (Decanting Rate)/tank m3/h
No. of tanks N nos

Water Depth d m
Length L m
Width W m
Volume/tank V m3
Check
Retention time at peak flow min 20-40
CHLORINATION SYSTEM
The calculation below are for chlorine gas disinfection
The chlorination system shall be designed on peak flow requiremnts

The Contractor can Propose to use Hypochlorite Sodium or Hypochlorite Calcium for Treated
Effluent Disinfection. The Contractor shall submit the calculation in a different sheet
Chlorination design
Decanting flow rate m3/min

Required dose mg/l Maximum Concentration
Required dosing rate g/min
g/hr
Number of SBR tanks decanting at
the same time Tanks
Required chlorinators capacity g/hr
Number of chlorinators ( duty + standby)
Selected chlorinator capacity g/hr
Chlorine House Design for Stage 2 (up to 2057)

Maximum dose mg/l
Average flow rate m3/d
Required dosing capacity at average
flow W kg/day
Daily total consumption kg/day
Storage duration days
Required Total Storage kg
Cylinder capacity kg
Number of cylinders nos
Selected number of cylinder nos
GRAVITY THICKENER

Excess sludge
Total sludge weight kg/d
Total sludge flow m3/day
20-30 (ECP,
Solid loading rate SLR kg/m3/day
1997/2017)
Total surface area of the thickeners m2
Selected number of thickeners n
Area of each thickener A' m2
Diameter of each thickener D' m
Selected diameter D m
Actual area of all thickener A m2
(12 - 48 hr)(ECP,
Retention time at average flow t hr
1997/2017)
Total volume of the thickeners V m3
Water side depth h m
Take side water depth m
Actual Volume Vact m3
Check
20-30 (ECP,
Solid loading rate SLR kg TSS/m2/day
1997/2017)
(12 - 48 hr)(ECP,
Actual Retention Time R.T. hr
1997/2017)
Thickener solids capture efficiency %
Total thickened sludge weight kg TSS/day
Thickened sludge solids concentration (2-4%)
Thickened sludge volume (m3/day) m3/day
Supernatant water m3/day
Stage 2 (from 2037 and up to 2057)

Sludge production kg TSS/day
Sludge to be waste m3/day
Selected number of thickeners n

Selected diameter D m
Actual area of all thickener A m2
Water side depth h m
Take side water depth m
Actual Volume Vact m3
Check
20-30 (ECP,
Solid loading rate SLR kg TSS/m2/day
1997/2017)
12 - 48 hr (ECP,
Actual Retention Time R.T. hr
1997/2017)
Thickener solids capture efficiency % Assumed
Total thickened sludge weight kg TSS/day
Thickened sludge solids concentration (2-4%)
Thickened sludge volume (m3/day) m3/day

DRYING BEDS
Stage 1 (up to 2037)

Thickened sludge weight kg TSS/day
Sludge to be dried m3/day
Retention time of the sludge over the bed day
Sludge thickness over the drying beds d m
Total surface area of the drying beds At m2
N L W
Required dims
Use (1.25 - 2.0) number

(ECP, 1997/2017)
Dried sludge solids concentration (20-30%) 0.25
Specific gravity 1.05
Dried sludge volume (m3/day) m3/day
Stage 2 ( from 2037 and up to 2057)

Thickened sludge weight kg TSS/day
Sludge to be dried m3/day
Retention time of the sludge over the bed day
Sludge thickness over the drying beds d m
Total surface area of the drying beds At m2
N L W
Required dims
Use (1.25 - 2.0) number

(ECP, 1997/2017)

Vol 2 - Combined Sids-Dabos Performance Specs Sep2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol 2 - Combined Sids-Dabos Performance Specs Sep2019

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vol 2 - Combined Sids-Dabos Performance Specs Sep2019

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Al-Sids WwTP 5,000 m3/d

& Kafr Daboos WwTP

Volume 2 Technical Specification – Design

Mott MacDonald in association with

Revision Date Originator Checker Approver Description

7th Mar- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

4th June- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

16th Aug- Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

17th Sep Eng. Ahmed Eng. Samir Dr. Mohamed

Mott MacDonald in association with

1.11 Spare Parts 26

Drawings and Specifications 65

3.37 Circular Clarifiers 100

3.41.3.2 Independent Gravity Drainage Area 117

3.42.5.2 Accessory Systems 129

Maintenance Tools 141

4 ELECTRICAL WORKS 149

Panel Earthing 159

LED Luminaires 177

5 MEASUREMENT INSTRUMENTATION &

Enclosures and Environment 189

5.13.5.4 Uninterrupted Power Supply UPS. 212

6 Testing Requirements 214

6.4.4.2 Sludge dewatering 221

7 DATA SHEETS & GUARANTEE TABLES 230

Non Return Valves 236

8 ‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ‬ 249

‫ﺣﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺧﺭ‬ ‫‪252‬‬

‫ﺧﻠـﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺳــﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫‪265‬‬

‫‪Submissions‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪277‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻣﻧﺕ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳــﺔ‬ ‫‪298‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪309‬‬

9 Operation and Maintenance Requirements 322

10 Training of Employer’s personnel 331

‫‪1 Performance Specification - Scope of‬‬

‫‪Mott MacDonald in association with‬‬

 The contractor is obliged to modify his submitted design to the satisfaction of

Parameter Stage 1 (2037) Stage 2 (2057)

Design Average flow (m3/d) 5,000 10,000

Peak Flow (m3/hr) 583 1,167

 Preparation of Detailed Design, construction, pre-commissioning and

Parameter Stage 1 (2037) Stage 2 (2057)

Design Average flow (m3/d) 5,000 7,500

Peak Flow (m3/hr) 583 875

 Construct and equip a laboratory within the WWTP administration building.

1.3 Employer’s Basic Design for WWTP

o Moving Bed Biological Reactor (MBBR);

1.4 General Project Information

1.4.5.2 Extended Aeration

1.4.5.3 Moving Bed Biological Reactor (MBBR)

1.4.5.4 Integrated Secondary Biological Treatment

 Specification for painting, coating, and insulation.

Table 3 Influent and Effluent Wastewater Quality to the Treatment Plant

Influent Effluent Law No.

Temperature [oC] 18-32 25-35 35

pH [-] 6.5 6-9 6-9

BOD5 [mg/lit] 650 60 60

COD [mg/lit] 1,200 <80 80

Alkalinity [mg/lit] 250 - NA